WaveLab Pro 9.5.0 - Operation Manual

WaveLab Pro 9.5.0 - Operation Manual
Operation Manual
Cristina Bachmann, Heiko Bischoff, Christina Kaboth, Insa Mingers, Matthias Obrecht, Sabine Pfeifer, Benjamin
Schütte, Marita Sladek
This PDF provides improved access for vision-impaired users. Please note that due to the complexity and number
of images in this document, it is not possible to include text descriptions of images.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on
the part of Steinberg Media Technologies GmbH. The software described by this document is subject to a License
Agreement and may not be copied to other media except as specifically allowed in the License Agreement. No
part of this publication may be copied, reproduced, or otherwise transmitted or recorded, for any purpose,
without prior written permission by Steinberg Media Technologies GmbH. Registered licensees of the product
described herein may print one copy of this document for their personal use.
All product and company names are ™ or ® trademarks of their respective owners. For more information, please
visit www.steinberg.net/trademarks.
©
Steinberg Media Technologies GmbH, 2017.
All rights reserved.
WaveLab Pro_9.5.0_en-US_24.10.2017
Table of Contents
6
6
6
6
7
8
WaveLab Pro Introduction
Platform-Independent Documentation
Help System
Conventions
Key Commands
How You Can Reach Us
9
9
9
9
10
13
13
Setting Up Your System
Connecting the Equipment
Audio Cards and Background Playback
Latency
Defining Audio Connections
CD/DVD Recorders
Remote Devices
22
22
22
23
24
31
31
31
32
35
36
36
WaveLab Pro Concepts
General Editing Rules
Startup Dialog
Basic Window Handling
Selecting Audio
Sliders
Renaming Items in Tables
File Browser
Tab Groups
Peak Files
Companion Files
EBU Loudness Standard R-128
38
38
39
39
39
39
39
40
40
41
42
44
44
44
45
Workspace Window
Audio Editor
Audio Montage
Batch Processor
Podcast Editor
Basic Audio CD
DVD-Audio
Script Editor
Control Window
File Tab
Info Tab
Tool Windows
Meter Windows
Slide-Out Windows
Docking and Undocking Tool Windows and
Meter Windows
Command Bar
Status Bar
Context Menus
Time Ruler and Level Ruler
Managing Tabs
Activating Full Screen Mode
Log Window
47
48
49
50
54
56
56
3
58
58
59
62
64
64
65
67
72
Project Handling
Opening Files
WaveLab Projects
File Groups
Value Editing
Drag Operations
Undoing and Redoing Actions
Zooming
Presets
74
74
75
76
78
83
83
84
85
85
87
88
88
File Operations
Recently Used Files
Favorite Files
Save and Save As
Templates
File Renaming
Naming Schemes
Deleting Files
Temporary Files
Work Folders vs. Document Folders
Exporting to SoundCloud
Copying Audio Information to the Clipboard
Setting the Focus on the Current File
89
89
100
100
100
101
102
103
104
105
Playback
Transport Bar
Starting Playback From the Ruler
Using the Play Tool
Playback Scrubbing
Timecode Window
Jog/Shuttle Function
Scroll During Playback
Playback in the Audio Montage Window
Speaker Configuration
107
107
115
123
144
144
149
150
153
154
Audio File Editing
Wave Window
Audio Editor Tabs
File Handling in the Audio Editor
Changing the Audio Properties
Metadata
Snapshots
Silence Generator Dialog
Bleep Censor
Waveform Restoration with the Pen Tool
155
155
156
164
166
Audio Analysis
Analyze Tab
Global Analysis
Audio File Comparator
3D Frequency Analysis
168
168
Error Correction
Correction Tab
Table of Contents
171
Correcting Errors
172
172
174
174
175
176
178
178
180
181
182
182
182
183
185
187
188
189
190
Offline Processing
Process Tab
Applying Processing
Gain Dialog
Level Normalizer Dialog
Loudness Normalizer
Pan Normalizer Dialog
Envelope Dialog
Fades in Audio Files
Crossfades
Phase Inverting
Reversing Audio
DC Offset
Time Stretching
Pitch Shift
Pitch Quantizing Dialog
Pitch Bend
Resample
Effect Morphing
193
193
196
213
213
215
218
219
220
220
231
237
254
259
263
263
271
279
280
280
295
295
302
303
304
306
307
307
309
310
320
320
Audio Montage
Montage Window
Audio Montage Tabs
Signal Path in the Audio Montage
Creating New Audio Montages
Audio Montage Duplicates
Creating an Audio Montage from an Audio File
Import Options for Audio Montages
Missing Files Dialog
Assembling the Audio Montage
Rearranging Clips
Clip Editing
Audio Montages within Audio Montages
Managing Source Files of Clips
Track Activity Indicator
Envelopes for Clips
Fades and Crossfades in Audio Montages
Clip Time Stretching
Clip Pitch Shifting
Effects for Tracks, Clips, and the Montage
Output
CD Markers
CD Window
Snapshots
Mixing Down – The Render Function
Loudness Meta Normalizer
Navigator Window
Notes Window
Groups
Audio Montage Backups
Multichannel Operations in the Audio Montage
XML Export and Import of Audio Montages
AES-31 Files Export and Import
323
323
324
324
330
Recording
Setting Up the Recording Dialog
Dropping Markers During Recording
Recording Dialog
Recording in the Audio Montage Window
331
331
331
349
Master Section
Bypassing the Master Section
Master Section Window
Rendering
4
357
358
360
364
365
Recording from an ASIO Input
Smart Bypass
Saving Master Section Presets
Monitoring Background Tasks
Dropouts
366
366
367
371
374
375
375
377
377
377
378
379
379
380
380
381
Markers
Marker Types
Markers Window
About Creating Markers
Deleting Markers
Moving Markers
Moving Multiple Markers
Navigating to Markers
Hiding Markers of a Specific Type
Converting Marker Types
Renaming Markers
Selecting Markers
Selecting the Audio Between Markers
Binding Markers to Clips in the Audio Montage
Exporting the Markers List as Text
How Marker Information is Saved
382
382
382
382
383
383
383
384
384
387
389
390
391
393
395
396
397
Metering
Meter Windows
Real Time vs. Non-Real Time
Metering Monitor Modes
Meter Settings
Multichannel Metering
Resetting the Meters
Using Presets in the Meter Windows
Level Meter
Loudness Meter
Phasescope
Spectroscope
Spectrometer
Live Spectrogram
Bit Meter
Oscilloscope
Wavescope
398
398
401
401
403
403
404
404
Basic Audio CD
Basic Audio CD Window
CD Markers
Preparing a Basic Audio CD
Opening CD Tracks for Editing
Playing Back Files in the Track List
Saving Basic Audio CD Tracks as Separate Files
Saving Basic Audio CD Tracks as One File
405
405
405
406
406
408
409
410
DVD-Audio
Structure of a DVD-Audio Project
DVD-Audio Formats
DVD-Audio Format Considerations
DVD-Audio Window
Preparing a DVD-Audio
Opening Audio Montages for Editing
Checking the DVD-Audio Conformity
411
411
413
413
416
428
432
Writing Operations
Write Audio CD or DDP Dialog
Erase Optical Media Dialog
About Writing Audio Files
About Writing Audio Montages
Write DVD-Audio Function
Data CD/DVD Projects
Table of Contents
435
Audio CD Formats
438
438
439
440
441
447
451
452
454
Spectral Editing
Spectrogram
Wavelet Display
Spectrogram Options Dialog
Spectrum Tab
Spectrum Processing
Audio Inpainting
Spectrum Watermark
Master Section Processing
456
456
459
Auto Split
Auto Split in Audio Files
Auto Split in Audio Montages
462
462
463
470
472
Loops
Basic Looping
About Refining Loops
Looping Audio Which Is Not Very Well Suited
for Looping
Sample Attributes
474
474
478
Generating Signals
Signal Generator
DTMF Generator
480
480
483
484
484
485
485
Importing Audio CD Tracks
Import Audio CD Dialog
Importing Audio CD Tracks
Searching Track Names on the Internet
Submitting Track Names to the Internet
Ultra-Safe Mode
Converting Audio CD Tracks to an Audio
Montage
Converting Audio CD Tracks to a Basic Audio
CD
485
486
486
487
Batch Processing
Batch Processor Window
Offline Processors
Working with the Batch Processor
Watch Folders
XML Files in Batch Processing
523
523
524
Batch Conversion
Batch Conversion Dialog
Batch Converting Files
525
525
525
527
528
530
533
534
534
536
Batch Renaming
Batch Renaming Dialogs
Batch Renaming Files
Batch Renaming Markers
Batch Renaming Clips
Renaming Operation Categories and Types
List of Renaming Operations
Preview Section
Range Parameters
Previewing and Performing All Renaming
Operations
Regular Expressions
536
Podcasts
Podcast Editor
Global Podcast Options
Creating a Podcast
Setting Up a FTP for Podcast Publishing
Publishing Podcasts
FTP Settings Dialog
Checking the Podcast
547
547
548
Customizing
Workspace Layout
Customizing the Wave Window and the
Montage Window
Customizing Shortcuts
Customizing Command Bars
Plug-in Organization
Variables and Text Snippets
Scripting
Touch Bar (macOS only)
550
555
555
562
564
566
567
567
572
578
583
WaveLab Exchange
WaveLab Pro as External Editor for
Cubase/Nuendo
Cubase/Nuendo as External Editor for WaveLab
Pro
488
489
496
497
504
517
540
540
544
544
545
545
545
546
5
583
584
Configuring WaveLab Pro
Global Preferences
Audio Files Preferences
Audio Montages Preferences
Synchronizing WaveLab Pro Settings on Several
Computers
Multi-User Settings
External Tools
587
Index
WaveLab Pro Introduction
Platform-Independent Documentation
The documentation applies to the operating systems Windows and macOS.
Features and settings that are specific to one of these platforms are clearly indicated. In all other
cases, the descriptions and procedures in the documentation are valid for Windows and macOS.
Some points to consider:
●
The screenshots are taken from Windows.
●
Some functions that are available on the File menu on Windows can be found in the
program name menu on macOS.
Help System
There are several ways of accessing the help system. The documentation is available online and
most of it can be downloaded in PDF format from steinberg.help.
●
To visit steinberg.help, enter steinberg.help in the address bar of your web browser or
open WaveLab Pro and select Help > steinberg.help.
●
To show tooltips, move the mouse over an interface icon.
●
To open the help for an active dialog on steinberg.help, click the question mark icon on the
title bar (Windows) or in the dialog (macOS) to show the Help button, and then click the
Help button, or press F1 (Windows) or Cmd-? (macOS).
●
To use the menu help, move the mouse over a menu item.
●
To see information on what kind of editing can be performed when using the mouse and
modifier keys in the Audio Montage window, move the mouse over the montage window.
The help text is displayed on the info line at the bottom of the window.
To open the “What’s This” help, you have the following possibilities:
●
In any window, press Shift-F1 and move the mouse over an interface item, or select Help >
What’s This?.
●
In a dialog, select the question mark icon on any title bar (Windows) or in the dialog
(macOS), and move the mouse over an interface item or a menu option.
●
Some “What’s this” tooltips include a link to a dedicated help topic.
RELATED LINKS
Info Line on page 233
Conventions
In our documentation, we use typographical and markup elements to structure information.
6
WaveLab Pro Introduction
Key Commands Typographical Elements
The following typographical elements mark the following purposes.
PREREQUISITE
Requires you to complete an action or to fulfill a condition before starting a
procedure.
PROCEDURE
Lists the steps that you must take to achieve a specific result.
IMPORTANT
Informs you about issues that might affect the system, the connected hardware, or
that might bring a risk of data loss.
NOTE
Informs you about issues that you should consider.
EXAMPLE
Provides you with an example.
RESULT
Shows the result of the procedure.
AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK
Informs you about actions or tasks that you can perform after completing the
procedure.
RELATED LINKS
Lists related topics that you can find in this documentation.
Markup
Bold text indicates the name of a menu, option, function, dialog, window, etc.
EXAMPLE
To open the Metadata dialog, open the Metadata window and click Edit.
If bold text is separated by a greater-than symbol, this indicates a sequence of different menus
to open.
EXAMPLE
Select File > Open.
Key Commands
Many of the default key commands, also known as keyboard shortcuts, use modifier keys, some
of which are different depending on the operating system.
For example, the default key command for Undo is Ctrl-Z on Windows and Cmd-Z on macOS.
When key commands with modifier keys are described in this manual, they are shown with the
Windows modifier key first, in the following way:
●
Windows modifier key/macOS modifier key-key
EXAMPLE
Ctrl/Cmd-Z means: press Ctrl on Windows or Cmd on macOS, then press Z.
7
WaveLab Pro Introduction
How You Can Reach Us How You Can Reach Us
On the Help menu in WaveLab Pro, you find items linking to additional information.
The menu contains links to various Steinberg web pages. Selecting a menu item automatically
launches your browser and opens the page. On these pages, you can find support and
compatibility information, answers to frequently asked questions, information about updates
and other Steinberg products, etc. This requires that you have a web browser installed on your
computer, and a working Internet connection.
8
Setting Up Your System
Before you start working, you need to make some settings.
IMPORTANT
Make sure that all equipment is turned off before making any connections.
Connecting the Equipment
Your system setup depends on many different factors, for example, the kind of project that you
want to create, the external equipment that you want to use, or the computer hardware available
to you.
Audio Cards and Background Playback
When you activate playback or recording in WaveLab Pro, other applications cannot access the
audio card. Likewise, if another application uses the audio card, WaveLab Pro is unable to play
back. The Windows MME driver is an exception from this.
You can run WaveLab Pro together with other applications and always give the active application
access to the audio card.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > Preferences > Audio Connections.
2.
Select the Options tab.
3.
Activate Release Driver.
4.
Do one of the following:
●
If you want to release the driver when WaveLab Pro is in the background, activate
When WaveLab Pro is in Background.
●
If you want to release the driver only when Cubase is in the foreground, activate
When Cubase is in Foreground.
Latency
Latency is the delay between when audio is sent from the program and when you actually hear it.
While a very low latency can be crucial in a real-time DAW application such as Steinberg Nuendo
or Cubase, this is not strictly the case with WaveLab Pro.
When working with WaveLab Pro, the important issues are optimum and stable playback and
editing precision.
The latency in an audio system depends on the audio hardware, its drivers, and settings. In
case of dropouts, crackles, or glitches during playback, raise the Buffer Number setting on the
9
Setting Up Your System
Defining Audio Connections Options tab in the Audio Connections, or increase the buffer size in the ASIO control panel,
specific to the audio card.
RELATED LINKS
Audio Connections Tab on page 11
Defining Audio Connections
To be able to play back and record audio in WaveLab Pro, you must specify how the internal
input and output channels in WaveLab Pro are connected to your sound card and which device
you intend to use for audio playback and recording.
You can define the buffer settings for your device as well as set up connections to external gear,
such as external effects units. You should select at least two channels for stereo playback and
recording.
If you have no third-party audio card, you can select the Windows MME driver or Built-in Audio
(Mac) options. You can also use MME with most third party audio cards, with the advantage that
you can record and play at different sample rates. However, Windows MME drivers do not allow
audio monitoring in the Recording dialog or multichannel operation, and other drivers generally
offer better sound quality and performance.
RELATED LINKS
Audio Connections Tab on page 11
Selecting an ASIO Driver
Audio Stream Input/Output (ASIO) is a computer device driver protocol for digital audio specified
by Steinberg. It provides a low-latency and high fidelity interface between a software application
and the soundcard of a computer.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > Preferences > Audio Connections.
2.
Open the Audio Device pop-up menu and select your ASIO driver.
The ASIO Plug-ins tab and the Control Panel button are activated.
3.
Optional: Click Control Panel and make your settings.
4.
On the ASIO Plug-ins tab, select the audio ports that are used for recording and monitor
input of the ASIO plug-ins.
Selecting a Windows MME Driver
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > Options > Audio Connections.
2.
Open the Audio Device pop-up menu and select Windows MME.
3.
On the Playback tab, select the audio ports that are used for playback.
4.
On the Recording tab, select the audio ports that used for recording and monitor input.
10
Setting Up Your System
Defining Audio Connections Audio Connections Tab
This tab allows you to specify how the internal input and output channels in WaveLab Pro
are connected to your sound card and which device you want to use for audio playback and
recording.
●
To open the Audio Connections tab, select File > Preferences > Audio Connections.
Global Settings
Audio Device
Allows you to select the audio device that you want to use for playback and recording
audio. If you do not have a third-party audio card, you can select the Windows MME
driver or Built-in Audio (Mac) options.
Control Panel
When you select an ASIO driver, the Control Panel button is activated. Click the
button to open the settings application of your sound card, which is usually installed
with the sound card. Depending on your sound card and driver, this provides
settings for buffer size, digital formats, additional I/O connections, etc.
Refresh
This button causes audio devices to be evaluated again to reflect device changes.
Playback Tab
This tab allows you to select and name audio ports that are used for playback. If you are
monitoring on a surround system, specify your surround speaker outputs here.
You can also specify the Preferred Sample Rate for playback. Furthermore, you can rename the
channels and set up the Speaker Configuration to be able to switch between different speakers.
11
Setting Up Your System
Defining Audio Connections Recording Tab
This tab allows you to select and name your audio ports that are used for recording and
input monitoring. The inputs that you define here are then available in the Recording dialog.
Furthermore, you can rename the channels and select the Speaker Configuration.
External Gear Tab
This tab allows you to select inputs from and outputs to external audio processing equipment.
The name of this tab corresponds to the installed driver, for example, ASIO Plug-ins.
Options Tab
This tab allows you to specify the number of buffers and the control driver functionality.
Buffer Number
Increasing this value improves the elasticity of audio streaming to avoid dropouts.
MME Specific – Buffer Size
Increasing this value improves the elasticity of audio streaming to avoid dropouts.
This is only available when an MME driver is selected.
Initialize Streaming Engine at First Use
Initializes the audio streaming engine when playback or recording are used for the
first time. If this option is deactivated, the audio streaming engine is initialized at
program startup.
Reset Driver When Changing Sample Rate
Resets the driver when sample rate is changed. When playback or recording must
be set to a new sample rate, some audio device drivers must be fully reset to work
properly. This operation takes some time.
12
Setting Up Your System
CD/DVD Recorders Perform Short Fade In/Out When Starting/Stopping Playback
Performs a short fade in when starting playback and a short fade out when stopping
playback. This avoids clicks that are caused by waveforms that are not starting on a
zero-crossing point.
Release Driver
Allows you to run WaveLab Pro together with other applications and always give the
active application access to the audio card.
●
If When WaveLab Pro is in Background is activated, the driver is released
when WaveLab Pro is in the background.
●
If When Cubase/Nuendo is in Foreground is activated, the driver is released
when Cubase/Nuendo is in the foreground.
CD/DVD Recorders
For general instructions on installing internal or connecting external recorders via USB or
Firewire, refer to the instruction manual for your computer or your recorder.
Make sure to have the latest firmware version installed on your recorder unit. For CD recorders,
the existing firmware must support disc-at-once mode. In addition, running a unit with older
firmware can prevent you from writing sub-index markers into the tracks, for example.
Remote Devices
You can use remote devices to remote-control WaveLab Pro.
Several commands can be controlled with knobs and sliders of your remote control device. For all
commands that can be assigned to a keyboard shortcut, a MIDI trigger can also be assigned.
Remote Devices Tab
This tab allows you to select a device to remote-control WaveLab Pro, and see and edit the
control map of MIDI control devices.
●
To open the Remote Devices tab, select File > Preferences > Remote Devices.
13
Setting Up Your System
Remote Devices Device Editing Tab
This tab lets you select a MIDI control device, see the control map, assign WaveLab Pro
commands to MIDI controls, and import/export control assignments.
Device Menu
Select the MIDI device to edit. Select MIDI Shortcuts for Menus to define the MIDI
input port that is used for MIDI shortcuts. The shortcuts can then be assigned on the
Shortcuts tab.
Select MIDI Control Device #1 – #10 to select a slot for a connected MIDI control
device. You can then assign a device by selecting a MIDI input port and output port.
Active
Activates the selected device and scans the MIDI ports.
In-Port/Out-Port
Select the MIDI input/output ports of the device that you want to use.
Edit Map
Activates the edit mode of the MIDI control map for the selected device. To leave the
edit mode, click again.
Save
Saves the modifications that have been made to the MIDI control map.
Undo
Undoes the modifications that have been made to the MIDI control map.
Reset
If the map has a factory preset, clicking Reset resets all changes that have been
made to the map. If the map has no factory preset, the map is cleared.
14
Setting Up Your System
Remote Devices Import
Opens the file browser where you can select a map definition file (XML file). This kind
of file can be supplied by a MIDI device manufacturer or another WaveLab Pro user,
for example.
Export
Lets you export a map definition file (XML file). This file can be sent to another
WaveLab Pro user, for example.
Name
Lets you enter a map name.
Only Display Assignments
If this option is activated, the control map only displays the parameters that are
associated with a remote control.
Expand/Collapse
Expands/collapses the folder tree of the control map.
WaveLab Pro Action List
This folder tree lists the parameters that you can remote-control. The top folder
represent contexts. The related parameters can only be controlled if the context is
active. For example, if an audio file is active.
A remote control can be used in several contexts if these are exclusive. For example,
parameters that can be used for an active audio file or an active audio montage.
The Global folder contain the parameters that can always be controlled.
Control Editor – Save
If a control has been created or modified, click this button to save it.
Control Editor – Undo
If a control has been modified, click this button to undo the changes.
Control Editor – Clear
Erases the selected control’s definition.
Control Name
Lets you enter a name for the control. Each control must have a name.
Type
In the Type section, you can edit the type of the selected control.
When more than one type of control can be assigned to a parameter, you can
select a type from the first pop-up menu. You can choose between relative and
absolute editing for some parameters. For example, a Master Section slider can
be associated to a remote motorized fader (absolute editing), or to an infinite knob
(relative editing).
Several protocols are supported to interpret the MIDI messages. You can select the
protocol that you want to use from the second menu. The MIDI Learn function can
automatically change this protocol, according to the received MIDI messages.
Remote controls send messages but can also receive messages from WaveLab Pro,
to light up a button or move a motorized fader, for example. You can select the
mode to use from the third menu.
Message
Activates the MIDI Learn function. If this option is activated, you can use the control
(knob, fader, etc.) on your MIDI controller. When MIDI messages are received, they
are analyzed after the MIDI activity stops for several milliseconds. The result is
15
Setting Up Your System
Remote Devices displayed in the Message field. The result is then used by WaveLab Pro as the control
identifier.
Clear
Erases the MIDI event that identifies the control.
Conditions
A modifier is a WaveLab Pro parameter that can be activated by a MIDI control (for
example, a foot switch) or a computer key (Ctrl/Cmd, Shift, etc.). By associating a
remote control with one or two modifiers, you can use a single remote control to edit
different parameters.
Options Tab
This tab lets you use the MIDI Learn function to assign a control of a MIDI remote control device
to a function.
Emulate Mouse Wheel
If this option is activated, the AI knob of Steinberg controllers acts as a mouse wheel
in the WaveLab Pro user interface, except for plug-ins.
Edit Focused Numeric Field
If this option is activated, the AI knob Steinberg controllers can be used to edit the
focused numeric field that you find in many WaveLab Pro windows and dialogs.
Selecting a MIDI Remote Control Device
PREREQUISITE
The MIDI remote control device is connected to your PC/Mac.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > Preferences > Remote Devices.
2.
On the Device Editing tab, select one of the MIDI control device slots or the MIDI
Shortcuts for Menus option from the pop-up menu at the top.
3.
Select Active to activate the selected device.
4.
From the In-Port and Out-Port pop-up menus, select a MIDI input port and output port.
Assigning a MIDI Controller to a Parameter
If you are using a Steinberg remote control device, for example, the CC121, the controls are
already assigned to parameters. You can customize these default settings.
PREREQUISITE
You have set up your MIDI remote control device.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > Preferences > Remote Devices.
2.
From the pop-up menu at the top of the dialog, select your MIDI control device.
3.
On the Device Editing tab, click the Edit Map button.
4.
In the tree structure, click the parameter that you want to remote-control.
5.
In the Control Editor section, enter a name in the Control Name field.
6.
Select the type of control.
16
Setting Up Your System
Remote Devices Depending on the type of control on the MIDI remote control device, you must select a
control with relative values (knob), trigger values (button), or absolute values (fader).
7.
Click in the Message field, and on your MIDI remote control device, move the control that
you want to assign.
The name of the controller is displayed in the Message field.
8.
Click Save to the right of the This Control is Modified message.
9.
Click Save to the right of the Edit Map button.
RESULT
The MIDI controller is now assigned to the function.
Assigning Custom Parameters to Plug-ins
You can assign custom parameters to many VST 3 plug-ins.
PREREQUISITE
In the Remote Devices tab, assign the controls of your MIDI controller to the plug-in custom
parameters. If you are using the Steinberg CC121 controller, the parameters are assigned by
default.
PROCEDURE
1.
From the Master Section or the Effects window, open the plug-in that you want to control
with the MIDI remote control device.
2.
Ctrl/Cmd-click the circle icon at the top of the plug-in window to enter the Edit mode.
3.
Click OK.
The icon indicates that you are in MIDI learn mode.
4.
Move the mouse over a plug-in parameter, and move the MIDI control that you want to
assign.
Repeat this for all the parameters and controls that you want to assign.
5.
When finished, click the tool icon to exit Edit mode, and click OK.
RESULT
The assignment is saved. You can now control the assigned parameters with your MIDI remote
control device. A plug-in can be controlled via the custom parameter if the Remote Control
Mode is activated and only one plug-in can be activated at a time.
When a plug-in is activated for remote control, it also has precedence over other application
settings that are controlled by the same parameter.
To remove all remote control assignments on the plug-in, hold Ctrl/Cmd and Shift, and click the
Remote Control Mode button.
RELATED LINKS
CC121 Advanced Integration Controller on page 18
17
Setting Up Your System
Remote Devices Importing and Exporting Remote Control Definition Files
Map definition files are XML files, containing control assignments for your remote devices. You
can exchange them with other users or save a backup copy.
In the Remote Devices tab, select the Device Editing tab.
●
To import a map definition file, click Import, browse to the location of the map definition
file, and select the file.
●
To export a map definition file, click Export, and browse to the location where you want to
save the file.
Editing Changes in the Remote Control Devices Settings
Changes that have been made to the map, for example, changing the name of a control, can be
saved, reset, undone, and removed in the Control Editor section of the Remote Devices tab.
●
To save any changes that you have made, click Save.
●
To restore the factory preset of a MIDI remote control device, click Reset. If the control
device does not have factory presets, the map is cleared.
●
To undo your last action, click Undo.
●
To remove the control definition of the selected control or to unassign the selected
control, click Clear.
Using Modifiers for Remote Controlling Parameters
You can use the same controller for controlling different parameters, using one or two modifiers.
A modifier can be a MIDI control (for example, a foot switch) or a modifier key on your computer
keyboard (for example, Shift and/or Ctrl/Cmd).
To determine one or two modifiers, open the Remote Devices tab, and when editing a
parameter, select the modifiers from the Conditions section.
You can use the Shift and Alt modifiers to alter the edit steps of infinite knob controls as follows:
●
Press Shift to edit values in small steps.
●
Press Alt to edit values in bigger steps.
CC121 Advanced Integration Controller
You can use Steinberg’s CC121 Advanced Integration Controller to control WaveLab Pro.
This section describes the WaveLab Pro factory preset for the CC121. For detailed information
on how to use the controller, refer to the manual that came with the CC121. Note that the
CC121 was originally designed for Cubase. The following mapping combines the WaveLab Pro
functionality with the CC121 controls. The controls that are not listed in the following paragraph
are not assigned to a parameter.
Channel Section
You can use all controls of the CC121 channel section, except the fader, to control the elements
of the selected track in a WaveLab Pro audio montage. You can use the fader for the Master
Section.
Fader
Controls the Master Section fader.
PAN knob
Controls the gain of the selected track.
18
Setting Up Your System
Remote Devices Mute
Mutes/Unmutes the selected track.
Solo
Activates/Deactivates solo for the selected track.
CHANNEL SELECT
Selects the previous/next track in the audio montage.
To move the cursor to the previous/next clip edge in the audio montage, hold Alt. To
move the cursor to the previous/next region edge, hold Shift. To move the cursor to
the previous/next marker in the Audio Editor, hold Ctrl/Cmd.
EQ Section
With the EQ section you can easily control the Steinberg Studio EQ plug-in.
If the EQ TYPE button is activated on the CC121, you can adjust the parameters of the focused
Studio-EQ. All necessary EQ parameters, such as Q/F/G of each band, EQ TYPE selection, and ALL
BYPASS on/off can be set. You can switch to WaveLab Pro navigation mode by turning off the EQ
TYPE button. In WaveLab Pro navigation mode, you get access to alternative functions, such as
scrolling, zooming, and switching between windows.
EQ TYPE activated:
Bandwidth knobs (Q)
Adjusts the Q (bandwidth) of each EQ band.
Frequency knobs (F)
Adjusts the center frequency of each EQ band.
Gain knobs (G)
Adjusts the gain of each EQ band.
ON
Activates/Deactivates the EQ bands.
ALL BYPASS
Activates/Deactivates bypass for all plug-ins in the Master Section.
EQ TYPE deactivated:
LOW ON
Opens the Audio Editor.
LOW-MID ON
Opens the Audio Montage window.
HIGH-MID ON
Opens the Batch Processor window.
HIGH ON
Opens the preferences tab.
EQ-1 knob for the EQ Gain (G)
Scrolls left/right on the timeline.
EQ-2 knob for the EQ Gain (G)
Adjusts the horizontal zoom on the timeline.
EQ-3 knob for the EQ Gain (G)
Adjusts the vertical zoom on the timeline.
19
Setting Up Your System
Remote Devices EQ-4 knob for the EQ Gain (G)
Scrolls tracks on the Audio Montage window or scrolls vertically on the Audio
Editor.
EQ-1 knob for the EQ Frequency (F)
Scrolls left/right on the overview timeline of the Audio Editor.
EQ-2 knob for the EQ Frequency (F)
Horizontally zooms in/out on the overview timeline of the Audio Editor.
EQ-3 knob for the EQ Frequency (F)
Vertically zooms in/out on the overview timeline of the Audio Editor.
EQ-4 knob for the EQ Frequency (F)
Vertically scrolls on the overview timeline of the Audio Editor.
Transport Section
In this section you can control the transport functions of WaveLab Pro.
Previous button
Moves the cursor position to the left.
Rewind button
Moves the edit cursor position to the left.
Forward button
Moves the edit cursor position to the right.
Next button
Moves the cursor position to the right.
Cycle button
Activates/Deactivates Cycle mode.
Stop button
Stops playback. Press again to move the cursor to the previous start position. Press a
third time to move the cursor to the beginning of the project.
Play button
Starts playback.
Record button
Press once to open the Recording dialog. Press again to start the recording. Press a
third time to stop recording. The recorded file opens in the Audio Editor.
Function Section
In this section, you can adjust functions, such as fades and envelope level, by using the VALUE
knob.
VALUE knob
Rotate this knob to adjust the assigned function. Press the knob to reset the
parameter to its default value.
FUNCTION button 1
Adjusts the fade in settings of the active clip.
FUNCTION button 2
Adjusts the fade out settings of the active clip.
20
Setting Up Your System
Remote Devices FUNCTION button 3
Adjusts the envelope level of the active clip.
FUNCTION button 4
The element clicked last in the Nudge section of the Edit tab in the Audio Montage
window is assigned to this button.
AI Knob Section
WaveLab Pro can be controlled with the AI knob of Steinberg’s CC121, CI2+, and CMC-AI
controllers. With the AI knob, you can control the parameter that the mouse points to.
NOTE
The AI knob only works on parameters that are automatable.
In this section you can control parameters via the AI knob.
AI KNOB
Controls the VST 3 plug-in parameters, emulates the mouse wheel, for example, for
scrolling, and lets you edit a focused numeric field. To control a parameter with the
AI knob, move the mouse cursor over the parameter that you want to control, and
move the AI knob. You can activate/deactivate the emulation of the mouse wheel
and the editing of the focused numeric field in the Options tab.
LOCK
When the mouse cursor points to a parameter, press LOCK to control this parameter
regardless of the position of the mouse cursor.
JOG
Activates Jog mode. While Jog mode is activated, press LOCK to enter shuttle mode.
CUBASE READY Indicator
The CUBASE READY indicator has no function in WaveLab Pro.
Foot Switch Section
The foot switch has the same function as Shift. Press and hold the foot switch while turning the
AI knob to fine tune parameters.
21
WaveLab Pro Concepts
This chapter describes general concepts that you will use when working with WaveLab Pro.
Getting accustomed with these procedures allows you to work more effectively with the
program.
General Editing Rules
The common editing operations apply to any Steinberg product.
●
To select and move interface items, and to select ranges, click and drag with the mouse.
●
Use the keys of your computer keyboard to enter numeric values and text, to navigate lists
and other selectable interface items, and to control the transport functions.
●
Common operations like cut, copy, paste, or the selection of multiple items can be
performed using standard keyboard shortcuts.
NOTE
The behavior of your product is also governed by your preference settings.
Startup Dialog
When WaveLab Pro starts, the Startup dialog opens where you can select which project or
project template you want to open.
22
WaveLab Pro Concepts
Basic Window Handling Create
Empty Project
Creates an empty project.
My Default Project Template
Opens the default startup project template. The default project is defined on the
Template page. If no default project is defined, an empty project is created.
Templates
Allows you to open a template in a new project.
Open
Last Project
Opens the project that you last used in WaveLab Pro, including all files that were
open.
Recent Project
Allows you to open a recently used project.
Recent File
Allows you to open a recently used file.
Browse
Allows you to select the files that you want to open.
Use as Default (Do Not Show This Dialog Again)
If this option is activated, the option that you select is used from now on and the
startup screen does not open anymore. To display the Startup dialog, even if this
option has been activated, press Ctrl/Cmd when starting WaveLab Pro.
RELATED LINKS
Workspace Layout on page 547
Basic Window Handling
WaveLab Pro follows the basic guidelines for the Windows/macOS interface, which means that
Windows/macOS standard procedures apply.
Closing Windows
●
To close a file group tab or a file tab, click the X button of the corresponding tab or press
Ctrl/Cmd-W.
●
To close a file tab without saving your changes, hold Ctrl/Cmd-Shift, and click the X button
of the tab. This avoids having to confirm a warning message whenever you want to close
an unsaved tab.
●
To close all files of a file group at once, right-click a file group tab and select Close All Files.
●
To close all file tabs but the selected file tab, right-click a file tab and select Close All But
This.
●
To individually select the file tabs that you want to close, right-click a file group tab and
select Select Files to Close. This opens the Files to Close dialog, where you can select the
files that you want to close.
●
By default, files are removed from the project when you close them. To keep the files in the
project even when you close them, right-click a file tab and activate Keep in Project after
Closing.
23
WaveLab Pro Concepts
Selecting Audio RELATED LINKS
Permanently in Project vs. Temporarily in Project on page 62
Switching Between Files
You can have multiple files open and switch between them.
●
To bring a file to the front, click the corresponding tab.
●
To switch between the files, hold Ctrl/Cmd, and press Tab continuously.
●
To switch back and forth between the last two active files, press Ctrl/Cmd-Tab. Between
each step you have to release all keys.
●
To switch backwards, press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-Tab.
●
To toggle between the active file and the last edited file, press F5.
Selecting Audio
Almost all types of editing and processing that you perform in WaveLab Pro operate on the audio
selection. There are numerous ways to make an audio selection.
●
To select the whole audio file, double-click it. If the audio file contains markers, triple-click
it.
Selecting a Range by Dragging
The standard way to select a range in the wave window is to click and drag.
If you drag all the way to the left or right side of the wave window, it scrolls automatically,
allowing you to select larger sections than what can be shown in the wave window. The speed of
the scrolling depends on how far from the wave window edge you are.
Audio Range Selection in an Audio File
You can edit, process, or play back selections of an audio file.
●
To access the audio range selection options, in the Audio Editor, select the Edit tab.
The following selection options are available in the Time Selection section:
Range
If you click Range, the Range Selection dialog opens. In this dialog, you can define
selection ranges very accurately.
If you click the arrow to the right of the Range button, the presets list opens. In the
presets list, you can select between the selection range factory presets and your
custom presets.
All
Selects the entire waveform.
Toggle
Toggles the selection range on/off.
Extend
Opens a menu where you can select the following options:
●
Extend to Start of File extends the selection to the start of the audio file. If
there is no selection, a selection is created from the edit cursor position.
●
Extend to End of File extends the selection to the end of the audio file. If
there is no selection, a selection is created from the edit cursor position.
24
WaveLab Pro Concepts
Selecting Audio ●
Extend to Previous Marker extends the left edge of the selection to the
nearest marker to the left or the start of the audio file. If there is no selection,
a selection is extended until the edit cursor position.
●
Extend to Next Marker extends the right edge of the selection to the nearest
marker to the right or the end of the audio file. If there is no selection, a
selection is extended until the next marker position.
●
Extend to Cursor extends the selection to the edit cursor position.
●
From Start of File Until Cursor selects the range between the start of the
audio file and the edit cursor position.
●
From Cursor to End of File selects the range between the edit cursor position
and the end of the audio file.
●
From Cursor to Previous Marker selects the range between the edit cursor
position and the previous marker or the start of the audio file.
●
From Cursor to Next Marker selects the range between the edit cursor
position and the next marker or the end of the audio file.
●
From Playback Position to End of File creates a selection range from the
playback position to the end of the audio file. If no playback is taking place, the
position of the edit cursor is used.
●
From Playback Position to Start of File creates a selection range from the
playback position to start of the audio file. If no playback is taking place, the
position of the edit cursor is used.
●
Double Selection Length doubles the length of the current selection range.
●
Halve Selection Length halves the length of the current selection range.
Channels
Opens a menu where you can select the following options:
●
Extend to All Channels extends the current selection range to all channels.
●
Left Channel Only reduces the current selection range to the left channel
only.
●
Right Channel Only reduces the current selection range to the right channel
only.
Regions
Opens a menu where you can select the following options:
●
CD Track selects the range between the two CD track markers that encompass
the edit cursor.
●
Loop Region selects the range between the two loop markers that encompass
the edit cursor.
●
Exclusion Region selects the range between the two exclusion markers that
encompass the edit cursor.
●
Generic Region selects the range between the two generic markers that
encompass the edit cursor.
RELATED LINKS
Range Selection Dialog on page 26
Audio Range Selection in an Audio Montage
You can edit, process, or play back selections of an audio montage.
●
To access the audio range selection options, in the Audio Montage window, select the
Edit tab.
25
WaveLab Pro Concepts
Selecting Audio The following selection options are available in the Time Selection section:
Range
If you click the Range button, the Range Selection dialog opens. In this dialog, you
can define selection ranges very accurately.
If you click the arrow on the right of the Range button, the presets list opens. In the
presets list, you can select between the selection range factory presets and your
custom presets.
Extend
Opens are menu where you can select the following options:
●
Double Selection Length doubles the length of the current selection range.
●
Halve Selection Length halves the length of the current selection range.
●
From Playback Position to End of File creates a selection range from the
playback position to the end of the audio montage. If no playback is taking
place, the position of the edit cursor is used.
●
From Playback Position to Start of File creates a selection range from the
playback position to start of the audio montage. If no playback is taking place,
the position of the edit cursor is used.
Toggle
Toggles the current selection range on/off.
RELATED LINKS
Range Selection Dialog on page 26
Range Selection Dialog
This dialog allows you to specify an audio range for editing, processing, or playing back.
●
In the Audio Editor or the Audio Montage window, select the Edit tab, and click Range.
Start
Zero
The selection begins at the start of the file.
26
WaveLab Pro Concepts
Selecting Audio Cursor
The selection begins at the edit cursor.
End Position Minus Length
The selection begins at the specified end position minus the Specific Length value.
Start of Selection
The selection begins at the start of the current selection range.
End of Selection
The selection begins at the end of the current selection range.
Marker (with Name)
The selection begins at the marker that is selected from the pop-up menu below.
Offset (±)
Allows you to specify an offset for the selected start position.
Custom
Allows you to specify a start time for the selection. The time unit is the same as the
time unit that is selected for the time ruler.
End
End of File
The selection ends at the end of the file.
Cursor
The selection ends at the edit cursor.
Start Position Plus Length
The selection ends at the specified start position plus the Specific Length value.
Start of Selection
The selection ends at the start of the current selection range.
End of Selection
The selection ends at the end of the current selection range.
Marker (with Name)
The selection ends at the marker that is selected from the pop-up menu below.
Offset (±)
Allows you to specify an offset for the selected end position.
Custom
Allows you to specify an end time for the selection. The time unit is the same as the
time unit that is selected for the time ruler.
Options
Specific Length
Allows you to specify the selection length.
Set as Selection Length
Clicking this button freezes the current selection length. This is useful if you want to
move the selection.
27
WaveLab Pro Concepts
Selecting Audio Round Down Length
If this option is activated, the selection length is rounded down to the length
specified in the value field.
Snap to Zero-Crossing
If this option is activated, the start and the end of a selected range always snap to a
zero-crossing point of the waveform.
Channels
Select whether the selection spans the left channel, the right channel, or both.
Play
With the play options, you can preview the specified audio range.
Play to
Plays the range before the specified position.
Play from
Plays the range after the specified position.
Play Once
Plays the selection once.
Play Looped
Plays the selection in a loop.
Play Duration
Sets the playback length. Note that this overrides the From/To parameters.
Memorizing Selection Length and Cursor Position
You can copy the length of a selection range and the edit cursor position to an internal memory.
This is useful if you want to use these values in several places in WaveLab Pro.
●
To save the length of the active selection range, in the Audio Editor or the Audio
Montage window, select the Edit tab, and right-click Copy. Here, select Memorize
Selection Length.
●
To save the position of the edit cursor, in the Audio Editor or the Audio Montage window,
select the Edit tab, and right-click Copy. Here, select Memorize Cursor Position.
●
To apply the memorized information, right-click any time edit field and select Set
Memorized Position or Set Memorized Duration.
28
WaveLab Pro Concepts
Selecting Audio Selecting in Stereo Files
If you are working on stereo material in the Audio Editor, you can apply an operation to one
channel only or to the entire stereo material.
Which channel is selected when you click and drag in the wave window depends on where you
position the mouse cursor. The pointer shape indicates which channel will be affected.
The following pointer shapes are available:
Select left channel
Clicking in the upper half of the left channel selects the left channel.
Select both channels
Clicking in the middle area between the left and the right channel selects both
channels.
Select right channel
Clicking in the lower half of the right channel selects the right channel.
Switching the Selection Between Channels
You can switch the channel selection that you have made for a channel to all channels or switch
the selection to the other channel.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the wave window of the Audio Editor, select a range.
2.
Select the Edit tab.
3.
In the Time Selection section, click Channels and select one of the following options:
●
Extend to All Channels
●
Left Channel Only
●
Right Channel Only
You can press Tab to switch between the different channel selections.
Selecting in the Overview of the Audio Editor
The ranges that you select in the overview of the Audio Editor also apply to the main view.
PROCEDURE
●
In the wave window of the Audio Editor, hold down Ctrl/Cmd and click and drag in the
overview.
Moving a Selection Range
If a selection range has the correct length, but the wrong position, you can move it.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the wave window, hold down Ctrl/Cmd-Shift.
29
WaveLab Pro Concepts
Selecting Audio 2.
Click in the middle of the selection and drag to the left/right.
Extending and Reducing the Selection
You can resize a selection range in the wave window or the montage window.
There are several ways to extend/reduce the selection:
●
Select a range, Shift-click outside the selection range, and drag to the left/right, or click
and drag the edges of the selection range to the left/right.
●
To extend the selection to the previous/next boundary (marker or start/end of file), press
Shift and double-click the non-selected area between the boundaries.
Extending and Reducing the Selection Using the Cursor Keys
●
To move the start/end of a selection in the wave window to the left/right, hold down Shift
and press the left/right cursor keys. To move it in bigger steps, press the Page Up/Page
Down keys.
●
To extend a selection to the previous/next boundary in the wave window (marker or start/
end of the audio file), hold down Ctrl/Cmd+Shift and press the left/right cursor keys.
Deleting Selections
There are several options for deleting a selected range.
Audio Editor
The following options can be found on the Edit tab in the Cutting section.
Crop
Removes the data outside the selection.
Delete
Removes the selection. The audio to the right of the selection is moved to the left to
fill the gap.
Smooth Delete
Removes the selection. Crossfades are inserted at the edges. You can edit the default
crossfade length and its type in the Audio Files Preferences, on the Editing tab.
Audio Montage Window
The following options can be found on the Edit tab in the Removal section.
Crop Clip
Removes the data outside the selection.
Erase Selected Range
Erases the clip parts inside the selection range on the selected track, without filling
the gap.
Erase Selected Range on All Tracks
To access this option, click the arrow icon at the right of the Erase Selected Range
option. Erases the clip parts inside the selection range on all tracks, without filling the
gap.
Delete Selected Clip
If there is a selection range, the clip parts inside the selection range on the selected
track are deleted and the right section of the clips is moved to the left to fill the gap.
30
WaveLab Pro Concepts
Sliders If there is no selection, the selected clips are deleted.
Delete Selected Range on All Tracks
To access this option, click the arrow icon at the right of the Delete Selected Clips
option. Deletes the clip parts inside the selection range on all tracks and moves the
right section of the clips to the left to fill the gap.
Sliders
At various places in WaveLab Pro, slider controls are available to change parameters. There are a
number of ways to change the value of a slider.
●
Position the mouse over the slider and use the mouse wheel without clicking. Hold Ctrl/
Cmd while using the mouse wheel to scroll faster. This modifier also applies to the zoom
wheels. To move a slider, click and drag it.
●
To move the slider handle to a position, click the slider at any position.
●
To move the slider handle in smaller steps, right-click or click below the handle. Keep the
mouse button pressed to automatically step to the next value.
●
To reset the slider to the default value, if available, Ctrl/Cmd-click the slider, or click using
the third mouse button, or double-click the handle.
Renaming Items in Tables
You can rename items in tables in the Markers window, the CD window, and the Clips window.
●
To rename an item, double-click it or select it, and press Return, and enter the new name.
●
To rename the previous/next item, press Up Arrow or Down Arrow. This way you move
the focus on the previous/next item, while staying in the edit mode.
File Browser
The File Browser window allows you to browse files from within WaveLab Pro. The Auto Play
Mode is useful for speeding up the process of auditioning sound files.
The File Browser window provides you with all the standard browsing functions. It features
additional controls to audition audio files and any marker defined regions. You can use it to open
or insert files by dragging them to another location.
You can also choose to only view specific file types.
File Browser Window
In this window, you can browse files and open them in WaveLab Pro.
●
To open the File Browser window, select Tool Windows > File Browser.
31
WaveLab Pro Concepts
Tab Groups Back/Forward/Parent Directory
Allows you to navigate through the list and file hierarchy.
Location
This menu allows you to select a file location to browse and lists the recently used
locations.
Auto-Play Mode
Automatically starts playback of the selected file.
Play Selected Audio File
Plays the selected audio file.
Search
If this button is activated, you can enter text in the search field.
File format list
Allows you to select which file format to display.
Folder tree
Shows the folders that are available on your computer.
Favorite folders
You can add your favorite folders by dragging them from the folder tree.
File list
Shows the file name, size, type, modification date, and other information about the
file.
Create Folder
Allows you to create a new folder. Right-click in the file list and select Create Folder.
Audio Regions
If the selected file contains region markers, the regions are displayed in the Audio
Regions section. You can drag regions onto a track.
Tab Groups
With tab groups, you can view the content of different files, tool windows, or meters at the same
time, without having to navigate through different windows. Each tab group has its own content
and tab bar.
In a Control Window, a tab group can contain tool windows and meters. You can have three file
tab groups.
32
WaveLab Pro Concepts
Tab Groups Empty File Tab Groups
File Tab Groups with Audio Montages
33
WaveLab Pro Concepts
Tab Groups Tab Groups in Control Window
RELATED LINKS
Control Window on page 40
Creating File Tab Groups
PROCEDURE
1.
In the top right of a file tab window, open the Tab Group pop-up menu.
2.
Select Create a Tab Group (Split Vertically) or Create a Tab Group (Split Horizontally).
Creating File Tab Groups in Empty Tab Groups
PROCEDURE
●
In the top right of an empty file tab group, click Create a Tab Group (Split Vertically) or
Create a Tab Group (Split Horizontally).
Using Tab Groups
The Tab Group button in the top right of each tab window allows you to maximize, move, and
close tab groups. Tabs are used differently depending on the type of window.
Tool Window Tab Groups
●
To hide a tool window tab group, open the Tool Window Tab Group Options pop-up
menu and select Hide All.
●
To reorder tabs in a tab group, drag the tab horizontally to a new position on the tab bar.
●
To dock the tab group to another location, open the Tool Window Tab Group Options
pop-up menu and select Dock Tab Group Elsewhere. Now you can select where to dock
the tab group.
34
WaveLab Pro Concepts
Peak Files ●
To dock the tab group to the Control Window, open the Tool Window Tab Group
Options pop-up menu and select Dock Tab Group to Control Window.
Now you can select to which Control Window you want to dock the tab group.
File Tab Groups
●
To close a file tab group, click the Tab Group button and select Hide All.
●
To reorder tabs in a tab group, drag the tab horizontally to a new position on the tab bar.
●
To move a tab to another project, drag the tab to another project.
●
To paste the content of a tab into an audio file, drag the tab onto the waveform. The tab is
inserted at the cursor position.
●
To maximize the active file tab group, open the File Tab Group Options pop-up menu, and
select Hide Other File Tab Groups.
To show all file tab groups, open the File Tab Group Options pop-up menu, and select
Show Other File Tab Groups.
You can also double-click the file tab header of a tab group to show/hide other file tab
groups.
Peak Files
A peak file (extension .gpk) is automatically created by WaveLab Pro each time an audio file is
modified or opened in WaveLab Pro for the first time. The peak file contains information about
the waveform and determines how it is drawn in the wave window or the montage window.
Peak files speed up the time it takes to draw the corresponding waveform. By default, the peak
file is saved in the same location as the audio file.
Setting the Peak File Behavior
The peak file behavior can be set in the Audio Files Preferences on the File tab.
●
To save peak files in another location, activate Create Peak Files in an Independent
Folder, select Edit, and specify another file location.
●
To create peak files when writing audio files, activate Create Peak Files When Writing
Audio Files.
●
To delete peak files when closing audio files, activate Delete Peak Files When Closing
Audio Files.
RELATED LINKS
Audio Files Preferences on page 572
Rebuilding Peak Displays
Normally, peak files are automatically updated when the date of the peak file is older than the
date of the audio file. However, it can happen that the date of the audio file is not automatically
updated. In this case you can force a rebuild of the peak file.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Editor, select the View tab.
2.
In the Peaks section, click Rebuild Display.
35
WaveLab Pro Concepts
Companion Files Companion Files
Companion files (extension .vs) contain Master Section presets and view settings for audio
files. If this feature is activated when you save a file, the settings are recreated the next time that
you load the file.
Companion files are only available in the Audio Editor.
The following view settings are included in companion files:
●
Window size and position
●
Zoom level
●
Scroll position
●
Display mode (Waveform/Spectrum/Loudness)
●
Snapshots
●
Master Section presets associated with the file
Deleting a companion file does not alter the audio contents. Master Section presets are specific
to WaveLab Pro and can therefore not be integrated inside the various audio file headers.
Storing Companion Files in Another Location
By default, companion files are saved in the same location as the audio file. However, you can
select another file location.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > Preferences > Folders.
2.
Click Companion Files and specify another file location.
EBU Loudness Standard R-128
The EBU loudness recommendation R-128 establishes well-defined methods to measure
loudness, dynamics, and peak values, and also defines reference values to achieve for these
measurements. Though the reference values are intended for the broadcast world, the
measurement methods are helpful in any application dealing with audio and loudness control.
WaveLab Pro supports these audio measurements in many places, for metering, audio analysis,
and processing. The following text gives some basic information about the EBU R-128 standard.
Loudness Measurement
This method takes into account the frequency sensitivity of the human ear to loudness levels.
There are 3 types of measurements:
1
Integrated loudness, also called program loudness: this reports how loud an audio piece
is, on average. This measurement uses a gating method to ignore long periods of silence.
2
Short-term loudness: this measures the loudness every 1 second on an audio block of 3
seconds. This gives information about the loudest audio passages.
3
Momentary loudness: every 100 ms, a range of 400 ms of audio is measured. This gives
instantaneous feedback about the loudness.
Loudness Range
This measures the dynamics of the audio signal. It reports the ratio between the loudest and the
quietest (but non-silent) sections. The audio is divided into small blocks. There is one audio block
every second and each block lasts 3 seconds (analyzed blocks overlap).
36
WaveLab Pro Concepts
EBU Loudness Standard R-128 The top 10 % of the quiet blocks and the top 5 % of the loud blocks are excluded from the final
analysis. The calculated loudness range is the ratio between the loudest and quietest remaining
audio blocks. This measurement helps to decide if and how much compression or expansion can
or should be applied to the audio.
True Peaks
When a digital signal is converted to an analog signal, the EBU R-128 recommends measuring an
estimation of the real peaks, rather than relying on digital peaks, to avoid clipping and distortion.
This is accomplished by over-sampling the signal 4 times and retaining the peak values.
Naming and Units
The EBU R-128 proposes naming and units conventions:
●
A relative measurement, such as a value relative to a reference level: “LU” as “Loudness
Unit” (1 LU is 1 dB).
●
An absolute measurement, “LUFS” as “Loudness Unit Full Scale”. 1 LUFS can be understood
as 1 dB in the AES-17 scaling.
When WaveLab Pro relates to the EBU R-128 loudness, these units are used rather than dB.
37
Workspace Window
The Workspace window provides an editing and playback environment for each particular file
type. Each environment contains functions that are tailored to the specific purpose of each file
type.
●
Audio Editor for viewing and editing audio files.
●
Audio Montage window for assembling and editing audio montages.
●
Batch Processor window for processing a list of audio files with offline effects, VST plugins, and Master Section presets.
●
Podcast Editor for preparing and uploading podcasts.
●
Basic Audio CD window for assembling and writing Basic Audio CDs.
●
DVD-Audio window for authoring DVD-Audio and writing it to DVD.
●
Script Editor for writing and executing scripts in WaveLab Pro.
●
Control Window for hosting and organizing tool windows, especially in a multi-monitor
setup.
The Workspace window is highly customizable to match your workflow.
Elements of the Workspace Window
The Workspace window contains the following elements:
●
A menu bar
●
Tab groups to host the files to edit. You can move the content of a tab to another tab,
create a new empty tab, display the file path, and access other functions by right-clicking.
●
A set of tool windows. Which tools are available depends on the file type you are working
on. The tool windows can be activated/deactivated individually.
Audio Editor
The Audio Editor provides tools and functions for sample-accurate audio editing, high-quality
analysis, and processing.
Features include various metering tools, a signal generator, a compare function, and a tool for
correcting errors.
The wave window gives you a graphical representation of the audio file and allows you to view,
play back, and edit the file.
RELATED LINKS
Audio File Editing on page 107
38
Workspace Window
Audio Montage Audio Montage
In the Audio Montage window, you assemble audio clips into a montage. You can arrange, edit,
and play back clips on an unlimited number of both stereo or mono tracks.
Features include track and clip-based effects, volume and pan automation, and wide-ranging
fade and crossfade functions. You can use the Audio Montage window for creating music CDs,
mastering, multimedia work, radio spot production, etc. You can create multitrack compositions
and author professional audio CDs or DVD-Audio. Depending on the channel configuration of
the montage, you can route each track to different surround channels (up to 6) or non-surround
channels (up to 8).
You can place any number of clips on an audio track. A clip contains a reference to a source audio
file on your hard disk, as well as start and end positions in the file.
The montage window gives you a graphical representation of clips on tracks. In it you can view,
play back, and edit the tracks and clips.
RELATED LINKS
Audio Montage on page 193
Batch Processor
This editor allows you to batch process any number of audio files or audio montage files using
the plug-ins and presets of the Master Section, offline effects, and other plug-ins that are unique
to batch processing.
You can save the processed file in a different file format, rename files, and run an external
application when the batch is finished.
RELATED LINKS
Batch Processing on page 488
Podcast Editor
In the Podcast Editor, you assemble, define, and publish your podcast to the Internet.
RELATED LINKS
Podcasts on page 540
Basic Audio CD
In the Basic Audio CD window, all tracks of the Basic Audio CD are listed. Here you can assemble
and write Basic Audio CDs that are compatible with the Red Book standard.
RELATED LINKS
Basic Audio CD on page 398
DVD-Audio
In the DVD-Audio window, you author DVD-Audio and write it to DVD.
RELATED LINKS
DVD-Audio on page 405
39
Workspace Window
Script Editor Script Editor
In the Script Editor, you write and execute scripts.
RELATED LINKS
Scripting on page 564
Control Window
A Control Window can contain multiple tool windows and meter windows. This is useful if you
have multiple monitors. You can place the Control Window on your secondary display and use it
to manage the tool windows and meter windows that you use most.
You can create up to 4 different control windows.
Docking Tool Windows and Meters in a Control Window
You can dock any tool window and meter window in a Control Window.
PROCEDURE
1.
Right-click the tab of the tool window or meter that you want to dock in the Control
Window.
2.
Select Dock to Control Window and select one of the Control Windows from the
submenu.
Docking Tab Groups in a Control Window
You can dock tab groups in a Control Window.
PROCEDURE
1.
Click the Options button on the right of the caption bar of a tab group.
2.
Select Dock Tab Group to Control Window and select a Control Window from the
submenu.
40
Workspace Window
File Tab File Tab
The File tab is the control center of WaveLab Pro. Here, you can save, open, render, import, and
export files. It also gives you detailed information about your files and allows you to set up the
WaveLab Pro preferences.
Info
Provides information about the active file and allows you to edit the audio properties
of audio files and audio montages.
New
Allows you to create audio files, audio montages, batch processors, file groups,
projects, Basic Audio CDs, DVD-Audio files, podcasts, and script files. You can create
new files or use a template.
Open
Allows you to open audio files, audio montages, batch processors, projects, Basic
Audio CDs, DVD-Audio files, podcasts, or script files.
You can also open files that you have previously copied to the clipboard in the File
Explorer/macOS Finder.
Import
Allows you to open different file formats. The following formats are supported:
●
Audio File to Montage
●
DDP
●
CD Cue
●
AES-31
●
XML
●
Unknown Audio
●
File Groups
41
Workspace Window
Info Tab You can also import audio CD tracks from an audio CD.
Save As
Allows you to save the active file or the project. You can specify the name, file format,
and location. You can also save a copy of the active file.
Save All
Allows you to save all changed files of your project at once. The file list gives you an
overview of all files that have been changed.
You can use the filter to show all changed files, only audio files, only audio montages,
or all other files, for example, batch processor files.
Export
Allows you to render the active file, export the file group to a text file, export audio
montages to AES-31 and XML, and upload the audio file to SoundCloud.
Preferences
Allows you to view and change the preferences of WaveLab Pro. You can set up the
preferences for the following parts of WaveLab Pro:
●
Global
●
Audio Connections
●
Shortcuts
●
Plug-ins
●
Remote Devices
●
Folders
●
Variables
●
Audio Files
●
Audio Montages
Tools
Allows you to access the following tools:
●
DDP to CD
●
Data CD/DVD
●
Auto Split Audio Files
●
Signal Generator
●
DTMF Generator
●
Batch Conversion
●
Batch Renaming
RELATED LINKS
Info Tab on page 42
Configuring WaveLab Pro on page 567
Info Tab
The Info tab provides information about the active file and allows you to edit the audio
properties of audio files and audio montages.
●
To open the Info tab, select the File tab, and click Info.
42
Workspace Window
Info Tab Depending on the selected file, different information and options are available.
Name
Displays the name, file extension, and file location of the active file. You can edit
these attributes.
File Properties
Displays the size, date, and file format of the active file.
Audio Properties
For audio files, this displays the bit resolution, channels, and sample rate of the
active file.
For audio montages, this displays the mode, channels, and sample rate of the active
file.
You can edit these attributes.
Sample Attributes (audio files only)
Displays the musical attributes tune, key range, and velocity range.
Metadata
Displays the metadata of the active file.
Copy to Clipboard
Opens a menu from which you can select which information about the active file you
want to copy to the clipboard.
Reveal in File Explorer/macOS Finder
Opens the File Explorer/macOS Finder to show the location of the active file.
Delete
Deletes the active file.
43
Workspace Window
Tool Windows Tool Windows
Throughout WaveLab Pro there are various tool windows available that allow you to view,
analyze, and edit the active file.
Generally, the content of a tool window is synchronized with the active file, with the exception of
the audio meters which displays the audio file being played back. Tool windows can be docked
and undocked, and saved in your custom layouts. Some tool windows are only available for
specific file types.
The tool windows can be accessed via the Tool Windows menu.
Opening and Closing Tool Windows
You can close all tool windows that you do not need for your project.
●
To open a tool window, select Tool Windows and select a tool window.
●
To close a docked tool window, right-click the tool window tab and select Hide.
●
To close an undocked tool window, click its X button.
Meter Windows
WaveLab Pro contains a variety of audio meters that you can use for monitoring and analyzing
audio. Meters can be used to monitor audio during playback, rendering, and recording.
Furthermore, you can use them to analyze audio sections when playback is stopped.
The meter windows can be accessed via the Meters menu.
Opening and Closing Meter Windows
You can close all meter windows you do not need for your project.
●
To open a meter window, select Meters and select a meter window.
●
To close a docked meter window, right-click the meter window tab and select Hide.
●
To close an undocked meter window, click its X button.
Slide-Out Windows
Slide-out windows are hidden in the frame of the Workspace window. When you hover the
mouse pointer over the window name, the window slides out. It is hidden again, when you click
anywhere else.
Slide-out window tab
44
Workspace Window
Docking and Undocking Tool Windows and Meter Windows An open slide-out window
Docking and Undocking Tool Windows and Meter Windows
Tool windows and meter windows can be used as docked windows, as floating windows, or as a
slide-out window. You can freely drag around the windows and dock them at various locations.
●
To undock a tool window or meter window, drag the corresponding tab to another
position.
Now the tool window or meter window is a floating window which can be freely moved.
●
To dock a tool window or meter window, click and hold the caption bar or click the Options
button on the right of the caption bar and select Dock Tab Group Elsewhere.
Yellow symbols indicate locations for docked windows, pink symbols indicate locations for
slide-out windows. Drag the window to one of the locations.
●
To dock a floating tool window or meter window at its last docked position, click the
Options
button on the right of the caption bar and select Dock to Last Place Again.
45
Workspace Window
Docking and Undocking Tool Windows and Meter Windows ●
To dock a tool window or meter window to the Control Window, click the Options button
on the right of the caption bar and select Dock to Control Window. You can then select to
which Control Window you want to dock the tool window or meter window.
You can also drag and drop a tool window or meter window to the Control Window.
RELATED LINKS
Slide-Out Windows on page 44
Control Window on page 40
Setting the Transparency for Floating Windows
You can make the tool windows and meter windows become transparent if they are not the
active window. For this, specify the transparency value in the global preferences and activate the
transparency for each window individually.
●
To specify the transparency value, select File > Preferences > Global, and select the
Display tab. In the Tool Windows section, specify the value in the Window Transparency
field.
●
To activate the transparency for a tool window or meter window, click the Tab Group
button at the top right of the window, and select Auto Transparency.
RELATED LINKS
Global Preferences on page 567
Hiding the Caption Bar in Floating Meter Windows
To save screen space, the caption bar of floating meter windows can automatically be hidden if
the window is not the active window. This can be set individually for each floating window.
PROCEDURE
1.
In a floating meter window, click the Options button at the top right of the window.
2.
Select Auto Caption Bar.
46
Workspace Window
Command Bar Command Bar
The command bar of file windows allows you to create, open, and save files, and undo/redo
changes. You can also use the text field to quickly find and access open files, and to trigger
keywords.
New
Allows you to create an audio file, audio montage, batch processor, file group,
project, Basic Audio CD, DVD-Audio, podcast, and script file. You can create new files
or use a template.
Open
Allows you to open an audio file, audio montage, batch processor, project, Basic
Audio CD, DVD-Audio, podcast, or script file.
Save
Saves the active file.
Save As
Allows you to save the active file. You can specify the name, file format, and location.
You can also save a copy of the active file.
Trigger Cubase Update
Updates the Cubase project if the active file was opened via the Edit in WaveLab
option.
Undo
Allows you to undo changes.
Redo
Allows you to redo changes that were undone.
Navigate Backwards/Navigate Forwards
In the Audio Editor and Audio Montage window, this allows you to navigate to the
previous/next cursor position, zoom factor, or selection range without undoing/
redoing the edit operation.
File Search and Keywords
The text field allows you to search for open files and apply keywords.
Keywords are custom words that are assigned to a function in the Customize
Commands dialog or to a preset in the Shortcut Definitions dialog.
Customize Command Bar
Allows you to select the buttons that you want to display on the command bar.
Maximize Window
Maximizes the window. To restore the window size, click the button again.
Layout Options
Allows you to determine the position of the command bar, transport bar, and file
group tabs.
RELATED LINKS
WaveLab Exchange on page 486
47
Workspace Window
Status Bar Status Bar
The status bar at the bottom of the screen of the Audio Editor and the Audio Montage window
shows information about the active window using the units specified in the rulers.
The information displayed on the status bar is updated depending on the cursor position and on
the audio selection that you have made.
Time/Level (dB)
Displays the time of the audio file at the mouse cursor position. In the Audio Editor,
it also displays the level.
The value in brackets shows the time from the edit cursor position to the mouse
cursor position.
Audio Information at Edit Cursor
Displays the time at the position of the edit cursor. This information changes if you
reposition the cursor.
●
To define the cursor position, click the Audio Information at Edit Cursor field
to open the Cursor Position dialog.
●
To focus the cursor position, right-click the Audio Information at Edit Cursor
field.
Audio Selection Indicator (Audio Editor)/Audio Range Indicator (Audio Montage)
In the Audio Editor, this displays the length of the current selection, or the total
length of the audio file if no selection has been made.
In the Audio Montage window, this displays the length of the audio selection if a clip
is selected, or the size of the audio montage.
If you have zoomed in, you can right-click the indicator to display the selected audio
range, the active clip, or the whole file. Left-click the indicator to open the Audio
Range dialog, where you can define or refine a selection.
Zoom Indicator
Displays the current zoom factor.
●
To open a pop-up menu, that allows you to make additional zoom settings,
click the indicator.
●
To open the Zoom Factor dialog, that allows you to edit the zoom factor, rightclick the indicator.
Sampler Key Indicator (Audio Editor only)
Indicates the key of the current audio file (if defined). Click the indicator to open the
Sample Attributes window.
Audio File Properties/Audio Montage Properties
In the Audio Editor, this displays the bit resolution and the sample rate. It also
indicates whether the audio file is mono or stereo. Click the indicator to open the
Audio Properties dialog.
In the Audio Montage window, this displays the number of audio channels and the
sample rate of the audio montage. Click the indicator to open the Audio Montage
Properties dialog.
48
Workspace Window
Context Menus Bypass Master Section
If this option is activated, only the Playback Processing pane of the Master Section
is active during playback. All other Master Section panes are bypassed. However,
rendering still takes all plug-ins into account.
Master Section Preset Setting pop-up menu
●
Save Master Section Preset opens the Save Master Section Preset dialog,
where you can save the active Master Section configuration inside the
companion file or audio montage.
●
Load Master Section Preset applies the Master Section with the
configuration previously saved to the audio file or audio montage.
●
If Include Master Section Preset when Rendering as Super Clip is activated,
the Master Section preset that is saved with the audio montage is used when
rendering super clips of audio montages (Audio Montage window only).
Background Information
The status bar shows the progress of some background operations, such as
rendering an effect. The operation can be paused or canceled using the provided
buttons.
Context Menus
Throughout WaveLab Pro, various context menus are available. These menus group the
commands and/or options that are specific to the active window.
The context menus appear if you right-click specific areas and are useful for speeding up your
workflow.
For example, right-click a file tab to open a context menu with some relevant file options. Rightclicking the ruler of the waveform window brings up the Time Ruler context menu that allows
you to access a number of options for changing the time ruler display format.
You can find most context menu commands in the tabs, in the file window and in the main
menus, but some commands are only available in context menus. If you search for a function,
right-click the current working window to check if it has a context menu.
Context menu in the montage window
49
Workspace Window
Time Ruler and Level Ruler Time Ruler and Level Ruler
In the Audio Editor, you can display a time and a level ruler in the wave window. In the Audio
Montage window, you can display a time ruler in the montage window.
You can also determine which time and level units the rulers show.
Time Ruler
Level Ruler (Audio Editor only)
Time Ruler and Level Ruler Options
You can specify the time and level (amplitude) formats for each ruler in each wave window and
the time formats for each ruler in the montage window separately by right-clicking the ruler and
selecting a format from the pop-up menu.
Time Ruler Menu
Timecode
Displays frames per second for various SMPTE timecode types and for CD resolution.
You can specify the timecode type in the Time Format dialog.
Clock
Displays time units.
Samples
Displays positions as number of samples. The number of samples per second
depends on the sample rate of the audio file. For example, at 44.1 kHz, there are
44100 samples per second.
Bars and Beats
Displays bars and beats.
File Size (Audio Editor only)
Displays positions in megabytes. Decimals represent kilobytes.
Show grid (Audio Montage window only)
Displays vertical lines in the montage window, aligned with time ruler marks.
50
Workspace Window
Time Ruler and Level Ruler Time Format
Opens the Time Format dialog, that allows you to edit the appearance of the time
ruler formats.
Save Current Settings as Default
If this option is activated, the time ruler uses the current time format in all new wave
windows or montage windows.
Set Ruler’s Origin to Start of File
If this option is activated, the ruler’s zero position is set to the beginning of the first
sample.
Set Ruler’s Origin at Cursor
If this option is activated, the ruler’s zero position is set to the current edit cursor
position.
Set Ruler’s Origin to BWF Reference (Audio Editor only)
If this option is activated, the first sample matches the BWF time reference, provided
that the time reference is available.
Show Playback Range
If this option is activated, the time ruler displays the audio range that is played with
the Play Audio Range command.
Show Playback Anchor
If this option is activated, a marker is displayed below the time ruler to indicate the
audio anchor that corresponds to the Play From and Play To commands.
Show Pre-/Post-Roll
If this option is activated, the pre-roll and post-roll times are displayed.
RELATED LINKS
Time Format Dialog on page 52
Level Ruler Menu (Audio Editor only)
dB
Sets the level format to decibels.
+-100 %
Sets the level format to percentage.
Normalized +1/-1
Sets the level format to a ruler gradation corresponding to 32-bit float audio.
16-bit Range
Sets the level format to a ruler gradation corresponding to 16-bit audio.
24-bit Range
Sets the level format to a ruler gradation corresponding to 24-bit audio.
Save Current Settings as Default
If this option is activated, the level ruler uses the current level format in all new wave
windows.
51
Workspace Window
Time Ruler and Level Ruler Working With a Meter-Based Display
If your working material is tempo-based, you can select the meter format (bars, beats, and ticks)
for the ruler legend. This makes it easier to find musically related cutting points.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the wave window or the montage window, right-click the time ruler, and select Bars and
Beats.
2.
Right-click the time ruler, and select Time Format.
3.
On the Meter tab, set the Time Signature and Tempo to values that match your audio file.
4.
Set Ticks per Quarter Note to a number that you feel comfortable with.
For example, this can be the same value that is used by your MIDI sequencer.
5.
Click OK.
Setting the Edit Cursor Position
Many operations, such as playback and selection, depend on the current edit cursor position.
For example, playback often starts at the edit cursor position. The current edit cursor position is
indicated by a vertical flashing line.
There are various ways to move the edit cursor:
●
Click somewhere in the wave window, the montage window, or the time ruler. If you have
made a selection, click the time ruler to prevent deselecting.
●
Click and drag in the time ruler.
●
Use the transport controls.
●
In the Audio Editor and Audio Montage window, select the View tab and use the options
in the Cursor section.
●
Use the cursor keys.
●
Double-click a marker.
Setting the Ruler Start Position
By default, the audio file starts at the ruler position 0. However, you can set the 0 position to
another position of the file.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the wave window or the montage window, right-click the time ruler, and select Time
Format.
2.
Select the Offset tab.
3.
Select one of the Time Ruler Offset options, and click OK.
Time Format Dialog
In this dialog, you can customize the time format of the ruler. The time format of the ruler is also
used in various time fields, for example, the status bar and some dialogs.
●
To open the Time Format dialog, right-click the ruler in the Audio Editor or Audio
Montage window, and select Time Format.
In the Audio Editor, you can set different time formats for the overview display and the
main display.
52
Workspace Window
Time Ruler and Level Ruler Timecode Tab
On this tab, you can configure the appearance of the Timecode.
Frames per Second
Lists standard frame rates. From the pop-up menu, select Other to enter a custom
frame rate. You can also choose which frames or units are displayed.
Show Absolute Frames
Shows the time format as a number of frames, without other time elements.
Show Quarter Frames
Adds the quarter frame number to the time format.
Show Hundredth Frames
Adds the number of a hundredth of a frame to the time format.
Show Units
Adds time units to the time format of the ruler.
Clock Tab
On this tab, you can configure the appearance of the Clock option.
Show Units
Adds time units to the time format of the ruler.
Compact
Shows the time without unit indicators.
Meter Tab
On this tab, you can configure the appearance of the Bars and Beats option.
Time Signature
Lets you edit the time signature used to display the time represented as a musical
notation.
Tempo
Lets you edit the tempo used to display the time represented as a musical notation.
Ticks per Quarter Note
Lets you edit the number of ticks per quarter note. These are used to display times
that are compatible with your sequencer.
53
Workspace Window
Managing Tabs Offset Tab
On this tab, you can configure the Time Ruler Offset.
Zero (Default)
Deactivates the time offset in the ruler.
Set Zero-Point at Cursor Position
Sets the current cursor position to be the starting point of the ruler.
Set Zero-Point at BWF Time Reference (Audio Editor only)
If the audio file contains BWF metadata, the corresponding time reference value is
used as offset.
Set Time of First Sample
Specifies the time that corresponds to the zero point of the ruler.
Managing Tabs
A tab is a container for a file in WaveLab Pro. There are file group tabs and file tabs. You can open
several tabs, but only one can be active at a time. The Tabs context menu of the file group tabs
and file tabs offer tab related options.
File Group Tabs
The following options are available when you right-click a file group tab.
Save Modified Files
Allows you to specify which of the modified files of the file group you want to save.
Close All Files
Closes all file tabs.
Select Files to Close
Opens the Files to Close dialog which allows you to specify the files to be closed.
Set Temporary Files to Permanent Files
Adds all files to the file group that are not a permanent part of the file group.
Close and Remove from Project
Closes the file group and removes it from the project.
Remove Other File Groups from Project
Removes all file groups but the active file group from the project.
Rename
Allows you to rename the file group.
Export File Names
Allows you to create a text file that lists all files that are used in the file group.
File Tabs
The following options are available when you right-click a file tab.
54
Workspace Window
Managing Tabs Check Tab/Uncheck Tab
Checks/Unchecks the tab. This allows you to render all file tabs at once via the
Render tab.
To check/uncheck all tabs at once, activate/deactivate the checkbox at the right of
the file tabs.
You can also drag the selected tabs to another file tab.
Add to
Allows you to add the active file to another editor.
Close
Closes the active tab.
Close All But This
Closes all files but the active file.
Close All Audio Files
Closes all audio files.
Keep in Project after Closing
If this option is activated, the file remains in the project after you close the file.
You can open the file again from the Project Manager window.
Info
Displays information about the active file.
Reveal in File Explorer/macOS Finder
Opens the File Explorer/macOS Finder to show the location of the file.
Copy to Clipboard
Opens a menu, from which you can select which information about the file you want
to copy to the clipboard.
Recent Files
Allows you to open recently used files.
New (Based on Active File)
Allows you to open a new file tab with the same settings of the source tab. This
option is available if you right-click the empty area next to the file tabs.
Files to Close Dialog
In this dialog, you can specify which files you want to close.
●
To open the Files to Close dialog, right-click a file group tab and select Select Files to
Close.
55
Workspace Window
Activating Full Screen Mode Files list
Displays all open files. You can set a checkmark for the files that you want to close. By
default, only the active file will remain open and all other files will be closed.
All/None
Allows you to select and deselect all files.
Temporary Project Files
Allows you to select all files that are opened in WaveLab Pro, but not set to
Permanently in Project in the Project Manager.
Permanent Project Files
Allows you to select all files that are opened in WaveLab Pro and set to Permanently
in Project in the Project Manager.
Close Files
Closes the selected files.
RELATED LINKS
Project Manager Window on page 61
Activating Full Screen Mode
PROCEDURE
●
Select Workspace > Full Screen.
Log Window
This window allows you to view log messages that have been issued by WaveLab Pro.
For example, when using the scripting language of WaveLab Pro, the logWindow( ) function
outputs messages to this window. Toggle buttons allow you to filter the types of messages that
are displayed.
●
To open the Log window, select Tool Windows > Log.
56
Workspace Window
Log Window Clear
Removes all messages from the window.
Show Errors
If this option is activated, error messages are displayed.
Show Warnings
If this option is activated, warning messages are displayed.
Show Notes
If this option is activated, notes are displayed.
57
Project Handling
Opening Files
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > Open.
2.
Select the file type that you want to open.
For example, Audio File.
3.
From the file browser, select the file that you want to open.
4.
Click Open.
Opening Files from the Clipboard
You can open files in WaveLab Pro that you have previously copied to the clipboard in the File
Explorer/macOS Finder.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the File Explorer/macOS Finder, copy the files that you want to open to the clipboard.
2.
In WaveLab Pro, select File > Open.
3.
Click Open Files from Clipboard.
RESULT
The files open in new file tabs.
Automatically Opening Files in a Dedicated Tab Group
You can specify a precedented file type for each tab group. Files that open after rendering, audio
files that you open from an audio montage, or files that you open via the File Explorer/macOS
Finder are automatically opened in the corresponding tab group for this file type.
●
To specify a precedented file type for a tab group, click File Tab Group Options at the
header of a tab group, and select a file type.
58
Project Handling
WaveLab Projects WaveLab Projects
A project file (extension *.wpr) is the central document in WaveLab Pro. A project file contains
references to media data.
Only one project can be open at a time. When you open a previously saved project or create a
new project, the currently opened project is closed.
Each project can contain multiple file groups. Each file group has its own tab.
You can save your complete production as a project and open it on any WaveLab Pro
workstation. For this, the source files must be available on the target workstation at the same
relative or absolute path.
The Project Manager window gives you access to the files inside the project.
The active project is automatically saved and can be reloaded the next time that you start
WaveLab Pro. If you create a new project, this will be the default project. The default project file is
saved in the following location:
Windows
AppData\Roaming\Steinberg\WaveLab Pro 9.5\Cache\DefProject.wpr
Mac
/Users/YourName/Library/Preferences/WaveLab Pro 9.5/Cache/
DefProject.wpr
RELATED LINKS
File Groups on page 62
Project Manager Window on page 61
Creating Projects
You can create empty projects or projects that are based on a template.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > New.
2.
Click Project.
3.
Do one of the following:
●
To create an empty project, click Create Empty.
59
Project Handling
WaveLab Projects ●
To create a project that is based on a template, click Templates, and select a
template.
RESULT
If you selected Create Empty, a new, untitled project is created. If you selected a template, the
new project is based on this template and includes the corresponding layout and settings.
RELATED LINKS
Templates on page 78
Creating Templates on page 79
Creating Default Projects
You can define a default project that you can select when starting WaveLab Pro. You specify the
default project when creating a template.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > New.
2.
Select Project > Templates.
3.
Click Add Template.
4.
In the Project Template dialog, activate Set as Default Project.
5.
Enter a project name.
6.
Click Save.
RESULT
The default project is created. You can select it in the WaveLab Pro Startup dialog.
To set another project template as the default project template, right-click the corresponding
template and select Set as Default Project.
RELATED LINKS
Startup Dialog on page 22
Saving Projects
The active project is automatically saved as a project file that can be reopened the next time that
you start WaveLab Pro. However, you can also manually save the active project as a project file.
This allows you to give the project a name and save the project file at another location.
To keep your projects as manageable as possible, make sure that you save project files and all
related files in the corresponding project folders and subfolders.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > Save As.
2.
Click Project.
3.
Enter the name and a file location.
4.
Click Save.
60
Project Handling
WaveLab Projects Project Manager Window
The Project Manager window gives you access to all project files in WaveLab Pro and allows you
to edit them.
●
To open the Project Manager window, select Tool Windows > Project Manager.
You can click on a file or file group to bring it to focus. If the file or file group is not already open
in WaveLab Pro, it is opened.
The toolbar contains the following options:
Sort Files by Type
If this option is activated, the files are grouped in subfolders according to their file
type.
Select Multiple Files (for Drag and Drop)
If this option is activated, you can select multiple files in the projects list. You can
then drag the files to an audio montage, for example.
Rename Selected File Group
Allows you to rename the selected group.
The projects list contains the following options:
Open Status
This column shows if a file is open in WaveLab Pro or not. To close a file, click its X
button.
If a file is set to Permanently in Project, the corresponding file tab is closed, but
the file remains available in the Project Manager. You can click the file name to
reopen the file. If the file is set to Temporarily in Project, the corresponding file tab
is closed and the file is removed from the Project Manager.
Permanently in Project/Temporarily in Project
In this column, you can define if a file should be included as permanent part of the
project or if the file is only temporarily needed in the project.
The lock icon indicates that the corresponding file is a permanent part of the project.
The clock icon indicates that the corresponding file is temporarily in the project. Click
the icon to change the file status.
If you drag files from the File Explorer/macOS Finder onto the file list in the Project
Manager, the files are added permanently to the project. This allows you to quickly
add multiple files to a project.
Modification Status
61
Project Handling
File Groups In this column, you can see if a file in the project has been modified. Files that have
been modified are indicated by a checkmark.
RELATED LINKS
Permanently in Project vs. Temporarily in Project on page 62
Permanently in Project vs. Temporarily in Project
Project can contain files that are permanently or temporarily in the project.
Permanent files
Files that are set to be permanently in the project stay part of the project even when
you close the file.
Temporary files
Files that are set to be temporarily in the project are removed from the project once
you close the file. When you close the project file, these remain in the project just like
permanent files do.
When you open a new file, it is considered a temporary file. If you want to keep the file in the
project even when you close the project, you must set the file to permanent.
RELATED LINKS
Project Manager Window on page 61
Changing the Permanent/Temporary Status of a File on page 62
Changing the Permanent/Temporary Status of a File
To change the file status, do one of the following:
●
Right-click a file tab of a temporary file and select Keep in Project after Closing.
●
In the Project Manager, click the Permanently in Project/Temporarily in Project
column of a file to change its status.
File Groups
File groups are part of WaveLab Pro projects. Each project can contain multiple file groups.
A file group can contain different file types. For example, audio files, audio montages, and batch
processor files. This allows you to organize all files in one file group. You can also organize
each file type in a different file group to have a better overview. In this case, the file group icon
changes to the icon of the corresponding file type.
Each file group can contain multiple, customizable tab groups. For each tab group, you can
define a type precedence to instruct WaveLab Pro in which tab group a file of a given type should
be opened by default.
You can export file groups as text files. File groups can also be imported in a project via a text file
that contains file paths. These file groups open as a new file group tab.
The file group options are available via the context menu of the file group tabs.
The tab color of a file group indicates whether a file group contains modified files that have not
been saved yet.
RELATED LINKS
Tab Colors on page 77
62
Project Handling
File Groups Creating File Groups
You can create empty file groups or file groups that are based on a template.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > New.
2.
Click File Group.
3.
Do one of the following:
●
To create an empty file group, click Custom, select one of the options, and click
Create.
●
To create a file group that is based on a template, click Templates, and select a
template.
RESULT
A new file group is created. If you selected a template, the new file group is based on this
template and includes the corresponding layout and settings.
RELATED LINKS
Project Manager Window on page 61
Templates on page 78
Saving File Groups
File groups are automatically saved with the project.
RELATED LINKS
Saving Projects on page 60
Exporting File Groups as Text
You can export the names of the files inside a file group to a text file that contains the file paths.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > Export.
2.
Click File Group to TXT.
3.
Specify a file name and location.
4.
Click Export.
Searching for Open Files
The File Search and Keywords field in the command bar allows you to search in all file tabs and
access them. This allows you to quickly switch between file tabs if a lot of files are open.
●
To open a file tab, click in the File Search and Keywords field or press Ctrl/Cmd-F, and
start typing the file name that you want to access.
Once you stop typing or when you press Return, the first file tab that contains the search
term is activated.
●
To jump to the next file tab that contains the search term, press Ctrl/Cmd-Tab.
●
To jump to the previous file tab that contains the search term, press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-Tab.
●
To switch back to the last file tab that was active before searching, delete the text in the
search field.
63
Project Handling
Value Editing RELATED LINKS
Command Bar on page 47
Value Editing
At various places in the program, numerical values can be edited by using a combination of text
fields and knobs.
Values are sometimes composed of several elements, for example, 12 mn 30 sec 120 ms. Each
value can be edited by using any of the following methods:
●
To change a value, click in a value field and type a new value, or click the small arrows in
the value field.
●
To change the value by one unit at a time, press the Left Arrow and Right Arrow keys.
●
To change the value by several units, press the Page Up and Page Down keys.
●
To change the value using the mouse wheel, position the mouse cursor over a value, and
use the mouse wheel, or use the AI knob of your MIDI controller.
●
To change the value with the mouse, click a value and drag the mouse up or down.
●
To jump to the maximum and minimum values, press the Home and End keys.
●
To move from one element of the value to another, press the Left Arrow and Right Arrow
keys.
Drag Operations
WaveLab Pro makes much use of drag-and-drop techniques to perform various operations,
some of which can only be performed this way. These are referred to as drag operations in this
documentation.
●
To drag an object, click and hold with the mouse when positioned on the object and drag
it. Drop the object by releasing the button.
Many types of objects can be dragged between different source and destination locations, for
example, files, text, clips, items in a list, and markers.
NOTE
It is also possible to drag and drop files from WaveLab Pro to Steinberg’s Nuendo.
●
To reorder a tab within its own tabbed group, drag horizontally. To move a tab to another
window, drag vertically.
●
To open a file, drag it from the File Browser window of WaveLab Pro, from the file browser
of your operating system, or from another application to the tab bar.
●
To create a copy of a file, drag its tab vertically to another position of the tab bar, then
press Ctrl/Cmd, and release the mouse button.
●
You can dock and undock tool windows and meter windows via dragging.
RELATED LINKS
Docking and Undocking Tool Windows and Meter Windows on page 45
Dragging in the Audio Editor and Audio Montage Window
●
To insert an audio file in another audio file, drag the title bar of the file onto the waveform
of another file. You can also drag an audio file from the File Browser window, the file
browser of your operating system, or from another application into the Audio Editor.
●
To move a marker, drag it to another position on the time ruler.
64
Project Handling
Undoing and Redoing Actions ●
To create a copy of a marker, press Shift, and drag it to another position on the time ruler.
●
To delete a marker, drag it upwards outside the time ruler.
●
To copy an audio selection, drag a selected region of audio onto the waveform area of the
same file or another file.
●
To change the extent of a selection range, position the edit cursor at the start/end of the
selection range, and drag to the left or right.
●
To move the edit cursor without losing the current selection, and to snap it to an anchor,
press Shift, and move the mouse near the audio file/montage cursor. The mouse cursor
shape changes and you can drag the cursor left and right.
●
To move the edit cursor without changing or losing the current selection, press Shift, click
the edit cursor, and drag it to another position.
●
To scroll the waveform horizontally, click the bar above the time ruler and drag left or
right. You can also click anywhere on the waveform using the 3rd mouse button, and drag
left or right.
●
To create a generic marker from a selected text, drop the text that you have selected in an
external application onto the time ruler. The text becomes the marker name.
●
To create a stereo copy of a mono file, or a mixed copy of a stereo file, drag a tab to
another position of the tab bar, press Ctrl-Alt (Windows) or Option-Ctrl (Mac), and release
the mouse button.
Dragging in the Podcast Window
●
To reorder episodes in the episodes list, drag them to another position.
Dragging in the Master Section
●
To change the order of processing, drag effects between different effects slots.
Dragging in the Batch Processor Window
●
To change the order in which plug-ins are processed, drag the plug-ins within the audio
plug-in chain window.
●
To add a file to a batch process, drag its file tab to the batch conversion tool or batch
processor.
Undoing and Redoing Actions
You can undo and redo as many steps as you like. The only limitation is the available hard disk
space.
By default, when undoing or redoing any operation in the Audio Editor or the Audio Montage
window, the zoom factor, cursor position, scroll position, clip selection status, and time range are
restored to the state before the operation.
●
To exclude the scroll and zoom settings when undoing/redoing, select File >
Preferences > Global, select the Display tab, and deactivate Undo/Redo Does Not Scroll/
Zoom Audio.
This is useful if you make an operation, zoom in on the changed area, and then undo the
step to see the change, for example. When you do this, you do not want snapshots to be
restored and change your scroll and zoom settings.
●
To undo or redo a step, click Undo
Audio Montage window.
65
or Redo
in the title bar of the Audio Editor or
Project Handling
Undoing and Redoing Actions Undo/Redo and History in the Audio Montage
The Undo/Redo function in the Audio Montage window is identical with the Undo/Redo
function in the Audio Editor. However, the Audio Montage window provides additional Undo/
Redo functions and a History window. This window allows you to view a history of all recent
editing activities in the audio montage and to revert to a previous state.
Each audio montage has its own history.
The following options are available in the History window.
●
To open the History window, select Tool Windows > History.
●
To revert the current audio montage to a previous state, double-click the operation to
which you want to return.
●
To undo all operations, select Functions > Undo All Operations.
●
To undo all operations since the last saving command, select Functions > Undo All
Operations since the Last Saving Command.
●
To redo all operations, select Functions > Redo All Operations.
●
To clear the history, select Functions > Clear.
This frees up memory, hard disk space, and any involved audio file.
NOTE
When you save an audio file, the undo history is cleared automatically. This is not the case
for audio montages.
The following options are available in the Audio Montages Preferences.
●
To group similar operations in the undo history, select File > Preferences > Audio
Montages. On the All Audio Montages tab, activate Group Similar Operations.
This groups all operations of the same type to one single operation, as soon as an
operation of another type is performed.
●
To clear the history after each saving, select File > Preferences > Audio Montages. On the
All Audio Montages tab, activate Clear After Each Saving.
History Window
In this window, you can see all the operations that have been performed in the audio montage
and revert to a previous state.
●
To open the History window, open an audio montage and select Tool Windows > History.
Status
Shows which operations are done and undone.
Operation
Shows the type of the performed operation.
66
Project Handling
Zooming Time
Shows the time at which the operation was performed.
Description
Describes the performed operation in detail.
Navigating Backwards and Forwards
In audio files and audio montages, you can navigate to the previous/next cursor position, zoom
factor, and selection range without undoing/redoing the edit operation.
●
To navigate backwards or forwards, click Navigate Backwards
or Navigate Forwards
in the title bar of the Audio Editor or Audio Montage window.
Zooming
Horizontal Zooming
●
When you zoom out as far as possible, the entire file fits in the window.
●
When you zoom in as far as possible, each sample occupies several pixels on the screen.
This allows for sample-accurate editing of waveforms.
Vertical Zooming
●
When you zoom out as far as possible, the height of the wave fits in the window.
●
As you progressively zoom in, the display only shows a part of the total height. The vertical
scrollbar lets you adjust exactly which section is shown. Check the ruler to see which part
of the waveform is shown in the display.
●
To optimize the vertical zoom of the waveform, press Ctrl/Cmd, the time ruler, keep the
mouse button pressed, and drag the mouse up or down.
High Zoom Level
●
When the zooming level is very high, each sample is shown with a step and a bullet. The
steps show the real digitized state, while the bullets make it easier to see the samples,
especially for zeroed samples.
●
The curve also represents an estimation of the analog reconstructed signal to give hints on
true peaks.
Zooming in the Overview and Main View Sections (Audio Editor Only)
●
You can have different zoom levels in the overview and in the main view section. In the
overview, a range indicator on the time ruler indicates which section of the file is displayed
in the main view.
The range indicator is only shown if Sync with Other View is deactivated.
67
Project Handling
Zooming ●
To adjust the zoom level, drag the edges of the range indicator.
●
To scroll in the main view, drag the range indicator. The range indicator is located at the
top of the overview display.
●
To adjust the zoom level using the scrollbar, drag the edges of the scrollbar.
Zooming Using the Zoom Controls
Both the main view and the overview have horizontal and vertical zoom controls.
●
To zoom horizontally, click the Horizontal Zoom control, and drag left or right, or use the
mouse wheel.
●
To zoom vertically, click the Vertical Zoom control, and drag up or down, or use the
mouse wheel.
●
To fully zoom-out, double-click the zoom controls.
68
Project Handling
Zooming Zooming Using the Zoom Tool
The Zoom tool is used to zoom in a specific section of the waveform so that it occupies the entire
wave window. This is only available in the Audio Editor.
Using the Zoom Tool in the Main View
The selection that you make in the main view of the wave window is magnified and fills up the
entire main view.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Editor, select the View tab.
2.
In the Zoom section, click Zoom.
3.
In the main view of the wave window, click and drag left or right, and release the mouse
button.
The selected part of the wave now occupies the entire main view.
Using the Zoom Tool in the Overview
The selection that you make in the overview of the wave window is displayed in the main view.
PROCEDURE
●
In the overview of the wave window, click and drag left or right, and release the mouse
button.
RESULT
The selected range of the waveform is shown in the main view.
Zooming Using the Mouse
With the mouse, you can change the zoom factor by clicking and dragging or by using the mouse
wheel.
●
To zoom horizontally, in the wave window or the montage window, position the mouse
cursor over the time ruler, click, and drag up or down.
●
To zoom horizontally while maintaining the cursor position, position the mouse cursor
over the time ruler, press Shift, and drag up or down.
For this, you can also use the mouse wheel. Press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift, point at a waveform,
and use the mouse wheel.
●
To zoom horizontally around the mouse cursor position using the mouse wheel, press
Ctrl/Cmd, point at a waveform, and use the mouse wheel.
●
To zoom horizontally around the edit cursor position, press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift, point at a
waveform, and use the mouse wheel.
●
To zoom vertically using the mouse wheel, press Shift, point at a waveform, and use the
mouse wheel.
69
Project Handling
Zooming Audio Editor Only
●
To zoom vertically, in the wave window, position the mouse cursor over the level ruler,
click, and drag left or right.
●
To reset the vertical zoom to 0 dB, double-click the level ruler.
●
To set the vertical zoom to the best value, that is, the current minimum and maximum
displayed samples, make sure that the level ruler is set to 0 dB, and double-click the level
ruler.
Zooming Using the Keyboard
A quick way to zoom the active wave or montage window is to use the arrow keys on the
computer keyboard.
●
To zoom horizontally in the active wave window or montage window, press Up Arrow or
Down Arrow.
●
To zoom vertically in the active wave/montage window, hold Shift, and press Up Arrow or
Down Arrow.
●
To zoom vertically to fit the available height, press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift-Up Arrow.
●
To zoom out fully, press Ctrl/Cmd-Down Arrow.
●
To zoom in fully, press Ctrl/Cmd-Up Arrow.
NOTE
You can increase or decrease the zoom steps with the Interval for Zoom Key Command option.
You can set this option in the Global Preferences on the Options tab.
RELATED LINKS
Global Preferences on page 567
Zoom Options
The zoom options allow you to quickly access various zoom settings.
The zoom options are available in the Audio Editor and the Audio Montage window on the View
tab in the Zoom section.
Time
Opens a pop-up menu that allows you to adjust the zoom to display the selected time
range. Zoom in 1:1 zooms in so that one pixel on the screen represents one sample.
To edit the zoom factor, click Edit Zoom Factor. This opens the Zoom Factor dialog,
where you can edit the following settings:
●
Set Time Range allows you to specify the time range that you want to display.
●
Samples per Screen Point allows you to specify how many audio samples are
summarized in each screen point.
●
Screen Points per Sample allows you to specify how many screen points are
used to represent a single audio sample.
Zoom
Activates the Zoom tool that allows you to define a time range that is zoomed in.
Zoom Selection
Zooms the window so that the current selection occupies the entire montage
window.
70
Project Handling
Zooming Display Whole Clip (Audio Montage window only)
Adjusts the view to display the active clip.
View All
Displays the entire audio range.
Microscope
Zooms in as far as possible.
Zoom in Audio (10x)/Zoom out Audio (10x)
Zooms in/out in big steps.
Zoom in Audio/Zoom out Audio
Zooms in/out in small steps.
Level
Adjusts the zoom to only display samples below the selected dB value.
Optimize Vertical Zoom (Audio Editor only)
Changes the vertical zoom factor so that the peaks are clearly visible. This
adjustment is done according to the section of the wave that is visible in the wave/
montage window.
Reset Zoom to 0 dB
Adjusts the zoom to display audio levels up to 0 dB.
Zoom in Vertically/Zoom out Vertically
Zooms in/out to show waveforms with a lower/higher level.
Zooming in Audio Montages
Zooming options in the Audio Montage window are almost similar to those in the Audio Editor.
However, there are additional zooming options for tracks and the Wave Matching window for
displaying a close-up view of the beginning of the selected track.
RELATED LINKS
Wave Matching Window on page 278
Zoom Buttons in the Audio Montage
The zoom buttons in the Audio Montage window allow you to apply zoom presets.
●
To only display the selected track, or also the tracks below and/or above the selected track,
click the corresponding buttons.
●
To set the zoom setting to fit the active clips in 25 %, 50 %, or 100 % of the available space,
click the corresponding buttons.
71
Project Handling
Presets ●
To select a specific area, click Ctrl/Cmd, and drag the rectangle over the tracks and clips
that you want to zoom in on.
Displaying More or Less Tracks
The number of tracks that are displayed in the Audio Montage window can be changed with the
zoom controls in the lower right corner of the montage window.
●
To display more tracks, click the smaller magnifying glass icon.
●
To display fewer tracks, click the larger magnifying glass icon.
●
To make a single track fit the whole montage window, click the numbered button in the
track control area, and select Zoom from the pop-up menu.
You can also right-click the lower area of a track, and select Display Whole Clip from the
pop-up menu.
Presets
You can create presets to save commonly used settings. WaveLab Pro provides a selection of
factory presets that can be used by most dialogs.
You can save customized presets. The next time that you load the program, the presets are
available.
Presets are saved as single files and can be organized in subfolders. The root folder of the preset
is different for each type of preset and cannot be changed.
Saving a Preset
PROCEDURE
1.
Open the dialog that you want to use and modify the parameters.
2.
Open the Presets pop-up menu and select Save As.
3.
Optional: Click the folder icon and enter a name for the subfolder that you want to use as
the location for this preset.
4.
Type in a name.
5.
Click Save.
72
Project Handling
Presets Loading Presets
To apply a saved preset or a factory preset to a dialog or plug-in, you must load the preset.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the dialog, open the Presets pop-up menu.
2.
Select the preset that you want to apply.
Modifying a Preset
You can modify a preset and save the changes.
PROCEDURE
1.
Open the dialog that you want to use.
2.
Load the preset that you want to modify.
3.
Modify the parameters of the dialog.
4.
Open the Presets pop-up menu and select Save.
Deleting a Preset
PROCEDURE
1.
Open the dialog that you want to use.
2.
Select the preset that you want to delete.
3.
Open the Presets pop-up menu and select Organize Presets.
4.
In the File Explorer/macOS Finder, select the preset file that you want to delete, and press
Delete.
Saving and Restoring Temporary Presets
Some dialogs allow you to save and load up to 5 temporary presets. This is useful if you want to
quickly test and compare different settings.
Saving Presets Temporarily
PROCEDURE
1.
Open the dialog that you want to use and make your settings.
2.
Open the Presets pop-up menu.
3.
From the Store Temporarily submenu, select a slot.
Restoring Temporary Presets
PROCEDURE
1.
Open the dialog in which you have saved a preset.
2.
Open the Presets pop-up menu.
3.
From the Restore submenu, select a preset.
73
File Operations
Recently Used Files
All files that you have recently used in WaveLab Pro are saved in a list. This helps you to gain fast
access to recent projects. You can open recently used files via the File menu or the Recent Files
tab, which displays more files and offers additional options.
Opening Recently Used Files
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > Open.
2.
Select the file type that you want to open.
3.
Click Recent Files.
4.
Optional: Use the search field to enter the name of the file that you are looking for.
5.
Select the file that you want to open.
6.
Click Open.
Recent Files Tab
This tab allows you to view and manage all the files that you have recently used in WaveLab
Pro. You can search for files, open multiple files at once, and remove individual files or files that
cannot be located.
●
To open the Recent Files tab, select File > Open, select one of the file types, and click
Recent Files.
Only Show Files Created by WaveLab Pro
Only shows the files that have not been opened since they were created by WaveLab
Pro. For example, a file that is rendered has this status until it is opened.
Search field
Lets you search for text in the Name or Path column, depending on which column is
selected.
Remove Non-Existing Files
Removes those files from the list that cannot be located on the medium.
74
File Operations
Favorite Files Remove Selected Files
Removes all selected files from the list.
Open
Opens the selected files.
Filtering Recently Used Files by Name
The search field in the Recent Files tab allows you to filter the files list by name.
●
To specify whether the Name or the Path column is used, click the Name or Path column
header.
●
To search for a file, enter the text that you want to search for in the search field.
●
To switch the focus from the search field to the list of recently used files, press Down
Arrow.
●
To switch the focus from the list of recently used files to the search field, press Ctrl/Cmd-F.
Setting the Number of Recently Used Files to Display
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > Preferences > Global.
2.
In the Global Preferences window, select the Display tab.
3.
In the History section, set the maximum number of items to be listed in the following
areas:
●
Recent File menus
●
Recent Files tab
●
Recent Folders menu
Favorite Files
You can add files that you are using regularly to the favorite files list.
●
To open the favorite files list, select File > Open, select the file type, and click Favorites.
●
To add the open file to the favorite files list, click Add Current File.
●
To open a file from the favorite files list, select a file from the file list, and click Open.
●
To remove files from the favorite files list, select the files that you want to remove, and
click Remove Selected Files.
●
To remove files from the list that are no longer present on the medium, click Remove
Non-Existing Files.
Favorite Files Tab
This tab allows you to display and edit the favorite files list.
●
To open the Favorite Files tab, select File > Open, select the file type, and click Favorites.
75
File Operations
Save and Save As List of favorite files
Shows the favorite files.
Search
Lets you filter the favorite files list by name.
Remove Non-Existing Files
Removes files from the list that are no longer present on the medium.
Remove Selected Files
Removes all selected files from the list.
Add Current File
Adds the open file to the favorites list.
Only Show Files Created by WaveLab Pro
If this option is activated, the list displays only files that were created by WaveLab
Pro, but have not yet been opened.
This allows you to quickly access files that were created in WaveLab Pro via the Save
As or Render option, for example.
Open
Opens the selected files in WaveLab Pro.
Filtering Favorite Files
The search field in the Favorite Files tab allows you to filter the favorite files list by name.
●
In the Favorite Files tab, enter the text that you want to search for in the search field.
●
To switch the focus from the search field to the favorite files list, press Down Arrow.
●
To switch the focus from the favorite files list to the search field, press Ctrl/Cmd-F.
RELATED LINKS
Favorite Files Tab on page 75
Save and Save As
●
Once a file has been saved, select File > Save, or press Ctrl/Cmd-S to update the file and
make the changes permanent.
●
If you want to specify a new name, location, and/or file format, select File > Save As.
NOTE
In the Audio Editor, all save operations except Save Copy clear the undo history, which means
that after saving you cannot undo or redo.
76
File Operations
Save and Save As Tab Colors
The colored tab corner gives information on whether a file is saved or not, and whether the file
has been rendered in Cubase.
White
The file is not modified.
Green (Audio Editor only)
The file uses a decoded file format and is saved.
Red
The file has been modified and changes have not been saved yet.
Yellow
The file has been rendered in Cubase.
Unsaved Changes Indicator
When you have made changes to a file, an asterisk is displayed next to the file name until you
save the file.
Saving Multiple Files at Once
You can save some or all open files at once.
PROCEDURE
1.
Open the File window and click Save All.
2.
Select the files that you want to save.
3.
Click Save.
Saving Copies of Files
You can save copies of files that you are working on.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > Save As.
2.
Specify a name and location.
3.
Right-click Save and select Save Copy.
Reverting to Saved File
You can revert the file that you are working on back to its last saved state. This undoes all the
changes made to the file since it was last saved.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > Open.
2.
Select the file type that you want to open.
3.
Click Revert to Saved File.
4.
In the warning dialog, click Yes to revert to the last saved state.
77
File Operations
Templates RESULT
The last saved version of the file is loaded from disk.
Automatic Backups
You can automatically create backups of your files.
For example, if you select Save As and specify a file name that is already used in that folder, you
will be asked if you want to replace the existing file or replace the existing file and rename the
old file. If you click Replace and Keep Old, the backup name of the audio file that is replaced will
be the original name, with .bak added at the end.
Saving Audio Montages
The saving operations for audio montages are the same as for audio files. However, there are
things to note when saving audio montages.
●
Audio montage files only contain references to audio files. If you want to rename audio
files that are referenced by audio montages, rename the audio files in the Info window of
the Audio Editor. All clip references are updated automatically.
●
If the audio montage contains clips that refer to untitled audio files, save these audio files
before saving the audio montage.
RELATED LINKS
Renaming Files on page 83
Save and Save As on page 76
Templates
You can save file settings that you regularly use as templates. Templates are useful when
creating new audio files, audio montages, podcasts, projects, or batch processors.
Templates Tab
This tab shows all templates, and allows you to create and open templates.
●
To open the Templates tab, select File > New, select a file type, and click Templates.
List of the available templates
Lists all saved templates.
Add Template
Allows you to add a new template or update an existing template.
Explore
Opens the folder where the template files are located. Here, you can rename and
delete templates.
78
File Operations
Templates Use Template Name as Default File Name
If this option is activated and you click Add Template, a new file is created and uses
the name of the template. If this option is deactivated, the name of the new file is
“untitled”.
Creating Templates
You can create a template from an active audio montage, audio file, podcast, project, or batch
processor file and use it as a basis for newly created files.
PREREQUISITE
Select the file that you want to base your template on.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > New.
2.
Select the file type for which you want to create a template.
3.
Click Templates.
4.
In the Templates tab, do one of the following.
●
To create a new template, click Add Template, make your settings, and click Create.
●
To update an existing template, click Add Template, enter the name of the template
that you want to update, and click Create.
5.
Optional: If you want to use the template name as the default file name, activate Use
Template Name as Default File Name.
6.
When saving or updating an audio file template or an audio montage template, you can
make additional settings.
●
When saving an audio file template, the Audio File Template dialog opens. Here,
you can select whether WaveLab Pro should attach an audio file format.
●
When saving an audio montage template, the Audio Montage Template dialog
opens. Here, you can select whether to include track plug-ins, clips, and/or markers.
Also select whether WaveLab Pro should attach an audio file format.
Audio File Template Dialog
The Audio File Template dialog displays the audio properties of the audio file template that you
are creating. You can also specify whether to always associate a specific audio file configuration
with optional metadata when creating an audio file template or not.
●
To open the Audio File Template dialog, select File > New, click Audio File, and click
Templates. In the Templates tab, click Add Template.
79
File Operations
Templates Attach Audio File Format
If this option is activated, whenever you open the Render or Save As dialogs, the
audio file configuration specified below is proposed by default.
Template Name
Allows you to enter a name for the template.
Audio Montage Template Dialog
In the Audio Montage Template dialog, you can set various options when creating an audio
montage template.
●
To open the Audio Montage Template dialog, select File > New, click Audio Montage,
and click Templates. In the Templates tab, click Add Template.
Include Clips
If this option is activated, clips are saved in the template.
Include Track and Master Plug-ins
If this option is activated, track plug-ins and master plug-ins are saved in the
template.
Include Markers
If this option is activated, markers are saved in the template.
Attach Audio File Format
If this option is activated, whenever you open the Render dialog, the audio file
configuration specified below is proposed by default.
Template Name
Allows you to enter a name for the template.
File Group Template Dialog
The File Group Template dialog displays the file group name on which the template that you are
creating is based on. You can also specify whether to include links to the files inside the file group
in the template and specify the template name.
●
To open the File Group Template dialog, select File > New, click File Group, and click
Templates. In the Templates tab, click Add Template.
80
File Operations
Templates Include Links to the Files Inside the File Group
If this option is activated, the links to the files that are included in the file group are
included in the template.
Template Name
Allows you to enter a name for the template.
Project Template Dialog
In the Project Template dialog, you can set various options when creating a project template.
●
To open the Project Template dialog, select File > New, click Project, and click
Templates. In the Templates tab, click Add Template.
Include Links to the Files Inside the Project
If this option is activated, the links to the files that are included in the project are
included in the template.
Set as Default Project
If this option is activated, the template is used as the default project when you start
WaveLab Pro.
Template Name
Allows you to enter a name for the template.
Creating Files From Templates
You can create a file from a template to use its settings.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > New.
2.
Select the file type that you want to create.
3.
Click Templates.
81
File Operations
Templates 4.
From the list of the available templates, select the template that you want to take as the
basis of the new file.
Deleting Templates
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > New.
2.
Select the file type for which you want to delete templates.
3.
Click Templates.
4.
Click Explore.
5.
In the File Explorer/macOS Finder, delete the templates.
Renaming Templates
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > New.
2.
Select the file type for which you want to rename templates.
3.
Click Templates.
4.
Click Explore.
5.
In the File Explorer/macOS Finder, rename the templates.
Setting Templates as Default
You can set a template as the default template that opens when you click New on the command
bar.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > New.
2.
Select the file type that you want to open.
3.
Select Templates.
4.
Right-click a template and select Set as Default.
RELATED LINKS
Command Bar on page 47
Defining Shortcuts for Templates
You can define key sequences and keywords for templates. This allows you to quickly open a
template.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > New.
2.
Select the file type that you want to open.
3.
Select Templates.
4.
Right-click a template and select Define Shortcut.
5.
In the Shortcut Definitions dialog, edit the shortcut for the selected template.
82
File Operations
File Renaming 6.
Click OK.
File Renaming
You can rename a file and update all references automatically. For example, if you rename an
audio file named India to Sitar, all open files that reference the file India are updated to
reference the file as Sitar.
Audio files, peak files, and marker files are also renamed accordingly.
The following files use audio file references:
●
Audio montages
●
Basic Audio CDs
●
DVD-Audio projects
Renaming Files
PREREQUISITE
If you want to rename a file that is referenced by other files, open the files that reference the file
that you are about to rename in WaveLab Pro.
PROCEDURE
1.
Open the file that you want to rename.
2.
Select the File tab.
3.
Click Info.
4.
In the Name section, enter the new name and/or a new file location.
5.
Select a file suffix from the pop-up menu.
6.
Click Apply Changes.
Naming Schemes
When rendering audio files or audio montages, you can create multiple files that are named
according to a naming scheme.
Defining Naming Schemes
You can define a naming scheme by combining name attributes that determine the structure of
the file names for the rendered audio files or audio montages.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Naming Scheme dialog, click Add Attribute and select which attributes you want to
add.
2.
In the Settings section, make your settings.
3.
Click OK.
RELATED LINKS
Naming Scheme Dialog on page 84
83
File Operations
Deleting Files Naming Scheme Dialog
The Naming Scheme dialog allows you to define naming schemes for the audio files or audio
montages that you want to render. You can save naming schemes as presets.
●
To open the Naming Scheme dialog, select the Render tab in the Audio Editor or Audio
Montage window, and activate Named File in the Result section. Then open the Scheme
pop-up menu in the Output section, and select Edit Naming Scheme.
Add Attribute
Allows you to add a naming scheme attribute. You can add free text, counters, and
variables.
Used Attributes
Shows the naming scheme attributes. You can rearrange the attributes by dragging.
Separator
Allows you to select a separator.
Counter Start
Allows you to select the counter start.
Digit Number
Allows you to select the style of the digit number.
Ignore for Single File Rendering
If this option is activated, the naming scheme is only applied when rendering more
than one file.
Preview
Displays a preview of your current settings.
Presets
Allows you to save and apply naming scheme presets.
Deleting Files
You can delete the active file from within WaveLab Pro.
PREREQUISITE
The file that you want to delete is not copied to the clipboard, is not pasted into another file that
is open, and is not open in another application.
PROCEDURE
1.
Open the file that you want to delete.
84
File Operations
Temporary Files 2.
Select the File tab.
3.
Click Info.
4.
Click Delete.
5.
Click OK.
RESULT
The file, including its peak and marker files, is deleted.
Temporary Files
Temporary files are used for specific operations, such as the undo/redo functions. You can
specify where WaveLab Pro saves its temporary files.
You can specify up to three different folders for saving temporary files. If you have access to
more than one drive, saving your temporary files on separate physical drives (not partitions) can
speed up performance considerably.
For example, if your source files are located on the C: drive, you could specify D:\temp and E:
\temp as temporary folders. This improves the performance and reduces disc fragmentation.
RELATED LINKS
Specifying Folders on page 85
Work Folders vs. Document Folders
WaveLab Pro distinguishes between two types of folders: work folders and document folders.
●
In work folders, temporary files are saved.
●
Document folders contain WaveLab Pro-specific files, such as audio files, audio montages,
etc.
Specifying Folders
You can specify which document folder should open when you perform an open or save
operation. You can also specify up to three work folders for temporary files.
PROCEDURE
1.
Open the file for which you want to specify folders.
2.
Select File > Preferences > Folders.
3.
On the Folders tab, click the type of folder for which you want to specify a location.
4.
Specify a location in the Folder field.
5.
Optional: Depending on the selected type of folder, you can make additional settings.
Folders Tab
On this tab, you can specify default document folders and work folders for each file type.
●
To open the Folders tab, select File > Preferences > Folders.
85
File Operations
Work Folders vs. Document Folders In the list on the left, you specify the folder type that you want to make settings for.
Folder for Temporary Files #1/#2/#3
You can specify three folders for saving temporary files. If your system comprises
multiple hard disks, specifying one folder for temporary files on each of these hard
disks can speed up file operations.
Companion Files
Specify a folder for saving companion files, that is, Master Section presets and view
settings for audio files.
Cache Folder
Activate Use Cache Folder for Decoded Files to specify a cache folder. The cache
folder contains wave files that are created when you are working with files in
compressed file formats, such as MP3 files. To prevent the cache folder from
growing indefinitely, WaveLab Pro checks the date of each file in this folder and
deletes files that were created before a specific number of days. You can specify the
number of days with the Delete Files Older Than option.
If Use Cache Folder for Decoded Files is deactivated, the compressed files are
decoded each time they are opened.
Audio File – Open Folder/Save Folder
The default open and save folders for audio files.
Audio Montage – Open Folder/Save Folder
The default open and save folders for audio montage files.
Basic Audio CD – Open Folder/Save Folder
The default open and save folders for Basic Audio CD files.
86
File Operations
Exporting to SoundCloud Batch Processor – Open Folder/Save Folder
The default open and save folders for Batch Processor files.
DVD-Audio Project – Open Folder/Save Folder
The default open and save folders for DVD-Audio Project files.
File Group – Open Folder/Save Folder
The default open and save folders for File Group files.
Podcast – Open Folder/Save Folder
The default open and save folders for podcast files.
Project – Open Folder/Save Folder
The default open and save folders for project files.
Script (Audio File/Audio Montage) – Open Folder/Save Folder
The default open and save folders for script files.
Depending on the selected item, different settings are available on the right side of the dialog.
Current Folder
In this field, the folder that is used as default is displayed. You can click the folder
button to the right to navigate to a folder, or to create a new folder.
Keep Last Used
Uses the last folder for saving or opening files of the selected type.
Change When Save Folder Changes/Change When Open Folder Changes
Updates the default open folder when you change the default save folder, and vice
versa. Activate this option for both the save folder and the open folder if you want a
specific file type to use the same folder for saving and for opening this type of file.
On Reopening the Application, Revert to This Folder
Activate this option to restore a specific folder each time you open WaveLab Pro. This
way, any changes to save/open folders are only temporary and are reset when you
restart WaveLab Pro.
Exporting to SoundCloud
SoundCloud is an online platform for uploading and sharing your audio recordings. You can
export an audio file from WaveLab Pro to your SoundCloud account.
If you do not have a SoundCloud account, visit www.soundcloud.com to register.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > Export.
2.
Click Export to SoundCloud.
3.
Once you have logged in to your SoundCloud account, the file upload starts.
AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK
After uploading the audio file, you can edit the privacy settings and add metadata in SoundCloud.
87
File Operations
Copying Audio Information to the Clipboard Copying Audio Information to the Clipboard
You can copy information about the name and location of the selected audio file, including any
selection information and cursor position. This information can be pasted into an external text
application.
This is useful if you need accurate file path/selection information when writing a script, for
example.
PROCEDURE
1.
Click the File tab.
2.
Click Info.
3.
Click Copy to Clipboard and select the information that you want to copy to the clipboard.
Setting the Focus on the Current File
If you are editing inside a floating window or a tool window and you want to switch the focus
back to a wave/montage window, you can use the Set Focus on Current File option.
PROCEDURE
●
In any window, press Ctrl/Cmd-F12, to set the focus on the wave/montage window.
88
Playback
This chapter describes the methods for controlling playback and transport functions.
Transport Bar
With this command bar you can control playback of an audio file or audio montage, navigate
between various positions in an audio file or audio montage, and open the Recording dialog.
The transport bar is available in the Audio Editor and in the Audio Montage window.
By default, the extended transport bar options are hidden.
●
To activate the extended transport bar, click Extend Transport Bar on the transport bar.
Presets
Allows you to save and apply presets.
Jog and Shuttle
Activates the Jog and Shuttle mode.
Playback Speed
Opens a menu where you can specify the playback speed.
Perform Pre-Roll/Perform Post-Roll
Activates pre-roll or post-roll for the commands Play from Anchor, Play until
Anchor, and Play Audio Range.
Right-click the button to select the pre-roll or post-roll length and to specify to which
commands you want to apply pre-roll/post-roll to. To edit the pre-roll/post-roll times,
select Edit Pre-Roll and Post-Roll Times.
Play Audio Range
Plays the selected audio range. Post-roll and pre-roll settings are taken into account.
Right-click the button to open a menu with related options and auto selection
modes.
●
If Auto Select Range is activated, the range is automatically selected
according to the editing actions.
●
If Auto Replay While Editing is activated, playback is automatically restarted
when you hold down the mouse button while editing ranges, and use the
shortcuts to trigger playback. This is useful to find a loop, for example.
This option works even if the automated selection mode is deactivated.
●
If Solo Track When Editing is activated and you keep the mouse button
pressed when editing ranges in the montage window, the track is soloed
when you start playback using the shortcuts for Play Audio Range, Play
from Anchor, or Play until Anchor. This option is only available in the Audio
Montage window.
89
Playback
Transport Bar You can select different audio ranges for playback:
●
Time Selection
●
Region between Marker Pairs
●
Clip (audio montage only)
●
Crossfade (audio montage only)
●
Fade In (audio montage only)
●
Fade Out (audio montage only)
Play until Anchor/Play from Anchor
Plays until or from anchor. Pre-roll and post-roll settings are taken into account.
Right-click the button to open a menu with related options and auto selection
modes.
●
If Auto Select Anchor is activated, the anchor is automatically selected
according to the editing actions.
●
If Auto Replay While Editing is activated, playback is automatically restarted
when you hold down the mouse button while editing anchors, and use the
shortcuts to trigger playback. This is useful to find a loop, for example.
This option works even when the automated selection mode is deactivated.
●
If Solo Track When Editing is activated and you keep the mouse button
pressed when editing anchors in the montage window, the track is soloed
when you start playback using the shortcuts for Play Audio Range, Play
from Anchor, or Play until Anchor. This option is only available in the Audio
Montage window.
You can select which anchor to use as reference for the commands Play from
Anchor and Play until Anchor. When there are multiple possibilities, for example,
multiple markers, the last selected item is used as a reference anchor or, if no item
was selected, the closest item near the edit cursor position is used.
You can select one of the following anchors:
●
Edit Cursor
●
Start of File
●
Start of Selected Time Range
●
End of Selected Time Range
●
Any Marker
●
Region Start Marker
●
Region End Marker
●
Clip Start (audio montage only)
●
Clip End (audio montage only)
●
Selected Envelope Point in Active Clip (audio montage only)
When an anchor is detected, for example, a region marker pair, this is indicated by a
green anchor marker.
Move Cursor to Start of File/Move Cursor to End of File
Moves the edit cursor to the start/end of the file.
90
Playback
Transport Bar Move Playback Position Backwards/Move Playback Position Forwards
Moves the edit cursor position to the left/right. If you click during playback, playback
jumps to the new edit cursor position.
To move the edit cursor to the start/end of the file, press Ctrl/Cmd, and click the
Move Playback Position Backwards/Move Playback Position Forwards buttons.
Navigation anchors allow you to move the edit cursor to specific positions in the
audio file or audio montage. Right-click the Move Playback Position Backwards/
Move Playback Position Forwards buttons to open the Navigation Anchors
pop-up menu. Here, you can set the type of navigation anchor. If you click during
playback, playback continues from the anchor position.
Loop
Activates the loop mode. Right-click the loop button to select whether to loop
continuously or only a few times.
Stop Playback
Stops playback. If playback is already stopped, the edit cursor is moved to the
previous start position. Right-click the button to open the Move Cursor Back to
Start Position pop-up menu.
●
If After Standard Playback is activated, the edit cursor jumps back to the
start position when regular playback stops.
●
If After Automated Playback is activated, the edit cursor jumps back to the
start position when playback stops after the Play from Anchor, Play until
Anchor, or Play Audio Range options.
Start Playback from Edit Cursor
Starts playing back the active audio file or audio montage from the edit cursor
position. This option can also be used to play back other sources, for example, the
selected Basic Audio CD track or the active clip in the Clips window.
If the audio being played back is not the active audio file, the Play button has a
different color. This happens if you switch to another file window during playback,
for example.
The playback button when playing back in the active window (left) and when playing
in another window (right).
You can also start playback from the last stop position. Right-click the button to open
the Lead Sequence pop-up menu.
●
If you select Start, playback starts from the cursor position.
●
If you select Resume from Last Interruption, playback starts from the last
stop position.
Record
Opens the Recording dialog.
Time Display
Displays the edit cursor or playback position. Click to select another time unit.
Transport Bar in the Podcast Editor and Batch Processor Window
In the Podcast Editor and Batch Processor window, a simplified transport bar allows you to play
back the selected podcast episode and selected batch process source files and destination files.
91
Playback
Transport Bar Play Button
Clicking the Play button on the transport bar starts playing back the active audio file or audio
montage from the edit cursor position. It can also be used to play back other sources, for
example, the selected Basic Audio CD track or the active clip in the Clips window.
You can also use the Space bar or the Enter key on your keyboard to start playback. Pressing
Space during playback stops playback, pressing Enter during playback makes playback restart
from the last start position.
If the Loop button is activated, the audio selection is looped, if available. Otherwise, the region
defined by loop markers is looped. If there are no selection ranges or loop markers, the entire
file is looped.
The standard play command is not influenced by the Play Audio Range, Play from Anchor, and
Play until Anchor options.
Stop Button
The result of clicking the Stop button or on the transport bar or 0 on your numeric keypad
depends on the current situation.
●
If you trigger Stop in stop mode, the edit cursor moves either to the previous playback
start marker, or to the selection start (whatever is closer), until the start of the file is
reached.
●
If there is no selection or if the edit cursor is positioned to the left of the selection, it is
moved to the beginning of the file instead.
Playing Back Audio Ranges
You can play back audio ranges using the Play Audio Range options on the transport bar.
PROCEDURE
1.
On the transport bar, right-click Play Audio Range and select the range type that you want
to play back.
2.
Optional: Activate Perform Pre-Roll and/or Perform Post-Roll.
3.
Position the edit cursor inside the range that you want to play back or make a selection
range.
This selected range and, if activated, the pre-roll and post-roll times are displayed on the
time ruler.
4.
To play back the selected range, click Play Audio Range on the transport bar or press F6.
RESULT
The selected range is played back. Pre-roll and post-roll settings are taken into account. If the
Loop mode is active, pre-roll is used before the first loop only, and post-roll is only used after the
last loop.
92
Playback
Transport Bar Playing Back From an Anchor or Until an Anchor
You can play back audio from an anchor or until a specified anchor using the Play from Anchor
or Play until Anchor options on the transport bar.
PROCEDURE
1.
On the transport bar, right-click Play from Anchor or Play until Anchor, and select an
anchor type.
2.
Depending on the selected anchor type, position the edit cursor in the wave window or
montage window inside the range that you want to play back.
For example, if you have selected Region Start Marker, click somewhere in the area of the
region marker pair from which you want to play back from/to. The green anchor marker
jumps to the selected anchor.
3.
Optional: Activate Perform Pre-Roll and/or Perform Post-Roll.
4.
To play back from the anchor marker, click the Play From Anchor button on the transport
bar or press F7. To play back until the anchor marker, click the Play Until Anchor button
on the transport bar or press F8.
RESULT
Playback starts from the anchor or stops at the anchor. Pre-roll and post-roll settings are taken
into account.
“Play From Anchor” and “Play Until Anchor” Functions
You can play back audio from an anchor or until an anchor using the Play from Anchor or
Play until Anchor functions on the transport bar. These playback functions behave differently
depending on the pre-roll and post-roll settings.
Play from Anchor
●
If post-roll is activated, playback starts at the anchor position and stops after
the post-roll time. If no post-roll is selected, playback continues until the end
of the audio file or audio montage.
●
If pre-roll is activated, playback starts from the selected anchor, minus the preroll time.
●
If pre-roll and post-roll are activated, playback starts from the selected anchor,
minus the pre-roll time and stops after the anchor point plus the post roll time.
●
If the loop mode is activated, the pre-roll and post-roll settings are taken into
account. This way you can play a loop around the edit cursor position, without
having to make further range settings.
Play until Anchor
●
Playback starts from the cursor, and stops at the selected anchor. If the cursor
is beyond the selected anchor, playback starts at the selected anchor. If preroll is activated, it is taken into account.
●
If pre-roll is activated, playback starts from the selected anchor minus the preroll time, until the selected anchor.
●
If no anchor is selected, Play until Anchor is deactivated.
●
The loop settings have no effect.
93
Playback
Transport Bar Using the Auto Selection Mode
You can use the auto selection mode in combination with the playback shortcuts to play back
audio ranges or anchors. This makes it easy to monitor your editing actions.
PROCEDURE
1.
On the transport bar, right-click the Play From Anchor or Play Until Anchor button and
activate Auto Select Anchor.
2.
Right-click the Play Audio Range button and activate Auto Select Range.
3.
In the wave window or the montage window, do one of the following:
●
Make a selection range.
●
Click inside the area of a marker pair.
●
Click a fade in, fade out, or crossfade.
●
Click anywhere in the wave/montage window.
●
Drag a marker.
Depending on your action, the most appropriate range, or anchor, is selected. For
example, if you click inside a marker pair, this region is selected as playback range.
The time ruler shows the selected range or anchor.
NOTE
In Auto Select Anchor and Auto Select Range mode, you can still change some range
and anchor options on the transport bar to play a different range/anchor. However, the
range/anchor are reselected when you start editing again with the mouse.
4.
Use the playback shortcuts to start playback.
●
To play back the selected audio range, press F6.
●
To play back from an anchor, press F7.
●
To play back until an anchor, press F8.
RESULT
The selection range is played back, or play back starts from the anchor or stops at the anchor.
Pre-roll and post-roll settings are taken into account.
NOTE
A selection range has priority over any other range. To allow other ranges to be auto-selected,
deselect the selection range.
Using Auto Replay While Editing
You can automatically re-trigger playback while editing audio with the mouse. This is useful if you
want to monitor the adjustment of a selection boundary, for example.
PROCEDURE
1.
On the transport bar, right-click the Play From Anchor or Play Until Anchor button and
activate Auto Replay While Editing.
2.
In the wave window or the montage window, make a selection range and keep the mouse
button pressed.
3.
Start playback by using one of the following shortcuts:
●
To play back the selected audio range, press F6.
●
To play back from an anchor, press F7.
94
Playback
Transport Bar ●
4.
To play back until an anchor, press F8.
Drag the cursor to the right or left.
The selection range is adjusted and played back until you release the mouse button. When
playback ends, the new selection range is played back.
Skipping Sections During Playback
You can automatically skip a selected audio range during playback. This way, you can audition
what the material would sound like without specific sections.
PROCEDURE
1.
On the transport bar, activate Skip Range.
2.
Activate Perform Pre-Roll and Perform Post-Roll.
3.
If you want to use the Play Audio Range function, activate one of the Ranges modes.
4.
Depending on the Ranges mode, do one of the following:
●
If you have activated Time Selection, make an audio selection in the wave window.
●
If you have activated Region Between Marker Pairs, click between a marker pair.
The audio range that will be skipped is displayed on the time ruler along with the pre-roll
and post-roll times.
5.
Select Play Audio Range, or press F6.
RESULT
The selected range is skipped during playback.
You can also use the factory preset for skipping selections during playback. Activate Skip Range,
make an audio selection, and press Shift-F6.
NOTE
This mode also works with the Start Playback from Edit Cursor button if there is a time
selection or if exclusion start and end markers are set. In this case, the pre-roll and post-roll
times are ignored.
Loop Playback
Loop points are updated continuously during playback. If you change the loop start or end
during playback, the loop changes. This way, you can audition selection points for rhythmic
material.
If you loop a section in an audio montage, playback loops within the boundaries of the current
selection range. This selection range may be on any track, even if it is empty. The vertical position
of the selection range is of no relevance for loop playback, only the left and right selection
boundaries matter.
95
Playback
Transport Bar Pre-Roll and Post-Roll
You can start playback slightly before a specific position (pre-roll) and stop playback slightly
after another position (post-roll). This gives you a brief context if you are auditioning a clip, for
example.
The position can be an anchor or the start or end of a range. The pre-roll and post-roll times are
displayed in the time ruler.
To activate pre-roll and/or post-roll, activate Perform Post-Roll and Perform Pre-Roll on the
transport bar.
When right-clicking the pre-roll or post-roll button on the transport bar, you can select a pre-roll/
post-roll time. Here, you can also select a play option for the pre-roll/post-roll, and you can open
the Pre-Roll and Post-Roll Times dialog.
Pre-Roll and Post-Roll Times Dialog
This dialog allows you to define a short, an average, and a long pre-roll and post-roll time. These
settings are global to WaveLab Pro.
●
To open the Pre-Roll and Post-Roll Times dialog, right-click the pre-roll or post-roll button
on the transport bar, and select Edit Pre-Roll and Post-Roll Times.
Playback Speed Dialog
This dialog allows you to specify the playback speed of the active audio file and all clips of the
active audio montage.
●
To open the Playback Speed dialog, right-click Playback Speed on the transport bar, and
select Edit Playback Speed.
96
Playback
Transport Bar Presets
You can enter a name to save the settings as a preset and select them from the
Playback Speed pop-up menu later.
Speed Factor
Sets the playback speed as a percentage of the normal speed.
Time Stretching
Compared to the speed coefficient, this is the inverse, a deceleration coefficient. This
value is equivalent to the percentage found in the Time Stretching dialog.
Keep Constant Pitch (Pure Time Stretching)
Indicates the time stretching.
Quality
Allows you to select a quality. The Best and High quality modes provide the highest
quality, but are also the most CPU intensive. In most cases, the Standard quality is
sufficient.
Acceleration by Skipping Low Level Regions
If this option is activated, regions of the audio that are below the threshold level are
skipped during playback.
Level Detection Sensitivity
Determines the sensitivity of the level detection analysis.
Level under Which Audio Is Skipped
Determines the threshold level for a region to be skipped during playback.
Bypass Effects and Master Section
If this option is activated, all active effects in the audio montage and all global effects
in the Master Section are bypassed. This saves processing power and usually the
plug-ins are not needed trying to locate audio material.
Bypass Audio Meters
If this option is activated, all meters are bypassed to save processing power.
NOTE
Changing the playback speed does not change the original audio, but only the playback speed in
WaveLab Pro.
97
Playback
Transport Bar Playback Shortcuts
In addition to the buttons on the transport bar, there are shortcuts to control the playback.
Space bar
Start/Stop playback. This shortcut can be used even when the wave window or
montage window is not the active window.
0 on numeric keypad
Stops playback. If the playback is stopped and you press this shortcut, the edit
cursor moves either to the previous playback start marker, or to the selection start
(whatever is closer), until the start of the file is reached. This is the same as clicking
Stop on the transport bar. This shortcut can be used even if the wave window or
montage window is not the active window.
Enter
Starts playback. If pressed during playback, playback restarts from the previous
start position. This is the same as clicking Start Playback from Edit Cursor on the
transport bar.
Alt-Space
Starts playback from the mouse cursor position.
F6
Starts playback of the selected range, depending on the selected option in the
Ranges section of the transport bar.
F7
Starts playback from the selected anchor, depending on the selected option in the
Anchors section of the transport bar.
F8
Starts playback until the selected anchor, depending on the selected option in the
Anchors section of the transport bar.
Save Transport Bar Preset Dialog
In this dialog, you can save a transport bar setup as preset.
●
To open the Save Transport Bar Preset dialog, click the Presets field on the transport bar,
and select Save As.
98
Playback
Transport Bar Path
Opens the root folder of the preset in the File Explorer/macOS Finder. Here, you can
create subfolders for your presets.
Presets list
Lists all existing presets.
Name
Lets you specify a name for your preset.
Create Shortcut for Selecting the Preset
If this option is activated and you click Save, the Shortcut Definitions dialog opens,
where you can define a shortcut for this preset.
If a preset already has an assigned shortcut, this option is grayed out. To change the
existing shortcut, double-click the preset name in the presets list.
When a Preset Is Selected
This lets you assign a customized playback command to a shortcut. For example, you
can set a shortcut to play a range with a short pre-roll/post-roll, and another shortcut
to play a range without a pre-roll/post-roll.
When Playback Stops, Restore Previous Transport Settings
If this option is activated, the settings are restored to as they were before playback
start. This is useful to trigger a special play task, and automatically switch back to the
standard settings as soon as playback is finished.
Changing the Position of the Transport Bar
You can position the transport bar at the top, middle, or bottom of the file window.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the title bar of the Audio Editor or Audio Montage window, click Layout Options
2.
In the Transport Bar section, select whether to position the transport bar at the Top,
Middle, or Bottom.
99
.
Playback
Starting Playback From the Ruler Hiding the Transport Bar
PROCEDURE
1.
In the title bar of the Audio Editor or Audio Montage window, click Layout Options.
2.
In the Transport Bar section, select Hidden.
Starting Playback From the Ruler
You can use the ruler to jump to a position and start playback from there.
●
Double-clicking the ruler starts playback from that position. Playback continues until you
click Stop Playback or until the end of the audio file or audio montage.
●
To set the playback position to a specific position, click the ruler during playback. This also
applies for clicking the time rulers of another audio file or audio montage, which allows
you to quickly switch playback between audio files or audio montages.
●
To start playback from a marker position, press Ctrl/Cmd and double-click the marker.
Using the Play Tool
This tool allows you to play back from any position on one or both stereo channels.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Editor, select the Edit tab.
2.
In the Tools section, select the Play tool, or press and hold Alt.
3.
In the wave window, click at the position where you want playback to start.
The cursor shape indicates whether the left (L) or the right (R) channel is played back. If
mid/side mode is activated, the cursor shape indicates whether the mid (M) or the side (S)
channel is played back. Using the Play tool in the middle of the channels plays back both
channels.
RESULT
Playback continues for as long as you keep the mouse button pressed, or until the audio file
ends. After playback has stopped, the cursor is moved to the playback start position.
RELATED LINKS
Mid and Side Editing on page 144
Playback Scrubbing
Playback scrubbing helps you find a specific position in an audio file, by restarting playback
repeatedly when you click and drag on the time ruler during playback or when using the Play
tool.
Scrubbing Using the Play Tool
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Editor, select the Edit tab.
2.
In the Tools section, select the Play tool, or press and hold Alt.
3.
Click in the wave window.
100
Playback
Timecode Window Playback starts at the position where you clicked.
RELATED LINKS
Playback Scrubbing Preferences on page 101
Scrubbing Using the Time Ruler
PROCEDURE
1.
Start playback.
2.
Click the time ruler and hold the mouse button pressed, and drag left or right.
3.
When you are done scrubbing, release the mouse button.
The audio is played back from the edit cursor position and a small section is looped once.
Playback Scrubbing Preferences
You can define the behavior of the Play tool in the Audio Files Preferences.
Select File > Preferences > Audio Files. The following options are available in the Playback
Scrubbing section.
●
If Restrict to Play Tool is activated, scrubbing is not available when you click and drag on
the time ruler during playback.
●
The Sensitivity setting determines the length of the audio loop that is played once when
click and drag on the time ruler with the Play tool.
Timecode Window
This window can display the recorded time, the time offset in relation to various positions, and
dynamic colors according to the context. During playback, the song position is displayed. If
nothing is played back, the edit cursor position is displayed.
●
To open the Timecode window, select Meters > Timecode.
View Menu
Edit Colors
Opens the Timecode Colors dialog, where you can edit the colors of the Timecode
window.
101
Playback
Jog/Shuttle Function Reduced Precision
If this option is activated, the timecode display show less digits.
Positive Times
If this option is activated, positive values are displayed. If Negative Times is also
activated, the closest offset, negative or positive, is displayed.
Negative Times
If this option is activated, negative values are displayed. If Positive Times is also
activated, the closest offset, negative or positive, is displayed.
File Start/File End
Displays the position in relation to the origin of the time ruler. The time format is
displayed according to the ruler.
Offset Display
Lets you select from which position you want to display the offset. The following
positions are available: edit cursor, selection start/end, marker, CD track start/end,
clip start/end.
Recorded Time
If this option is activated, the Timecode window displays the recorded time when
you start recording.
Recorded Time (from Last Marker)
If this option is activated, the Timecode window displays the recorded time since the
last dropped marker when you start recording.
Jog/Shuttle Function
This function allows you to play back audio forwards or backwards, at any speed. This is useful
for finding exact spots in the audio file and audio montage.
NOTE
The Jog and Shuttle functions are CPU intensive. If you experience playback problems, try
reducing the window size.
Using the Jog Function
This can be viewed as dragging the audio past a playback point, much like dragging a reel-to-reel
tape past the playback head.
PROCEDURE
1.
Zoom in on the wave window or the montage window, so that you get a good visual
feedback.
2.
On the transport bar, activate Jog and Shuttle.
102
Playback
Scroll During Playback A vertical line is shown in the middle of the wave/montage window. This is the playback
point.
3.
Click in the area above the time ruler and drag to the left or right, to play back the audio.
Dragging to the left of the line plays the audio forwards, dragging to the right plays the
audio backwards.
Using the Shuttle Function
This can be viewed as playing back with a continuous control for tape speed and direction.
PROCEDURE
1.
Zoom in on the wave window or the montage window, so that you get a good visual
feedback.
2.
On the transport bar, activate Jog and Shuttle.
A vertical line is shown in the middle of the wave/montage window. This is the playback
point.
3.
Click in the wave/montage window and drag to the left or right of the vertical line.
Clicking to the left of the line plays the audio backwards, clicking to the right plays the
audio forwards.
The playback speed is determined by the distance from the line to the pointer. The further
away from the line you move the pointer, the faster the playback.
4.
Release the mouse button to stop playback.
5.
Deactivate Jog and Shuttle on the transport bar.
Scroll During Playback
You can determine how the view should be scrolled in Play mode.
●
To set the scroll mode, open the Audio Editor or the Audio Montage window, select the
View tab, and activate one of the options in the Playback section.
Static View
Disables scrolling.
View Follows Cursor
The view automatically scrolls to keep the playback cursor visible.
Scroll View
Scrolls the view to keep the playback cursor centered.
NOTE
If you get dropouts during playback, activate Static View.
103
Playback
Playback in the Audio Montage Window Playback in the Audio Montage Window
Playback in the Audio Montage window works the same way as in the Audio Editor. However,
there are some things to note.
Mute and Solo Tracks
You can mute or solo tracks in an audio montage by using the corresponding buttons in the track
control area.
●
When a track is muted, the mute button is yellow.
●
When a track is soloed, the solo button is red.
●
Solo can only be activated for one track at a time. However, you can unmute other tracks
when Solo is active if you want to listen to a combination of tracks.
RELATED LINKS
Track Control Area on page 194
Muting Individual Clips
PROCEDURE
1.
Select Tool Windows > Clips.
2.
Select the clips that you want to mute, and select Functions > Mute/Unmute Selected
Clips, or check the box in the Mute column.
Playing Back Individual Clips
You can play back an individual clip on a track. Overlapping clips or clips on other tracks are
muted.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, right-click the lower part of the clip that you want to play back.
2.
On the menu, select one of the following play options:
●
To play back the clip, select Play Clip.
●
To play back the clip with pre-roll, select Play Clip with Pre-Roll.
Playing Back a Selection Range of a Track
You can select a section of a clip and play it back. Overlapping clips or clips on other tracks are
muted.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, make a selection range, either in a clip or in an empty section of a
track.
2.
Right-click the selection range, and select Play Clip Inside Selection Range.
104
Playback
Speaker Configuration Speaker Configuration
You can configure up to 8 speaker setups to switch between different audio speaker
configuration without latency. This allows you to compare the sound on different speaker setups.
After setting up the speaker configurations in the VST Audio Connections tab, the
configurations can be selected from the bottom of the Master Section.
The switching between different setups is done at the lowest level, right before sending the
audio to the hardware, and without any plug-in processing.
A gain can be set individually for each configuration.
●
The speaker gain is not taken into account by the meters. This means that the signal could
clip even if the meters do not indicate clipping.
●
The speaker gain has no effect on file rendering or CD writing.
●
Because a gain affects samples, any dither settings are reset when changing the gain. This
has an effect when monitoring quiet music passages.
The speaker configuration #1 is active on startup and should remain the default configuration,
without a gain change.
The gain settings are saved with the active configuration. To save the gain settings of the
speaker configurations as a preset, open the VST Audio Connections tab, and save the speaker
configurations as a preset.
RELATED LINKS
Speaker Configuration Pane on page 349
Audio Connections Tab on page 11
Speaker Configuration LED Colors
The speaker configuration LEDs indicate if gain is applied to the audio. The LED is located in the
Speaker Configuration pane at the bottom of the Master Section.
Dark green
No gain is applied and dithering is preserved.
Red
Positive gain is applied, dithering is canceled, and there is a risk of clipping.
Orange
Negative gain is applied without the risk of clipping, but dithering is canceled.
RELATED LINKS
Master Section on page 331
Setting Up the Speaker Configuration
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > Preferences > Audio Connections.
2.
In the Audio Connections tab, select an Audio Device.
3.
On the Playback tab, select the speaker configuration that you want to edit.
4.
Select and name the audio ports used for playback.
105
Playback
Speaker Configuration 5.
On the Recording tab, select the speaker configuration that you want to edit.
6.
Select and name the audio ports used for recording and input monitoring.
NOTE
The input selection is not affected by the speaker configuration.
106
Audio File Editing
Audio file editing refers to opening, editing, and saving audio files.
Wave Window
The wave window displays audio files graphically. Here, you view, play back, and edit individual
audio files.
The wave window consists of two displays. You can use one display as an overview to navigate
through the project and the other as the main view for editing.
You can select different display modes for the two displays. For example, one display can show
the waveform and the other the loudness.
107
Audio File Editing
Wave Window You can synchronize the waveform displays so that they display the same part of the audio file,
by clicking Sync with Other View.
Display Modes
In the wave window, the upper and the lower displays can independently be set to one of three
display modes.
●
The Waveform tab displays the waveform of the audio file.
●
The Spectrum tab displays the audio as a spectrogram.
●
The Loudness tab displays the loudness graphs of the audio file.
108
Audio File Editing
Wave Window Waveform Display
The Waveform display displays the waveform of the audio file. The horizontal axis shows the
time and the vertical axis the amplitude.
RELATED LINKS
Audio Files Preferences on page 572
Spectrogram
The Spectrogram allows you to view the level intensity of each area in the frequency spectrum.
You can use the WaveLab Pro spectrum editing tools to edit the spectrogram.
The Spectrum tab in conjunction with the Spectrogram is a unique editing and restoration tool.
RELATED LINKS
Spectral Editing on page 438
109
Audio File Editing
Wave Window Wavelet Display
The Wavelet display shows a higher time resolution in high frequencies and a higher frequency
resolution in lower frequencies. You can use the WaveLab Pro spectrum editing tools to edit the
spectrogram.
The Wavelet tab in conjunction with the Spectrogram is a unique editing and restoration tool.
RELATED LINKS
Spectral Editing on page 438
Loudness Display
The curves on the Loudness display represent the loudness over time in an audio file.
Because isolated peaks do not alter the perceived loudness of audio material very much, this
display represents the loudness of an audio file more accurately than the waveform display.
This display mode also gives you an overview of the compression or dynamic range of an audio
file. For example, the more peaks and valley expressions in the curve, the more dynamics in the
audio. An even curve with few peaks indicates that the material is compressed with a limited
dynamic range.
RELATED LINKS
EBU Loudness Standard R-128 on page 36
110
Audio File Editing
Wave Window Loudness Envelope Curves
The loudness envelope curves represent the average loudness of the signal in different areas of
the frequency spectrum. These curves are shown in the Loudness display of the wave window.
The following loudness curves are available:
1
Momentary loudness (100 ms resolution)
2
Short-term loudness (1 sec resolution)
3
Integrated loudness (loudness of the entire file)
4
Loudness range
5
True peak hints
The curves can be shown individually or in any combination. Which curves are displayed and
what frequency area they represent is specified in the Loudness Display Settings dialog.
NOTE
The resolution is 100 ms, which means the momentary loudness information is collected every
100 ms and the short-term loudness every second to match the EBU standard. This is the same
for true peaks. A clipping indicator is displayed when a 400 ms audio region contains one or
more over peaks.
RELATED LINKS
Loudness Display Settings Dialog on page 111
Loudness Display Settings Dialog
In this dialog, you can specify how the loudness waveform is displayed.
●
To open the Loudness Display Settings dialog, select the Loudness tab in the Audio
Editor, and click Edit Settings.
111
Audio File Editing
Wave Window Momentary Loudness/Short-Term Loudness
Color
Lets you edit the color of the associated element.
Curve Thickness
Lets you customize the curve thickness. If Auto Curve Thickness is selected, the
curve thickness increases when zooming in.
Show Range
If this option is activated, the dynamic range is visualized. This displays the difference
between the recent minimum and maximum loudness values. The wider the band,
the wider the dynamics.
Range Transparency
Lets you specify the transparency of the range section.
Range Inertia
Determines the inertia of the loudness range, that is, how fast the range edges meet
each other after a new minimum or maximum loudness is reported.
Integrated Loudness/Loudness Range/True Peaks
Color
Lets you edit the color of the associated element.
Curve Thickness
Lets you customize the curve thickness. If Auto Thickness is selected, the curve
thickness increases when zooming in.
Only Show Hot Points (True Peaks section only)
If this option is activated, the curve is hidden and only the peak overloads are
displayed as red bullets.
112
Audio File Editing
Wave Window Axes
Upper/Reference/Lower
Lets you activate several axes, and edit their color and position in the loudness tab to
get a visual reference.
Additional Color Settings
Background/Selected Background
Lets you edit the color of the associated element.
Additional Options
Curve Smoothing
If this option is activated, the transitions between the loudness measurements are
smoothly drawn. This is less accurate when abrupt changes occur.
Apply to All Open Files
If this option is activated, the settings are applied to all open audio files when you
click OK.
Magnetic Bounds in Audio Files
Some positions, such as markers or selection edges, can be defined as magnetic. Dragged
elements can snap to these positions. This makes it easier to position items accurately.
For example, if you move a marker and it gets close to one of the magnetic bounds, the marker
snaps to this position. A label is displayed, indicating the snap position.
To place the cursor at a magnetic position, click the time line and keep the mouse button
pressed. When you now move the cursor, it jumps to the next magnetic bound.
Magnets Menu
On this pop-up menu, you can specify which positions should be magnetic. If Snap to Magnets is
activated, items that you move snap to these positions.
●
To open the Magnets pop-up menu, select the Edit tab in the Audio Editor, and click
Magnets in the Snapping section.
You can let items snap to the following positions:
Start of File/End of File
Elements snap to the start/end of the file when they are moved near these positions.
Time Ruler Marks
Elements snap to the time ruler grid when they are moved near these positions.
Markers
Elements snap to marker positions when they are moved near these positions.
Selection Edges
Elements snap to the selection edges when they are moved near these positions.
113
Audio File Editing
Wave Window Cursor
Elements snap to the edit cursor when they are moved near the cursor.
Zero Crossing
A zero crossing is a point where the waveform crosses the zero level axis. When you perform
editing operations, such as cutting, pasting, or dragging, make sure that the material is inserted
at a zero crossing.
If you do not perform these operations at zero crossings, this can result in discontinuities in the
wave, which are perceived as clicks or pops in the sound.
Activate Zero-Crossing on the Edit tab of the Audio Editor to make sure that the selections that
you make are always adjusted so that they start and end at the nearest zero crossing.
Setting Up the Zero Crossing Detection
You can let selection edges automatically snap to the nearest zero crossing point. In the Audio
Files Preferences dialog, you can specify whether to allow snap at high zoom factors, and
specify the scan range for the zero crossing detection.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Editor, select the Edit tab.
2.
In the Snapping section, activate Zero-Crossing.
3.
Select File > Preferences > Audio Files.
4.
In the Audio Files Preferences tab, select the Editing tab.
5.
Make your settings in the Snap Selection to Zero-Crossing section.
6.
Click OK.
Moving the Cursor Position to the Closest Zero Crossing
You can automatically move the cursor position to the closest zero crossing.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Editor, select the View tab.
2.
In the Cursor section, click Snap to Zero-Crossing.
114
Audio File Editing
Audio Editor Tabs Audio Editor Tabs
The tabs in the Audio Editor give you access to the tools and options you need to edit audio files.
View Tab
Navigate
Backwards/Forwards
Navigates to the previous/next cursor position, zoom factor, and selection range.
Zoom
Time
Opens a pop-up menu that allows you to adjust the zoom to display the selected time
range. Zoom in 1:1 zooms in so that one pixel on the screen represents one sample.
To edit the zoom factor, click Edit Zoom Factor. This opens the Zoom Factor dialog,
where you can edit the following settings:
●
Set Time Range allows you to specify the time range that you want to display.
●
Samples per Screen Point allows you to specify how many audio samples are
summarized in each screen point.
●
Screen Points per Sample allows you to specify how many screen points are
used to represent a single audio sample.
Zoom
Activates the Zoom tool that allows you to define a time range that is zoomed in.
Zoom Selection
Zooms the window so that the current selection occupies the entire montage
window.
Microscope
Zooms in as far as possible.
Zoom in Audio (10x)/Zoom out Audio (10x)
Zooms in/out in big steps.
View All
Zooms out as far as possible.
Zoom in Audio/Zoom out Audio
Zooms in/out in small steps.
Level
Adjusts the zoom to only display samples below the selected dB value.
Optimize Vertical Zoom
Changes the vertical zoom factor so that the peaks are clearly visible. This
adjustment is done according to the section of the wave that is visible in the wave/
montage window.
115
Audio File Editing
Audio Editor Tabs Reset Zoom to 0 dB
Adjusts the zoom to display audio levels up to 0 dB.
Zoom in Vertically/Zoom out Vertically
Zooms in/out to show waveforms with a lower/higher level.
Cursor
Move Cursor to Start of File/Move Cursor to End of File
Moves the cursor to the start/end of the file.
Previous Marker/Next Marker
Moves the cursor to the previous/next marker.
Start of Selection/End of Selection
Moves the cursor to the start/end of the selected time range.
Previous Region Edge/Next Region Edge
Moves the cursor to the previous/next region edge.
Snap to Zero-Crossing
Moves the edit cursor to the nearest zero crossing point.
Edit Cursor Position
Opens the Cursor Position dialog where you can edit the cursor position.
Scroll
Start/End
Displays the start/end of the audio without moving the cursor.
Start of Selection/End of Selection
Displays the start/end of the audio selection without moving the cursor.
Cursor
Displays the cursor position.
Playback
Static View
Deactivates scrolling.
View Follows Cursor
Automatically scrolls the view to keep the playback cursor visible.
Scroll View
Scrolls the view to keep the playback cursor centered.
Snapshots
Allows you to take, recall, and edit snapshots.
Presets
The buttons 1, 2, and 3 allow you to save a snapshot of the scroll position, zoom
factor, cursor position, and audio selection. The rightmost preset button is a global
preset that is available for all audio montages.
Options
Allows you to select which settings are restored when applying a snapshot preset.
The following options are available:
116
Audio File Editing
Audio Editor Tabs ●
Scroll Position and Zoom
●
Cursor Position
●
Audio Selection
Peaks
Rebuild Peak Display
Normally, peak files are automatically updated when the date of the peak file is older
than the date of the audio file. However, it can happen that the date of the audio
file is wrong and therefore not automatically updated. In this option allows you to
rebuild the peak file.
Edit Tab
Tools
Time Selection
Tool that allows you to select a time range.
Pen
Tool that allows you to redraw the waveform in the wave window. This can be used
to quickly repair waveform errors.
Play
Tool that allows you to play back the audio file at the position where you click.
Time Selection
Range
Opens the Audio Range dialog, where you can define selection ranges very
accurately.
Extend
This pop-up menu contains various options for creating or extending selection
ranges.
Toggle
Toggles the current audio selection.
All
Selects the entire waveform.
Channels
This pop-up menu allows you to change the channel selection.
●
Extend to All Channels extends the current selection range to all channels.
●
Left Channel Only reduces the current selection range to the left channel
only.
●
Right Channel Only reduces the current selection range to the right channel
only.
117
Audio File Editing
Audio Editor Tabs Regions
This pop-up menu allows you to select a range between two markers.
●
CD Track selects the range between the two CD track markers that encompass
the edit cursor.
●
Loop Region selects the range between the two loop markers that encompass
the edit cursor.
●
Exclusion Region selects the range between the two exclusion markers that
encompass the edit cursor.
●
Generic Region selects the range between the two generic markers that
encompass the edit cursor.
Clipboard
Cut
Cuts the active clip to the clipboard.
Copy
Copies the active clip to the clipboard.
Right-click Copy to open a pop-up menu with additional options:
●
Memorize Cursor Position copies the position of the edit cursor to the
clipboard.
●
Memorize Selection Length copies the length of the active selection range to
the clipboard.
Paste
Pastes the clipboard content.
Right-click Paste to open a pop-up menu that allows you to select a paste type.
●
Overwrite replaces the audio at the paste position.
●
Append adds the pasted audio after the end of the file.
●
Prepend adds the pasted audio before the beginning of the file.
●
Multiple Copies opens a dialog in which you can enter the number of copies
that you want to create.
●
Mix blends two files into each other, starting at the selection or, if there is no
selection, at the cursor position.
If you select Mix, a dialog opens, allowing you to specify the gain and phase
for the audio on the clipboard and at the destination. The clipboard data is
always mixed in, regardless of the length of the selection.
Paste and Crossfade
Pastes the clipboard content and creates a crossfade.
Right-click Paste and Crossfade to open a pop-up menu that allows you to select a
crossfade type for pasting.
●
Linear (Equal Gain) changes the level linearly.
●
Sinus (Equal Power) changes the level according to a sine curve, the power of
the mix remains constant.
●
Square-Root (Equal Power) changes the level according to a square-root
curve, the power of the mix remains constant.
Cutting
Crop
Deletes the data outside the selection.
118
Audio File Editing
Audio Editor Tabs Delete
Deletes the selection. The audio to the right of the selection is moved to the left to fill
the gap.
Smooth Delete
Deletes the selection and inserts crossfades at the edges. You can edit the default
length and type for the crossfade in the Audio Files Preferences, on the Editing tab.
Swap Stereo Channels
Moves the audio in the left channel to the right channel, and vice versa.
Nudge
Nudge Left
Nudges the audio selection to the left.
Nudge Right
Nudges the audio selection to the right.
Snapping
Zero-Crossing
If this option is activated, the start and the end of a selected range always snap to a
zero-crossing point of the waveform.
Snap to Magnets
If this option is activated, moved elements such as clip edges, time selection edges,
cursor, and markers snap to the magnets that are activated on the Magnets pop-up
menu.
Insert Tab
Markers
Marker Name
Allows you to enter the name of the start and end marker. If nothing is entered, a
generic name is used.
To edit the default names, open the Markers window, and select Functions >
Default Marker Names.
Different Name for End Marker
If this option is activated, you can enter a different name for the end marker.
If this option is deactivated, the name of the start marker is also used for the end
marker.
Create Marker
Allows you to create different types of markers and marker pairs at the edit cursor
position or at the selection range.
119
Audio File Editing
Audio Editor Tabs Audio File
At Start
Allows you to insert an audio file at the start of the active audio file.
At End
Allows you to insert an audio file at the end of the active audio file.
At Cursor
Allows you to insert an audio file at the cursor position.
Signal
Mute Selection
Replaces the audio selection with silence.
Silence Generator
Opens the Silence Generator dialog that allows you to insert silence or background
noise in an audio file.
Bleep Censor
Opens the Bleep Censor dialog that allows you to replace a part in an audio file with
a tone to cover a swear word, for example.
RELATED LINKS
Silence Generator Dialog on page 150
Bleep Censor on page 153
Process Tab
This tab provides access to the offline processing tools.
RELATED LINKS
Offline Processing on page 172
Correction Tab
This tab provides access to the error detection and correction tools.
RELATED LINKS
Error Correction on page 168
Spectrum Tab
The Spectrum tab allows you to use high-quality linear-phase filters to process a spectrum range
selection for audio restoration and processing.
RELATED LINKS
Spectral Editing on page 438
Analyze Tab
The Analyze tab provides you with tools for analyzing your audio and for detecting any errors.
RELATED LINKS
Audio Analysis on page 155
120
Audio File Editing
Audio Editor Tabs Render Tab
Source
Auto Select Source
If this option is activated, the source is automatically selected according to the
selection that you make in the audio file. If there is no selection, the whole audio file
is processed.
The Source pop-up menu allows you to select which part of the audio file you want to process.
The following options are available:
Whole File
Processes and renders the whole audio range.
Selected Audio Range
Processes and renders the selected audio range.
Specific Region
Processes and renders a specific audio range to an independent file.
Specify the region to process on the pop-up menu.
All Regions
Processes and renders each marked audio range to an independent file. By defining
multiple isolated regions in an audio file, you can process them in one operation.
Specify the type of regions to process on the pop-up menu.
Result
In Place
If this option is activated, the rendered audio range replaces the source audio range.
Unnamed File
If this option is activated, a temporary untitled file is rendered.
Named File
If this option is activated, you can specify a name for the rendered file.
Output
Name
Allows you to enter a name for the rendered file. Clicking the arrow icon opens a
pop-up menu that offers you several naming options.
Scheme
Allows you to specify a naming scheme for the file name.
Location
Allows you to select a destination folder for the rendered files.
Format
Opens a pop-up menu where you can select a single file format or multiple file
formats.
121
Audio File Editing
Audio Editor Tabs Options
Depending on the selected source, different options are available.
Bypass Master Section
If this option is activated, the plug-ins and gain of the Master Section are bypassed
when rendering.
Auto Save Master Section Preset
If this option is activated, the Master Section preset is automatically saved in the
companion file of the audio file when you render the file. You can load the Master
Section preset via the Load Master Section Preset option in the lower right corner
of the wave window.
Fade In/Out at Boundaries
If this option is activated, a fade is performed at the audio range boundaries when
a new file is created, or a crossfade with the adjacent audio is created if the audio
range is processed in place.
Crossfades allow for smooth transitions between the processed and the nonprocessed parts. The crossfade time and shape are set in the Audio Files
Preferences. If the fade time is longer than half the length of the processed file, the
fade is not performed.
No Reverb Tail
If this option is activated, the audio tail produced by effects such as reverb is not
included in the rendered file.
Some plug-ins do not transfer information on the tail duration to WaveLab. In this
case, this option has no effect. For such plug-ins, you can add the Silence plug-in to
add extra samples at the end of the file.
Copy Markers
If this option is activated, the markers that are included in the range to process are
copied to the rendered file.
Skip Exclusion Region
If this option is activated, muted audio ranges are skipped and not included in the
result.
Open Resulting Audio File
If this option is activated, every rendered file is opened in a new window.
Open Files in New File Group
If this option is activated, the rendered audio file is imported in a new file group.
Bypass Master Section on Resulting Audio File
If this option is activated, playback of the resulting audio file bypasses the entire
Master Section except the Playback Processing section. This setting can be toggled
by clicking the button at the bottom right of the wave window or montage window.
NOTE
It is recommended to activate this option, because this way, you do not monitor new
files through the effects that have already been applied to them.
Include Pause before Track
If this option is activated and you render CD tracks, a pause is included before each
CD track in the rendered file.
122
Audio File Editing
File Handling in the Audio Editor Include Pause after Track
If this option is activated and you render CD tracks, a pause is included after each CD
track in the rendered file.
Upload to SoundCloud
If this option is activated, the rendered file is uploaded to SoundCloud.
Presets
Presets
This pop-up menu allows you to save and restore render presets. All settings are
saved and restored, except the file name and the file location.
Render
Start
Starts the rendering process.
RELATED LINKS
Companion Files on page 36
File Handling in the Audio Editor
Mono/Stereo Handling
WaveLab Pro is very flexible in its handling of stereo. All editing operations can be performed on
either one channel or on both.
Supported File Formats
WaveLab Pro can open and save audio files in a number of file formats.
Wave (.wav)
The following bit resolutions are supported: 8 bit, 16 bit, 20 bit, 24 bit, 32 bit float, and
64 bit float.
Wave 64 (.w64)
This file format is very similar to the Wave format but with one important difference:
it allows you to record and/or edit files of virtually any length. Standard Wave files
are limited to 2 GB (stereo files) in WaveLab Pro.
NOTE
Wave 64 does not support metadata. If you need large files and metadata, use Wave
files and activate the RF64 option.
WavPack (.wv/.wvc)
This file format allows digital audio to be losslessly compressed, including 32 bit float
audio files.
RF64
In the Audio Files Preferences, on the File tab, you can activate the RF64 file format
support. If this is activated, the standard Wave file format switches automatically to
the RF64 file format as soon as the file size exceeds 2 GB, without any performance
loss or interruption. This is useful when recording very long sessions. A RF64 file has
the extension .wav, but it can only be opened with an application that supports the
RF64 standard if the file exceeds 2 GB.
123
Audio File Editing
File Handling in the Audio Editor AIFF (.aif, .aiff, .snd)
Audio Interchange File Format, a standard defined by Apple Computers Inc. The
following bit resolutions are supported: 8 bit, 16 bit, 20 bit, and 24 bit.
MPEG-1 Layer 3 (.mp3)
The most common audio compression format. The major advantage of MPEG
compression is that the file size is significantly reduced, while there is little
degradation of sound quality.
NOTE
When you open an MPEG compressed file in WaveLab Pro, the file is converted to a
temporary wave file. On saving, the temporary wave file is converted back to MP3.
MPEG-1 Layer 2 (.mp2, .mpa, .mpg, .mus)
MP2 (sometimes referred to as “Musicam files”) is a common file format in the
broadcast industry.
Original Sound Quality (.osq, read-only)
This is the proprietary lossless compressed audio format of WaveLab.
Sound Designer II (.sd2)
This audio file format is used by Digidesign applications (such as Pro Tools). The
following bit resolutions are supported: 8 bit, 16 bit, and 24 bit.
U-LAW (.ulaw, .vox)
This is an audio encoding and compression technique supported by Windows and
Web phones, using 8 bit resolution. The U.S. telephone system uses U-law encoding
for digitization.
A-LAW (.alaw, .vox)
This is an audio encoding and compression technique for telephony, using 8-bit
resolution. The EU telephone system uses A-law encoding for digitization.
Sun/Java (.snd, .au)
This is an audio file format used on Sun and NeXT computers. The following bit
resolutions are supported: 8 bit, 16 bit, and 24 bit.
ADPCM – Microsoft/Dialogic (.vox)
This is a format commonly used for games and telephony applications. It offers a
lower bit rate than linear PCM and therefore requires less storage space/bandwidth.
Ogg Vorbis (.ogg)
Ogg Vorbis is a compressed file format that is open, patent-free, and which creates
very small audio files maintaining comparatively high audio quality.
Text/Excel (.txt)
This is a text representation of a waveform. By saving an audio file as a text file and
then opening it in a spreadsheet application such as Excel, you can view it in textual,
decimal form, and edit the sample values. When you open a text file representing a
waveform in WaveLab Pro, it is decoded and opened as an audio file. These files are
not compressed in any way, so they can become very large.
When using 32-bit float files, the .txt format is not 100 % lossless. This is because it is
not possible to express a binary floating point value in textual decimal form without
some precision loss.
Windows Media Audio (.wma, .asf)
Microsoft’s own compressed format. WaveLab Pro lets you import/export audio
in this format (Windows only). To import/export audio in WMA surround format,
Windows Media Player 9 or later must be installed on your system.
124
Audio File Editing
File Handling in the Audio Editor Ensoniq Paris (.paf)
Used by the Ensoniq Paris™ system. The following bit resolutions are supported: 16
bit and 24 bit.
Raw PCM files (.raw, .bin, .pcm, .$$$)
In this format, no information about bit resolution or sample rate is included. If you
open a file in this format, WaveLab Pro asks you to specify the bit resolution and
sample rate. If this is not done correctly, the file will not play back as intended.
FLAC (.flac)
Free Lossless Audio Codec (FLAC) is a codec which allows digital audio to be losslessly
compressed.
AAC (.aac)
Advanced Audio Coding (AAC) is a codec that allows lossy compression and encoding
scheme for digital audio.
NOTE
The “$$$” file type is a temporary file format of WaveLab Pro. If you experience a computer crash,
you may restore some of your work by opening any “$$$” files on your hard disk.
20-bit, 24-bit, and 32-bit Float Files
You do not need a 20-bit or 24-bit audio card to take advantage of the fact that WaveLab Pro can
handle 20-bit and 24-bit audio files. Any processing or editing performed on the files is always
done at full resolution (32-bit float), even if your card does not support the full resolution.
For playback, WaveLab Pro automatically adapts to the card that you have installed.
Creating a New Audio File
You can create an empty audio file, to assemble material from other audio files, for example.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > New.
2.
Click Audio File > Custom.
3.
Specify the audio properties and click Create.
Audio Properties
You can define the channels, the sample rate, and the bit resolution of the audio file.
You can set these properties when you create a new audio file.
●
To change the properties for the selected audio file, select the File tab and click Info, or
click the Audio Properties button at the bottom right of the wave window.
125
Audio File Editing
File Handling in the Audio Editor Channels
Allows you to select the number of audio channels.
Sample Rate
Allows you to select the number of audio samples per second.
Bit Resolution
Allows you to select the accuracy of samples in the audio stream.
Saving an Audio File
PROCEDURE
1.
Do one of the following:
●
To save an audio file that has never been saved before, select File > Save As.
●
To save an audio file that has been saved before, click the Save button, or select
File > Save.
2.
In the Save As window, specify a file name and location.
3.
Click Save.
Saving in Another Format
You can change the file format, sampling frequency, bit resolution, and stereo/mono status when
saving.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > Save As.
2.
In the Save As window, specify a file name and location.
3.
Click in the Format field and select Edit.
4.
In the Audio File Format dialog, set the file format and specify the properties.
5.
Click OK.
6.
Click Save.
RESULT
A new file is created. The original file is not affected by the operation.
Audio File Format Dialog
In this dialog, you can change various file settings when saving.
●
To open the Audio File Format dialog, select File > Export, and select Render > Single or
Render > Multi. Then activate Named File, click in the Format field, and select Edit.
This dialog can also be opened from various other locations in WaveLab Pro.
126
Audio File Editing
File Handling in the Audio Editor Type
Select an audio file type. This affects which options are available on the Audio
Format menu.
File Extension
Select a file extension that is compatible with the current file type.
Audio Format
Select an audio format that is compatible with the current file type.
Channels
Specify the number of audio channels for the files to be created. For multichannel
audio montages, you can create multiple files.
Sample Rate
Select a sample rate for the audio file. If you change this setting, a sample rate
conversion takes place.
IMPORTANT
Use this only for simple conversions. For professional results, use the Resample
plug-in and add limiting and dithering.
Bit Resolution
Select a bit resolution for the audio file. This option is only available for specific file
types.
IMPORTANT
Reducing the bit resolution is only advised for simple conversions. For professional
results, it is recommended to add dithering in the Master Section.
Metadata
Lets you make metadata settings that are saved with the file. This option is only
available for some file types.
●
If Do Not Save Anything is selected, no metadata are saved with the file.
127
Audio File Editing
File Handling in the Audio Editor ●
If Inherit from Source File is selected, the metadata of the source file
are used. If the source metadata is empty, the default metadata is used, if
available. For example, this can be used to create Wave files with a Unique
Material Identifier (BWF standard).
●
If selecting Specific to This Configuration is selected, you can edit the
metadata, or replace it with a metadata preset. To edit the metadata, open the
metadata pop-up menu again, and select Edit.
Single File Format/Multiple File Format
Switches between the Audio File Format dialog and the Multi Audio File Format
dialog.
Changing the Format
When changing the sample rate, bit resolution, and number of channels of an audio file, several
operations are performed.
Sample Rate
If a new sample rate is specified, a sample rate conversion is performed.
Bit Resolution
If a different bit resolution is specified, the file is either truncated down to 8 bits,
or padded up to 64 bits. If you are converting to a lower bit resolution, you should
consider adding dithering.
Mono/Stereo
If the file is converted from mono to stereo, the same material is used in both
channels. If the conversion is from stereo to mono, a mix of the two channels is
created.
NOTE
●
If you only want to change the bit resolution, you can do this in the Audio Properties
section of the Info window instead, and then save the audio file.
●
For high quality mastering purposes, it is not recommended to change the sample rate
and number of channels using the Audio Properties section, but instead use plug-ins and
functions of the Master Section.
Saving a Selection as an Audio File
You can save a selection in the open audio file as a new audio file.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the wave window, make a selection range.
2.
In the Audio Editor, select the Render tab.
3.
In the Source section, open the pop-up menu and select Selected Audio Range.
4.
In the Output section, specify a file name and location.
5.
Open the Format menu and select Edit Single Format.
6.
In the Audio File Format dialog, specify the output format and click OK.
7.
In the Render section, click Start.
128
Audio File Editing
File Handling in the Audio Editor Saving Left/Right Channel as Audio File
You can save each channel individually into a separate file. Use this option when editing dual
mono files, for example.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Editor, select the Render tab.
2.
In the Output section, specify a file name and location.
3.
Open the Format menu and select Edit Single Format.
4.
In the Audio File Format dialog, open the Channels pop-up menu, and select Left
Channel or Right Channel.
5.
Make additional output settings and click OK.
6.
In the Render section, click Start.
Encoding Audio Files
Audio can be saved in different formats. The process of converting audio to another format is
called encoding. When saving audio files, you can specify various encoding options for some file
formats.
MP3 Encoding Dialog
You can edit the encoding options when you save an MP3 audio file.
You can open the MP3 Encoding dialog from most places where you can select an output file
format. For example, open an audio file, select File > Save As, click in the Format field, and select
Edit. In the Audio File Format dialog, select MPEG-1 Layer 3 (MP3) as type, click the Encoding
field, and select Edit.
Encoder
Lets you select the encoder (Fraunhofer or Lame).
Constant/Variable Bit Rate
The bit rate is related to the quantity of data used to encode the audio signal. The
higher the value, the better the quality, but the larger the output file. If you choose
Variable Bit Rate, the rate changes, according to the complexity of the audio
material.
129
Audio File Editing
File Handling in the Audio Editor Highest Quality (Slowest)/Fastest
Select the quality that you want to achieve. The higher the quality, the more
resources and time are required to analyze and compress the audio signal.
NOTE
Highest Quality (Slowest) can require a specific sample rate for the audio file. If this
is the case and the sample rate is different from the input sample rate, a message is
displayed.
When you use the Lame encoder, you can make additional settings on the Advanced tab.
Add File Length and Playback Position Information to VBR Header
Adds additional data to the VBR header that allows the playback device to estimate
the length of the MP3 file and to jump to any time position inside the MP3 file. This
option is available for the Fraunhofer encoder only.
Embed Ancillary Data for Time and Delay Compensation
Embeds ancillary data so that the decoded file will exactly match the duration of the
original file. This option is available for the Fraunhofer encoder only.
Allow Intensity Stereo Coding
Decreases the bit rate by reorganizing the intensity information between the
channels.
Specify as Original Recording
Marks the encoded file as the original recording.
Write Private Bit
This is a custom flag.
Write Copyright Flag
Marks the encoded file as copyright-protected.
Write Check-Sum
Allows other applications to check the integrity of the file.
Create Long Frames
Saves space by writing fewer headers in the file (not compatible with all decoders).
AAC Encoding Dialog
You can edit the encoding options when you save an AAC audio file.
You can open the AAC Encoding dialog from most places where you can select an output file
format. For example, open an audio file, select File > Save As, click in the Format field, and select
Edit. In the Audio File Format dialog, select AAC (Advanced Audio Coding) as type, click the
Encoding field, and select Edit.
130
Audio File Editing
File Handling in the Audio Editor Container
Specifies the container for the AAC file. A container is a file format that can contain
compressed audio data and metadata.
●
MPEG-4 (recommended format for iTunes)
●
3GPP (3rd Generation Partnership Project)
●
ADIF (Audio Data Interchange Format)
●
ADTS (Audio Data Transport Stream)
●
ADTS (with CRC)
●
LATM LOAS (Low Overhead Audio Stream)
Audio Compression Method
Lets you select the audio compression method.
●
LC (Low Complexity, iTunes standard)
●
HE (High Efficiency)
●
HE v2 (High Efficiency, Parametric Stereo)
●
HD 16 bit (Lossless)
●
HD 24 bit (Lossless)
LC (Low Complexity) does not mean lower quality, but less compression attempts. It
is used for best audio quality.
HE (High Efficiency) is an extension of Low Complexity AAC (AAC LC) and is optimized
for low-bit-rate applications, for example, streaming audio.
HE v2 enhances the compression efficiency of stereo signals. HE formats provide
extremely compressed audio files with a high quality sound.
HD is an extension to the MPEG-4 standard and allows lossless audio compression
that is scalable to lossy compression. This means that the decoding can be lossless
or lossy, depending on the decoder settings. However, the file size is larger than with
the other compression methods.
Constant/Variable Bit Rate
The bit rate is related to the quantity of data that is used to encode the audio signal.
The higher the value, the better the quality, but the larger the output file. If you
choose Variable Bit Rate, the rate changes over time according to the complexity of
the audio material.
131
Audio File Editing
File Handling in the Audio Editor Quality
Select the quality that you want to achieve. The higher the quality, the more
resources and time are required to analyze and compress the audio signal.
NOTE
Highest Quality can require a particular sample rate for the audio file.
MPEG-1 Layer 2 Encoding Dialog
You can edit the encoding options when you save an MPEG-1 Layer 2 (MP2) audio file.
You can open the MPEG-1 Layer 2 Encoding dialog from most places where you can select an
output file format. For example, open an audio file, select File > Save As, click in the Format
field, and select Edit. In the Audio File Format dialog, select MPEG-1 Layer 2 as type, click the
Encoding field, and select Edit.
Bit Rate
Determines the bit rate. The bit rate is related to the quantity of data that is used to
encode the audio signal. The higher the value, the better the quality, but the larger
the output file.
Stereo Encoding
In Standard mode, the encoder does not use the correlation between channels.
However, the encoder can take space from a channel that is easy to encode and use
it for a complicated channel.
In Joint mode, the encoder uses the existing correlations between the two channels
to increase the ratio quality/space.
In Dual mode, both channels are independently encoded. This mode is
recommended for signals with independent channels.
Specify as Original Recording
Marks the encoded file as the original recording.
Write Private Bit
This is a custom flag.
Write Copyright Flag
Marks the encoded file as copyright-protected.
Write Check-Sum
Allows other applications to check the integrity of the file.
Encode Peaks (Ancillary Data)
This must be activated for compatibility with specific systems, for example, DIGAS.
132
Audio File Editing
File Handling in the Audio Editor FLAC Encoding Dialog
You can edit the encoding options when you save a FLAC audio file.
You can open the FLAC Encoding dialog from most places where you can select an output file
format. For example, open an audio file, select File > Save As, click in the Format field, and select
Edit. In the Audio File Format dialog, select FLAC as type, click the Encoding field, and select
Edit.
Compression Level
Lets you specify the compression level. The more compression, the slower the
encoding.
Ogg Vorbis Dialog
You can edit the encoding options when you save an Ogg Vorbis audio file.
You can open the Ogg Vorbis dialog from most places where you can select an output file
format. For example, open an audio file, select File > Save As, click in the Format field, and select
Edit. In the Audio File Format dialog, select Ogg Vorbis as type, click the Encoding field, and
select Edit.
Average Bit Rate
If this option is activated, the average bit rate in the file remains constant during
encoding. Because the file size is proportional to time, the localization of a given
point is easier, but it can result in a lower quality compared to the Variable Bit Rate
option.
Variable Bit Rate
If this option is activated, the bit rate in the file will vary during encoding, depending
on the complexity of the material. This can give a better quality/size ratio in the
resulting file.
In the Quality field, select the quality. Lower quality settings result in smaller files.
133
Audio File Editing
File Handling in the Audio Editor Windows Media Audio Encoding Dialog
You can edit the encoding options when you save a Windows Media Audio (WMA) audio file. This
dialog is only available in on Windows systems.
You can open the Windows Media Audio dialog from most places where you can select an
output file format. For example, open an audio file, select File > Save As, click in the Format field,
and select Edit. In the Audio File Format dialog, select Windows Media Audio (WMA) as type,
click the Encoding field, and select Edit.
Encoder
Sets the encoder.
Output Sample Rate
Sets the output sample rate of the encoded file. The higher the sample rate, the
higher the quality, but the larger the output file.
Output Bit Resolution
Sets the output bit resolution of the encoded file. This parameter is not available for
all encoders.
Channels and Bit Rate
The available items here depend on the selected encoding method and the output
sample rate.
VBR (Variable Bit Rate)
If this option is activated, the bit rate in the file will vary during the encoding,
depending on the complexity of the material. This can produce a better quality/size
ratio in the output file.
In the Quality field, select the quality. Lower quality settings result in smaller files.
Two-Pass Encoding
If this option is activated, the encoding quality increases, but the process takes twice
as long.
Constrained Bit Rate
This option is available when the VBR and Two-Pass Encoding options are
activated. This is used to maintain the bit rate within limits to avoid peaks. This is
recommended for media, such as CD or DVD.
134
Audio File Editing
File Handling in the Audio Editor Creating an Audio Montage from an Audio File
You can export audio files to an audio montage, including all markers that you have set in the
audio file.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Editor, open the audio file that you want export to an audio montage.
2.
Optional: If you want to use a specific time range of the audio file, create a selection range
in the wave window.
3.
Select File > New.
4.
Select Audio Montage > From Current File.
5.
In the From Current Audio File section, click Insert Audio File in New Montage.
6.
Click Create.
7.
In the Create Audio Montage from Audio File dialog, select whether to import the whole
file or the selected audio range.
8.
Optional: Decide if you want to perform any of the following marker operations:
9.
●
Import Markers
●
Split at Generic Region Markers
●
Split at CD Track Markers
Click OK.
Inserting Audio Files into Another Audio File
You can assemble an audio file from several audio files.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Editor, open the audio file in which you want to insert another audio file.
2.
If you want to insert an audio file at the edit cursor position, make sure that Snap to
Magnets is activated, and that Cursor is activated on the Magnet pop-up menu.
The edit cursor snaps to the nearest zero crossing. This avoids glitches.
3.
Select the Insert tab.
4.
In the Audio File section, select one of the following insert options:
●
At Start
●
At End
●
At Cursor
If you select At Cursor, the audio file is cut at the insert position. The part after the cut is
moved to the right.
5.
On the pop-up menu, select the audio file that you want to insert.
RELATED LINKS
Magnetic Bounds in Audio Files on page 113
135
Audio File Editing
File Handling in the Audio Editor Turning Selections Into New Files
You can turn selections into new files via drag and drop or by using the Render tab in the Audio
Editor.
Turning Selections Into New Files By Dragging
PROCEDURE
1.
Make a selection in the wave window.
2.
Drag the selection to the tab bar above the wave window and release the mouse button.
RESULT
The selection opens in a new stereo window.
Turning Selections Into New Files Using the Menu
PROCEDURE
1.
Make a selection in the wave window.
2.
Right-click the selection and select Copy Selection to New Window.
3.
From the submenu, select one of the following options:
●
Duplicate
●
Stereo Version
●
Mono Mixdown
●
Mono Mixdown (Subtract Right Channel from Left Channel)
RESULT
The selection opens in a new stereo or mono window.
Special File Format Dialog
When opening files via the Unknown Audio option, you can specify how to interpret the format
of the audio file that you want to open.
●
To open the Special File Format dialog, select File > Import, click Unknown Audio, and
select the file that you want to open.
136
Audio File Editing
File Handling in the Audio Editor Sample Format
Specifies the binary representation of the samples in the file.
Byte Order
Specifies the order in which bytes should be interpreted. This only applies for 16 bit
or more.
Channels
Specifies the number of audio channels in the audio file.
Data to Ignore (Number of Bytes)
Specifies how many bytes at the start and end of the audio file are ignored.
Sample Rate
Specifies the sample rate of the audio file.
File Extension
Specifies the default file name extension for the audio file. When the file selector
opens after closing this dialog, only the file with this extension is displayed.
Dual Mono Files
Dual mono files are two mono files that are the left and right channels of a stereo recording.
You can open several dual mono files at the same time and have them grouped automatically,
provided the files have channel tags in their file names.
You can open dual mono files like stereo files in the Audio Editor, the Audio Montage window,
and the Batch Processor window.
In the Audio Files Preferences, on the File tab, you can set the channel ID for the left and
right channel, and the channel ID to add to dual mono files when saving the files. Up to 7 name
descriptors can be defined, each of which can be of the type Suffix or Advanced.
In the Advanced mode, the channel ID can be located anywhere in a file name. For this purpose,
a name pattern must be defined. This name pattern must have a {capture} section.
Name matching is not case sensitive and the file extension is ignored.
137
Audio File Editing
File Handling in the Audio Editor By default, WaveLab Pro recognizes the file name endings “.L/.R”, “-L/-R”, or “_L/_R” as the left and
right channels.
Allowing Opening of Dual Mono Files
NOTE
To avoid accidentally opening two separate mono files as a dual mono file, you should only
activate Allow Opening of Dual Mono Files when you are opening dual mono files.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > Preferences > Audio Files.
2.
Select the File tab.
3.
Activate Allow Opening of Dual Mono Files.
4.
If you want to open several dual mono files at the same time, define the naming scheme of
the dual mono files in the Dual Mono File Identification section.
Opening Dual Mono Files in the Audio Editor
PREREQUISITE
Activate Allow Opening of Dual Mono Files and place the dual mono files in the same folder.
PROCEDURE
1.
Open the audio file in which you want to open the dual mono files.
2.
Select File > Open.
3.
Select Audio File > Browse.
4.
Browse to the file location.
5.
Select the dual mono files that you want to open and click Open.
RELATED LINKS
Allowing Opening of Dual Mono Files on page 138
Opening Dual Mono Files in the Audio Montage Window
PREREQUISITE
Activate Allow Opening of Dual Mono Files and place the dual mono files in the same folder.
PROCEDURE
1.
Open the audio montage in which you want to open the dual mono files.
2.
Select File > Open.
3.
Select Audio Files > Browse.
4.
Browse to the file location.
5.
Select the dual mono files that you want to open, and click Open.
6.
In the Insert Audio Files dialog, make your settings.
7.
Click OK.
138
Audio File Editing
File Handling in the Audio Editor Opening Dual Mono Files in the Batch Processor Window
PREREQUISITE
Activate Allow Opening of Dual Mono Files and place the dual mono files in the same folder.
PROCEDURE
●
In the Batch Processor window, drag the dual mono files from the File Browser window
to the Files to Process list, or use the Insert options on the Edit tab.
Dual mono files are displayed in purple in the list.
Converting From Stereo to Mono and From Mono to Stereo
You can convert audio files from mono to stereo and from stereo to mono. Converting a mono
file into a stereo file produces an audio file that contains the same material in both channels, for
example for further processing into real stereo. Converting a stereo file into a mono file mixes
the stereo channels to a mono channel.
Converting a Selection From Stereo to Mono
PROCEDURE
1.
Make a stereo selection in the wave window.
2.
Select File > New.
3.
Select Audio File > From Current File.
4.
Select one of the following options:
●
To mix the left and right stereo channels when converting to mono, click Mono
Mixdown.
●
To mix the left channel with the inverse of the right channel when converting to
mono, click Mono Mixdown (Subtract Right Channel from Left Channel).
The resulting mono wave contains the difference between the channels. For
example, this allows you to verify that a wave file really is a true stereo file rather
than a mono file converted to stereo format.
RESULT
The selection opens in a new mono window.
Converting From Stereo to Mono While Saving
PROCEDURE
1.
Make a stereo selection in the wave window.
2.
Select File > Save As.
3.
In the Save As window, specify a file name and location.
4.
Click in the Format field and select Edit.
5.
In the Audio File Format dialog, open the Channels menu and select one of the mono
settings.
For example, when selecting Mono (Mix -3 dB), the resulting audio file is attenuated by 3
dB.
6.
Click OK.
139
Audio File Editing
File Handling in the Audio Editor 7.
Click Save.
Converting a Selection From Mono to Stereo
PROCEDURE
1.
Make a mono selection in the wave window.
2.
Select File > New.
3.
Select Audio File > From Current File.
4.
Click Stereo Version.
5.
Click Create.
RESULT
The selection opens in a new stereo window.
Swapping Channels in a Stereo File
You can swap the two channels in an audio file, that is, you can move the audio in the left
channel to the right channel, and the audio in the right channel to the left channel.
●
To swap the channels of the whole audio file in the Audio Editor, select the Edit tab, and in
the Cutting section, click Swap Stereo Channels.
●
To swap the channels only a selected range of the audio file, make a selection range in the
wave window, select the Edit tab, and in the Cutting section, click Swap Stereo Channels.
Special Paste Options
On the Paste pop-up menu in the Audio Editor, you find additional paste options.
●
To access the special paste option, open the Audio Editor, select the Edit tab, and in the
Clipboard section, right-click Paste.
Overwrite
Overwrites data in the destination file, rather than moving data to make room for the
inserted audio. How much is overwritten depends on the selection in the destination
file:
●
If there is no selection in the destination file, a section with the same length as
the pasted selection is overwritten.
●
If there is a selection in the destination file, the pasted selection replaces that
selection.
Append
Adds the pasted audio after the end of the file.
Prepend
Adds the pasted audio before the beginning of the file.
Multiple Copies
Opens a dialog in which you can enter the number of copies that you want to create.
Mix
Blends two files into each other, starting at the selection or, if there is no selection, at
the cursor position.
●
When you select the Mix option, a dialog opens, allowing you to specify the
gain for the audio on the clipboard and at the destination.
140
Audio File Editing
File Handling in the Audio Editor ●
All the data on the clipboard is always mixed in, regardless of the length of the
selection.
Moving Audio
You can rearrange the order of the audio in a file by dragging, and cutting and pasting.
Moving Audio by Dragging
PREREQUISITE
Decide whether you want to use Snap Selection to Zero-Crossing.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the wave window, make a selection.
2.
Drag the selection to a position outside the selection in the same file, or to another wave
window.
RESULT
The selection is removed from its original position and inserted where you drop it.
NOTE
To undo a move between two files you must first undo the paste in the destination window and
then undo the cut operation in the source window.
Moving Audio Using Cut and Paste
PREREQUISITE
Decide whether you want to use Snap Selection to Zero-Crossing.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the wave window, make a selection.
2.
Use one of the following copy methods:
3.
4.
●
In the Audio Editor, select the Edit tab, and click Cut.
●
Press Ctrl/Cmd-X.
Select how you want to insert the selection:
●
If you want to insert the audio, click once at the position in the same file or in
another file.
●
If you want to replace a section of audio, select it.
To paste the selection, do one of the following:
●
In the Audio Editor, select the Edit tab, and click Paste.
●
Press Ctrl/Cmd-V.
RESULT
The selection is removed from its original position and inserted where you drop it.
NOTE
To undo a move between two files you must first undo the paste in the destination window and
then undo the cut operation in the source window.
141
Audio File Editing
File Handling in the Audio Editor Moving Audio by Nudging
The nudge left/right tools can be used to move the audio in small steps within a file.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the wave window, make a selection.
2.
In the Audio Editor, select the Edit tab.
3.
In the Nudge section, click Nudge Left or Nudge Right.
RESULT
The audio is moved one pixel. Exactly how much this is depends on how far you are zoomed in.
For example, if the status bar displays x1:256, the selection is moved 256 samples. The moved
section overwrites the audio at that position.
Copying Audio
You can copy sections of audio within the same file or between audio files.
Stereo/Mono Handling
When you drag or copy stereo or mono files to other locations, the target location determines
how the files are inserted.
Stereo/Mono is handled as follows when you drag between files:
Dragged section
Drop wave
Action
Stereo
Stereo
The dragged audio is always inserted into both channels.
Stereo
Mono
Only the left channel is inserted.
Mono
Stereo
What happens depends on the vertical drop position.
This is indicated by the cursor shape. The selection can
be inserted into only one of the channels, or the same
material can be inserted into both channels.
Stereo/Mono is handled as follows when you copy and paste files:
Copied section
Paste wave
Action
Stereo
Stereo
If the wave cursor extends across both channels of
the destination file, the material is inserted into both
channels.
Stereo
Stereo
If the wave cursor is only in one channel, the audio is only
pasted in that channel. Material from the left channel is
pasted in the left channel and material from the right
channel is pasted in the right channel.
Stereo
Mono
Only the left channel is pasted.
Mono
Stereo
What happens depends on whether the wave cursor is in
one channel or both. The audio is either pasted in one of
142
Audio File Editing
File Handling in the Audio Editor Copied section
Paste wave
Action
the channels, or the same material is inserted into both
channels.
Sample Rate Conflicts
If you copy or move audio from one window to another, and the sample rates of the two files
are not the same, the copied/moved sound plays back at the wrong pitch (speed). The program
warns you if this is about to happen.
While mixing sample rates can be used as an effect, it is most often not intended. There are two
ways to get around this:
●
Convert the sample rate of the source file to the same rate as the destination file before
editing.
●
Convert the sample rate of the destination file to the same rate as the source file before
adding the audio.
Copying Audio Using Copy and Paste
PREREQUISITE
Decide whether you want to use Snap Selection to Zero-Crossing.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the wave window, make a selection.
2.
Use one of the following copy methods:
3.
4.
●
In the Audio Editor, select the Edit tab, and click Copy.
●
Press Ctrl/Cmd-C.
Select how you want to insert the selection:
●
If you want to insert the audio, click once at the position in the same file or in
another file.
●
If you want to replace a section of audio, select it.
To paste the selection, do one of the following:
●
In the Audio Editor, select the Edit tab, and click Paste.
●
Press Ctrl/Cmd-V.
Copying Audio by Dragging
PREREQUISITE
Decide whether you want to use Snap Selection to Zero-Crossing.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the wave window, make a selection.
2.
Click the middle of the selection, and drag it to a position outside the selection in the same
file, or to another wave window.
RESULT
The selection is inserted at the indicated point. The audio that previously began at that point is
moved to the right.
143
Audio File Editing
Changing the Audio Properties Mid and Side Editing
You can edit, process, and monitor audio material in the left/right and in the mid/side domain.
Mid/Side editing can be applied on the waveform view and in spectral editing mode. This allows
you to do spectral editing only on the mid or on the side channel, for example.
You can switch between left/right and mid/side mode with the LR/MS button at the bottom left
of the overview and the main view. The upper track displays the mid signal and the lower track
displays the side signal. The overview and main view have independent LR/MS controls. This
allows you to display the left/right channels in the overview and the mid/side channels in the
main view, for example.
When you render the audio, the channels are automatically encoded back to left/right mode.
The waveform display and the cursor shape indicate whether L/R or M/S mode is activated.
You can apply offline processes like Gain and Level independently on the mid and on the side
channel. With the playback tool, you can play back the mid or side channel independently.
Changing the Audio Properties
You can change the sample rate and bit resolution of audio files.
Changing these values does not process the audio file in any way (in contrast to using Save As).
However, the following rules apply:
●
If you change the sample rate, the file plays back at a new pitch.
●
If you change the bit resolution, the file is converted to the new resolution the next time
you save it.
NOTE
There is no undo for this. If you save a file with a lower bit resolution, the file is converted
permanently.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Editor, open an audio file.
2.
Select the File tab.
3.
Click Info.
4.
In the Audio Properties section, specify a new Sample Rate and/or Bit Resolution.
5.
Click Apply Changes.
RELATED LINKS
Info Tab on page 42
Metadata
Metadata consists of attributes that describe the audio contents, for example, the title of the
track, the author, or the date the track was recorded. Depending on the file format of the
selected audio file, this data varies.
When opening an audio file, audio montage, or batch process, the metadata found in the file is
loaded. You can create different metadata presets for audio files, audio montages, and batch
processes. When creating a new file from a template, this file can inherit the metadata of the
preset, if available.
144
Audio File Editing
Metadata A preview of the metadata is displayed in the Metadata window. To view the complete metadata
of a file and to be able to edit the metadata, select Tool Windows > Metadata and click the Edit
button.
Not all file formats can save metadata. Depending on the output file format, all metadata or only
part of the metadata is saved in an audio file. The following file formats can contain metadata:
●
.wav
●
.mp3
●
.ogg
●
.wma
●
.flac
●
.aac
For MP3, the following metadata types are available:
●
ID3 v1 and ID3 v2, including picture support, and ReplayGain standard
AAC is used for MPEG-4 (iTunes compatible) and 3GPP containers.
NOTE
●
AAC is not ID3v2 compatible. However, in WaveLab Pro it uses the same editor.
●
The metadata codes that are followed by an “(i)” indicate the iTunes compatible fields.
Lyrics and pictures are also iTunes compatible.
For WAV, the following metadata types are available:
●
RIFF
●
BWF markers
●
BWF version 2 (EBU R-128 loudness support)
●
BWF support for USID and UMID standards (Unique Source Identifier and Unique Material
Identifier)
●
iXML (with EBU R-128 loudness support)
●
aXML (BWF standard to attach XML data)
●
CART (AES standard, dedicated to broadcast needs)
●
MD5 (Extra tab)
●
ID3, including picture support
When saving or recording an audio file in the Audio File Format dialog, you can specify whether
not to use any metadata, inherit the metadata from the source file, or edit the metadata of the
file.
Metadata can be entered manually or generated automatically.
145
Audio File Editing
Metadata The following options can be generated automatically:
●
Unique Source Identifier (BWF, Basics tab)
●
UMID (BWF, Unique Material Identifier (UMID) tab)
●
Loudness and true peak values* (BWF, Loudness tab)
●
Insert BWF data (iXML tab)
●
Time markers (CART tab)
●
MD5 checksum* (Extra tab)
●
ReplayGain information* (ID3, ID3 v2 tab)
●
USID (BWF, Basics tab)
(*) These options cause a file analysis while the file is written, which means that the file writing
process can take longer.
WaveLab Pro includes several metadata presets. They are used as examples and can be
customized to your needs. You can load metadata presets from the Metadata Presets pop-up
menu in the Audio File Format dialog, or from the Metadata dialog.
RELATED LINKS
Audio File Format Dialog on page 126
Metadata Dialog
This dialog allows you to define the metadata to be embedded in your audio file.
●
To open the Metadata dialog, open the Metadata window and click Edit.
Depending on the file type, the metadata is handled differently.
Metadata dialog for WAV files
When opening the Metadata dialog for files in the Audio Editor, you can edit the metadata that
is saved in the audio file. This metadata is saved to disk later.
When opening the Metadata dialog for files in the Audio Montage window or the Batch
Processor window, you can edit the metadata for the WAV, MP3, and AAC audio files that are
created when rendering the audio montage or processing through the batch processor. If you
render to WAV, MP3, or AAC formats, the metadata will be associated to these files.
146
Audio File Editing
Metadata NOTE
The metadata codes that are followed by an “(i)” indicate the iTunes compatible fields. Lyrics and
pictures are also iTunes compatible.
Metadata Presets
In the Metadata dialog, you can save metadata presets and apply these presets to other files.
Metadata presets can be applied to WAV, MP3, and AAC files.
The Use as Default for New .wav Files option allows you to define a set of metadata as default.
When you create a new file, and do not add any metadata, this default metadata is applied to
the file when saving or rendering it. For example, you can save or record WAV files with BWF
metadata and automatically add a Unique Material Identifier.
To edit the default metadata preset, select Load Default, and edit the preset.
CART and Markers
WaveLab Pro reads the CART markers, if any, and merges them with the existing markers of the
file.
The CART standard can contain up to 8 markers. WaveLab Pro saves them if their names conform
to the CART standard.
If Generate Time Markers is activated in the CART tab of the Metadata dialog, the markers are
generated if at least one CART text field has content. Otherwise, the CART data is meant to be
unused.
To be able to merge the CART markers with the markers of a file when rendering a file, the
option Copy Markers must be activated in the Render dialog.
Metadata and Variables
Variables make handling metadata more efficient. You can use the available variable options to
quickly add metadata to a file, without having to type the same information multiple times.
You can also quickly add available information such as dates or file names.
The idea behind this is to set up the metadata and variables once, and then be able to output
various file versions from the project.
Example of Using Metadata and Variables
Let’s say you have an audio montage that contains CD tracks and want to render all CD tracks to
individual audio files, including metadata information. You have already added some CD-Text to
each track.
The CD-Text of each CD track is automatically available in the CD Metadata dialog and can be
used as variables.
Now you want to add information that is not available as CD-Text, for example, the year of the CD
track and a comment, to have these information available in the rendered audio files.
1
In the CD window, select Functions > Edit CD Metadata, and fill out the @CdTrackYear@
and @CdTrackInfo1@ fields. Use the scroll-bar on the right of the dialog to select the
other tracks, and add the information for all tracks. Close the dialog.
147
Audio File Editing
Metadata 2
Edit the metadata in the Metadata dialog. Set up the ID3 v2 fields using the variables. Click
the arrow icon to open the variables and text snippets pop-up menu for a field. You can
also fill out other metadata chunks, such as BWF, RIFF, or CART, or add an album picture.
Or you could apply a previously set up metadata preset to add metadata.
3
Once the information is complete, open the Render tab in the Audio Montage window. In
the Source section, open the pop-up menu and select All Regions. Open the Marker popup menu and select CD Tracks.
4
Click in the Format field, and click Single File Format. In the Audio File Format dialog,
open the Metadata pop-up menu, and select Inherit from Source File. Click OK to close
the dialog.
5
In the Render tab, in the Render section, click Start to render the files.
Result: When you now open the rendered audio files and look at the metadata, you can see that
the variables were replaced with the metadata that has been set up for each track.
RELATED LINKS
Variables and Text Snippets on page 562
CD Window on page 295
Metadata in the Batch Processor Window
You can batch process metadata. For this, you must set up the Metadata dialog for batch
processes, and apply the metadata to the files of the batch process.
In the Batch Processor window, on the Format tab, the following options are available in the
Batch Metadata pop-up menu:
●
If you do not want the batch metadata to change the metadata of the files in the batch,
select Ignore.
●
If you want to merge the metadata of the batch with the metadata of the source files (WAV
files only), select Merge.
●
If you want to replace the metadata of the source files with the metadata of the batch,
select Replace.
Examples for Merging Metadata
A simple example would be if you have 1000 files with a mistake in a copyright field of their
metadata. With this batch option, you can preserve the metadata of the files, and edit only the
copyright field.
However, the merge option can also be used for complex batch metadata. You can process an
audio file and specify which metadata to use from the source audio file and which from the batch
metadata. For this, use the Merge Codes options in the Metadata dialog for batch processes.
148
Audio File Editing
Snapshots If you enter #Source# in a value field, the value of the source audio file’s metadata is used when
batch processing. If you enter #Remove# in a value field, the corresponding value of the source
audio file’s metadata is removed when batch processing. In order to set up the merging process,
you must set up these codes in the value field that you want to merge.
An example on how to merge metadata while using the #Source# and #Remove# options:
●
The batch process contains an audio file that already has metadata.
●
The batch metadata is set up.
When starting the batch process, the metadata are merged in the following way:
●
If value field “A” in the audio file metadata contains the text “Jazz”, while value field “A” is
empty in the batch metadata, the resulting output file has the text “Jazz” in value field “A”.
●
If value field “B” in the batch metadata contains the text “Modern”, while value field “B” in
the audio file metadata is empty, the resulting output file has the text “Modern” in value
field “B”.
●
If value field “C” contains text both in the source audio file and in the batch metadata,
some more editing in the Metadata dialog for batch processes is necessary to specify
which metadata should be used.
Examples on how to use the #Source# and #Remove# codes:
●
No code is used, the source audio file has the text “Piano”, and the batch metadata has
the text “Trumpet”. Result: “Piano” is retained, because the source audio file metadata has
precedence over the batch metadata.
●
The source audio file has the text “Piano”, and the batch metadata has the text “Electric
#Source#”. Result: The resulting output file has the text “Electric Piano”.
●
The source audio file has the text “Piano”, and the batch metadata has the text
“#Remove#”. Result: “Piano” is removed from the value field.
●
The source audio file has the text “Piano”, and the batch metadata has the text
“#Remove#Trumpet”. Result: “Piano” is removed, and “Trumpet” is added.
Snapshots
You can save a number of snapshots of your audio file, to capture the current scroll position,
zoom factor, cursor position, and audio selection.
You can recall a snapshot at any time and update snapshots.
Selecting a saved snapshot restores all of its view settings. You can also choose to recall only
specific view properties by activating the corresponding options for a snapshot.
RELATED LINKS
View Tab on page 115
149
Audio File Editing
Silence Generator Dialog Capturing the Current View
Capturing the current view saves the current zoom factor, cursor position, scroll position, and
time range.
PROCEDURE
1.
Set up the view of the wave window.
2.
Select the View tab.
3.
In the Snapshots section, click Take Snapshot.
4.
Click one of the preset buttons to save the snapshot.
RESULT
The snapshot is saved and can be recalled by clicking the corresponding preset button.
Recalling a Snapshot
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Editor, select the View tab.
2.
In the Snapshots section, open the Options pop-up menu.
3.
Activate the view settings that you want to recall.
4.
Click a Preset button.
Updating Snapshots
You can update a previously captured snapshot with the current view.
PROCEDURE
1.
Set up the view of the wave window.
2.
Select the View tab.
3.
In the Snapshots section, click Take Snapshot.
4.
Click the preset button that you want to update.
RESULT
The new snapshot replaces the selected snapshot.
Silence Generator Dialog
This dialog allows you to insert silence or background noise in an audio file.
●
To open the Silence Generator dialog, select the Insert tab in the Audio Editor, and click
Silence Generator.
150
Audio File Editing
Silence Generator Dialog Type of Silence
●
True Silence allows you to insert digital silence.
●
Background Noise (File Will Be Looped If Needed) allows you to select an
audio file containing ambient noise.
Gain to Apply to This File lowers or raises the gain of the background noise.
Silence Duration
As Selection uses the duration of the active audio selection as the duration of the
silent section. Specify the duration of the silent section in the value field below.
Edges
Fade In/Fade Out performs a crossfade at the start and end of the silent section for
smoother transitions. Specify the fade time in the value field below.
Destination
●
Replace Selection replaces the current audio selection with the silent section.
●
Insert at Cursor inserts the silent section at the cursor position.
●
From End of File Until Cursor extends the audio file with silence up to the
cursor position. Activating this option also defines the silence duration and
ignores the Silence Duration setting.
True Silence vs. Background Noise
Recordings can sound unnatural when you insert true silence. This is particularly true for voice
recordings and field recordings, where a natural background noise is often present. To produce
more natural results, you can insert a file with background noise.
The file that you specify must have the same properties (stereo/mono, sample rate, etc.) as the
file in which you want to insert the silence. The file can be any length – if the silence region is
longer than the file, the file is looped.
Replacing a Selection with Silence
You can replace a section of an audio file with true silence or background noise.
151
Audio File Editing
Silence Generator Dialog PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Editor, make a selection.
2.
Select the Insert tab.
3.
In the Signal section, click Silence Generator.
4.
In the Silence Generator dialog, select the type of silence:
●
True Silence
●
Background Noise
For this option you must select a file containing the background noise.
5.
Set the silence duration to As Selection, and the destination to Replace Selection.
6.
Click Apply.
Inserting Silence
You can insert a specified length of true silence or a background noise at any position of the
audio file.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Editor, set the cursor where you want the inserted silence to begin.
2.
Select the Insert tab.
3.
In the Signal section, click Silence Generator.
4.
In the Silence Generator, select the type of silence:
●
True Silence
●
Background Noise
For this option you need to select a file containing the background noise.
5.
Deactivate As Selection, and specify the length.
6.
Set the destination to Insert at Cursor.
7.
Click Apply.
Muting a Selection
The Mute Selection function replaces the selection with true silence.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the wave window of the Audio Editor, make a selection.
2.
Select the Insert tab.
3.
In the Signal section, click Mute Selection.
152
Audio File Editing
Bleep Censor Bleep Censor
The bleep censor allows you to replace a part in an audio file with a tone to cover a swear word,
for example.
Bleep Censor Dialog
The Bleep Censor dialog allows you to define the bleep censor tone.
Frequency
Allows you to specify the frequency of the bleep censor tone.
Level
Allows you to specify the level of the bleep censor tone.
Crossfading
If this option is activated, WaveLab Pro creates a crossfade at the start and the end
of the bleep censor region for a smoother transition. You can specify the crossfade
time.
Presets
This pop-up menu allows you to save and restore bleep censor presets.
Replacing Audio with Tone
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Editor, make a selection.
2.
Select the Insert tab.
3.
In the Signal section, click Bleep Censor.
4.
In the Bleep Censor dialog, specify the frequency and the level of the bleep censor tone.
5.
Optional: Activate Crossfading and specify the crossfade time.
This creates a crossfade at the start and the end of the bleep censor region.
6.
Click Apply.
153
Audio File Editing
Waveform Restoration with the Pen Tool Waveform Restoration with the Pen Tool
The Pen tool allows you to redraw the waveform in the wave window. This can be used to quickly
repair waveform errors. The Pen tool can be used if the zoom resolution is set to 1:8 (one pixel
on the screen equals 8 samples) or higher.
●
To redraw the waveform, select the Pen tool on the Edit tab of the Audio Editor, click in
the waveform, and draw the new waveform.
●
To redraw the waveform of both channels at once, press Shift during the drawing process.
154
Audio Analysis
WaveLab Pro provides you with a comprehensive set of tools for analyzing your audio and for
detecting any errors.
You can compare two audio files with the Audio File Comparator tool and view audio in a
Spectrum or Loudness view.
For example, you can use the suite of audio meters or the 3D Frequency Analysis. There are also
several tools that help you examine any sample of your audio for errors or anomalies.
Analyze Tab
The Analyze tab provides you with tools for analyzing your audio and for detecting any errors.
Tools
Global Analysis
Opens the Global Analysis dialog where you can analyze peaks, loudness, pitch, DC
offset, and errors in the audio file.
Audio File Comparator
Opens the Audio File Comparator dialog where you can compare two audio files.
3D Frequency Analysis
Opens the 3D Frequency Analysis dialog where you can define, which frequency
range is analyzed and modify the appearance of the graph for the 3D frequency
analysis.
Monitoring
Playback
This is the standard metering mode, in which the meters reflect the audio that is
played back. Metering occurs after the Master Section, which means that effects,
dithering, and master faders are taken into account. You can monitor playback in
audio files, audio montages, audio CD track lists, etc.
Audio Input
In this mode, the meters reflect the audio input. Typically, this is the mode to use
when recording. The Master Section settings are not taken into account.
155
Audio Analysis
Global Analysis File Rendering
In this mode, you can monitor what is being written to disk during file rendering or
recording. Average and min/max peak values are calculated. After rendering, the
meters freeze until you refresh or change the monitor mode.
Edit Cursor
In this mode, the meters are static, showing the levels and other values for the audio
at the position of the edit cursor, in stop mode. This allows you to analyze a specific
position in an audio file in real time. The Master Section settings are not taken into
account.
Audio Selection
In this mode, the meters display the average values calculated for a selected range.
The Master Section settings are not taken into account.
When you change the selection, you have to update the meter displays by clicking
Update Selection Analysis.
Freeze Meters
This mode freezes the values for all open meters. The meters remain frozen until you
select another monitor mode or deactivate Freeze Meters.
Floating Meters
Show/Hide
Shows/Hides floating meters.
Global Analysis
In WaveLab Pro, you can perform advanced analysis on your audio to identify areas with specific
properties. This helps you find problem areas such as glitches or clipped samples. You can also
check general information, such as the pitch of a sound.
If you analyze a section of an audio file, WaveLab Pro scans the section or the audio file and
extracts information which is displayed in the dialog. WaveLab Pro also marks sections of the file
that meet specific characteristics, for example, sections that are very loud or almost silent. You
can then browse between these points, set markers, or zoom in on markers. On most of the tabs,
you find settings that determine exactly how the analysis is performed. Each tab focuses on a
particular analysis area.
You perform the global analysis in the Global Analysis dialog. This dialog consists of the
following tabs that provide different analysis types:
●
The Peaks tab allows you to find individual samples with very high values.
●
The Loudness tab allows you to find sections with high intensity.
●
The Pitch tab allows you to find the exact pitch of a sound or section.
●
The Extra tab provides information about DC offsets and the significant bit resolution.
●
The Errors tab allows you to find glitches and sections where the audio has been clipped.
Most of the analysis types provide a number of positions in the file that indicate peaks, glitches,
etc. These points are called “hot points”.
Opening the Global Analysis Dialog
The Global Analysis dialog provides various analysis options.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the wave window, select a range in the audio file that you want to analyze.
156
Audio Analysis
Global Analysis If you want to analyze the entire file, press Ctrl/Cmd-A. If Process Whole File If There
Is No Selection is activated in the Audio Files Preferences, the whole file is analyzed
automatically provided that no selection has been made.
2.
In the Audio Editor, select the Analyze tab.
3.
In the Tools section, click Global Analysis.
4.
Optional: Click Open New Global Analysis Dialog at the top of the Global Analysis dialog
to open another Global Analysis dialog.
Choosing the Analysis Type
Several types of analysis can be performed. Each of them takes some time, so make sure that
only the types that you need are included in the analysis.
Select the analysis types in the Global Analysis dialog by activating them in the corresponding
tabs.
●
To include the peaks analysis, select the Peaks tab and activate Find Peaks.
●
To include the loudness analysis, select the Loudness tab and activate Analyze Loudness.
●
To include the pitch analysis, select the Pitch tab and activate Find Average Pitch.
●
To include the extra analysis, select the Extra tab and activate Find DC Offset.
●
To include the error analysis, select the Errors tab and activate Find Possible Glitches and
Find Clipped Samples.
Global Analysis – Peaks Tab
On this tab, you can make settings that help you find digital peak and true peak values in the
audio, that is, single samples with very high values.
●
In the Global Analysis dialog, select the Peaks tab.
Find Peaks
Enables peak analysis.
Digital/True
Displays the highest peak in the analyzed section. When you click this value, the
number of peaks that are detected in the selection is shown in the Number of Hot
Points section in the lower left corner of the dialog. You can use the hot points to
move the cursor between the peaks.
At Cursor
Displays the level at the current audio file cursor position at the time of the analysis.
157
Audio Analysis
Global Analysis Maximum Number of Peaks to Report
Restricts the number of reported peaks. For example, setting this to 1 reports only
the highest peak.
Minimum Time between 2 Peaks
Controls the distance between peaks, so they do not appear too close to each other.
For example, setting this to 1 s ensures that there is always at least one second
between reported peaks.
Results of the Analysis
The Find Peaks fields show the highest peak in the analyzed section and the level of the sample
at the wave cursor position at the time of the analysis.
Global Analysis – Loudness Tab
On this tab, you can make settings that help you find sections that are perceived by the human
ear as louder or weaker in volume. To find sections that the ear perceives as significant in
volume, you must look at a longer section of audio.
●
In the Global Analysis dialog, select the Loudness tab.
The following options are available for the Raw Loudness tab and the EBU R-128 tab:
Maximum Number of Loudness Points to Report
Restricts the number of reported hot points. Only the highest points are reported.
For example, setting this to 1 reports only the loudest section or one of the sections
that have the same highest value.
Minimum Time between 2 Points
Controls the distance between points, so they do not appear too close to each other.
For example, setting this to 1 s ensures that there is always at least one second
between reported points.
Raw Loudness
Analyze Loudness
Enables RMS loudness analysis.
158
Audio Analysis
Global Analysis Average
Displays the overall loudness of the analyzed selection.
Maximum
Displays the level of the loudest section in the analyzed selection. Clicking this value
displays the number of loud sections detected within the selection in the Number of
Hot Points section in the lower left corner of the dialog.
Minimum
Displays the level of the quietest section in the analyzed selection. Clicking this value
displays the number of weak sections that are detected within the selection in the
Number of Hot Points section in the lower left corner of the dialog. This provides
adequate information about the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) of the audio material.
Around Cursor
Displays the loudness at the audio file cursor position at the time of the analysis.
Resolution
The length of audio to be measured and averaged. If this value is lowered, short
passages of loud/weak audio are detected. If the value is raised, the sound must be
loud/weak for a longer period to result in a hot point.
Threshold (for the Average)
Ensures that the average value is calculated correctly for recordings with pauses. The
value that you set here determines a threshold below which any detected audio is
considered to be silence, and is therefore excluded from average value calculations.
EBU R-128
Integrated Loudness
Displays the integrated loudness of the analyzed selection, also known as
programme loudness, according to the loudness analysis reference value. This
indicates the average loudness of the audio.
159
Audio Analysis
Global Analysis Loudness Range
Displays the loudness range according to the loudness analysis reference value.
It is based on a statistical distribution of loudness within a programme, thereby
excluding the extremes.
Short-Term Loudness: Maximum
Displays the level of the loudest 3 seconds section in the analyzed selection. When
you click this value, the number of loud sections that are detected within the
selection is shown in the Number of Hot Points section in the lower left corner of
the dialog.
Short-Term Loudness: Minimum
Displays the level of the quietest 3 seconds section in the analyzed selection. When
you click this value, the number of quiet sections that are detected within the
selection is shown in the Number of Hot Points section in the lower left corner of
the dialog. This provides adequate information about the signal-to-noise ratio (SNR)
of the audio material.
Momentary Loudness: Maximum
Displays the level of the loudest very short section (400 milliseconds) in the analyzed
selection. When you click this value, the number of loud sections that are detected
within the selection is shown in the Number of Hot Points section in the lower left
corner of the dialog.
Momentary Loudness: Minimum
Displays the level of the quietest very short section (400 milliseconds) in the analyzed
selection. When you click this value, the number of quiet sections that are detected
within the selection is shown in the Number of Hot Points section in the lower left
corner of the dialog.
RELATED LINKS
EBU Loudness Standard R-128 on page 36
Global Analysis – Pitch Tab
On this tab, you can make settings that help you find the average pitch of an audio section.
●
In the Global Analysis dialog, select the Pitch tab.
Settings on this tab allow you to gather information for pitch shifting, for example, to get one
sound in tune with another. The display shows the pitch for each channel, in Hertz (Hz) and as
semitones and cents (hundredths of a semitone). Because the display shows an overall value for
the entire analyzed section, the hot point controls in the lower section of the dialog are not used
on this tab.
Usage guidelines for the Pitch tab:
●
The result is an average value for the whole selection.
●
The method only works on monophonic material, not on chords or harmonies.
●
The algorithm assumes that the analyzed section has a reasonably stable pitch.
●
The material must be relatively well isolated from other sounds.
●
It is preferable to analyze the sustain portion of a sound rather than the attack. The pitch is
usually not stable during the attack.
160
Audio Analysis
Global Analysis ●
Some synthetic sounds may have a weak fundamental (first harmonic) which can irritate
the algorithm.
Global Analysis – Extra Tab
This tab shows the average DC Offset of the analyzed section and the Apparent Bit Resolution.
●
In the Global Analysis dialog, select the Extra tab.
The Apparent Bit Resolution attempts to detect the actual resolution in the audio. This is useful,
for example, if you want to check, whether a 24-bit file really uses 24 bits or if it was actually
recorded with 16-bit resolution and then expanded to 24 bits.
NOTE
For more accurate results on the bit resolution, use the Bit Meter.
RELATED LINKS
Bit Meter on page 395
Global Analysis – Errors Tab
This tab helps you find glitches and sections where the audio has clipped.
●
In the Global Analysis dialog, select the Errors tab.
Maximum Number of Error Points to Report
Allows you to restrict the reported numbers of hot points.
Minimum Time between 2 Points to Report
Controls the distance between points, so they do not appear too close to each other.
For example, setting this to 1 s ensures that there is always at least one second
between reported points.
Find Possible Glitches
Enables glitch analysis.
●
Threshold sets the value at which a change in level is considered to be a
glitch. The higher the value, the less sensitive the detection.
161
Audio Analysis
Global Analysis ●
Sensitivity is a length value that represents the length of time in which the
waveform must exceed the threshold to be reported as a glitch. The higher the
value, the less sensitive the detection.
●
Output Format displays the number of clipping occurrences that are detected
by the analysis. Clicking this value displays the number of clips in the Number
of Hot Points section in the lower left corner of the dialog.
NOTE
Make sure that the points that are detected by the algorithm are real glitches. Zoom
in and play back to check whether the detected points really indicate a problem.
Find Clipped Samples
Enables clipping analysis.
●
Threshold checks for a number of consecutive samples at full value to
determine whether clipping has occurred. The Threshold setting determines
the exact number of these consecutive samples that must occur for the
program to report clipping.
●
Output Format displays the number of clipping occurrences that are detected
by the analysis. Clicking this value displays the number of clips in the Number
of Hot Points section in the lower left corner of the dialog.
Error Detection
You can detect errors, such as glitches and sections where the audio has clipped. For a more
advanced error detection, use the Error Correction window.
Glitches
●
These are disruptions in the audio. Glitches may occur after problematic digital transfers,
after careless editing, etc. They manifest themselves as “clicks” or “pops” in the audio.
Clipping
●
A digital system has a finite number of levels that it can represent properly. When
recorded sound levels are too high or when the system cannot handle levels that have
been raised by digital processing, hard clipping occurs that you can hear as strong
distortion.
A sine waveform before clipping and after.
Result of the Analysis
This reports the number of glitches and clipping instances that have been detected.
Performing a Global Analysis
PREREQUISITE
In the Audio Editor, select the Analyze tab, click Global Analysis, and select the tab that you
want to include in the analysis.
162
Audio Analysis
Global Analysis PROCEDURE
1.
In the Global Analysis dialog, set up the parameters.
Most of the tabs have settings that determine how the analysis should be performed.
2.
If the Peak or Loudness tab is selected, move the cursor to the position that you want to
analyze.
The Peak and Loudness tabs report values for the position of the cursor.
3.
Click Analyze.
Results of the Global Analysis
Depending on the analysis type, one or several values are returned for the analyzed audio.
For the Pitch and Extra analyses, only one value is returned. The other analysis types provide
a number of positions in the file that indicate peaks, glitches, etc. These points are called hot
points.
Checking the Results of the Global Analysis
The results of the global analysis are marked with hot points. You can browse through these
points to see the results of the analysis.
PREREQUISITE
In the Audio Editor, select the Analyze tab, click Global Analysis, and perform the analysis.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Global Analysis dialog, click the tab that represents the values that you want to
check.
2.
Check the display for maximum/minimum values in the entire analyzed section.
3.
Decide which of these values you want to check.
4.
Click the value.
5.
Check the Number of Hot Points value at the bottom of the dialog.
The value shows the number of positions that were detected by the analysis.
6.
Use the scrollbar below the Number of Hot Points value to browse between the detected
positions.
The edit cursor shows the position in the wave window.
7.
To browse another property, click the corresponding tab, and then the value button.
NOTE
The result of the analysis is saved until you close the dialog or click Analyze again.
RELATED LINKS
Performing a Global Analysis on page 162
Creating Markers at Hot Points
Creating markers at hot points simplifies browsing the results of the global analysis.
PREREQUISITE
In the Audio Editor, select the Analyze tab, click Global Analysis, and perform the analysis.
163
Audio Analysis
Audio File Comparator PROCEDURE
1.
In the Global Analysis dialog, select the analysis type for which you want to create
markers at hot points.
You can add markers for only one channel at a time.
2.
Click the Create Markers at Hot Points button.
Temporary markers are added at all hot points.
RESULT
The markers are named using the following principle: “Hot point number (Channel)”. For
example, a marker at the third hot point in the left channel would be labeled “3 (L)”.
RELATED LINKS
Performing a Global Analysis on page 162
Focusing Hot Points
After a global analysis, you can focus the display on a specific hot point.
PREREQUISITE
In the Audio Editor, select the Analyze tab, click Global Analysis, and perform the analysis.
PROCEDURE
1.
Use the Number of Hot Points scroll bar to move the position indicator to the position in
which you are.
2.
Click Focus.
The wave window zooms in on the selected point. The Global Analysis dialog is reduced to
the bottom part.
3.
To return to the full view of the Global Analysis dialog, click Focus again.
Audio File Comparator
You can compare audio files to find differences.
Use the Audio File Comparator for the following:
●
Seeing and hearing the effect of using an equalizer
●
Checking the noise added by a processor
●
Checking the effects of data compression
●
Comparing two versions of an apparent similar recording to see if they are really the same
You can create a delta audio file that contains only the differences between the two compared
audio files. To see and hear small differences easily, you can amplify them.
Markers can be automatically added at positions in the audio file where differences are detected.
Audio File Comparator Dialog
In this dialog, you can compare two audio files.
●
To open the Audio File Comparator dialog, select the Analyze tab in the Audio Editor and
click Audio File Comparator.
164
Audio Analysis
Audio File Comparator Files to Compare
Allows you to select the two audio files that you want to compare.
Generate Delta File
If this option is activated, a delta file is created that contains only the differences
between the two compared files.
Difference Amplification
Amplifies the differences in the delta file to facilitate seeing and hearing them.
Create Markers at Points of Difference
Inserts markers at points where differences are detected. You can insert difference
markers in the first, the second, or the delta file.
One Marker Pair Encompasses the Differences
If this option is activated, one marker pair is inserted that encompasses the range
that contains differences.
Multiple Markers
If this option is activated, multiple markers are inserted according to the Maximum
Number of Markers and Minimum Time Between Two Markers settings.
●
Maximum Number of Markers sets the maximum number of markers to be
inserted.
●
Minimum Time Between Two Markers determines the density of the
markers to be inserted.
Comparing Audio Files
The file comparator lets you see the differences between two files.
PROCEDURE
1.
Open the audio files that you want to compare.
2.
In the Audio Editor, select the Analyze tab.
3.
In the Tools section, click Audio File Comparator.
4.
If more than two audio files are open, select the two files that you want to compare.
165
Audio Analysis
3D Frequency Analysis 5.
Optional: Activate Generate Delta File.
This creates a new audio file that contains only the differences between the compared
audio files.
6.
Optional: Make marker settings in the Create Markers at Points of Differences section.
This creates markers at differing points to facilitate finding the differences.
7.
Click OK.
3D Frequency Analysis
Using the 3D Frequency Analysis, you can view an audio file in the frequency domain.
Use the 3D Frequency Analysis for the following:
●
Viewing the frequency spectrum distribution in a mix
●
Identifying which frequencies can be reduced or boosted as a basis for equalizing
●
Viewing parts of the frequency spectrum that are occupied by a background noise that you
want to filter out
A wave display (time domain) informs you about the start and end of a sound in a file, but lacks
information about the timbral contents of the file that a frequency graph (frequency domain)
provides. The graph that is used in WaveLab Pro is often referred to as an FFT (Fast Fourier
Transform) plot. If you select a stereo recording, a mix of the two channels is analyzed.
The wheel control allows you to view the frequency spectrum from different angles. For example,
you can open several 3D Frequency Analysis windows, each with a different perspective. This
allows you to get a better view of an otherwise crowded graph.
Creating a Graph for 3D Frequency Analysis
The length of the selected audio affects the accuracy of the analysis. For short selections, the
result is more detailed. Consider making a separate analysis of the attack in which the most
drastic variations occur.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the wave window, select the section of the file that you want to analyze.
If you make no selection, the whole audio file is analyzed.
166
Audio Analysis
3D Frequency Analysis 2.
In the Audio Editor, select the Analyze tab.
3.
In the Tools section, click 3D Frequency Analysis.
The audio is analyzed.
4.
To edit the analysis parameters, click 3D Analysis Options.
5.
Adjust the parameters and click OK.
The audio is re-analyzed.
3D Analysis Options
In the options dialog of the 3D Frequency Analysis dialog, you can define which frequency
range is analyzed and modify the appearance of the graph for the 3D frequency analysis.
●
In the 3D Frequency Analysis dialog, click the 3D Analysis Options button.
Top/Bottom Frequency
Specifies the highest/lowest frequency of the range.
Logarithmic Ruler (Octaves)
Divides the frequency ruler in equally spaced octaves.
Amplitude
Select whether you want the peaks to be proportional to their amplitude (Linear) or
to their power (Logarithmic with Decibel Scale).
Colors
Defines the color scheme of the graph.
Background
Defines the background color.
167
Error Correction
You can search for unwanted clicks and digital artifacts in an audio file. You can use several
detection and restoration methods to detect, mark and name, jump to, play back, and remove
individual audio errors.
You can also restore damaged portions of an audio file by using waveform replacement. The
Correction tab gives you access to the error detection and correction tools.
NOTE
Because errors can have multiple origins and effects, various algorithms are needed to cover
these cases. Experiment with the settings to find the best parameters to detect the errors in your
files.
Correction Tab
This tab provides access to the error detection and correction tools.
Scan Range
In this section, you can specify the range of audio that you want to search for errors.
Scan Range
●
Entire File searches the whole audio file for errors.
●
Define as Current Selection searches the selected audio range for errors.
Once defined, you can change the audio selection without altering this search
area. The search area indicator is displayed on the ruler.
The text field displays the active scan area.
Start Scan at Cursor
If this option is activated, the scan starts at the edit cursor position. Once defined,
you can change the cursor position without altering the defined scan start position.
The scan start position indicator is displayed on the ruler.
168
Error Correction
Correction Tab Detection
In this section, you can specify how to detect errors.
Presets
Allows you to save and restore error detection presets.
Detect All Errors
Searches the specified range from the beginning to the end and creates pairs of
error markers for each detected error without performing any correction.
Previous Error
Returns to the last detected error.
Detect Next Error
Searches for the next error, starting at a specified position or at the end of the last
detected error.
Play
Starts playback of the current audio selection while taking into account the pre-roll
and post-roll settings. You can make pre-roll and post-roll settings on the transport
bar.
Mark
Sets a pair of error markers to the audio selection without performing any
correction.
Unmark
Deletes the error markers that are surrounding the audio selection.
Correction
In this section, you can specify the method that is used to correct errors.
Correct Error
Restores the audio selection with the default correction method. You can select
another correction method from the pop-up menu.
Error Correction Method
Allows you to select the error correction method.
●
Linear Interpolation draws a straight line between the first and the last
selected samples.
●
Optimal for Small Clicks – 1 ms is optimal to remove clicks smaller than 1 ms.
●
Optimal for Common Clicks – 3 ms is optimal to remove clicks smaller than 3
ms.
●
Waveform Replacement – 500 ms replaces the corrupt samples with the best
match detected in the material up to 500 milliseconds to the left/right.
●
Waveform Replacement – 4 s replaces the corrupt samples with the best
match detected in the material up to 4 seconds to the left/right.
●
Waveform Replacement – Left 6 s replaces the corrupt samples with the best
match detected in the material up to 6 seconds to the left.
169
Error Correction
Correction Tab ●
Waveform Replacement – Right 6 s replaces the corrupt samples with the
best match detected in the material up to 6 seconds to the right.
●
Inpainting replaces the corrupt samples using spectral inpainting.
Correct All Marked Errors
Corrects all marked errors in the specified range.
Previous Error/Next Error
Jumps to the previous/next error marker pair.
Previous Correction/Next Correction
Jumps to the previous/next correction marker pair.
Selection
This section displays information about the detected errors and allows you to adjust the error
area.
Selection Adjustment
Defines by how many samples the selection edges are moved, when you use the
Adjust Selection buttons to adjust the error area.
Move Left Edge of Selection to the Left/Move Left Edge of Selection to the Right
Moves the left edge of the selection to the left/right.
This lets you finely adjust an audio selection that was suggested by the detection
function.
Move Right Edge of Selection to the Left/Move Right Edge of Selection to the Right
Moves the right edge of the selection to the left/right.
This lets you finely adjust an audio selection that was suggested by the detection
function.
Options
This section provides a range of preferences for playing back, viewing, and marking any detected
errors.
Zoom Level
Specifies the zoom level when displaying an error.
Auto-Play
Automatically plays back the error area after it has been detected or corrected.
Set Markers around Corrected Errors
Creates correction markers around the audio section each time an error is corrected.
This area can be larger than the marked error area when crossfades are performed
by the corrector.
Remove Markers After Correction
Removes the error marker each time an error is corrected.
Jump to Previous Error After Correction/Jump to Next Error After Correction
Automatically jumps to the previous/next marked error when you click Correct
Error.
170
Error Correction
Correcting Errors Correcting Errors
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Editor, select the Correction tab.
2.
In the Scan Range section, do one of the following:
3.
●
To scan the whole audio file for errors, select Entire File.
●
To scan the selected audio range for errors, make a selection range in the audio file
and select Define as Current Selection.
In the Detection section, select an error detection method from the Presets menu, and
set the parameters.
Depending on the method that you have selected, different detection parameters are
available.
4.
In the Detection section, do one of the following:
●
To detect the next error, click Detect Next Error. WaveLab Pro analyzes the audio
file from the beginning and stops at the first detected error. This allows you to
individually correct each error with the specific correction method.
●
To detect all errors, click Detect All Errors. This allows you to quickly correct all
errors.
The errors are marked by error markers.
5.
In the Correction section, select an error correction method from the Error Correction
Method menu.
6.
In the Correction section, do one of the following:
●
To correct an error, click inside an error marker pair and click Correct Error.
●
To correct all errors in the specified range, click Correct All Marked Errors.
RESULT
The errors are corrected with the selected correction method.
171
Offline Processing
Offline processes are useful for a variety of editing purposes and creative effects, for example, if
the computer is too slow for real-time processing or if the editing requires more than one pass.
After the processing, the audio file is permanently altered.
Process Tab
Level
Gain
Opens the Gain dialog where you can apply a gain to change the level of an audio
file.
Envelope
Opens the Envelope dialog where you can create a level envelope which can be
applied to a selected range or an entire audio file.
This is useful if you want to even out loud and quiet parts or create a sophisticated
fade in/fade out, for example.
Remove DC Offset
DC offset in a file affects the loudness. Remove DC Offset sets the DC offset to zero.
Normalizing
Level
Opens the Level Normalizer dialog where you can change the peak level of an audio
file.
Loudness
Opens the Loudness Normalizer dialog where you can specify the loudness of a file.
Pan
Opens the Pan Normalizer dialog which allows you to ensure that both channels of
a stereo file have the same level or loudness, and helps you to get the best possible
stereo balance.
Fading
Fade In/Fade Out
Allows you to apply a fade in or fade out. Right-click the button to open the Curve
pop-up menu.
172
Offline Processing
Process Tab Curve
Allows you to select preset fade curves.
●
Linear changes the level linearly.
●
Sinus (*) changes the level according to a sine curve. When used in a
crossfade, the loudness (RMS) remains constant during the transition.
●
Square-Root (*) changes the level according to a square-root curve. When
used in a crossfade, the loudness (RMS) remains constant during the
transition.
●
Sinusoid changes the level according to a sine curve.
●
Logarithmic changes the level according to a logarithmic curve.
●
Exponential changes the level according to an exponential curve.
●
Exponential+ changes the level according to a more pronounced exponential
curve.
Time & Pitch
Time Stretching
Opens the Time Stretching dialog where you can change the duration of an audio
selection.
Pitch Shifting
Opens the Pitch Shifting dialog where can change the pitch of your audio.
Resample
Opens the Sample Rate dialog where you can change the sample rate of your audio.
Pitch Bend
Opens the Pitch Bend dialog where you can gradually change the pitch of your
audio using an envelope curve.
Pitch Quantizing
Opens the Pitch Quantizing dialog where you can automatically detect and correct
the pitch of your audio. The input signal is quantized to discrete notes.
Reverse
Creates a backwards-tape effect.
Correct
Error Correction
Lets you select the default error correction method.
●
Linear Interpolation draws a straight line between the first and the last
selected samples.
●
Optimal for Small Clicks – 1 ms is optimal to remove clicks smaller than 1 ms.
●
Optimal for Common Clicks – 3 ms is optimal to remove clicks smaller than 3
ms.
●
Waveform Replacement – 500 ms replaces the corrupt samples with the best
match detected in the material up to 500 milliseconds to the left/right.
●
Waveform Replacement – 4 s replaces the corrupt samples with the best
match detected in the material up to 4 seconds to the left/right.
●
Waveform Replacement – Left 6 s replaces the corrupt samples with the best
match detected in the material up to 6 seconds to the left.
●
Waveform Replacement – Right 6 s replaces the corrupt samples with the
best match detected in the material up to 6 seconds to the right.
173
Offline Processing
Applying Processing Loop
Tweaker
Opens the Loop Tweaker dialog where you can adjust the loop start and end points,
and crossfade the loop boundaries.
Tone Uniformizer
Opens the Loop Tone Uniformizer dialog where you can create loops from sounds
that are not optimal for looping.
Split
Auto Split
Opens the Auto Split dialog where you can specify how to split clips.
Other
Invert Phase
Turns the signal upside down.
Effect Morphing
Opens the Effect Morphing dialog, where you can gradually mix two audio ranges
that have different effects/processing applied to them.
External Tools
Allows you to execute and configure external tools.
Applying Processing
Processing can be applied to a selection or to a whole file. For some operations processing the
entire file is necessary.
NOTE
If Process Whole File If There Is No Selection is activated in the Editing tab of the Audio Files
Preferences, the whole file is automatically processed if no selection exists.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the wave window, make a selection.
2.
In the Audio Editor, select the Process tab.
3.
Select the type of processing that you want to apply.
4.
If a dialog opens, make the settings and click Apply to render the effect to file.
Gain Dialog
In this dialog, you can apply a gain to change the level of an audio file.
●
To open the Gain dialog, select the Process tab in the Audio Editor, and click Gain in the
Level section.
174
Offline Processing
Level Normalizer Dialog Click Find Current Peak Level to obtain a report on the peak level of the audio selection, or
the whole file if there is no selection. This is useful if you want to calculate how much you can
increase the overall gain of a file without clipping (exceeding 0 dB), for example.
This processor also lets you add clipping. Clipping happens when the gain is raised to a point
where distortion is added. While this is normally not intended, mild clipping can add some
punch, for example, to accentuate the attack of a drum sound.
Level Normalizer Dialog
In this dialog, you can change the peak level of an audio file.
●
To open the Level Normalizer dialog, select the Process tab in the Audio Editor, and click
Level in the Normalizing section.
This dialog is also available as a multipass plug-in in the Batch Processor window.
Peak Level
Enter the peak level (in dB) that you want the audio selection to have.
Stereo Link
Applies the gain to both channels.
Reference
In this pop-up menu, select whether WaveLab Pro uses sample values (digital peaks)
or analog reconstructed values (true peaks).
Mix to Mono
Mixes the left and the right channel. The resulting mono file has the specified peak
level. This ensures a mix without clipping.
Find Current Peak Value
Creates a report on the peak level of the current audio selection or the whole audio
file if there is no selection.
175
Offline Processing
Loudness Normalizer Loudness Normalizer
You can use the Loudness Normalizer to achieve a specific loudness.
Increasing the loudness to a specific value can provoke clipping. To remedy this, a peak limiter
(Peak Master plug-in) can be part of the process. The Loudness Normalizer raises the loudness
and limits peaks in the signal at the same time if needed, to achieve the wanted loudness.
This process happens in several stages, first an analysis and then the final rendering.
Loudness Normalizer Dialog
In this dialog, you can specify the loudness of a file.
●
To open the Loudness Normalizer dialog, select the Process tab in the Audio Editor, and
click Loudness in the Normalizing section.
This dialog is also available as a multipass plug-in in the Batch Processor window.
Loudness (EBU R-128)
Loudness to Achieve
If the loudness cannot be achieved with a simple positive gain change, a limiter must
come into action to prevent clipping.
Here, specify the loudness that you want to achieve. The EBU R-128 recommendation
for broadcast is -23 dB.
Specifying high values might require a gain outside the normal capabilities of the
limiter, which can cause distortion.
It is recommended to use Statistics after specifying a loudness. This way, you know
how much the gain needs to be raised and if peak limiting needs to be applied. If
heavy limiting is necessary, this might degrade the audio quality. In such cases, a
warning is shown after applying the process, allowing you to undo it.
Catch Loudness from Audio Selection
Sets the Loudness to Achieve value to the average loudness found in the audio file.
Reference
This pop-up menu allows you to select a reference: the loudness of the entire file
(EBU R-128 recommendation), the average loudest 3 second audio section (Top of
176
Offline Processing
Loudness Normalizer Loudness Range), or the loudest 3 seconds audio section (Maximum Short-Term
Loudness).
Peaks
In this pop-up menu, select whether WaveLab Pro should limit the sample values
(Digital Peaks) or the analog reconstructed samples (True Peaks).
Peak Limiter
Max Peak Level
Here, specify the maximum peak level of the resulting audio. The lower this value,
the lower the loudness.
Softness
Affects how the peak master operates. A high setting maximizes the perceived
loudness effect, but can result in a slight harshness of the sound.
Adjust this parameter to optimize the balance between sound quality and the effect
that you want to achieve.
Pre-Processing Options
Remove DC Offset
DC offset in the file affects the loudness computation. Therefore it is recommended
that you keep this option activated.
Attempts/Analysis
Tolerance (+/-)
If the Loudness to Achieve requires peak limiting, this also reduces the loudness
to some degree. This cannot be computed in advance and cannot be automatically
applied to the gain change. Instead, several simulation passes are performed to find
the best possible gain. This option lets you define the precision of the result that you
want to achieve.
Maximum Number of Passes
WaveLab Pro performs as many analysis passes as needed to match the precision
that you want to achieve. Use this option to specify the maximum number of passes
to be performed.
Authorized Peak Compression
As too much compression degrades the audio quality, you can specify a limit for the
applied compression. The value can be set between -1 and -20 dB. Consider to lower
the Loudness to Achieve, as this renders better results.
Warn If Unmatched
If this option is activated, you are warned if the normalizing process does not
meet the specified loudness/precision. This option is not available during batch
processing.
Statistics
Opens a window that shows you information about the file to be processed. It shows
any DC offset, the current loudness, the current peak level, and the required gain to
achieve the specified loudness. Furthermore, you are informed if limiting is required.
RELATED LINKS
EBU Loudness Standard R-128 on page 36
177
Offline Processing
Pan Normalizer Dialog Pan Normalizer Dialog
This dialog allows you to ensure that both channels of a stereo file have the same level or
loudness, and helps you to get the best possible stereo balance.
●
To open the Pan Normalizer dialog, select the Process tab in the Audio Editor, and click
Pan in the Normalizing section.
This dialog is also available as a multipass plug-in in the Batch Processor window.
This process first analyzes the audio and then renders any required level changes. You must have
a stereo selection in a stereo file to apply this process.
Peak Level
Raises the channel with the lowest peak level to match the peak level of the other
channel.
Loudness (EBU R-128)
Analyzes the loudness of both channels and adjusts their gain so that both channels
get the same loudness. No clipping can be introduced using the pan normalizer.
Remove DC Offset
Removes DC offsets which affect the loudness computation. We recommend to keep
this option activated.
Analyze Channel Difference
Shows the current loudness ratio between the left and right channels. The result
changes depending on the selected Peak/Loudness mode.
Envelope Dialog
In this dialog, you can create a level envelope which can be applied to a selected range or
a whole audio file. This is useful if you want to even-out loud and quiet parts or create a
sophisticated fade in or fade out, for example.
●
To open the Envelope dialog, select the Process tab in the Audio Editor, and click
Envelope in the Level section.
178
Offline Processing
Envelope Dialog The dialog shows a waveform with an envelope curve (initially a straight line). A vertical ruler
displays the level in dB, and the horizontal ruler displays the timeline.
The following options are available:
●
Undo/Redo the Last Operation
●
Deselect the Envelope Points
●
Delete the Selected Envelope Points
●
Reset the Selected Envelope Points
●
Reset the Whole Envelope
●
Flip the Envelope Around the Horizontal Axis
●
Reverse the Envelope Time Sequence
●
Toggle the Envelope Smoothing
Basic Envelope Operations
By adding points to the envelope curve, you can create an envelope curve that changes the
volume of the material over time. When you point the mouse in the display or move a point, the
current position and level change is shown in the field above the display.
●
To add a point, double click the envelope curve.
●
To select a point, click it.
●
To select several points, click and drag the selection rectangle.
●
To move a point, click and drag it. If more than one point is selected, all points are moved.
●
To move the whole curve up or down, click the envelope curve, and drag up or down.
●
To move the curve segments vertically, click the curve and drag up or down.
●
To move two points horizontally, press Shift, click the curve segment between two points,
and drag left or right.
179
Offline Processing
Fades in Audio Files ●
To move two points vertically, press Ctrl/Cmd, click the curve segment between two
points, and drag up or down.
Fades in Audio Files
A fade in is a gradual increase in level and a fade out is a gradual decrease in level.
You can create fades by selecting an individual fading type for each fade in/fade out.
Creating a Fade In and Fade Out
PROCEDURE
1.
In the wave window, make a selection.
2.
In the Audio Editor, select the Process tab.
3.
Depending whether you want to create a fade in or a fade out, select one of the following
options in the Fading section:
●
To apply the default fade type, click the Fade In or Fade Out icon.
●
To select another fade type, click Fade In or Fade Out below the fade icon. From the
pop-up menu, select the type of fade that you want to create.
Applying Easy Fades
The Easy Fade function allows you to quickly apply a default fade in or fade out to an audio file
via shortcut.
The shape of the fade is governed by the Fade In and Fade Out settings in the Fading section of
the Process tab.
PROCEDURE
1.
2.
In the Audio Editor, make one of the following selections:
●
From the start of the audio file to where you want the fade in to end.
●
From the position where you want the fade out to start to the end of the audio file.
Click Ctrl/Cmd-D.
180
Offline Processing
Crossfades Crossfades
A crossfade is a gradual fade between two sounds, where one is faded in and the other faded
out. You can automatically create a crossfade when pasting an audio section into another.
Creating Crossfades
The material that you want to crossfade can either be in two different sections of the same audio
file or in two different audio files.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the wave window, select the section that you want to fade in.
2.
Select the Edit tab.
3.
In the Clipboard section, click Copy.
4.
Select the section that you want to fade out.
The length of this selection determines the length of the actual crossfade (check the length
on the status bar). The section can be within the selected audio file or in another wave
window. However, the selection must not be longer than the selection that you just copied.
5.
Depending whether you want to create a fade in or a fade out, select one of the following
options in the Clipboard section:
●
To apply the default crossfade type, click the Paste and Crossfade icon.
●
To select another crossfade type, click Paste and Crossfade below the crossfade
icon. From the pop-up menu, select the type of crossfade that you want to create.
RESULT
The crossfade is created. Any material that originally appeared after the selection in the file into
which you paste, is moved so that it now appears after the pasted material.
Any excess material in the copied selection appears after the fade at full level.
NOTE
If both files already have full level sections in the crossfade area (for example, if you have
normalized both files), clipping and distortion might occur. If this happens, reduce the amplitude
of both files by 3 dB to 6 dB and try again.
AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK
Play back the file and adjust the crossfade if necessary.
Paste and Crossfade Options
These options allow you to select a crossfade type for pasting.
●
Select the Edit tab in the Audio Editor, and click Paste and Crossfade in the Clipboard
section.
Linear (Equal Gain)
Level changes linearly.
Sinus (Equal Power)
Level changes according to a sine curve, the power of the mix remains constant.
Square-Root (Equal Power)
Level changes according to a square-root curve, the power of the mix remains
constant.
181
Offline Processing
Phase Inverting Phase Inverting
Inverting the phase turns the signal upside down. The most common use for this function is to
fix a stereo recording if one of the channels has been recorded out of phase with the other.
Inverting the Audio Phase
PROCEDURE
1.
Optional: If you only want to invert the phase for a specific time range of the audio file,
create a selection range in the wave window.
2.
In the Audio Editor, select the Process tab.
3.
In the Other section, click Invert Phase.
Inverting the Phase of an Audio Montage Track
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Montage window, select the Process tab.
2.
In the Process section, click Invert Phase.
RESULT
An inverted phase is indicated by an icon in the montage window.
Reversing Audio
You can reverse an audio file or a part of an audio file as if playing a tape backwards.
PROCEDURE
1.
Optional: If you only want to reverse a specific time range of the audio file, create a
selection range in the wave window.
2.
In the Audio Editor, select the Process tab.
3.
In the Time & Pitch section, click Reverse.
DC Offset
DC offset means that there is a too large DC (direct current) component in the signal. This most
often occurs due to mismatches between various types of recording equipment.
A DC offset is problematic for the following reasons:
●
It affects the zero crossing position.
●
Some processing options do not give optimal results when performed on files with a DC
offset.
182
Offline Processing
Time Stretching Removing DC Offset
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Editor, open the audio file that you want to check for DC offset and that you
want to fix.
2.
Select the Process tab.
3.
In the Level section, click Remove DC Offset.
A dialog opens, stating the amount of DC offset in the audio file. You can also create a
selection range in the wave window and select this option to only show the DC offset in the
selection range.
NOTE
This function should be applied to whole files, because the problem is normally present
throughout the entire recording.
4.
Click OK to remove the DC offset.
Time Stretching
Time stretching is an operation that allows you to change the length of a recording without
affecting its pitch.
With time stretching, you can make audio material longer or shorter. This function is most often
used to make a section of audio fit in with some other material. You select the material to be
stretched and use the options in the Time Stretching dialog to find a stretch factor. This is done
by specifying a length or a tempo, according to what the situation requires.
Time Stretching Dialog
In this dialog, you can change the duration of an audio selection, usually without changing its
pitch. You can stretch a selection to a specified duration (in minutes, seconds, and milliseconds),
tempo (in bpm), or stretch factor (as percentage).
●
To open the Time Stretching dialog, select the Process tab in the Audio Editor and click
Time Stretching in the Time & Pitch section.
This dialog is also available as a monopass plug-in in the Batch Processor window.
Source (Audio Selection)
Duration
If Edit Tempo is activated, you can change the tempo of the audio source. The
number of bars and beats and the stretch factor is updated automatically.
183
Offline Processing
Time Stretching If Edit Bars is activated, you can set the number of bars and beats and the signature
for the audio source. The source tempo and according to the stretch factor is
automatically updated.
Result
Target Duration
If this option is activated, the audio source changes its duration.
Target Tempo
If this option is activated, the audio source changes its tempo. For this to work, you
must specify the original tempo or the number of bars and beats.
Target Stretch Factor
Indicates how much the audio duration changes. This parameter is automatically
updated when you edit the other parameters, but you can also activate this option to
edit it manually.
Reset
Resets the stretch factor to 100 %, that is, no stretch.
Method
Preserve Pitch
If this option is activated, the pitch of the audio material is not affected when you
apply time stretch. If this option is deactivated, the pitch changes proportionally with
the time stretch ratio.
Method pop-up menu
Auto/Preview: Automatically selects the best time/frequency trade-off for realtime/preview performance. This is the fastest setting, but might not provide optimal
results in all cases.
Time Localization ++ (Instruments, Voices): Selects full-time localization. This is a
good setting for single instruments and solo voices.
Time Localization +: Selects the time/frequency localization with the emphasis on
time localization. If the previous mode produces echo artifacts, try this option.
Average Time/Frequency Localization: Sets the time/frequency localization halfway
between the time and frequency domains. It is the best setting for all general
purpose signals.
Frequency Localization +: Selects time/frequency localization with the emphasis on
frequency localization. This is a good setting for classical music.
Frequency Localization ++ (Complex Mixes): Selects the highest possible frequency
localization. This setting might not work well on material with many sharp attack
transients, but it can produce good results with less transient/percussive material.
Transcribe Mode (for Large Changes): This uses a content-aware algorithm to
time stretch and pitch shift music by up to 4 times the original length without losing
information critical to transcription, such as attack transients.
Quality pop-up menu
The High Quality and Best (Slow) modes provide high-quality time stretching, but
the processing takes longer. For most uses, the Standard Quality mode is sufficient.
Use Modulation Envelope
If this option is activated, the stretch factor is modulated over time. In the Result
section, you can set the Maximum Stretch Factor for the modulation envelope.
184
Offline Processing
Pitch Shift Time Stretching Limitations
Time stretch is a complicated Digital Signal Processing (DSP) operation, that always affects the
sound quality to some extent.
●
For speech, stretch factors within a ±30 % range provide good results.
●
For composite music, try to limit the range to ±10 %.
●
For sensitive material, like solo piano, try to limit the range to ±3 %.
ZTX Time Stretching Processor
WaveLab Pro uses the ZTX technology for high quality time stretching.
Pitch Shift
Pitch shift allows you to detect and to change the pitch of a sound, with or without affecting its
length. This is useful for fixing an off-key vocal note in a live recording, or for tuning the pitch of a
kick drum sample to fit a particular song, for example.
Pitch Shifting Dialog
In this dialog, you can change the pitch of a sound.
●
To open the Pitch Shifting dialog, select the Process tab in the Audio Editor, and click
Pitch Shifting in the Time & Pitch section.
This dialog is also available as a monopass plug-in in the Batch Processor window.
185
Offline Processing
Pitch Shift Semitones
Specifies the amount of pitch change in semitones.
Cents
Specifies the amount of pitch change in cents.
Find Current Pitch of Audio Selection
Analyzes the pitch of the selected audio and displays it below this button.
According to the current pitch, compute the required shift to match the key hereafter
Click to adjust Amount of Pitch parameters automatically, based on the detected
pitch and the pitch specified in the value field below this button.
Pitch field
Specifies the resulting pitch.
Length Preservation
Specifies how the length of the selection is affected by the operation:
●
A setting of 100 means that the length of the audio remains unchanged.
●
A setting of 0 means that the program behaves like a tape recorder, when the
speed of its tape is changed. For example, if you raise the pitch by one octave,
the audio is half as long.
●
Intermediate values give results in between these two extremes.
For large transposition values, the lower this setting, the better the quality of the
effect.
Method pop-up menu
Auto/Preview: Automatically selects the best time/frequency trade-off for realtime/preview performance. This is the fastest setting, but might not provide optimal
results in all cases.
Time Localization ++ (Instruments, Voices): Selects full time localization. This is a
good setting for single instruments and solo voices.
Time Localization +: Selects the time/frequency localization with the emphasis on
time localization. If the previous mode produces echo artifacts, try this option.
Average Time/Frequency Localization: Sets the time/frequency localization halfway
between the time and frequency domains. It is the best setting for all general
purpose signals.
Frequency Localization +: Selects the time/frequency localization with the emphasis
on frequency localization. This is a good setting for classical music.
Frequency Localization ++ (Complex Mixes): Selects the highest possible frequency
localization. This setting might not work well on material with many sharp attack
transients, but it can produce good results with less transient/percussive material.
186
Offline Processing
Pitch Quantizing Dialog Transcribe Mode (for Large Changes): This uses a content-aware algorithm to
time-stretch and pitch-shift music by up to 4 times the original length without losing
information critical to transcription, such as attack transients.
Quality pop-up menu
The High Quality and Best (Slow) modes provide high-quality time stretching, but
the processing takes longer. For most uses, the Standard Quality mode is sufficient.
Correct Formants
If this option is activated, changing the pitch of vocal material gives a more realistic
result. When processing non-vocal material, leave this option deactivated, because it
uses a slightly slower processing algorithm.
NOTE
This algorithm might cause a noticeable increase in signal level.
Modulate Formants Correction
If this option is activated, the formant correction is modulated over time.
NOTE
If the envelope is not used and the formant correction is activated, a 100 %
correction is performed.
Pitch Quantizing Dialog
This dialog allows you to automatically detect and correct the pitch of an audio file. The input
signal is quantized to discrete notes.
●
To open the Pitch Quantizing dialog, select the Process tab in the Audio Editor, and click
Pitch Quantizing in the Time & Pitch section.
This dialog is also available as a monopass plug-in in the Batch Processor window.
Pitch quantize works best on recordings that have monophonic signals, such as voice or single
instruments.
Reference Frequency
Defines the reference tuning (in Hz) for the pitch shift.
Liaison Time
Defines the time it takes for the correction to reach the full correction amount.
Typically, sung notes are slightly unstable at the beginning, because the attack phase
of a sound has a higher amount of noise and because singers gradually adjust their
tuning after the onset of the note.
The liaison time makes the pitch shift sound more natural, because it mimics this
effect.
187
Offline Processing
Pitch Bend Preserve Formants
If this option is activated, the formants are corrected according to the pitch shift
amount.
Quality pop-up menu
The High Quality and Best (Slow) modes provide high-quality time stretching, but
the processing takes longer. For most uses, the Standard Quality mode is sufficient.
Pitch Bend
Pitch bend allows you to change the pitch of a sound over time. Changing the pitch using pitch
bend affects its duration unless Preserve Duration is activated.
This function can be used for creating the classic tape stop effect, or for blending the tempo/
pitch of one track into another, for example.
You can draw the curve that you want the pitch to follow. The pitch offset is displayed on the
vertical ruler of the envelope and the range of the envelope effects can be adjusted. Positive
pitch values produce sounds with a higher pitch and a shorter length, negative values produce
sounds with a lower pitch and a longer length.
If Preserve Duration is activated, you can choose the algorithm that is used to perform the
pitch bend operation. Depending on the type of audio material you are processing, choose the
appropriate mode. You can also adjust the quality used when processing the pitch bend. The
quality setting and the selected mode affect the processing time for this effect.
Pitch Bend Dialog
In this dialog, you can gradually change the pitch of a sound using an envelope curve.
●
To open the Pitch Bend dialog, select the Process tab in the Audio Editor, and click Pitch
Bend in the Time & Pitch section.
The following options are available at the top of the dialog:
●
Undo/Redo the Last Operation
●
Deselect the Envelope Points
●
Delete the Selected Envelope Points
●
Reset the Selected Envelope Points
●
Reset the Whole Envelope
188
Offline Processing
Resample ●
Flip the Envelope Around the Horizontal Axis
●
Reverse the Envelope Time Sequence
●
Toggle the Envelope Smoothing
The following options are available at the bottom of the dialog:
Preserve Duration
If this option is activated, a time stretching process is applied to compensate for the
change of duration caused by the pitch modifications.
Method pop-up menu
Auto/Preview: Automatically selects the best time/frequency trade-off for realtime/preview performance. This is the fastest setting, but might not provide optimal
results in all cases.
Time Localization ++ (Instruments, Voices): Selects full time localization. This is a
good setting for single instruments and solo voices.
Time Localization +: Selects the time/frequency localization with the emphasis on
time localization. If the previous mode produces echo artifacts, try this option.
Average Time/Frequency Localization: Sets the time/frequency localization halfway
between the time and frequency domains. It is the best setting for all general
purpose signals.
Frequency Localization +: Selects the time/frequency localization with the emphasis
on frequency localization. This is a good setting for classical music.
Frequency Localization ++ (Complex Mixes): Selects the highest possible frequency
localization. This setting might not work well on material with many sharp attack
transients, but it can produce good results with less transient/percussive material.
Transcribe Mode (for Large Changes): This uses a content aware algorithm to
time stretch and pitch shift music by up to 4 times the original length without losing
information critical to transcription, such as attack transients.
Varies with Envelope
If this option is activated, time stretching is continuously applied, but varies,
depending on the pitch changes. If this option is deactivated, time stretching is
applied equally to all audio parts.
In both cases, the global audio duration is preserved. The option is activated by
default because this gives a more natural result. Note, however, that this affects the
quality of the audio.
Quality pop-up menu
The High Quality and Best (Slow) modes provide high quality time stretching, but
the processing takes longer. For most uses, the Standard Quality mode is sufficient.
Range (Semitones)
Specifies the maximum range in semitones for the pitch change. When you change
this value, this is indicated in the vertical ruler.
Resample
You can change the sample rate of a recording. This is useful if the file that you want to use in an
audio system was recorded at a sample rate that this system does not support.
NOTE
●
Sample rate conversion from a low frequency upwards does not improve the sound
quality. The high frequencies that were lost cannot be restored by a conversion.
189
Offline Processing
Effect Morphing ●
If you resample to a lower frequency, high frequency material is lost. Therefore,
converting down and then up again leads to a degradation in sound quality.
NOTE
Using the Resampler plug-in in the quality mode High changes the sample rate results in the
same quality as when using the Resample option in the Audio Editor. However, that is only the
case if the sample rate in the Sample Rate dialog exists in the values of the Resampler Sample
Rate pop-up menu. If you choose a custom sample rate, another algorithm is used, which results
in a lower quality of what the Resampler can achieve.
Converting a Sample Rate
NOTE
Sample rate conversion is always applied to the entire file.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Editor, select the Process tab.
2.
In the Time & Pitch section, click Resample.
3.
In the Sample Rate dialog, select a sample rate from the pop-up menu.
4.
Click OK.
Effect Morphing
Effect morphing allows you to smoothly morph from one effect to another, or from an
unprocessed audio segment to a processed audio segment.
Effect morphing always involves two audio ranges. For example, two versions of the same audio
range, of which one is processed and the other unprocessed.
Effect Morphing Dialog
In this dialog, you can gradually mix two audio ranges that have different effects or processing
applied to them.
●
To open the Effect Morphing dialog, select the Process tab in the Audio Editor, and click
Effect Morphing in the Other section.
190
Offline Processing
Effect Morphing The dialog consists of a waveform display that shows the current selection and an envelope
curve (by default a straight line) in the middle. By adding points to the envelope, you can create a
curve that is used for the morphing process.
The following options are available at the top of the dialog:
●
Undo/Redo the Last Operation
●
Deselect the Envelope Points
●
Delete the Selected Envelope Points
●
Reset the Selected Envelope Points
●
Reset the Whole Envelope
●
Flip the Envelope Around the Horizontal Axis
●
Reverse the Envelope Time Sequence
●
Toggle the Envelope Smoothing
The following options are available in the lower right corner of the dialog:
Mix Current Selection With
Unprocessed Selection mixes the audio selection with the unprocessed version of
the same audio.
Clipboard mixes the audio selection with the audio in the clipboard.
RELATED LINKS
Basic Envelope Operations on page 179
Setting Up the Effect Morphing
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Editor, open the two audio files for which you want to apply effect morphing.
Effect morphing always involves two audio ranges.
2.
In the wave window, make a selection range over the time that you want the effect
morphing to take place.
3.
Process this range by using any Master Section effects or offline processing.
You cannot use processing/effects that alter the length of the selection, for example, time
stretching.
4.
Select the Process tab.
5.
In the Other section, click Effect Morphing.
6.
Make sure that Unprocessed Selection is activated.
The current processed selection is mixed with an unprocessed version of the same
selection.
7.
Adjust your envelope points over time between 0 % and 100 %.
This determines the level and direction of the morph. For example, starting at 100 % and
ending at 0 % fades out the effect.
191
Offline Processing
Effect Morphing 8.
Click Apply.
Morphing Effects of Differently Processed Audio Segments
Effect morphing can take place between two differently processed audio segments.
PREREQUISITE
In the Audio Editor, make a range selection and process the selection.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select the result, and press Ctrl/Cmd-C.
2.
Undo the processing.
3.
Process the selection again, this time with a different effect.
4.
Select the Process tab.
5.
In the Other section, click Effect Morphing.
6.
In the Effect Morphing dialog, activate Clipboard.
7.
Click Apply.
RESULT
The curve enables you to morph between two different processing methods.
NOTE
The clipboard can also be a copy from another wave file, but the clipboard size and the selection
size must match.
192
Audio Montage
The audio montage is a multichannel and multitrack non-destructive editing environment that
allows you to arrange, edit, play back, and record audio clips.
Non-destructive means that when you delete or change a part of an audio file, the audio is not
deleted or permanently changed. Instead, a set of pointers keeps track of all the edits, so that
these can be readily reversed.
The non-destructive editing functions include both track- and clip-based effects, volume and pan
automation, as well as wide-ranging fade and crossfade functions. The multichannel support
makes it possible to create surround mixes that can be written to DVD-Audio compatible discs.
The audio montage is a great tool for audio CD or DVD-Audio creation, mastering, multimedia
work, radio spot production, etc.
Basic Terminology
Audio montages can contain an unlimited number of stereo or mono audio tracks. You can use
them to structure your work graphically or logically. Depending on the channel configuration of
the audio montage, you can route each track to a stereo output or route each track to different
surround channels (up to 6) or non-surround audio channels (up to 8).
On an audio track, you can place any number of clips. Clips are containers for the audio, and
include a number of settings and functions such as volume and pan curves, fades, etc.
A clip contains a reference to a source audio file on your hard disk, as well as start and end
positions in the file, which means that clips can play back sections of the source audio files. Any
number of clips can reference the same source file.
In addition to audio tracks, you can create DVD-Audio picture tracks in the audio montage.
Montage Window
The montage window is where you assemble your audio montage. This is where you view, play
back, and edit audio montages.
The montage window gives you a graphical representation of the tracks and clips.
193
Audio Montage
Montage Window Track Control Area
The track control area offers several options regarding the track.
Fold/Unfold Track
Folds/Unfolds the track.
Mute
Mutes the track.
Solo
Solos the track.
FX
Opens the Effects pop-up menu where you can select effects for the track. A blue
icon indicates that a track has track effects.
Track number button
Opens the track menu that contains track-related options.
Audio Track Dispatching
Opens the Audio Track Dispatching dialog where you can route a track to an output
channel.
Track Name
Opens the Track Name dialog where you can enter a name for the track.
Track Pop-up Menu
This pop-up menu contains all track-related options.
●
To open the Track pop-up menu, click the number button of a track in the track control
area.
194
Audio Montage
Montage Window Add Stereo Track
Adds a stereo track below the active track.
Add Mono Track
Adds a mono track below the active track.
Add Picture Track
Adds a picture track below the active track.
Move Track Up
Moves the track one position up in the track list.
Move Track Down
Moves the track one position down in the track list.
Split into Left/Right Mono Tracks
Converts the stereo track into two mono tracks that represent the left and right
channels of a stereo track. This does not alter the audio material.
Split into Mid/Side Mono Tracks
Converts the stereo track into two mono tracks that represent the mid and side
channels. This assumes that each channel of a stereo track is a mid/side recording.
This does not alter the audio material.
Duplicate Track
Creates a copy of the active track. The duplicate is added below the active track.
Remove Track
Deletes the active track.
Mute
Mutes the active track.
195
Audio Montage
Audio Montage Tabs Solo
Solos the active track.
Route to Master Section
Routes the audio signal of the active track to the Master Section input.
Route to Master Section and Upper Track
Routes the audio signal of the active track to the Master Section input and to the
modulation input of the Ducker clip plug-in.
Route to Upper Track Only
Routes the audio signal of the active track to the modulation input of the Ducker clip
plug-in.
Record at Cursor
Opens the Recording dialog to start recording at the cursor position.
Lock
If this option is activated, you cannot edit the track.
Half-Height
Reduces the track height to half the current size.
Quarter-Height
Reduces the track height to a quarter of the current size.
Zoom
Shows the active track in the full available height.
Color
Opens a submenu where you can select a color for the active track.
Audio Montage Tabs
The tabs in the Audio Montage window give you access to the tools and options you need for
editing audio montages. For example, you can edit the envelope curves and fades in clips, make
zoom settings, analyze the audio, and render the audio montage.
View Tab
Navigate
Backwards/Forwards
Navigates to the previous/next cursor position, zoom factor, and selection range.
Zoom
Zoom
Activates the Zoom tool that allows you to define a time range that is zoomed in.
Time
Opens a pop-up menu that allows you to adjust the zoom to display the selected time
range. Zoom in 1:1 zooms in so that one pixel on the screen represents one sample.
196
Audio Montage
Audio Montage Tabs To edit the zoom factor, click Edit Zoom Factor. This opens the Zoom Factor dialog,
where you can edit the following settings:
●
Set Time Range allows you to specify the time range that you want to display.
●
Samples per Screen Point allows you to specify how many audio samples are
summarized in each screen point.
●
Screen Points per Sample allows you to specify how many screen points are
used to represent a single audio sample.
Zoom Selection
Zooms the window so that the current selection occupies the entire montage
window.
Microscope
Zooms in as far as possible.
View All
Zooms out as far as possible.
Display Whole Clip
Adjusts the view to display the active clip.
Zoom in Audio (10x)/Zoom out Audio (10x)
Zooms in/out in big steps.
Zoom in Audio/Zoom out Audio
Zooms in/out in small steps.
Zoom in Vertically/Zoom out Vertically
Zooms in/out to show waveforms with a lower/higher level.
Level
Adjusts the zoom to only display samples below the selected dB value.
Reset Zoom to 0 dB
Adjusts the zoom to display audio levels up to 0 dB.
Cursor
Move Cursor to Start of File/Move Cursor to End of File
Moves the cursor to the start/end of the file.
Previous Marker/Next Marker
Moves the cursor to the previous/next marker.
Start of Selection/End of Selection
Moves the cursor to the start/end of the selected time range.
Previous Region Edge/Next Region Edge
Moves the cursor to the previous/next region edge.
Edit Cursor Position
Opens the Cursor Position dialog where you can edit the cursor position.
Previous Clip Edge/Next Clip Edge
Moves the cursor to the previous/next clip edge.
197
Audio Montage
Audio Montage Tabs Scroll
Start/End
Displays the start/end of the audio without moving the cursor.
Start of Selection/End of Selection
Displays the start/end of the audio selection without moving the cursor.
Cursor
Displays the cursor position.
Playback
Static View
Deactivates scrolling.
View Follows Cursor
Automatically scrolls the view to keep the playback cursor visible.
Scroll View
Scrolls the view to keep the playback cursor centered.
Clip
Ruler
If this option is activated, the markers of the source audio file are displayed in the
clip, together with a ruler.
Color
Allows you to apply a color to the active clip.
Tracks
Display More Tracks/Display Fewer Tracks
Allows you to change the number of tracks that are displayed in the montage
window.
Focus on Previous Track/Focus on Next Track
Sets the focus on the previous/next track.
Snapshots
Allows you to take, recall, and edit snapshots.
Take Snapshot
Activates/Deactivates the snapshot function. If this option is activated, click on a
preset button to save a snapshot.
Presets
The buttons 1, 2, and 3 allow you to save a snapshot of the scroll position, zoom
factor, cursor position, audio selection, and clip selection. The rightmost preset
button is a global preset that is available for all audio montages.
Options
Allows you to select which settings are restored when applying a snapshot preset.
The following options are available:
●
Scroll Position and Zoom
●
Cursor Position
●
Audio Selection
198
Audio Montage
Audio Montage Tabs ●
Clip Selection
Peaks
Update Peak Files
Updates the peak files of the audio file.
Map Waveform to Level
If this option is activated, changes in the level envelope are reflected in the
waveform.
Edit Tab
Source
Edit Source
Opens source file of the clip in the Audio Editor.
Edit Cubase Project
Opens the Cubase project relating to the clip.
Time Selection
Range
Opens the Audio Range dialog where you can define selection ranges very
accurately.
Right-click Range to open the Preset pop-up menu. Here, you can select factory
presets and custom presets.
Extend
Allows you to edit the selection range in the following ways:
●
Double Selection Length doubles the length of the selection range.
●
Halve Selection Length halves the length of the selection range.
●
From Playback Position to End of File creates a selection range from the
playback position to the end of the file. If playback is not active, the position of
the edit cursor is used.
●
From Playback Position to Start of File creates a selection range from the
playback position to the start of the file. If playback is not active, the position
of the edit cursor is used.
Toggle
Toggles the selection range on/off.
Clipboard
Cut
Cuts the active clip to the clipboard.
Copy
Copies the active clip to the clipboard.
Right-click Copy to open a pop-up menu with additional options:
199
Audio Montage
Audio Montage Tabs ●
Memorize Cursor Position copies the position of the edit cursor to the
clipboard.
●
Memorize Selection Length copies the length of the active selection range to
the clipboard.
Paste
Pastes the clipboard content.
Right-click Paste to open a pop-up menu with additional paste options.
Split
Split Selected Clips
Splits the selected clips at the edit cursor or playback cursor position.
Split Clips on All Tracks
Splits the clips on all tracks at the edit cursor or playback cursor position.
Removal
Crop Clip
Removes the areas of the clip that are outside the selection range.
Erase Selected Range
Erases the part of the clip that lies inside the selection range on the selected track,
without filling the gap.
To erase the selection range on all tracks, right-click Erase Selected Range and
select Erase Selected Range on All Tracks.
Delete Selected Clips
Deletes the part of the clip that lies inside the selection range on the selected track
and moves the right section of the clip to the left to fill the gap.
If there is no selection range, the selected clip is deleted.
To delete the selection range on all tracks, right-click Delete Selected Range and
select Delete Selected Range on All Tracks.
Nudge
Target
This pop-up menu allows you to select which items are affected by the nudge
function.
●
Auto Select Item automatically selects what should be nudged, depending on
your last action. For example, if your last action was to select or move a clip,
the Clip Position option is automatically selected.
●
Clip Position moves the selected clips.
●
Clip’s Left/Right Edge resizes the active clip.
●
Clip’s Fade In/Fade Out moves the fade in/fade out junction points of the
active clip. For stereo envelopes, both sides are adjusted.
●
Clip’s Crossfade narrows or widens the crossfade zone by moving the junction
points of both clips in the crossfade. This only works if you select the second
clip (the one on the right) in a crossfade pair.
●
Edit Cursor moves the edit cursor.
●
Left Edge of Selected Time Range/Right Edge of Selected Time Range
moves the left/right edge of a selection range.
●
Selected Marker moves the selected audio montage marker. To select a
marker, click it in the area above the ruler.
200
Audio Montage
Audio Montage Tabs ●
Volume of Active Clip adjusts the volume of the active clip step by step
according to the Gain setting in the Audio Montages Preferences.
●
Volume of All Selected Clips adjusts the volume of all selected clips step by
step according to the Gain setting in the Audio Montages Preferences.
●
Pan of Active Clip adjusts the pan of the active clip. Nudge + pans to the left
and Nudge – to the right.
●
Pan of All Selected Clips adjusts the pan of all selected clips. Nudge + pans to
the left and Nudge – to the right.
●
Surround Pan of Active Clip adjusts the Pan of the active clip. Nudge + pans
to the left and Nudge – to the right.
●
Surround Pan of All Selected Clips adjusts the Pan of all selected clips.
Nudge + pans to the left and Nudge – to the right.
Nudge Left
Nudges the target to the left or down, by the amount that is defined in the Audio
Montages Preferences.
Right-click Nudge Left to open a pop-up menu that allows you to change the nudge
amplitude.
Nudge Right
Nudges the target to the right or up, by the amount that is defined in the Audio
Montages Preferences.
Right-click Nudge Right to open a pop-up menu that allows you to change the
nudge amplitude.
Ripple
None
Deactivates the auto-shift function.
Track
If this option is activated and you move a clip horizontally, all clips on the selected
track that are located to the right of the edited clip are also moved. This option also
applies when moving or resizing clips, and when inserting or pasting more than one
clip at the same time.
Global
If this option is activated and you move a clip horizontally, all clips on all tracks that
are located to the right of the edited clip are also moved. This option is taken into
account when moving or resizing clips, and when inserting or pasting more than one
clip at the same time.
Auto Grouping
None
Deactivates auto-grouping.
Track
If this option is activated and you move a clip horizontally, all overlapping or adjacent
clips on the same track are also moved.
Global
If this option is activated and you move a clip horizontally, all vertically overlapping
clips on all tracks are also moved.
201
Audio Montage
Audio Montage Tabs Snapping
Crossfading
This pop-up menu allows you to make snapping settings for crossfades.
●
If Snap to Waveform When Crossfading is activated and you create a
crossfade by dragging a clip towards another one located on its left side,
the position of the moved clip is automatically adjusted to obtain a good
correspondence between the clip waveforms. This correlation process
provides a crossfade that is aligned in phase.
●
If Create Crossfade and Snap to Waveform When Snapping to Left Clip is
activated and you move a clip to let its start snap to the end of another clip on
its left, the clip is slightly moved to the left to create a short crossfade that is
based on an optimal correlation between the two waveforms. This correlation
process provides a crossfade that is aligned in phase.
●
If Create Crossfade When Snapping to Left Clip is activated and you move a
clip to let its start snap to the end of another clip on its left, the clip is slightly
moved to the left to create a crossfade.
The length of the crossfade is the fade in length of the clip on the right. If
the fade in length is zero, the fade out length of the left clip is used as a
basis instead. If that length is also zero, the Create Crossfade and Snap to
Waveform When Snapping to Left Clip function is performed if activated.
Snap to Magnets
If this option is activated, moved elements such as clip edges, time selection edges,
cursor, and markers snap to the magnets that are activated on the Magnets pop-up
menu.
Magnets
This pop-up menu allows you to select which items should be magnetic.
Clip
Create from Selection
Allows you to create clips from the selection range. If no clip is overlapping the
selection, an empty clip is created.
Repeat Clip
Opens the Repeat Clip dialog where you can specify how clips should be repeated.
Mute
Mutes the active clip.
Lock
This pop-up menu allows you to lock the active clip.
●
If Full Lock is activated, the clip is locked to prevent accidental editing.
●
If Time Lock is activated, the position and size of a clip are locked. Other
editing options are still possible.
Cue Point
This pop-up menu allows you to make cue point settings.
●
Set at Cursor sets the cue point to a fixed position from the start of the clip.
●
Set at Default Gap Position sets the cue point before the start of the clip, at a
distance governed by the default pre-gap position.
●
Follows Fade In End Point sets the cue point to the fade in end point.
●
Follows Fade Out Start Point sets the cue point to the fade out start point.
202
Audio Montage
Audio Montage Tabs ●
If Custom Cue End is activated, you can set the end cue point at a custom
position from the end of the clip. This option allows you to edit the gap
individually for each clip.
If this option is deactivated, the default gap that is defined in the Audio
Montages Preferences is used.
●
End Offset opens the End Cue Point Offset dialog that allows you to set the
end cue point at a custom position from the end of the clip.
Insert Tab
Markers
Marker Name
Allows you to enter the name of the start and end marker. If nothing is entered, a
generic name is used.
To edit the default names, open the Markers window, and select Functions >
Default Marker Names.
Different Name for End Marker
If this option is activated, you can enter a different name for the end marker.
If this option is deactivated, the name of the start marker is also used for the end
marker.
Create Marker
Allows you to create different types of markers and marker pairs at the edit cursor
position or at the selection range.
Import
Audio Files
Allows you to select one or more audio files to insert at the edit cursor position on
the selected track.
Clip Files
Opens the file browser where you can select one or more clips to insert at the edit
cursor position on the selected track. If you import several clips at the same time,
they are lined up in alphabetical order, according to their file names, and separated
according to the set pre-gap.
Surround Audio File
Allows you to select a surround audio file to insert at the edit cursor position on the
selected track. For this, the audio montage must be set to Multichannel (DVD-Audio
Compatible) with 6 Channels. Each file is placed on a different track, and routed to
the corresponding surround output. Mono surround channels are placed on mono
tracks and stereo surround channels on stereo tracks.
Audio Montages
Allows you to select an audio montage to insert at the edit cursor position on the
selected track.
203
Audio Montage
Audio Montage Tabs Selected Clip
Replace Audio File
Allows you to make the clip refer to another audio file while retaining all clip settings.
The audio file must be at least as long as the end position of the clip. You cannot
substitute a stereo file with a mono file or vice versa. Clicking the arrow icon opens
the list of recently used folders.
Clone and Substitute
Creates a copy of the source audio file and makes the clip refer to this new file. As a
result, you can modify the new source file without affecting other clips of the original
audio file. The cloned audio file is saved in the implicit folder that is specified in the
Audio Montages Preferences.
Process Tab
Loudness
Meta Normalizer
Opens the Loudness Meta Normalizer dialog where you can adjust the loudness
of each clip in the audio montage so that they get the same loudness. You can
also adjust the whole output, while taking the EBU R-128 audio measurement
recommendation and a true peak analysis into account.
Process
Time-Stretch to Cursor
Opens the Time Stretching dialog that allows you to time-stretch the clip so that
it ends at the audio montage edit cursor position. When this function is used, a
clone of the original audio file is created, containing the audio range used in the clip.
The process is applied to the clone, and the clip refers to this file instead. Neither
the original audio file nor other clips that refer to the same audio file are affected.
The cloned audio file is saved in the implicit folder that is specified in the Audio
Montages Preferences.
Pitch Shifting
Opens the Pitch Shifting dialog where you can change the pitch of the clip. When
this function is used, a clone of the original audio file is created that contains the
audio range used in the clip. The process is applied to the clone, and the clip refers
to this file instead. Neither the original audio file nor other clips that refer to the
same audio file are affected. The cloned audio file is saved in the implicit folder that
is specified in the Audio Montages Preferences.
Invert Phase
Inverts the phase of the clip. An inverted phase is indicated by an icon in the wave
window.
Split
Auto Split
Opens the Auto Split dialog where you can specify how to split clips.
204
Audio Montage
Audio Montage Tabs Fade Tab
Edit
Fade In/Fade Out
Allows you to switch between the fade in and the fade out settings.
Zoom
Zoom to Fade Range
Adjusts the view to display the fade in/fade out part of the active clip.
Shape
Curve
Allows you to select preset fade curves.
●
Linear changes the level linearly.
●
Sinus (*) changes the level according to a sine curve. When used in a
crossfade, the loudness (RMS) remains constant during the transition.
●
Square-Root (*) changes the level according to a square-root curve. When
used in a crossfade, the loudness (RMS) remains constant during the
transition.
●
Sinusoid changes the level according to a sine curve.
●
Logarithmic changes the level according to a logarithmic curve.
●
Exponential changes the level according to an exponential curve.
●
Exponential+ changes the level according to a more pronounced exponential
curve.
Variations
When creating a crossfade, the fade in/fade out shape changes to optimize the
volume evolution during the crossfade. The following options are available:
●
If Pure Shape is selected, the fade shape is not changed and is used as
defined. This is the default setting when any fade in/fade out preset is
selected.
●
If Amplitude Compensation is selected for a fade in/fade out curve in a
crossfade, the summed fade in/fade out gains remain constant along the
crossfade region. This option is recommended for short crossfades.
●
Medium Compensation provides an intermediary between amplitude
compensation and power compensation. This option is recommended if the
other two compensation options do not provide the expected result.
●
If Power Compensation is selected, the power of the crossfade remains
constant along the crossfade region. Crossfading between completely
different types of audio material can sometimes cause harmonics to cancel
each other out at the crossfade splice point, causing the volume to drop.
Constant power crossfades compensate for this. Using either the Sinus (*) or
Square-Root (*) fade presets for a fade in/fade out provide a constant power
crossfade without selecting this option.
205
Audio Montage
Audio Montage Tabs NOTE
Selecting a compensation option for a single fade (not a crossfade) changes the
shape of the curve. However, the actual compensation is only applied when the fade
becomes part of a crossfade.
Time
Fade Time
Allows you to specify a fade in/fade out time for the clip.
Apply Fade Time
Applies the specified clip fade in/fade out time.
Clip Options
Hide Curve Points
Hides the envelope curve points. This way, they cannot be edited with the mouse.
However, you can drag the whole curve up or down.
Automatic Changes
If this option is activated, the fade in/fade out is not changed automatically, for
example, by automatic crossfading of overlapping clips. This option is useful if you
have set a fade that you do not want to be altered, even though you may want to
overlap the clip with another clip. This option is individual for each clip, as opposed
to the global No Automatic Crossfading.
Smoothing
Rounds the resulting envelope curve angles. This produces smoother, more natural
envelope curves.
Clipboard
Copy
Copies the fade in/fade out shape to the clipboard.
Paste
This pop-up menu allows you to set the paste behavior.
●
Paste Shape Only replaces the fade in/fade out shape with the shape that was
copied to the clipboard. The original length is preserved.
●
Paste to Selected Clips replaces the fade in/fade out shape in all selected clips
with the shape that was copied to the clipboard.
Preset
Presets
This pop-up menu allows you to save and restore fade presets, and set up the default
settings for automatic fades and crossfades.
Apply Default
Replaces the current fade in/fade out with the default setting that is specified on the
Presets pop-up menu.
Options
Overlaps
This pop-up menu allows you to set the automatic crossfading behavior.
206
Audio Montage
Audio Montage Tabs ●
If No Automatic Crossfading is activated, no automatic crossfading is
performed when clips overlap.
●
If Free Overlaps is activated, automatic crossfades are created when a clip
overlaps another clip on the same track. The length of the overlap determines
the length of the crossfade.
●
If Fade In Constrains Overlaps is activated, the fade in length of a clip
constrains the maximum possible overlap, and thus the crossfade time. If the
clip on the right side, that is, the clip with the fade in in the overlap, is moved
to the left past the set overlap time, the other clip is progressively resized.
Moving the other clip to the right into the clip that contains the fade in in the
overlap produces the same result.
●
If Fade Out Constrains Overlaps is activated, the fade out length of a clip
constrains the maximum possible overlap, and thus the crossfade time. If the
clip on the left side, that is, the clip with the fade out in the overlap, is moved
to the right past the set overlap time, the other clip is progressively resized.
Moving the other clip to the left into the clip that contains the fade out in the
overlap produces the same result.
Automatic Crossfading
This pop-up menu allows you to make automatic crossfading settings.
●
If Allow Automatic Crossfading with Clips on Selected Track is activated,
crossfades are automatically created when you move a clip so that it overlaps
another clip that is located on the selected track.
●
If Allow Multiple Automatic Crossfades is activated, crossfades are
automatically created for all moved clips that overlap other clips on their track.
If this option is deactivated, a crossfade is only created for the clip that you
drag, even if several clips are moved simultaneously.
Options
●
If Create Default Fades in New Clips is activated, all new clips get the default
fade in and fade out shape and length. For clips that are created by splitting a
clip, only the default fade time is used.
●
If Lock Fade Times When Adjusting Clip Edges is activated, the defined fade
in and fade out lengths are locked to the clip start or end, even if you adjust
the clip edges. This means that if you resize a clip by dragging its edge, the
corresponding fade junction point moves accordingly, while maintaining the
fade length.
Envelope Tab
Selector
Envelope Type
Sets the type of the envelope. Depending on the selected type, different options are
available.
Pan Law
Lets you select a pan mode. This option is only available if the Pan envelope type is
selected.
207
Audio Montage
Audio Montage Tabs Lock Mouse Editing
If this option is activated, all envelopes are locked and cannot be edited with the
mouse. The envelopes and their points are still displayed.
Zoom
Zoom to Envelope Range
Adjusts the view to display the active envelope of the active clip.
Level
Reset All
Resets the envelope to its neutral form.
Reset to 0 dB
Replaces the segments between the fade in and fade out points with a single neutral
segment.
Ducking
Opens the Ducking Settings dialog. This dialog allows you to create ducking effects
between clips on two adjacent tracks where the level or send effect of one clip is
modified every time that clips are present on the other track.
Mute Selection
Adds level envelope points and draws a curve to mute the selection by lowering the
level to zero with default 20 ms fall and rise times.
Raise Selection
Adds level envelope points and draws a curve to raise the audio level of the selection
with 20 ms fall and rise times. You can drag the created segment up and down to
adjust the level.
Clip Options
Hide Curve Points
Hides the envelope curve points. This way, they cannot be edited with the mouse.
However, you can drag the whole curve up or down.
Envelope after Effects
Places the level/fade envelope after the clip effect section. This is useful if you are
using dynamic processors that alter the level of the clip.
Smoothing
Smoothes the resulting envelope curve angles. This produces more natural envelope
curves.
Shape
Copy
Copies the envelope shape into a dedicated clipboard while excluding any fade part.
Paste
Replaces the current envelope shape with the one in the clipboard without altering
any fade part.
Convert
●
Convert to Stereo creates independent envelopes for the left and right
channels.
208
Audio Montage
Audio Montage Tabs ●
Convert to Mono combines the envelopes of the left and right channels into a
single envelope.
Selected Points
Delete
Deletes the selected envelope points in the active clip.
Deselect
Deselects the selected envelope points in the active clip.
Reset
Resets the selected points in the active clip to their default level.
Preset
Presets
This pop-up menu allows you to save and restore envelope presets.
Analyze Tab
The Analyze tab provides you with tools for monitoring your audio.
Monitoring
Playback
This is the standard metering mode, in which the meters reflect the audio that is
played back. Metering occurs after the Master Section, which means that effects,
dithering, and master faders are taken into account. You can monitor playback in
audio files, audio montages, audio CD track lists, etc.
Audio Input
In this mode, the meters reflect the audio input. Typically, this is the mode to use
when recording. The Master Section settings are not taken into account.
File Rendering
In this mode, you can monitor what is being written to disk during file rendering or
recording. Average and min/max peak values are calculated. After rendering, the
meters freeze until you refresh or change the monitor mode.
Freeze Meters
This mode freezes the values for all open meters. The meters remain frozen until you
select another monitor mode or deactivate Freeze Meters.
Floating Meters
Show/Hide
Shows/Hides floating meters.
209
Audio Montage
Audio Montage Tabs Render Tab
Source
Auto Select Source
If this option is activated, the source option changes according to the selection
that you make in the audio file. If there is no selection, the whole audio montage is
processed.
The Source pop-up menu allows you to select which part of the audio montage you
want to process. The following options are available:
Whole Montage
Processes and renders the whole audio range.
Selected Audio Range
Processes and renders the selected audio range.
Union of Selected Clips
Processes and renders the audio range that starts with the first selected clip and
ends with the last selected clip. Only the selected clips are included in the process.
Selected CD Track
Processes and renders the selected CD track in the CD window.
CD Track Group
Processes and renders the CD track group that you can select on the pop-up menu
below this option.
Specific Region
Processes and renders a specific audio range to an independent file.
Specify the region to process on the pop-up menu.
All CD Tracks in Group
Processes and renders all CD tracks in the selected CD track group.
All Regions
Processes and renders each marked audio range to an independent file. By defining
multiple isolated regions in an audio file, you can process them in one operation.
Specify the type of regions to process on the pop-up menu.
All Clip Groups
Processes and renders each audio montage group to an independent file. The group
names are used as file names.
All Selected Clips
Processes and renders each selected clip to an independent file. The clip names are
used as file names.
Result
CD/DDP
Allows you to burn a CD or generate a DDP file from the audio montage.
210
Audio Montage
Audio Montage Tabs Unnamed File
If this option is activated, a temporary untitled file is rendered.
Named File
If this option is activated, you can specify a name for the rendered file.
Output
Name
Allows you to enter a name for the rendered file. Clicking the arrow icon opens a
pop-up menu that offers you several naming options.
Scheme
Allows you to specify a naming scheme for the file name.
Location
Allows you to select a destination folder for the rendered files.
Format
Opens a pop-up menu where you can select a single file format or multiple file
formats.
Options
Depending on the selected source, different options are available.
Bypass Master Section
If this option is activated, the plug-ins and gain of the Master Section are bypassed
when rendering.
Auto Save Master Section Preset
If this option is activated, the Master Section preset is automatically saved in the
audio montage when you render the file. You can load the Master Section preset
via the Load Master Section Preset option in the lower right corner of the montage
window.
Fade In/Out at Boundaries
If this option is activated, a fade is performed at the audio range boundaries when
a new file is created, or a crossfade with the adjacent audio is created if the audio
range is processed in place.
Crossfades allow for smooth transitions between the processed and the nonprocessed parts. The crossfade time and shape are set in the Audio Files
Preferences. If the fade time is longer than half the length of the processed file, the
fade is not performed.
No Reverb Tail
If this option is activated, the audio tail produced by effects such as reverb is not
included in the rendered file.
Some plug-ins do not transfer information on the tail duration to WaveLab. In this
case, this option has no effect. For such plug-ins, you can add the Silence plug-in to
add extra samples at the end of the file.
Copy Markers
If this option is activated, the markers that are included in the range to process are
copied to the rendered file.
Create Basic Audio CD
If this option is activated, a file of the whole audio montage, including clip effects and
master effects, is created. Then a Basic Audio CD window opens.
211
Audio Montage
Audio Montage Tabs Create CD Image and Cue Sheet
If this option is activated, the audio montage is exported as a CD image with an
accompanying cue sheet. A cue sheet is a text file identifying the CD tracks in the
image file. The cue sheet and the image file it describes can then be imported into
any CD recording application that supports this function (including WaveLab Pro) and
written onto a CD. You can use this option with any sample rate.
Create Audio Montage from Result
If this option is activated, the rendered audio file is imported in a new audio
montage.
Open Resulting Audio File
If this option is activated, every rendered file is opened in a new window.
Open Files in New File Group
If this option is activated, the rendered audio file is imported in a new file group.
Bypass Master Section on Resulting Audio File
If this option is activated, playback of the resulting audio file bypasses the entire
Master Section except the Playback Processing section. This setting can be toggled
by clicking the button at the bottom right of the wave window or montage window.
NOTE
It is recommended to activate this option, because this way, you do not monitor new
files through the effects that have already been applied to them.
Include Pause before Track
If this option is activated and you render CD tracks, a pause is included before each
CD track in the rendered file.
Include Pause after Track
If this option is activated and you render CD tracks, a pause is included after each CD
track in the rendered file.
Render Audio File, Do Not Change Audio Montage
If this option is activated, the selected CD track is rendered to a separate audio file.
Replace On Same Audio Montage Track
If this option is activated, the rendered file replaces the clips on the selected
montage track.
Add to Next Empty Audio Montage Track
If this option is activated, the rendered file is added to the next empty audio
montage track. The original clips are preserved.
Add to New Audio Montage Track
If this option is activated, the rendered file is added to a new audio montage track.
The original clips are preserved.
Bypass Clip Plug-ins
If this option is activated, the selected clips are rendered without their clip effects.
Bypass Volume/Pan Envelopes
If this option is activated, the selected clips are rendered without volume and pan
envelopes.
Replace Clips with Rendered Audio Files
If this option is activated, the rendered audio files replace the selected clips.
212
Audio Montage
Signal Path in the Audio Montage Upload to SoundCloud
If this option is activated, the rendered file is uploaded to SoundCloud.
Presets
Presets
This pop-up menu allows you to save and restore render presets. All settings are
saved and restored, except the file name and the file location.
Render
Start
Starts the rendering process.
Signal Path in the Audio Montage
The audio signal passes through the various sections of WaveLab Pro in a certain way.
1
The audio samples are read.
2
Clip envelope (unless post-effects mode is active)
3
Clip effects
4
Clip envelope (if post-effects mode is active)
5
Clip pan
6
Individual clip gain (Clips window)
7
Clips are mixed into the track slot (for example, overlapping clips).
8
Track effects
9
Track level settings/surround pan
10
Each track is mixed into a bus that has as many channels as defined by the audio
properties of the audio montage (between 1 to 8).
11
The audio channels are processed through the plug-ins of the master output.
12
The channels are sent to the Master Section input.
Signal Path in the Master Section
1
Channels/Sample rate can change at each plug-in slot.
2
Master Section meters
3
Final Effects/Dithering pane in the Master Section
4
Playback Processing pane
5
Independent meters
6
Speaker gain for playback
7
Playback or file format rendering
Creating New Audio Montages
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > New.
2.
Select Audio Montage > Custom.
3.
Specify the audio properties and click Create.
213
Audio Montage
Creating New Audio Montages Audio Montage Properties
You can define the mode (stereo, mono, or multichannel), the number of audio channels, and the
sample rate of the audio montage.
You can set these properties when you create a new audio montage.
●
To change the properties for the selected audio montage, select the File tab and click
Info, or click the Audio Montage Properties button at the bottom right of the montage
window.
Mode
Lets you select the following modes for audio montage projects.
●
Stereo (CD Compatible)
●
Multichannel (DVD-Audio Compatible)
●
Multichannel (Free Configuration)
Channels
Lets you define the number of audio channels and their configuration at the
output of the audio montage. This is only available in Multichannel (DVD-Audio
Compatible) mode.
Enable Additional DVD-Audio Configurations
Enables additional DVD-Audio channel configurations on the channels pop-up menu.
This is only available in Multichannel (DVD-Audio Compatible) mode.
This option is only available if you access the Audio Montage Properties via the
Audio Montage Properties button at the bottom right of the montage window.
Sample Rate
Lets you select the sample rate for the audio montage.
Alternative Ways of Creating New Audio Montages
There are several ways to create a new audio montage.
●
Import cue sheets/CD images as audio montage
●
Import audio CD tracks to an audio montage
●
Convert a Basic Audio CD into an audio montage
●
Create an audio montage from a wave file with the Auto Split function
●
Import an AES-31 project file to an audio montage
●
Import an XML text file to an audio montage
●
Convert wave files to an audio montage
●
When you render, you can open the resulting file into a montage.
●
Duplicating audio montages
●
Import DDP files to an audio montage.
214
Audio Montage
Audio Montage Duplicates ●
Press Ctrl/Option and drag a montage tab on the tab bar.
●
From a script
RELATED LINKS
Audio Montage Duplicates on page 215
Audio Montage Duplicates
You can duplicate audio montages in various ways.
Empty (With Same Properties)
Creates a new audio montage with the channel settings and sample rate of the
original audio montage, without any clips.
Exact Duplicate (Using the Same Audio Files)
Creates an exact duplicate of the original audio montage and lets the new clips
reference to the original audio files. The duplicated audio montage uses the channel
settings and sample rate of the original audio montage.
This is useful if you want to create several versions of the audio montage, for
example, to experiment with variations. However, any processing or editing that you
apply to the actual audio files are reflected in all audio montages.
You can also press Ctrl/Cmd, drag a tab, and drop it on the tab bar to create a exact
duplicate of an audio montage.
Customized Duplicate
Allows you to specify which parts of the audio montage to include in the duplicate of
this audio montage.
Duplicate (Recreate Audio Files)
Allows you to copy the audio montage together with its audio files to create a new
self-contained audio montage. There are several uses for complete cloning:
●
Edit and process the audio files without affecting other audio montages.
●
Create different versions of the audio montage that focus on specific aspects
of the audio montage by removing any unused audio sections.
●
Split audio files and give them specific names.
●
Reduce the size of an audio montage project by only using the needed audio
material.
NOTE
Duplicate (Recreate Audio Files) does not render effects to files.
RELATED LINKS
Duplicating Audio Montages on page 215
Duplicating Audio Montages
PROCEDURE
1.
Open the audio montage that you want to duplicate.
2.
In the Audio Montage window, select the File tab.
3.
Select New > Audio Montage > From Current File.
4.
In the From Current Audio Montage section, select one of the following:
●
Empty (With Same Properties)
215
Audio Montage
Audio Montage Duplicates 5.
●
Exact Duplicate (Using the Same Audio Files)
●
Customized Duplicate
●
Duplicate (Recreate Audio Files)
Do one of the following:
●
If you have selected Empty (With Same Properties) or Exact Duplicate (Using the
Same Audio Files), click Create.
●
If you have selected Customized Duplicate or Duplicate (Recreate Audio Files),
make your settings and click OK.
RESULT
A duplicate of the audio montage opens in another tab.
Create Customized Audio Montage Duplicate Dialog
In this dialog, you can specify which parts of an audio montage you want to include in the
duplicate.
●
To open the Create Customized Audio Montage Duplicate dialog, open an audio
montage and select the File tab. Select New > Audio Montage > From Current File, select
Customized Duplicate, and click Create.
Do Not Import Clips
If this option is activated, the clips of the source audio montage are not imported.
For example, this can be used to open an audio montage with all the CD markers
in place and to insert alternate audio clips to compare them with the original audio
montage.
Import Markers
If this option is activated, the markers of the source audio montage are imported.
Import Track and Master Plug-ins
If this option is activated, the track and master plug-ins of the source audio montage
are imported.
Duplicate with New Audio Files
If this option is activated, you can replace the audio files of the source audio
montage with new audio files. For this, specify the folder that contains the new audio
files.
216
Audio Montage
Audio Montage Duplicates If the audio files that you want to use as replacement have different file names than
the source audio files, you can specify the differences between the source files and
the new files.
For example, if the file piano_96k.wav is replaced by the file piano_44k.wav,
specify 96k in the Old Files field and 44k in the New Files field.
If no matching audio files are available, you can create empty clips instead and later
replace the empty clips with audio files.
If there is a difference between the sample rate of the source montage and the
sample rate of the new montage, the position, length, envelope, and marker settings
are adjusted accordingly.
Duplicate Audio Montage by Recreating Audio Files Dialog
You can create a copy of the audio montage in which the actual audio files are duplicated to
create a new self-contained audio montage. In this dialog, you can specify how the selected
audio montage is duplicated.
●
To open the Duplicate Audio Montage by Recreating Audio Files dialog, open an audio
montage and select the File tab. Select New > Audio Montage > From Current File, select
Duplicate (Recreate Audio Files), and click Create.
Name of Audio Montage Duplicate
Specifies the file name of the audio montage duplicate.
Location
The location where you want to create the audio montage duplicate and its audio
files.
Exact Audio File Duplicates
If this option is activated, the cloned audio files are exact copies of the original files.
Unused ranges are not removed.
The files are recreated and saved in an uncompressed format. For example, an MP3
file that is included in an audio montage will be recreated as a PCM file. In other
words, the content is recreated, not the file format.
Combine Audio Files into as Few Audio Files as Possible
If this option is activated, all used ranges in the original audio files are copied and
combined into a single audio file to which the clips in the clone refer. The file gets the
same name as the audio montage clone file.
217
Audio Montage
Creating an Audio Montage from an Audio File NOTE
If the audio montage contains both mono and stereo clips, there will be two
combined audio files, one for mono material (with the suffix “M”) and one for stereo
material (with the suffix “S”).
Remove Unused Ranges
If this option is activated, the same number of audio files is created, but any unused
ranges in the files are removed. This reduces the file size.
Split Files to Remove Unused Ranges
If this option is activated, unused ranges in the files are removed, and the file is split
into several new files when a range is removed.
Create One File per Clip
If this option is activated, every clip in the audio montage clone refers to a unique
file, containing only the audio that is used in the clip. The files are named after the
clips. A number is added if several clips have the same name.
Create One File per Clip (Avoid Duplicates)
If this option is activated, every clip in the audio montage clone refers to a unique
file, containing only the audio that is used in the clip. The files are named after the
clips. However, if two clips use the same audio range, a common file is created for
these clips.
Clip Margins
Allows you to add a number of seconds before and after the beginning and end of
the clip range in the created audio files. This allows you to lengthen the clips in the
cloned audio montage at a later stage.
Use File Names as Clip Names
If this option is activated, the clips in the cloned audio montage get the name of the
corresponding audio file.
Copy Audio File Markers
If this option is activated, the markers in the original audio files are included in the
recreated files.
Creating an Audio Montage from an Audio File
You can export audio files to an audio montage, including all markers that you have set in the
audio file.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Editor, open the audio file that you want export to an audio montage.
2.
Optional: If you want to use a specific time range of the audio file, create a selection range
in the wave window.
3.
Select File > New.
4.
Select Audio Montage > From Current File.
5.
In the From Current Audio File section, click Insert Audio File in New Montage.
6.
Click Create.
7.
In the Create Audio Montage from Audio File dialog, select whether to import the whole
file or the selected audio range.
8.
Optional: Decide if you want to perform any of the following marker operations:
●
Import Markers
218
Audio Montage
Import Options for Audio Montages 9.
●
Split at Generic Region Markers
●
Split at CD Track Markers
Click OK.
Import Options for Audio Montages
You can import different files into your audio montage, for example, audio files, audio montages,
and DDP images.
The following import options are available via the Import section on the Insert tab of the Audio
Montage window:
●
To import audio files, click Audio Files and select the audio files that you want to import at
the edit cursor position on the selected track.
If you import a single audio file, the Paste pop-up menu opens. Here, you can specify how
the clip should be inserted, whether existing clips should be affected, etc.
If you import multiple audio files, the Insert Audio Files dialog opens. Here, you can
specify where to insert the files.
●
To import clips, click Clip Files and select the clips that you want to import at the edit
cursor position on the selected track.
If you import several clips at the same time, they are inserted in alphabetical order,
according to their file names, and separated according to the set Pre-Gap.
●
To import audio montages, click Audio Montages and select the audio montages that you
want to import at the edit cursor position on the selected track.
●
To import surround audio files, click Surround Audio File and select the file that you want
to import at the edit cursor position on the selected track.
The audio montage must be set to Multichannel (DVD-Audio Compatible) mode with
6 Channels. Each file is placed on a different track, and routed to the corresponding
surround output. Mono surround channels are placed on mono tracks and stereo
surround channels on stereo tracks.
To access the following import options, select File > Import.
●
To import audio files, click Audio File to Montage, select the audio files that you want to
import, and click Import.
●
To import a DDP image, click DDP. In the file browser, select the file that you want to
import, and click Import.
●
To import a CD cue file with its audio data, click CD Cue. In the file browser, select the file
that you want to import, and click Import.
●
To import an AES-31 file, click AES-31. In the file browser, select the file that you want to
import, and click Import.
●
To import an audio montage that has been saved as an XML file, click XML. In the file
browser, select the file that you want to import, and click Import.
●
To open audio files that have an unknown format, click Unknown Audio. Via the Special
File Format dialog, you can specify how to interpret the format of the audio file that you
want to open.
●
To import CD tracks from an audio CD, click Audio CD. Via the Import Audio CD dialog,
browse for the audio CD tracks to extract.
●
To import a file group, click File Group. In the file browser, select the file group that you
want to import, and click Import.
RELATED LINKS
Mismatched Sample Rates When Inserting Audio Files on page 229
219
Audio Montage
Missing Files Dialog Inserting Multiple Clips on page 228
Audio Montages within Audio Montages on page 254
Missing Files Dialog
This dialog opens when you open an audio montage, and some audio files that the audio
montage refers to cannot be found. You can then search for the files or select a replacement.
Missing Original Files
Lists the files that cannot be found. Each file can be replaced by an existing file. To
search replacements for multiple files, select the files and specify a new path in the
Where to Search field.
A file with a green checkmark is associated with a valid replacement. A file with a
red checkmark is not yet associated with a valid replacement, but there are possible
replacement candidates available at the bottom of this dialog.
Find Files with the Same Name
Instructs WaveLab Pro to find all files with the same name in the folder specified in
the Where to Search field.
Replace Selected Files With
Replaces the missing files with a single specific file.
Reset
Removes all possible replacements for the selected missing files.
Where to Search
Lets you specify a location for searching files. Click Find Files with the Same Name
to start the search.
Replacement List
Lists the files that can be used as a replacement. You can also drag a file into the list
from the File Explorer/macOS Finder.
Assembling the Audio Montage
You assemble your audio montage by adding tracks and clips.
In the audio montage, only one track can be selected at a time. This selected track has a different
color for the track control area. Some WaveLab Pro functions are always applied to the selected
track.
220
Audio Montage
Assembling the Audio Montage Tracks
Tracks form the structure that is used to organize clips. The tracks can be mono/stereo audio
tracks or picture tracks.
●
Audio tracks allow you to add clips to an audio montage.
●
Picture tracks allow you to add pictures to an audio montage. These are shown when you
play back the final DVD-Audio.
Adding Tracks
You can add stereo tracks, mono tracks, and picture tracks.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Montage window, click the number button of a track to open the Track popup menu.
2.
Select the track type that you want to add to your audio montage.
RESULT
The new track is added below the selected track. If you want to place it above the selected track,
press Ctrl/Cmd when adding the new track.
Adding Pictures to a Picture Track
PREREQUISITE
In the Audio Montage window, add a picture track to your audio montage.
PROCEDURE
1.
On the picture track, set the edit cursor to the position where you want to insert the
picture.
2.
Right-click an empty area of the picture track and click Insert Files.
3.
Select a picture and click Open.
RELATED LINKS
Adding Tracks on page 221
Moving Tracks in the Track View
You can change the order of the tracks in the montage window.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Montage window, click the number button of a track.
2.
On the pop-up menu, select Move Track Up or Move Track Down.
221
Audio Montage
Assembling the Audio Montage Removing Tracks
Removing a track with clips also removes the clips. However, the audio files to which the clips
refer are not affected.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Montage window, click the number button of the track that you want to
remove.
2.
On the pop-up menu, select Remove Track.
Grouping CD Tracks
You can render grouped CD tracks simultaneously and create audio CD reports for grouped
tracks.
PREREQUISITE
In the montage window, create CD tracks.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select Tool Windows > CD.
2.
In the CD window, click in the Group column of a CD track and select a group.
RELATED LINKS
CD Window on page 295
Audio CD Reports on page 419
Render Tab on page 210
Folding and Unfolding Tracks
To save screen space, you can fold tracks that do not need to be visible.
●
To fold a track, click the arrow button at the top left corner of the track control area.
●
To unfold a folded track, click the button again, or double-click anywhere on the folded
track.
Locking and Unlocking Tracks
You can lock tracks to prevent them from being accidentally moved, edited, or deleted.
●
To lock a track, click the number button of the track and activate Lock.
●
To unlock a track, click the locked track, or click the number button of the track, and
deactivate Lock.
222
Audio Montage
Assembling the Audio Montage Left/Right and Mid/Side Mono Tracks
You can split a stereo audio track into two mono tracks, either in Left/Right or Mid/Side mode.
This is a virtual split which does not affect or create audio files.
When you split into mid/side mono tracks, the upper track displays the mid signal and the lower
track displays the side signal. This allows you to process the mid or side signal with any effect
plug-in independently, and use independent envelopes.
The mid/side signals are automatically converted back to left/right signal at the montage output.
Splitting Stereo Tracks into Mono Tracks
You can split stereo tracks into left/right or mid/side mono tracks. This is a virtual split which
does not affect or create audio files.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Montage window, click the number button of the track that you want to split.
2.
Do one of the following:
●
To split the stereo track into two left/right mono tracks, select Split into Left/Right
Mono Tracks.
●
To split the stereo track into two mid/side mono tracks, select Split into Mid/Side
Mono Tracks.
RESULT
The track is split. If there are clips on the track, the two stereo sides are now separate clips,
allowing you to move, edit, or process them independently. If the track has no clips, this is the
same as deleting the track and inserting two new mono tracks.
The mono tracks are automatically grouped and can only be moved and resized together.
When you drag a stereo clip onto a mid/side mono track, the stereo clip is automatically split into
mid and side signals. During playback and rendering, the mid/side channels are automatically
combined to left/right channels at the montage output.
Clips
A clip contains a reference to a source audio file on your hard disk as well as start and end
positions in the file, volume and pan curves, fades, etc. This allows clips to play back smaller
sections of their source audio files.
Any number of clips can reference the same source file. Because a clip only references to the
original source file, it contains no audio data. Any number of clips can reference the same source
file.
You can also use envelopes and effects on clips.
You can see the clips of the active audio montage in the Clips window.
223
Audio Montage
Assembling the Audio Montage 3 clips on a track
Adding Audio Clips to the Audio Montage
You create clips by inserting audio into the audio montage. There are several ways to do this.
NOTE
You cannot add a mono clip to a stereo track or vice versa.
Dragging Audio from the Wave Window
PROCEDURE
1.
In the wave window of the Audio Editor, select the audio section that you want the clip to
refer to.
2.
Drag the selection onto a track of the audio montage.
If you want to add the whole audio file, drag the tab on a track.
3.
Select an insert option from the pop-up menu that opens when you release the mouse
button.
RESULT
A clip is created, named after the original file.
Inserting Audio from Open Wave Windows Using the Insert Menu
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, right-click an empty area of a track.
2.
From the pop-up menu, select the audio file that you want to insert as clip.
Inserting Audio Using Copy and Paste
PROCEDURE
1.
In the wave window of the Audio Editor, select the audio section to which you want the
clip to refer to.
2.
Select the Edit tab and click Copy, or press Ctrl/Cmd-C.
3.
In the montage window, select the track where you want to insert the clip.
The clip insert position is indicated by the edit cursor.
4.
Select the Edit tab and click Paste, or press Ctrl/Cmd-V.
5.
Select an insert option from the pop-up menu.
224
Audio Montage
Assembling the Audio Montage Inserting Audio from the File Explorer/macOS Finder Using Copy and Paste
PROCEDURE
1.
In the File Explorer/macOS Finder, select an audio file and press Ctrl/Cmd-C.
2.
In the montage window, select the track where you want to insert the clip.
The clip insert position is indicated by the edit cursor.
3.
Select the Edit tab and click Paste, or press Ctrl/Cmd-V.
4.
Select an insert option from the pop-up menu.
Dragging Audio Files From the File Browser Tool Window
NOTE
The following can also be done from the File Explorer/macOS Finder.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select Tool Windows > File Browser.
2.
In the File Browser window, select the audio files to which you want the clip to refer, and
drag them on a track.
3.
●
If you have selected a single audio file, the Paste pop-up menu opens.
●
If you have selected several audio files, the Insert Audio Files dialog opens.
Do one of the following:
●
If you have selected a single audio file, select an insert option from the pop-up
menu.
●
If you have selected several audio files, specify how the files should be ordered and
placed, and click OK. Then select an insert option from the pop-up menu.
Dragging Regions From the File Browser Tool Window
If you have defined marker regions in an audio file, you can drag these regions from the File
Browser window onto a track.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select Tool Windows > File Browser.
2.
In the File Browser window, select the audio file to which you want the clip to refer.
On the right side of the File Browser window, a list shows the available audio regions of
the selected file.
3.
Drag any region to the track.
4.
Select an insert option from the pop-up menu.
RELATED LINKS
File Browser Window on page 31
Importing Audio Files
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, select the track on which you want to insert the clip.
The clip insert position is indicated by the edit cursor.
225
Audio Montage
Assembling the Audio Montage 2.
Right-click an empty area on the track, and select Insert Audio Files from the pop-up
menu.
3.
Select the files that you want to insert.
Copying Clips From Another Audio Montage
If you have opened more than one audio montage, you can copy clips from one audio montage
to another, either by using drag and drop or by using copy and paste.
Dragging Clips From the Clips Tool Window
You can add clips by dragging them from the same audio montage.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select Tool Windows > Clips.
2.
Select one or several clips, and drag them to a track.
If you drag a single clip on a clip on the track, you must select an insert option from the
pop-up menu.
Clip Inserting Options
When dragging a single clip on another clip, you can choose between different clip inserting
options. For example, you can create default fades. You can also insert multiple clips at the same
time.
You can insert clips by pasting, importing from disk, using drag and drop, etc.
Single Clip Inserting
If you insert a single clip at a position in an audio montage that contains another clip, a pop-up
menu opens. By selecting one of the menu items, you specify how the clip should be inserted,
whether existing clips should be affected or not, etc.
Add/Mix
Inserts the clip without affecting any clips that already exist on the destination track.
However, if an inserted audio clip partially overlaps another audio clip, a crossfade is
created in the overlapping zone provided that an auto crossfade option is active.
226
Audio Montage
Assembling the Audio Montage Insert & Shift Clips Right (Track)
All clips to the right of the inserted clip (on the same track) are moved to the right.
Insert & Shift Clips Right (Global)
All clips to the right of the inserted clip (on all tracks) are moved to the right.
Split/Insert
Only available if the insertion point is within an existing clip (audio tracks only). The
existing clip is split and the right section is moved to the right. Other clips are not
affected.
Split/Insert & Shift Clips Right (Track)
Applies the Split/Insert function and moves all other clips on the same track to the
right (audio tracks only).
Split/Insert & Shift Clips Right (Global)
Applies the Split/Insert function and moves all other clips on all tracks to the right
(audio tracks only).
Replace Selected Range
Only available if there is a selection range on the destination track. The clip with
the selection range is split at the selection range edges, the inserted clip replaces
the range, and the section to the right of the range is moved to the left or right
(depending on the length of the inserted clip and the length of the selection range),
to close gaps behind the inserted clip.
Replace Selected Range (Trim Source Accordingly)
Only available if there is a selection range on the destination track and if that
selection range is shorter than the range of the clip that is to be inserted. The
inserted clip overwrites only the selected range. If necessary, the range to be
inserted is trimmed according to the current selection.
Replace Selected Range & Shift Clips Right (Track)
Applies the Replace Selected Range function and moves all other clips on the same
track to the right.
Replace Selected Range & Shift Clips Right (Global)
Applies the Replace Selected Range function and moves all other clips on all tracks
to the right.
Overwrite from Cursor
Inserts the clip at the edit cursor position. If the inserted clip overlaps any other clips,
the overlapped regions are removed from the existing clips.
Make Next Selection the Default Paste Function
If this option is activated, you can select a default option from the menu. This default
option is used when inserting audio. However, if the option is not compatible with
the context, it is not processed and the default option is deactivated. For example,
when using Replace Selected Range while there is no range selected.
●
To deactivate the default insert action, select the Edit tab, right-click the Paste
button, and select Cancel Default Insert Action.
Close Menu
No clip is added.
227
Audio Montage
Assembling the Audio Montage Inserting Multiple Clips
When you add multiple audio clips to an audio montage by importing them from disk or by using
drag and drop, the Insert Audio Files dialog opens.
Arrow Up/Down
Moves the selected file up/down in the list.
Add File
Opens the file browser where you can select files to be added to the list.
Remove File
Removes the selected file from the list.
Line up Files on Current Track (Linear)
If this option is activated, the clips are added to the audio montage, lined up
contiguously on a single track and spaced according to the Pre-Gap. The pre-gap can
be defined in the Audio Montages Preferences.
Stagger Files on Two Alternating Tracks (Linear)
If this option is activated, the clips are added to the audio montage, lined up
contiguously on two alternating tracks.
Place Each File on Separate Track (Stacked/Non-Linear)
If this option is activated, the clips are added to the audio montage on separate
tracks, according to the following settings.
●
If Start Inserting below Selected Track is activated, the new tracks for the
added files are inserted below the selected track.
●
If Use Existing Tracks (Create New Tracks If Necessary) is activated, the files
are added to the existing tracks. If there are more files than existing tracks,
new tracks are created.
Shift Existing Clips to the Right
If this option is activated, any existing clips in the audio montage are moved to the
right by an amount equaling the length of the first new added file.
228
Audio Montage
Assembling the Audio Montage Mismatched Sample Rates When Inserting Audio Files
When inserting audio files with a different sample rate than the sample rates of the audio
montage, WaveLab Pro can create and use resampled versions of the files.
The resampled file versions are created in the implicit folder that is defined in the Audio
Montages Preferences. The name of the file is the name of the original file name with the new
sample rate as suffix. If the resampled file already exists, it is not recreated. However, you can
also activate the option Recreate Resampled Files in the Mismatched Sample Rates dialog.
This creates a 32-bit float file without any dithering process.
If you modify the original audio file, you must use the Replace Audio File option in the Insert
tab of the Audio Montage window to select the modified audio file. This will recreate the
resampled file.
Mismatched Sample Rates Dialog
This dialog opens when you insert an audio file with a different sample rate than the sample rate
of the audio montage. It allows you to create a resampled copy of the audio file.
You can specify the quality of the resample conversion in the Global Preferences.
Recreate Resampled Files
If this option is activated and a resampled file exists, it is recreated. Otherwise,
the existing version is used. Activate this option if the original audio file has been
modified and you want to recreate its resampled version.
RELATED LINKS
Resample Conversion Quality on page 570
Empty Clips
If the audio file of a clip is missing, an empty clip displays the length and position of the missing
clip.
Empty clips are useful for the following:
●
As place holders, to create audio montage templates with empty clips.
229
Audio Montage
Assembling the Audio Montage ●
As an alternative to muting a clip. The difference is that for empty clips no audio is copied
when cloning the audio montage.
●
To define regions. Because a clip has a start and end point in the audio montage, it defines
a range which can be used as a reference for any purpose.
Creating Empty Clips
You can create an empty clip from a selection range.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, select a range.
2.
Right-click an empty area of the track, and select Create Empty Clip from Selection
Range.
Removing the Source of Clips
You can create an empty clip by removing a source file of a clip. This does not delete the audio
file from the disk.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, select the clip for which you want to remove the source audio file.
2.
Select the Insert tab.
3.
In the Selected Clip section, click Replace Audio File, and select Remove Source.
Saving and Loading Clips
You can save clips to disk as separate files. This is useful if you have, for example, created a
perfect fade, envelope, or clip effect configuration, but want to continue experimenting with the
clip in the audio montage.
By saving the clip, you can always revert to the perfect version by reloading it. However, saved
clips are still a reference to the original source file and contain no audio data.
Saving Clips
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, right-click the bottom area of a clip.
2.
From the pop-up menu, select Save Clip.
3.
In the Save Clip as dialog, specify a name and location, and click Save.
Loading Clips
PREREQUISITE
Select a stereo track for stereo clips and a mono track for mono clips.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, on an empty part of a track, right-click where you want to insert
the clips.
2.
From the pop-up menu, select Insert Clip Files.
3.
Select a .clip file, and click Open.
230
Audio Montage
Rearranging Clips RESULT
The clips are inserted on the selected track. If you selected more than one clip, the first clip is
positioned at the audio montage cursor, and any following clips are placed according to the
default pre-gap time that is set in the Audio Montages Preferences. When you import several
clips, they are sorted alphabetically according to their the file names.
Rearranging Clips
You can freely arrange clips in the montage window.
Selected and Active Clips
There is a distinction between selected and active clips. Some editing functions can only be
processed on an individual clip or active clip, while others can be processed on multiple clips or
selected clips.
●
A selected clip is a clip that you have selected using any of the selecting clips procedures.
Several clips can be selected at the same time. This allows you to edit multiple clips at the
same time using functions such as copy, delete, move, etc. Selected clips have a different
background color. Right-clicking in the top part of a clip opens the Clip Selected Range
menu.
●
An active clip is the clip that you selected, clicked, or edited last. Only one clip can be active
at a time. By default, the active clip is distinguished by a highlighted name label. Some
functions can only be processed on a active clip. Right-clicking in the lower part of a clip
opens the Active Clip menu.
Mouse Zones
Basic rearranging of clips in the audio montage is achieved by clicking and dragging with the
mouse. However, the results of dragging with the mouse depend on where in the clip you click.
The different areas in a clip are called mouse zones.
By default, the mouse zones have the following basic functionalities:
Top Clip Area
●
Copy a clip by dragging.
●
Open the source file by double-clicking.
●
Split at cursor position by double-clicking the edit cursor
or pressing S.
231
Audio Montage
Rearranging Clips Upper Clip Area
●
Select a range.
●
Open the Clip Selected Range menu by right-clicking.
Lower and Bottom Clip Area
●
Move a clip by dragging.
●
Open the Active Clip menu by right-clicking.
●
Resize a clip by dragging the edges, while keeping the audio
source static.
●
Resize the left or right side of a clip while letting the audio follow
by holding Ctrl/Cmd and dragging the left or right edges.
Clip Edges
232
Audio Montage
Rearranging Clips Clip Name
●
Rename the clip by double-clicking.
When you move the mouse cursor over a mouse zone, the info line at the bottom left indicates
the corresponding actions.
Info Line
The info line at the bottom of the Audio Montage window shows what happens when you click
the mouse button with or without modifier keys, depending on the cursor position.
●
To activate/deactivate the info line, open the Audio Montages Preferences, and on the All
Audio Montages tab, activate/deactivate Display Indications of Possible Actions.
The following symbols are used on the info line:
Single-click
Indicates what happens when you click.
Double-click
Indicates what happens when you double-click.
Right-click
Indicates that you can right-click to display a menu. The name of the menu is
displayed to the right of the symbol.
Ctrl/Cmd-click
Indicates that you can Ctrl/Cmd-click for an additional function.
233
Audio Montage
Rearranging Clips Alt-click
Indicates that you can Alt-click for an additional function.
Shift-click
Indicates that you can Shift-click for an additional function.
Drag up/down
Indicates what happens when you click and drag up or down.
Drag left/right
Indicates what happens when you click and drag left or right.
Drag in any direction
Indicates what happens when you click and drag an item in any direction within the
audio montage.
Drag out of the audio montage
Indicates what happens when you click and drag an item out of the audio montage.
Moving/Resizing clips or changing envelope values
This indicates that you are moving or resizing clips, or changing envelope values, for
example.
Combined modifier keys
Indicates that you can use combined modifier keys.
Magnetic Bounds in Audio Montages
Some positions, such as markers or the start and end of a clip, can be defined as magnetic.
Dragged elements can snap to these positions. This makes it easier to position items accurately.
For example, when you move or resize a clip, and its edges or its cue point get close to one of the
magnetic bounds, the clip snaps to this position. A label is displayed, indicating the snap position.
To place the cursor at a magnetic position, click the time line and hold the mouse button
pressed. When you now move the cursor vertically, the cursor jumps to the next magnetic
bound.
234
Audio Montage
Rearranging Clips Activating Snapping to Magnets
To make use of the magnetic bounds function, Snap to Magnets must be activated.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Montage window, select the Edit tab.
2.
In the Snapping section, activate Snap to Magnets.
Magnets Menu
In this pop-up menu, you can specify which positions should be magnetic. When Snap to
Magnets is activated, items that you move snap to these positions.
●
To open the Magnets pop-up menu, select the Edit tab in the Audio Montage window,
and click Magnets in the Snapping section.
You can let items snap to the following positions:
Start of Montage
Makes the start of the audio montage magnetic.
Clip Start
Makes the start of the clips magnetic.
Clip End
Makes the end of the clips magnetic.
Clip Cue Point
Makes the cue point in the clips magnetic.
Clip End Cue Point
Makes the position that is located after the clip end magnetic. If this option is
deactivated, all end cue points are invisible in the audio montage.
Time Ruler Marks
Makes the main time units that are displayed in the ruler magnetic.
Markers
Makes the markers magnetic.
Markers in Audio Sources
Makes the markers in the original audio files of the clip magnetic if they are visible.
Time Selection Edges
Makes the edges of the selected time range magnetic.
Cursor
Makes the edit cursor magnetic.
Selecting Clips
You can edit multiple selected clips at once.
●
To select a clip, click the lower clip area. Selected clips are displayed in a different color.
●
To select multiple clips, Ctrl/Cmd-click the lower clip areas.
●
To select a range of clips, Shift-click them.
●
To select several adjacent clips, double-click the upper clip area, and after the second click,
drag to select the adjacent clips.
235
Audio Montage
Rearranging Clips ●
To select several clips on several tracks with a selection rectangle, hold down Ctrl/
Cmd-Shift, and drag the rectangle.
●
To choose between several clip selection options, open the Clips window and select an
option from the Select menu, or right-click the top clip area of a track and select from the
Clip Selected Range pop-up menu.
Selection Ranges in Audio Montages
A selection range is a selected area on a track. The selection range can be entirely or partially
within a clip or an empty section of the track.
Selection ranges are useful for the following:
●
To edit clips by cutting or erasing the selection, or trimming the clip to the selection.
●
To create a new clip by dragging the selection range to another track.
●
To open a montage window with the selection range from the source audio file by
dragging the selection range to the Audio Editor.
●
To play back only the selection range, either the whole audio montage or only the clip with
the intersecting clip part.
●
To loop the playback within the selection by activating the loop and selecting the Loop
mode on the transport bar.
Creating and Editing Selection Ranges in Audio Montages
You can resize, create, move, and remove selection ranges.
●
To create a selection range in an empty area on a track, click and drag with the mouse. The
start and end position and the length of the range are displayed on the info line.
●
To create a selection range within a clip, click and drag with the mouse in the upper clip
area. The start and end position and the length of the range are displayed on the info line.
●
To create a selection range of the area between two markers, double-click between the
markers.
●
To create a selection range from a region marker pair, press Shift, and double-click the
start or end marker. In the Markers window, you can also double-click the Length field of
a region marker.
●
To create a selection range from a CD track, open the CD window and double-click the
number to the left of the corresponding track.
●
To create a selection range from a clip, open the Clips window and Alt-click the number to
the left of the corresponding clip. To zoom in on the selected clip, double-click the number
to the left of the clip.
●
To resize a selection range, Shift-click and drag to the left or to the right, or click and drag
the edges of the selection range.
●
To move a selection range, press Ctrl/Cmd and Shift, and drag the selection range to the
left or right.
●
To deselect a selection range, click elsewhere in the audio montage, or press Esc.
236
Audio Montage
Clip Editing Clip Context Menus
Many editing functions for clips can be accessed via the clip context menus. Depending on where
you right-click the clip, different context menus are available.
1
Fade in section
Opens the Fade In pop-up menu where you can edit the fade in.
2
Bottom area of a clip
Opens the Active Clip pop-up menu where you can edit the active clip.
3
Upper area of a clip
Opens the Clip Selected Range pop-up menu where you can select specific areas of a clip,
lock a clip, etc.
4
Sustain section
Opens the Envelope pop-up menu where you can edit the envelope.
5
Clip name
Opens the Effects pop-up menu where you can add effects to the clip.
6
Fade out section
Opens the Fade Out pop-up menu where you can edit the fade out.
Clip Editing
All clips are displayed in the Clips window. In this window, you can edit and rearrange clips and
drag them into the audio montage.
The active clip is highlighted in the clips list.
RELATED LINKS
Clips Window on page 237
Clips Window
This window contains a list of the clips that are placed in the active audio montage together with
additional information about the clips.
●
To open the Clips window, open an audio montage and select Tool Windows > Clips.
237
Audio Montage
Clip Editing Clip List
In the clip list columns, you can edit the following settings for each clip:
●
Name
●
Track number
●
Pre-gap
●
Start and end time
●
Length
●
Pre-effect gain
●
Post-effect gain
●
Comment
You can also mute and lock clips, search for clip names, and play back a clip with or without pregap. The playback buttons work in the following way:
From Start with Pre-Roll
Playback from start with a pre-roll.
You can also press Alt and click From Start with Pre-Roll to play back from the start
with a short pre-roll.
From Start
Playback from start.
The FX icon indicates that a clip contains one or more plug-ins. Double-clicking the FX icon opens
the Effects window.
●
To zoom in on the clip, click the name of the clip.
●
To select the time range corresponding to the clip, Alt-click the number to the left of the
clip name.
●
To zoom in and select the time range at the same time, double-click the number to the left
of the clip name.
Select Menu
Select All Clips
Selects all clips in the audio montage.
Select Clips on Selected Track
Selects all clips that are included in the selected track.
Select Clips Inside Selected Time Range
Selects all clips that are fully encompassed in the selected time range on all tracks.
Select Clips Located Before the Cursor (on Selected Track)
Selects all clips that have their end point to the left of the cursor on the selected
track.
Select Clips Located Before the Cursor (on All Tracks)
Selects all clips that have their end point to the left of the cursor on all tracks.
Select Clips Located After the Cursor (on Selected Track)
Selects all clips that start to the right of the cursor on the selected track.
Select Clips Located After the Cursor (on All Tracks)
Selects all clips that start to the right of the cursor on all tracks.
238
Audio Montage
Clip Editing Inverse Selection
Deselects all selected clips and selects all other clips.
Deselect All Clips
Deselects all selected clips.
Functions Menu
Create Super Clip from Selected Clips
Replaces the selected clips with a super clip that refers to a sub-montage.
Export Clip List as Text
Opens a plain text version of the clip list in the default text editor.
Batch Renaming
Opens the Batch Renaming dialog in which you can batch-rename any number of
clips.
Use Audio File Name for Selected Audio Clips
Names each clip after the audio file to which it refers.
Update BWF Time Stamps (Selected Clips)
Updates the time stamp of each audio file that is referenced by a selected clip to
reflect the clip position in the audio montage.
The file header of a WAV audio file may contain a time stamp in the Broadcast Wave
Format. This time stamp makes it possible to insert audio at precise positions in
different applications. The audio files are marked as modified and must be saved.
Move Selected Clips to Their Related BWF Time Stamp
Moves the selected clips to the positions that are contained in their source audio
files, provided the audio files contain a time stamp.
Align Clips
Opens the Align Clips dialog which lets you align all selected clips on the selected
track relatively to one another.
Resize Selected Clips to Match the Active Clip
Uses the length of the active clip as reference to change the length of all selected
clips.
Mute/Unmute Selected Clips
Mutes/unmutes all selected clips.
Lock/Unlock Selected Clips
Locks the clip to avoid that it is accidentally edited.
Lock/Unlock Moving and Resizing
Locks the position and size of a clip. Other editing options are still possible.
Show/Hide Clip Ruler and Markers of Source File
Changes the visibility of the ruler and the marker display of the source audio files for
all selected clips.
Options Menu
Only Show Selected Clips
If this option is activated, only clips that are selected in the montage window are
displayed. This is useful to display only the clips that belong to a specific group
(Groups window) or to a specific audio file (File Browser window).
239
Audio Montage
Clip Editing Show Audio Clips
If this option is activated, only audio clips are displayed.
Show Picture Clips
If this option is activated, only picture clips are displayed.
Show Global Pre-Gaps
Displays the length of the gap between the start of a clip and the end of the previous
clip on any track in the Pre-Gap column. If the clips overlap, the length is displayed in
red.
Show Pre-Gaps by Track
Displays the length of the gap between the start of a clip and the end of the previous
clip on the same track. If the clips overlap, the length is displayed in red.
Zoom the Clip When Selected
If this option is activated when you select a clip in the list, the clip fills the track area
in the most efficient way.
Make Clip Entirely Visible When Selected
If this option is activated when you select a clip in the list, the track area is scrolled
and/or zoomed to display the whole clip.
Customize Command Bar
Opens the Customize Commands dialog which contains options to hide or show
specific command bar buttons.
Filtering Clip Names
The search field in the Clips window allows you to filter the clips list.
You can perform a text search in the Name and Comment columns. To perform a text search
in the Comment column, this column must be sorted. Otherwise, the name column is searched.
The Select All function selects the filtered items.
●
To search for clips, click in the search field, and enter text.
●
To switch the focus from the search field to the clips list, press the arrow down key.
●
To switch the focus from the clips list to the search field, press Ctrl/Cmd-F.
Align Clips Dialog
This dialog allows you to align clips at specific positions and add a space between them. You
must select at least two clips to use this function.
●
To open the Align Clips dialog, open the Clips window, and select Functions > Align Clips.
240
Audio Montage
Clip Editing NOTE
Clips can be moved independently from the group to which they belong.
Place Clips One after the Other (Use End Cue Points as Reference)
Positions the selected clips successively on the selected track. Each clip is aligned at
the end cue point of the preceding clip.
Place Clips One after the Other with Gap
Positions the selected clips on the selected track. In the time field, specify the time
between the end of a clip and the start of the next clip.
Place Clips One after the Other with Crossfade
Positions the selected clips on the selected track and creates crossfades between
them. In the time field, specify the crossfade time.
Place Every
Lets each clip start at the specified interval from the start of the preceding clip.
In this case, the clips can overlap each other. In the time field, specify the interval
between the start of a clip and the start of the next one.
Treat Overlapping Clips on a Track as One Unit
All overlapping or adjacent clips on a track are treated as one unit. This means that
all clips are aligned with the same offset.
Treat Overlapping Clips as One Unit, Regardless of Their Tracks
All overlapping or adjacent clips on a track are treated as one unit, even if they are
on different tracks. This means that all clips are aligned with the same offset.
Only Align Selected Clips
If this option is activated, only selected clips are moved. If a group of overlapping
clips contains a clip that is not selected, the group is not moved.
Only Align Clips of Selected Track
If this option is activated, only clips of the selected track are moved. For example, if
a group of overlapping clips contains a clip that is not part of the selected track, the
group is not moved.
241
Audio Montage
Clip Editing Reordering Clips in Audio Montages By Dragging
In the Clips window, you can re-order clips by dragging them to another position in the list.
PROCEDURE
1.
Open the Clips window.
2.
In the clip list, drag a clip to another position in the list.
The option Move Overlapping Clips Together is taken into account.
You can move more than one clip at the same time, by selecting multiple clips and
dragging them. If more than one clip is selected, all clips between the leftmost selected
clip and the rightmost selected clips are moved.
RELATED LINKS
Clips Window on page 237
Exporting the Clip List as Text
You can export clip list information like names, source files, tracks, and clip length.
PROCEDURE
1.
Open the Clips window.
2.
In the Clips window, select Functions > Export Clip List as Text.
3.
Activate the option for the information that you want to export.
4.
Select the output format from the pop-up menu.
5.
Click OK.
RESULT
The clip list opens in the selected output format. If you select Print, the Print Preview window
opens. The text file is saved in the folder for temporary files.
RELATED LINKS
Temporary Files on page 85
Export Clip List as Text Dialog
This dialog allows you to export the clip list in various file formats, or to print it out. You can
select what clip information is included in the exported file.
●
To open the Export Clip List as Text dialog, open the Clips window, and select
Functions > Export Clip List as Text.
242
Audio Montage
Clip Editing Moving and Crossfading Clips
You can let clips overlap other clips, move them, and create crossfades between clips.
Moving Clips
NOTE
The channel configuration of the clip must match the destination track.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, select the clips that you want to move.
2.
Click the lower clip area, and drag the clips in any direction.
While dragging, the info line displays the current start position of the clip.
Moving Clips with Auto Grouping
The options for auto grouping allow you to specify how clips are moved. The options can be
selected in the Audio Montage window, on the Edit tab, in the Auto Grouping section.
RELATED LINKS
Options for Moving and Crossfading Clips on page 244
Optimized Crossfades When Snapping to Other Clips
If you line up clips so that one clip ends exactly where the next one starts, for example, by using
the Magnets option, the waveforms at the intersection point probably do not match. To avoid
sudden level changes, that may result in pops and clicks, you can optimize the crossfade when
snapping to other clips.
On the Edit tab, in the Snapping section, open the Crossfading pop-up menu, and activate Snap
to Waveform When Crossfading. When this option is activated and you move a clip so that its
start snaps to the end of another clip, the following happens:
●
WaveLab Pro scans the waveforms of the clips within a short range to find the position
where the waveforms of the two clips match best. This is the same automatic phase
matching as in the Wave Matching window. You can specify how far you want the
program to scan into the clips, by selecting a search range on the menu of the Wave
Matching window.
●
The position of the clip that you moved is adjusted slightly to achieve the best possible
match between the waveforms. This creates a short crossfade.
NOTE
This function only applies when moving from right to left, for example, when you let the start of
the moved clip snap to the end of the clip on the left.
RELATED LINKS
Magnetic Bounds in Audio Montages on page 234
Wave Matching Window on page 278
Overlapping Clips
You can move clips so that they overlap each other.
Note the following:
243
Audio Montage
Clip Editing ●
The tracks in the audio montage are polyphonic, which means that each track can play
back several overlapping clips at the same time. Overlapping clips are transparent,
allowing you to see the underlying clips and their waveforms.
●
To select an overlapped clip, click the bottom clip area of the crossfade area.
●
There are crossfading options that automatically adjust the level envelope curves when
you overlap clips.
Options for Moving and Crossfading Clips
There are several options that help you when moving and crossfading clips. You can choose how
you want clips to be handled when they are moved, decide whether automatic fades are created
or not, and select the behavior of clips when they are moved.
Ripple
The ripple options are available in the Edit tab of the Audio Montage window.
Track
If this option is activated and you move a clip horizontally, all clips on the selected
track that are located to the right of the edited clip are also moved. This option also
applies when moving or resizing clips, and when inserting or pasting more than one
clip at the same time.
Global
If this option is activated and you move a clip horizontally, all clips on all tracks that
are located to the right of the edited clip are also moved. This option is taken into
account when moving or resizing clips, and when inserting or pasting more than one
clip at the same time.
Auto Grouping
The auto grouping options are available in the Edit tab of the Audio Montage window.
Track
If this option is activated and you move a clip horizontally, all overlapping or adjacent
clips on the same track are also moved.
Global
If this option is activated and you move a clip horizontally, all vertically overlapping
clips on all tracks are also moved.
Crossfading
The following crossfading options are available in the Fade tab of the Audio Montage window in
the Options section.
Overlaps
This pop-up menu allows you to set the automatic crossfading behavior.
●
If No Automatic Crossfading is activated, no automatic crossfading is
performed when clips overlap.
●
If Free Overlaps is activated, automatic crossfades are created when a clip
overlaps another clip on the same track. The length of the overlap determines
the length of the crossfade.
●
If Fade In Constrains Overlaps is activated, the fade in length of a clip
constrains the maximum possible overlap, and thus the crossfade time. If the
clip on the right side, that is, the clip with the fade in in the overlap, is moved
to the left past the set overlap time, the other clip is progressively resized.
244
Audio Montage
Clip Editing Moving the other clip to the right into the clip that contains the fade in in the
overlap produces the same result.
●
If Fade Out Constrains Overlaps is activated, the fade out length of a clip
constrains the maximum possible overlap, and thus the crossfade time. If the
clip on the left side, that is, the clip with the fade out in the overlap, is moved
to the right past the set overlap time, the other clip is progressively resized.
Moving the other clip to the left into the clip that contains the fade out in the
overlap produces the same result.
Automatic Crossfading
This pop-up menu allows you to make automatic crossfading settings.
●
If Allow Automatic Crossfading with Clips on Selected Track is activated,
crossfades are automatically created when you move a clip so that it overlaps
another clip that is located on the selected track.
●
If Allow Multiple Automatic Crossfades is activated, crossfades are
automatically created for all moved clips that overlap other clips on their track.
If this option is deactivated, a crossfade is only created for the clip that you
drag, even if several clips are moved simultaneously.
Options
●
If Create Default Fades in New Clips is activated, all new clips get the default
fade in and fade out shape and length. For clips that are created by splitting a
clip, only the default fade time is used.
●
If Lock Fade Times When Adjusting Clip Edges is activated, the defined fade
in and fade out lengths are locked to the clip start or end, even if you adjust
the clip edges. This means that if you resize a clip by dragging its edge, the
corresponding fade junction point moves accordingly, while maintaining the
fade length.
The following crossfading options are available in the Edit tab of the Audio Montage window, in
the Snapping section.
Crossfading
This pop-up menu allows you to make snapping settings for crossfades.
●
If Snap to Waveform When Crossfading is activated and you create a
crossfade by dragging a clip towards another one located on its left side,
the position of the moved clip is automatically adjusted to obtain a good
correspondence between the clip waveforms. This correlation process
provides a crossfade that is aligned in phase.
●
If Create Crossfade and Snap to Waveform When Snapping to Left Clip is
activated and you move a clip to let its start snap to the end of another clip on
its left, the clip is slightly moved to the left to create a short crossfade that is
based on an optimal correlation between the two waveforms. This correlation
process provides a crossfade that is aligned in phase.
●
If Create Crossfade When Snapping to Left Clip is activated and you move a
clip to let its start snap to the end of another clip on its left, the clip is slightly
moved to the left to create a crossfade.
The length of the crossfade is the fade in length of the clip on the right. If
the fade in length is zero, the fade out length of the left clip is used as a
basis instead. If that length is also zero, the Create Crossfade and Snap to
Waveform When Snapping to Left Clip function is performed if activated.
245
Audio Montage
Clip Editing Creating Clips from Selection Ranges
You can create clips from a selection range. If no clip is overlapping the selection, an empty clip is
created.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, select a clip.
2.
Select a range in the clip.
3.
Select the Edit tab.
4.
In the Clip section, click Create from Selection.
Duplicating Clips
NOTE
The channel configuration of the clip must match the destination track.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, select one or more clips.
2.
Click the upper clip area and drag the clips in any direction.
While you are dragging, a dotted line indicates where the first of the copied clips will be
placed. The position is also indicated on the info line.
If you dragged a single clip, a pop-up menu opens. Select the option that you want to
apply to the duplicate of the clip. The ripple and auto grouping settings are taken into
account.
Duplicating with Ripple and Auto Grouping
If you duplicate more than one clip, the auto grouping and ripple settings affect the result.
The following options are available on the Edit tab, in the Ripple section:
●
If Track is activated and you move a clip horizontally, all clips on the selected track that are
located to the right of the edited clip are also moved.
●
If Global is activated and you move a clip horizontally, all clips on all tracks that are located
to the right of the edited clip are also moved.
The following options are available on the Edit tab, in the Auto Grouping section:
●
If Track is activated and you move a clip horizontally, all overlapping or adjacent clips on
the same track are also moved.
●
If Global is activated and you move a clip horizontally, all vertically overlapping clips on all
tracks are moved.
Repeating Clips
You can make a number of copies of a clip and position them at various intervals on the current
track of your audio montage.
NOTE
Repeating clips does not create overlapping clips.
246
Audio Montage
Clip Editing PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, select the clip that you want to repeat.
2.
Optional: Place the edit cursor.
3.
Select the Edit tab.
4.
In the Clip section, click Repeat Clip.
5.
In the Repeat Clip dialog, select one of the following options:
●
Select Count, and specify the number of copies.
●
Select Repeat Until Cursor.
6.
Select one of the Placement options.
7.
Click OK.
RESULT
The clips are repeated. If you chose Repeat Until Cursor, the last clip starts to the left of the
audio montage cursor.
Repeat Clip Dialog
This dialog allows you to specify the number of clones to produce and control their placement,
alignment, and spacing.
●
To open the Repeat Clip dialog, select the Edit tab in the Audio Montage window, and
click Repeat Clip in the Clip section.
Number of Clones
Count creates the specified number of clones.
Repeat until Cursor creates clones up to the edit cursor.
Placement
Place Clips One after the Other places the clips one after the other on the track.
Use End Cue Points as Reference places the selected clips one after the other on
the focused track. Each clip is aligned with the end cue point of the preceding clip.
247
Audio Montage
Clip Editing Gap between Clips sets the gap duration between clips.
Place Every places the copied clips in the time interval that you set in the field below.
This is the interval between two succeeding clip starts.
Align with Clips of Selected Track aligns the copied clips with the starting position
of the clips on the selected track, including any offset value that you can set in the
Offset field.
Insert Copies at Markers aligns the copied clips with specific markers. Specify these
markers on the menus below.
Creating New Clips by Dragging Selections
You can drag selection ranges to create a new clip.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, select a range.
If the selection range covers more than one clip, only the section that is part of the active
clip is copied.
2.
Click the upper clip area and drag the selection to the new position.
When you are dragging, the position of the pointer is displayed on the info line. The
magnets settings are taken into account.
3.
Select one of the insert options.
NOTE
Envelopes and effects are not included when you copy selection ranges.
Clip Resizing
In this context, resizing usually means moving the start and end points of a clip. This reveals
more or less of the original audio file. You can keep the audio source static relative to the time
line of the audio montage, or relative to the resized edge of the clip.
Resize Clips With a Static Audio Source
To resize clips, click the left or right edge of the clip and move the start or end point to the left or
to the right.
The start and end positions and the length of the clip are displayed on the info line while you are
dragging. You cannot drag the edge of a clip past the start or end point of the audio file to which
it refers.
When you drag the right edge of a clip, the Ripple settings are taken into account. If Track is
activated, all the following clips on the track are moved when you resize the clip. If Global is
activated, all clips on all tracks in the audio montage are moved.
If you press Alt, all selected clips are resized by the same value.
248
Audio Montage
Clip Editing Resize Clips With Tied Audio Sources
You can resize a clip while having the audio source tied to the edge that you are moving. You
Ctrl/Cmd-click the left or right edge of the clip and move the start or end point to the left or to
the right.
The start and end positions and the length of the clip are displayed on the info line while you are
dragging. Magnetic bounds and the auto grouping options apply.
If you press Alt-Ctrl/Cmd when resizing, all selected clips are resized by the same value.
RELATED LINKS
Options for Moving and Crossfading Clips on page 244
Resizing Clips by Cropping
You can crop clips to remove material at the beginning and end of a clip.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, select a clip range.
2.
Select the Edit tab.
3.
In the Removal section, click Crop Clip.
RESULT
The clip is resized so that it contains only the selected audio.
Sliding Audio in Clips
You slide the audio in a clip. This moves the section of the audio source that the clip refers to.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, position the mouse cursor over the lower area of the clip.
2.
Press Ctrl/Cmd-Alt, and drag left or right to slide the audio source.
Moving Clips With Fixed Audio Sources
You can move the clip while the audio source remains fixed in position.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, position the mouse cursor over the lower area of the clip.
2.
Press Shift-Alt, and drag left or right to move the clip.
249
Audio Montage
Clip Editing This reveals other sections of the underlying audio source.
Splitting Clips
PREREQUISITE
Decide whether you want to automatically create crossfades between the left and right clip. To
activate/deactivate this option, select the Fade tab, click Options in the Options section, and
activate/deactivate Create Default Fades in New Clips.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, click the position where you want to split the clip.
2.
Position the mouse cursor on the edit cursor position in the top clip area.
The cursor becomes a pair of scissors.
3.
Double-click.
RESULT
The clip is split in two. The two clips have the same name and settings. Envelopes and fades are
converted so that the two clips play back as if they were still one clip.
To split clips on all tracks, select the Edit tab, right-click Split Clip in the Split section, and select
Split Clips on All Tracks.
Erase Selections of Clips
You can erase a selection range within a clip.
Erasing Parts of Clips Inside Selection Ranges
Erasing the part of a clip inside a selection range results in a gap between the two resulting clips.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, select a range in a clip.
2.
Select the Edit tab.
3.
In the Removal section, click Erase Selected Range.
If Snap to Waveform when Crossfading or Create Crossfade when Snapping to Left
Clip are activated, the position of the right clip is adjusted for the best possible phase
match between the clips.
The auto grouping settings are taken into account.
RELATED LINKS
Snapping on page 202
250
Audio Montage
Clip Editing Deleting Parts of Clips Inside Selection Ranges and Patching Up
Deleting the part of a clip inside a selection range removes the selected range and moves the
right section of the clip to the left to fill the gap.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, select a range in a clip.
2.
Select the Edit tab.
3.
In the Removal section, click Delete Selected Range.
If any of the automatic crossfading modes or the option Create Default Fades in New
Clips are activated, a default crossfade is created between the resulting two clips. This
creates a clean transition.
Deleting Clips
●
Right-click a clip and select Delete.
●
Select a clip and press Delete. To ensure that there is no selection range, press Esc.
Locking Clips
You can lock clips to prevent them from being accidentally moved, edited, or deleted.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, select a clip.
2.
Do one of the following:
●
Select the Edit tab, open the Lock pop-up menu in the Clip section, and activate Full
Lock or Time Lock.
●
In the Clips window, select Functions, and activate Lock/Unlock Selected Clips or
Lock/Unlock Moving and Resizing.
RESULT
A lock symbol indicates that a clip is locked.
Unlocking Clips
Use one of the following methods to unlock a clip:
●
Click in the lower area of the locked clip, and click Yes in the message.
●
Select the Edit tab, open the Lock pop-up menu in the Clip section, and deactivate Full
Lock or Time Lock.
251
Audio Montage
Clip Editing Clips and Cue Points
A cue point is a defined position marker that belongs to a clip. It may be positioned inside or
outside the clip. Cue points are displayed as dotted vertical lines.
When you move a clip, its cue point is magnetic to any edges, markers, or positions that are
activated on the Magnets menu. Magnetic cue points allow for easy selection. There are several
uses for this:
●
Set the cue point at a relevant position in the audio to align the clip with other clips, etc.
●
Set the cue point before the start of a clip to position clips in a row with pre-defined
spaces.
●
Set the cue point at the fade in or fade out point of a clip to maintain defined fade lengths
when crossfading.
NOTE
Each clip can only have one cue point. If you select another cue point insert option, the cue point
is moved to a new position.
Adding Cue Points
You can add one cue point for each clip.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the audio montage, click the clip position where you want to set a cue point.
2.
Select the Edit tab.
3.
In the Clip section, open the Cue Point pop-up menu.
4.
Select one of the following options:
5.
●
Set at Cursor
●
Set at Default Gap Position
●
Follows Fade In End Point
●
Follows Fade Out Start Point
Optional: Select Custom Cue End and specify a custom cue end point.
About Nudging
Nudging in the montage window allows you to make fine adjustments. You can nudge clips,
objects, and properties.
Each time that you use the nudge function, the selected element is nudged by a specific amount.
By holding down user-specified modifier keys, you can nudge the element by smaller or larger
amounts.
Magnetic bounds are not taken into account. Nudged elements do not snap to positions but can
be moved freely.
252
Audio Montage
Clip Editing Nudging
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, select the objects that you want to nudge.
2.
Select the Edit tab.
3.
In the Nudge section, click Target.
4.
In the Target pop-up menu, activate the elements that you want to nudge or activate Auto
Select Item.
5.
Click Nudge - or Nudge + in the Nudge section or use the nudge icons on the transport
bar.
By holding down the user specified modifier keys, you can nudge the element by smaller
or larger amounts.
Setting the Default Nudge Impulse
You can set the nudge value that is used to adjust the elements. The large, small, and micro
impulses are relative to the default value.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > Preferences > Audio Montages.
2.
Select the All Audio Montages tab.
3.
In the Basic Amplitudes for Nudging section, specify a default time for the nudge
impulse in the Time field.
4.
In the Gain field, specify the default impulse gain for the nudging volume.
Elements That Can Be Nudged
The Target pop-up menu lists the elements and properties that can be nudged.
●
To open the Target pop-up menus, select the Edit tab in the Audio Montage window, and
right-click Target in the Nudge section.
Auto Select Item
Attempts to automatically select what should be nudged, depending on your last
action. For example, if your last action was to select or move a clip, the Clip Position
option is automatically selected in the Target menu. In most cases, this allows you
to use the nudge feature without having to manually select nudge elements on the
submenu.
Clip Position
Moves all selected clips.
Clip’s Left/Right Edge
Resizes the active clip. This function is similar to resizing with a static audio source.
Clip’s Fade In/Fade Out
Moves the fade in/fade out junction points of the active clip. If the envelope is a
stereo envelope, both sides are adjusted.
Clip’s Crossfade
Narrows or widens the crossfade zone by moving the junction points of both clips in
the crossfade. This nudging only functions if you select the second clip (the one to
the right) in a crossfade pair.
253
Audio Montage
Audio Montages within Audio Montages Edit Cursor
Moves the edit cursor.
Left Edge of Selected Time Range
Moves the left edge of a selection range.
Right Edge of Selected Time Range
Moves the right edge of a selection range.
Selected Marker
Moves the selected audio montage marker. To select a marker, click it in the area
above the ruler.
Volume of Active Clip
Adjusts the volume of the active clip step by step according to the Gain setting in the
Audio Montages Preferences.
Volume of All Selected Clips
Adjusts the volume of all selected clips step by step according to the Gain setting in
the Audio Montages Preferences.
Pan of Active Clip
Adjusts the pan of the active clip. Nudge + pans to the left and Nudge - to the right.
Pan of All Selected Clips
Adjusts the pan of all selected clips. Nudge + pans to the left and Nudge - to the
right.
Surround Pan of Active Clip
Adjusts the pan of the active clip. Nudge + pans to the left and Nudge - to the right.
Surround Pan of All Selected Clips
Adjusts the pan of all selected clips. Nudge + pans to the left and Nudge - to the
right.
Displaying Clips in Mid and Side View
●
To activate the mid/side view, right-click the upper area of a clip, and select Show/Hide
Mid/Side Channels.
NOTE
This does not affect playback and plug-in processing.
Audio Montages within Audio Montages
You can insert external audio montages in an audio montage or gather several clips of an audio
montage to an internal sub-montage. This makes it easy to build large audio montages while
hiding edit complexities inside other audio montages.
This also increases the performance of your system as it provides options to freeze edits and
audio effects in cached audio files.
RELATED LINKS
Super Clips on page 255
254
Audio Montage
Audio Montages within Audio Montages Super Clips
A super clip is the representation of an audio montage within an audio montage. It refers to an
audio file that is rendered from either an internal sub-montage or an external sub-montage.
A super clip behaves like any other clip. To edit the tracks and clips in a super clip, you can
reopen it and then render the changes to update the super clip.
A super clip can either be a mono or a stereo audio montage.
An example: You have an album that is composed of 15 songs. Each song requires complex
edits. In this case you can create 15 super clips, of which each one represents a song. The main
audio montage will be composed of these super clips, while each song can have its own audio
montage.
Moreover, because super clips can represent external audio montages with different sample
rates, you could provide your songs in high-resolution audio (96k sample rate), and build an
audio montage album in 44.1k for a CD and another album at 96k for a DVD-Audio, for example.
External Sub-Montages
A super clip can refer to an external sub-montage which is an audio montage in another file. An
external sub-montage is independent from the audio montage in which you insert it.
External sub-montages can be shared between projects and used in audio montages with a
different sample rate. They can be nested to any depth.
External sub-montage files can contain other external audio montages to any depth.
Super clips that refer to external sub-montages are indicated by an external sub-montage icon.
A super clip that refers to an external sub-montage is also called X-Clip.
NOTE
An external sub-montage is a normal audio montage. The term “external” is to point out its
inclusion in another audio montage.
Internal Sub-Montages
A super clip can refer to an internal sub-montage, which is an audio montage that is saved in the
same file as the audio montage of the super clip. Such a super clip can be regarded as a folder
that contains another audio montage.
Internal sub-montages are handled within a single audio montage file. For example, when you
have finished editing specific clips of your audio montage, you can render them as a super clip.
An internal sub-montage cannot contain another internal sub-montage. However, it can contain
super clips that represent external audio montages.
Super clips that are internal sub-montages are indicated by an internal sub-montage icon.
A super clip that refers to an internal sub-montage is also called I-Clip.
255
Audio Montage
Audio Montages within Audio Montages Creating a Super Clip
You can render clips of an audio montage to a super clip. This super clip can be part of an
internal sub-montage or an external audio montage.
PROCEDURE
1.
Open the audio montage in which you want to create a super clip.
2.
In the montage window or in the Clips window, select the clips that you want to render to
a super clip.
3.
Select one of the following options:
●
Right-click in the upper half of one of the selected clips, and select Create Super
Clip from Selected Clips.
●
In the Clips window, select Functions > Create Super Clip from Selected Clips.
4.
In the Create Super Clip dialog, decide whether to create an I-Clip (internal sub-montage)
or an X-Clip (external sub-montage).
5.
Optional: Enter a name for the super clip.
6.
Click OK.
RESULT
The clips are rendered as a super clip inside the audio montage.
Create Super Clip Dialog When Creating Super Clips from Selected Clips
In this dialog, you specify how to create super clips for internal and external sub-montages.
●
To open the Create Super Clip dialog, right-click the upper half of one or several selected
clips, and select Create Super Clip from Selected Clips.
Name
Allows you to specify a name for the super clip. For X-Clips, the name is also used for
the audio montage.
Create I-Clip (Internal Sub-Montage)
Creates a new audio montage inside the open audio montage and inserts a super
clip to reference it.
256
Audio Montage
Audio Montages within Audio Montages Place on First Available Track/Place on Last Available Track
If you create a sub-montage from clips that reside on different tracks, the pop-up
menu allows you to specify on which track the super clip is inserted.
Export as External Audio Montage and Create X-Clip (External Sub-Montage)
Creates an independent audio montage and a super clip that refers to this audio
montage.
Destination
Lets you select the destination folder of the external sub-montage.
Include Track Effects
If this option is activated, the track effects are included in the sub-montage. If you
want to keep the super clip on the track, deactivate this option.
NOTE
Output effects are not included to prevent double processing.
Create Super Clip Dialog When Inserting External Audio Montages
In this dialog, you can select whether to create X-Clips or I-Clips when inserting an external audio
montage in another audio montage.
Create X-Clip (External Sub-Montage)
The super clip refers to the audio montage file.
Make a Deep Copy and Create I-Clip (Internal Sub-Montage)
The audio montage is copied into the other audio montage. The super clip refers to
this independent copy.
Inserting External Sub-Montages into Audio Montages
You can insert an external sub-montage as a super clip into another audio montage.
PROCEDURE
1.
Open the audio montage in which you want to insert another audio montage.
2.
Do one of the following:
●
Right-click an empty area of the montage window, select Insert Audio Montages >
Browse, select the audio montages that you want to insert, and click Open.
●
Drag the audio montage that you want to insert from the File Explorer/macOS
Finder or from inside WaveLab Pro and drop it in the montage window.
3.
In the Create Super Clip dialog, select whether to create an X-Clip or an I-Clip, and click
OK.
4.
From the pop-up menu, select how to add and mix the external sub-montage.
257
Audio Montage
Audio Montages within Audio Montages RESULT
The external sub-montage is rendered, and the resulting super clip is inserted at the edit cursor
position.
Editing Super Clips
You can reopen the sources of super clips, edit the clips that they contain, and apply the changes
to update the super clips of the external or internal audio montages.
The changes in the internal or external audio montage are applied to the parent audio montage
when the sub-montages are rendered.
Editing External Sub-Montages of Super Clips
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, right-click the bottom area of a super clip of an external submontage and select Edit Source, or double-click at the top area of the super clip.
The external sub-montage opens in another tab.
2.
Edit the external sub-montage, and save the changes.
3.
Decide on how you want to update the audio montage.
4.
●
To apply the changes to all audio montages that refer to the updated audio
montage, select File > Export, and select Render > Render Super Clip.
●
To apply the changes to a single audio montage, go back to the audio montage
that contains the external sub-montage that you have updated. Select the updated
audio montage, open the Files window, and select Menu > Update Rendering of
Selected Audio Montage.
Save the audio montage.
Editing Internal Sub-Montages of Super Clips
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, right-click the bottom area of a super clip of an internal submontage and select Edit Source, or double-click the top area of the super clip.
The internal sub-montage opens in another tab.
2.
Edit the clips of the internal sub-montage, and save the changes.
RESULT
The changes are automatically rendered to update the super clip.
258
Audio Montage
Managing Source Files of Clips Freezing External Sub-Montages
Freezing external sub-montages renders the external sub-montage to an audio file while
converting the super clips into regular clips.
IMPORTANT
Once a sub-montage has been frozen, it is no longer possible to edit it as an audio montage.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, select the external sub-montage that you want to freeze.
2.
In the Files window, select Menu > Freeze External Sub-Montage.
3.
Specify a name and a location, and click Save.
Managing Source Files of Clips
The Files window helps you to manage files that are used in the current audio montage.
It displays all files that are used by clips in the current audio montage along with their location,
size, and last modification date. In addition, the following file operations are available:
●
Replace files in the audio montage
●
Rename files (all internal clip references are updated)
●
Open files that are used in the audio montage in the Audio Editor
●
Export file names as text
Files Window
This window helps you to manage files that are used in the current audio montage, including
internal and external montages.
●
To open the Files window, open an audio montage, and select Tool Windows > Files.
Files List
The files list shows the names, dates, sizes, and paths of the files that are used in the current
audio montage. The Clips column shows how often a clip uses the corresponding audio file. The
location and type of the files determine how paths are displayed:
●
If the path is relative to the file audio montage location, the path is displayed in green.
●
If the path is on the same partition as the audio montage, for example in a subfolder, the
path is displayed in blue.
●
If the path is on another partition, the path is displayed in red.
●
Internal sub-montages have no path.
259
Audio Montage
Managing Source Files of Clips Menu
Update Rendering of Selected Audio Montage
Renders the focused audio montage to a new audio file. This is necessary to forward
the changes that you have made in the selected sub-montage to the open audio
montage.
Update Outdated Renderings
Renders all audio montages that have been modified since their rendered audio file
was created.
Replace With
Allows you to replace the selected file with another one.
Freeze External Sub-Montage
Renders the external sub-montage to an audio file while converting the super clips
into regular clips.
Rename File
Lets you change the file name. The internal references of the audio montage are
updated accordingly.
Export File Names as Text
Creates a text file that lists all files that are used in the active audio montage.
Select Clips of Selected File
Selects all clips that refer to the selected file.
Edit Source
Opens the selected files in the Audio Editor. If the selected files are sub-montages,
the related audio montage opens in the Audio Montage window.
Reveal in File Explorer
Opens the File Explorer/macOS Finder to locate the selected file.
Customize Command Bar
Opens the Customize Commands dialog which contains options to hide or show
specific command bar buttons.
Replacing Source Files of Clips
You can replace a source file of a clip with another file and have all clips that refer to the old
source file refer to the new source file.
PROCEDURE
1.
Open an audio montage.
2.
Select Tool Windows > Files.
3.
In the Files window, select the file that you want to exchange.
4.
Select Menu > Replace With.
5.
Select the replacing file.
260
Audio Montage
Managing Source Files of Clips Changing Names and File Locations of Audio Files
You can change the name and location of an audio file in your audio montage project. All clips
that reference this file are automatically updated.
PROCEDURE
1.
Open an audio montage.
2.
Select Tool Windows > Files.
3.
In the Files window, select the file that you want to rename.
4.
Select Menu > Rename File.
5.
In the Rename File dialog, enter a new name.
6.
To enter a new file location, activate Change Folder, and enter a new file location.
7.
Optional: If you want the related clips to change their name according to the new file
name, activate Rename Related Clips as File Name.
8.
Click OK.
Exporting File Names as Text
You can export the file names list as text to various formats. The list contains the names and
paths of the audio files in the active audio montage.
PREREQUISITE
Set up your audio montage.
PROCEDURE
1.
Open an audio montage.
2.
Select Tool Windows > Files.
3.
In the Files window, select Menu > Export File Names as Text.
4.
Choose the information that you want to export and the output format.
5.
Click OK.
RESULT
The file names list opens in the selected output format. When selecting Print, the Print Preview
window opens. The text file is saved in the specified folder for temporary files.
Editing Source Files of Clips
Editing the audio montage may require that you process or edit the actual audio files that are
referenced by the clips.
Use one of the following methods to edit the source file of a clip:
●
Right-click the bottom area of the clip that you want to edit, and select Edit Source, or
double-click the top area of the clip. The source file of the clip opens in the Audio Editor.
Edit the clip, save it, and return to the audio montage.
●
Drag the clip and drop it in the Audio Editor.
Note the following:
●
Any editing that you perform this way affects the source audio file and thereby all clips
that use the audio file, including clips in other audio montages.
261
Audio Montage
Managing Source Files of Clips ●
You can undo/redo all changes in audio files. These changes are reflected immediately in
all open audio montages.
●
If you use File > Save As to save the source audio file with a different name, all open audio
montages that refer to the file now refer to the new file.
About Cloning and Substituting Source Files of Clips
Cloning an audio source file avoids the risk that other clips are affected when the source file of a
clip is edited.
Use the Clone and Substitute function to create a copy of the audio source file, and make the
clip reference to the new file. As a result, you can edit the source file without affecting other clips
or the original audio file.
The cloned audio file has the original file name with the suffix _#X, where X is a number.
The cloned audio file is saved in the implicit folder that is specified in the Audio Montages
Preferences on the Active Audio Montage tab.
The implicit folder is used when WaveLab Pro needs to create new files that can be referenced by
an audio montage. Files that are saved in the implicit folder are not temporary, that is, they are
not deleted when you close WaveLab Pro. This is necessary because the audio montage contains
references to the files.
Cloning and Substituting Source Files of Clips
PROCEDURE
●
In the montage window, right-click the bottom area of a clip, and select Clone and
Substitute.
RESULT
A clone of the source file replaces the selected clip. All clips that are referring to the original file
are referenced to the new file.
Replacing Audio Files of Clips
You can replace the audio file of a clip to compare different takes.
NOTE
You cannot replace a stereo file with a mono file and vice versa.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, right-click the bottom area of a clip, and select Replace Audio
File.
2.
Select the file to which you want to reference, and click Open.
RESULT
The selected audio file replaces the clip. All clip settings are retained. Clip references to the
replaced file are still available.
262
Audio Montage
Track Activity Indicator Track Activity Indicator
The track activity indicator shows the volume level for audio tracks. It is located on the right side
of the track control area in the Audio Montage window.
The track activity indicator provides an overview of which tracks are playing back audio at what
approximate level.
Envelopes for Clips
For clips in the audio montage, you can create envelopes for level and fades, for panning, and for
effects that are routed to a clip.
You can create an independent level envelope curve to automate level, to create fades and
crossfades, and to mute clip sections.
You can also draw pan envelopes to automate pan settings for clips. For mono clips, pan governs
the left/right position in the stereo field. For stereo clips, pan sets the left/right balance.
Edit the envelope settings in the Envelope tab, or by right-clicking an envelope curve. The
settings menu is different, depending on whether you click the fade in part, the fade out part, or
the sustain part.
RELATED LINKS
Routing a Plug-in to a Clip on page 289
How Envelopes are Displayed
By default, all clips display a level envelope curve. You can view the envelope as three separate
envelopes: the fade in part, the sustain part, and the fade out part.
The points on the left and right side of the curve are the fade in and fade out junction points that
separate the fade parts from the sustain part.
The envelope curve indicates if points, fade ins, or fade outs have been defined. In addition to the
curve, changes in the level envelope are also reflected in the waveform.
You can activate/deactivate the Map Waveform to Level option in the Peaks section of the View
tab.
263
Audio Montage
Envelopes for Clips Selecting Envelopes
You can select volume/fade envelopes and pan envelopes.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, select a clip.
2.
Select the Envelope tab.
3.
In the Selector section, open the Envelope Type pop-up menu, and select which envelope
to edit.
Hiding Envelope Curves
All clips display envelopes by default. You can hide these envelopes. However, hidden envelopes
are still active.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, select a clip.
2.
Select the Envelope tab.
3.
In the Selector section, open the Envelope Type pop-up menu, and select Hide All.
Clip Envelope Editing
Curve points allow you to create volume curves, pan curves, and fade curves for a clip. You can
edit the envelope curve by adding and moving curve points.
Editing Curve Points
Many of the editing operations that are commonly used in the context of your computer
operating system can be applied when editing curve points. On top of these, a number of specific
procedures apply.
●
To add a curve point, double-click the envelope curve.
●
To delete a curve point, double-click the curve point. The curve point between the sustain
and fade parts of the envelope cannot be deleted.
●
To delete multiple curve points, select the curve points that you want to delete, right-click
one of the points, and select Delete Selected Points.
●
To select a range of points, Alt-click and drag to create a selection rectangle.
●
To move all selected points, click one of the selected points and drag.
●
To raise or lower the value of two consecutive curve points, Ctrl/Cmd-click the segment
between the points and drag up or down.
●
To change the time position of two consecutive curve points, Shift-click the segment
between the points and drag left or right.
●
To raise or lower the entire envelope curve, make sure that no curve point is selected,
click the envelope curve, and drag up or down. Do not drag a segment that is limited by
selected points.
●
To adjust the envelopes in all selected clips, hold down Alt, and drag any envelope curve
up or down. This is a quick way to adjust the level or pan of multiple clips at the same time
and also to adjust both sides of a stereo envelope simultaneously.
●
To move a fade in/fade out point vertically, Ctrl/Cmd-click and drag the fade point.
●
To change the level or the fade in/out time of multiple envelopes at the same time, select
the clips that you want to edit, press Alt, and edit the envelope with the mouse.
264
Audio Montage
Envelopes for Clips Resetting Curve Points
You can reset curve points to the default level 0 dB.
●
To reset a single point to 0 dB, select the point, right-click it, and select Reset Selected
Points.
●
To reset the whole envelope curve to default, right-click the envelope curve, and select
Reset Level to 0 dB.
Copying Envelopes
You can copy envelope curves from other clips.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, right-click an envelope curve, and select Copy Shape.
2.
Right-click the envelope curve of the destination clip, and select Paste Shape.
Raising Selection Levels
You can raise the audio level with specific fall and rise times (by default 20 ms) and then adjust
the level.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, in a clip, select the range for the section that you want to raise in
level.
2.
Right-click the envelope curve, and select Raise Level of Selection with Envelope.
The level of the selection range is raised.
3.
Click the envelope of the selection range and drag up or down to adjust the level.
Muting Selected Ranges of Clips
You can mute a selected range by lowering the volume to -144 dB.
Muted sections are not affected when you drag the envelope curve up or down.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, in a clip, make a selection range for the section that you want to
mute.
2.
Right-click the envelope curve, and select Mute selection with envelope.
RESULT
The section is muted. A fade in and fade out of 20 ms is applied to the muted section.
265
Audio Montage
Envelopes for Clips Envelope Smoothing
To produce smoother, more natural envelope curves, you can activate the Smoothing function.
●
To activate this function, select the Envelope tab, and activate Smoothing in the Clip
Options section.
Creating Envelope Presets
You can create envelope presets that you can later recall and apply to other clips. There are
separate presets for the sustain parts (envelope presets) and the fade parts.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, activate the clip with the envelope curve that you want to save as
a preset.
2.
Select the Envelope tab.
3.
In the Preset section, open the Presets pop-up menu.
4.
Select Save As.
5.
In the Save Preset As dialog, enter a name for the preset, and click Save.
Applying Envelope Presets
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, activate the clip to which you want to apply the envelope preset.
2.
Select the Envelope tab.
3.
In the Preset section, open the Presets pop-up menu.
4.
Select a preset from the list.
RESULT
The envelope curve is applied.
266
Audio Montage
Envelopes for Clips NOTE
Level envelope presets can only be applied to level envelopes. Other envelope presets such as
pan and effect presets can be applied to any other non-level envelope, but not to level envelopes.
Locking an Envelope Curve
When an envelope curve is locked, the level envelope curve points are hidden and cannot be
edited with the mouse. However, you can drag the whole curve up or down.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, activate the clip that you want to lock.
2.
Select the Envelope tab.
3.
In the Clip Options section, activate Hide Curve Points.
Locking All Envelope Curves
If you lock all envelope curves globally, they cannot be edited with the mouse.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Montage window, select the Envelope tab.
2.
In the Selector section, activate Lock Mouse Editing.
RESULT
The envelopes and their points are still displayed, but cannot be selected or edited.
Changing Overall Level Envelopes of Clips
The default envelope curve contains no level envelope points, but you can use it to change the
overall level for a clip.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, place the mouse cursor on the envelope curve.
The mouse cursor takes the shape of a circle with two arrows that point up and down.
2.
Click and drag the curve up or down to change the clip envelope level.
Converting Envelopes to Mono or Stereo
It is possible to display two level envelope curves for stereo clips, allowing you to control the level
separately for the left and right channels.
NOTE
Only level envelopes can be converted to stereo.
267
Audio Montage
Envelopes for Clips PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, select a clip.
2.
Select the Envelope tab.
3.
In the Shape section, click Convert.
4.
Select Convert to Stereo or Convert to Mono.
Pan Modes
The power of the sum of the channels drops by about 3 dB if a signal is panned hard left or right,
compared to the same signal being panned center. This can be compensated with pan modes.
Experiment with the modes to hear which fits best. The pan modes can be set for tracks, clips,
and the montage output.
●
To set the pan modes for clips, use the Pan Law pop-up menu in the Envelope tab, or use
the Pan Law pop-up menu and knob in the Effects window.
●
To set the pan modes for tracks and the montage output, use the Pan Law pop-up menu
and knob in the Effects window.
The following pan modes are available:
Channel Damp (0 dB/Mute)
This mode does not compensate for power loss at all. If a signal is panned hard left
or right, the power of the sum of the channels drops by 3 dB.
Constant Power (+3 dB/Mute)
This is the default mode. Regardless of the pan position, the power of the sum of the
channels remains constant.
Channel Boost (+4.5 dB/Mute)
If this mode is selected and a signal is panned hard left or right, the power of the
sum of the channels is higher than with a signal-panned center.
Channel Boost (+6 dB/Mute)
If this mode is selected and a signal is panned hard left or right, the power of the
sum of the channels is higher than with a signal-panned center. This is the same as
the previous option, but with even greater power boost.
Modulating Audio With Other Audio
You can use the audio signal of one track to modulate the compression factor of another track.
The signal of the upper audio track (clip) is usually called the carrier signal, because it contains
the audio to be transmitted.
The Ducker clip plug-in is used for this purpose as it lowers the volume of one signal whenever
another signal is present.
RELATED LINKS
Ducking Clips on page 268
Ducking Clips
Ducking happens when the level or send effect of one clip is modified through the presence of
another signal on another track or channel. You can create ducking effects between clips on two
adjacent tracks.
If you use the Ducking option, the presence of another clip on an adjacent track causes ducking.
268
Audio Montage
Envelopes for Clips A typical application for ducking would be a music track with a commentary voice-over on
another track. Whenever the commentary voice starts, the level of the music track is lowered by a
specific level through automatically created level envelope curves.
You can also create a ducking effect for effect envelopes that are routed to a clip. Each clip plugin has its independent envelope. When the envelope is all the way down, only the wet signal is
applied. When the envelope is all the way up, the processed/wet signal is at its maximum.
NOTE
●
The method of ducking clips is independent from clip modulation, though they share some
concepts. Ducking clips is more flexible but needs more manual adjustments.
●
The clips that cause ducking must be positioned completely inside the time range of the
clip to which ducking is applied.
●
If the clips that cause ducking contain silent passages, ducking does not function properly.
These clips must be edited so that each phrase is a separate clip without any silence.
●
When Ducking is performed it is applied to one clip at a time. For example, if the music
consists of several clips that have been spliced together, only one of the clips is ducked by
the voice-over. To solve this issue, you can to repeat the function for each clip or use the
Render function in the Master Section to create a specific (single) file from the separate
clips and re-import this as a new clip in the audio montage.
RELATED LINKS
Routing a Plug-in to a Clip on page 289
Creating Voice-Over Ducking Effects
In the following example, the track to which ducking is applied contains music and an adjacent
track that causes ducking contains a voice-over.
269
Audio Montage
Envelopes for Clips PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, place the clips that contain the music and the voice-over on
separate adjacent tracks.
The voice-over clips must be located inside the time range of the music clip.
2.
Select the clip containing the music.
3.
Select the Envelope tab.
4.
In the Selector section, open the Envelope Type pop-up menu, and select Volume/Fades.
5.
In the Level section, click Ducking.
6.
In the Ducking Settings dialog, make your settings.
Depending on whether the voice-over track is above or below the music track, you must
select Previous Track or Next Track.
7.
Click OK.
RESULT
The level of the music is automatically lowered by the voice-over clips.
RELATED LINKS
Routing a Plug-in to a Clip on page 289
Ducking Settings
In the Ducking Settings dialog, you can create ducking effects.
●
To open the Ducking Settings dialog, select the Envelope tab in the Audio Montage
window, and click Ducking in the Level section.
Fall Region
Balance Clip Fade In ignores any duration or gap settings in the Fall Region section.
Instead, the ducking envelope lowers the volume from the fade in end position of the
voice-over clip.
Duration allows you to set the time it takes for the level to fall when ducking starts.
Gap before Clip allows you to set the time between the end of the fall region and the
start of the voice clip.
Rise Region
Balance Clip Fade Out ignores any duration or gap settings in the Rise Region
section. Instead, the ducking envelope raises the volume from the fade out start
position of the voice-over clip.
Duration allows you to set the time it takes for the level to rise to the original level
after ducking ends.
270
Audio Montage
Fades and Crossfades in Audio Montages Gap before Clip allows you to set the time between the end of the voice clip and the
start of the Rise region.
Modulator Clips
Previous Track and Next Track define whether the modulator track should be the
one before (Previous Track) or after (Next Track) the track that is to be ducked.
If Only Selected Clips is activated, only the selected clips on the modulator track
cause ducking.
Damp Factor
Sets the amount of ducking, that is, the degree of attenuation that is applied to the
affected clip.
Fades and Crossfades in Audio Montages
A fade in is a gradual increase in level and a fade out is a gradual decrease in level. A crossfade is
a gradual fade between two sounds, where one is faded in and the other faded out.
Creating Fades
By default, all clips display fade in and fade out junction points. These can be dragged
horizontally to create a fade in or fade out for a clip.
You can add envelope points to a fade just as with level envelopes.
●
To create a fade in, click the fade in point at the start of a clip, and drag it to the right.
●
To create a fade out, click the fade out point at the end of a clip, and drag it to the left.
●
To create a fade in or fade out at a specific time position, use set Apply Fade Time option
in the Fade tab. Enter the time value in the time field and click Apply Fade Time.
●
To move a fade in/fade out point vertically, press Ctrl/Cmd while dragging.
The resulting fade in/fade out curve is displayed in the clip, and the fade is also reflected in
the waveform. If you position the mouse over the fade in point, the fade in time is displayed in
seconds and milliseconds and the volume in dB.
Fade In and Fade Out Menus
In this menu, you can select various preset fade curves and other fade-related options.
●
To open the Fade In or Fade Out pop-up menu, right-click the fade in or fade out points.
Zoom to Fade In Range/Zoom to Fade Out Range
Adjusts the view to mainly display the fade in/fade out part of the active clip.
Copy
Copies the fade in/fade out shape to the clipboard.
271
Audio Montage
Fades and Crossfades in Audio Montages Paste
Replaces the fade in/fade out shape and length with the shape and length that was
copied to the clipboard.
Paste Shape Only
Replaces the fade in/fade out shape with the shape that was copied to the clipboard.
The original length is preserved.
Paste to Selected Clips
Replaces the fade in/fade out shape of all selected clips with the shape that was
copied to the clipboard. The original length is preserved.
Linear
Changes the level linearly.
Sinus (*)
Changes the level according to the first quarter period of the sine curve. When used
in a crossfade, the loudness (RMS) remains constant during the transition.
Square-root (*)
Changes the level according to the square-root curve. When used in a crossfade, the
loudness (RMS) remains constant during the transition.
Sinusoid
Changes the level according to a half period part of the sine curve.
272
Audio Montage
Fades and Crossfades in Audio Montages Logarithmic
Changes the level logarithmically.
Exponential
Changes the level exponentially.
Exponential+
Changes the level strongly exponential.
Saving Fade Ins/Fade Outs as Default
The default fade in/fade out curve shape is linear. You can change this setting and define a
default shape and/or length separately for fade ins and fade outs.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, drag the fade in/fade out point to the position that you want to
set as default.
2.
Select the Fade tab.
3.
In the Edit section, activate Fade In or Fade Out.
4.
In the Preset section, open the Presets menu.
5.
Depending on whether you want to save the current fade as default for fades and/or
crossfades, select one of the following options:
●
Save Current Fade as Default for Automatic Fade Ins
●
Save Current Fade as Default for Automatic Fade Outs
●
Save as Default for Automatic Crossfades
RESULT
When you select a clip and click Apply Default in the Fade tab, the saved fade is applied. In
addition, when you create a new clip and Create Default Fades in New Clips is activated, the
default fade is used.
273
Audio Montage
Fades and Crossfades in Audio Montages NOTE
The default fades are saved for each audio montage. If you want to use the same default fade for
several audio montages, you should update the audio montage template file.
Applying Default Fade Ins/Fade Outs
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, select the clip for which you want to apply the default fade in/fade
out.
2.
Select the Fade tab.
3.
In the Edit section, select Fade In or Fade Out.
4.
In the Preset section, click Apply Default.
RESULT
The fade in/fade out time is set to the defined default value.
Applying Default Fades to New Clips
All new clips that are imported or recorded in the audio montage get the default fade in and fade
out shape and length if Create Default Fades in New Clips is active. In this case, the default
crossfade shapes are used. This also applies to clips that are created by splitting clips.
PROCEDURE
1.
Open an audio montage and select the Fade tab.
2.
In the Options section, open the Options pop-up menu.
3.
Activate Create Default Fades in New Clips.
Locking Fade Times When Adjusting Clip Edges
PROCEDURE
1.
Open an audio montage and select the Fade tab.
2.
In the Options section, open the Options pop-up menu.
3.
Activate Lock Fade Times When Adjusting Clip Edges.
RESULT
The defined fade in/fade out length is locked to the clip start or end, even if you adjust the clip
edges.
Copying Fades
You can copy a fade in or fade out and paste it in another clip.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, right-click a fade in/fade out point, and select Copy.
2.
Right-click the fade in/fade out point for which you want to apply the fade, and select
Paste.
274
Audio Montage
Fades and Crossfades in Audio Montages RESULT
The fade is applied to the clip.
Setting Fade/Level Envelopes After the Effects
When using dynamic processors that alter the level of the clip, it is useful to place the level/fade
envelope after the clip effect section.
PROCEDURE
1.
Open an audio montage and select the Envelope tab.
2.
In the Selector section, make sure that Volume/Fades is selected.
3.
In the Clip Options section, activate Envelope after Effects.
Deactivating Automatic Fade Changes for Individual Clips
You can deactivate automatic fade changes for individual clips. This can be used if you have set a
fade that you do not want to be altered in any way, even though you may want to overlap the clip
with another clip.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, select the clip for which you want to disable automatic fade
changes.
2.
Select the Fade tab.
3.
In the Clip Options section, deactivate Automatic Changes.
Creating Automatic Crossfades in Audio Montages
Crossfades in audio montages can be created automatically when clip edges overlap. You can
specify the type of crossfade that is performed.
PROCEDURE
1.
Open an audio montage and select the Fade tab.
2.
In the Options section, open the Overlaps pop-up menu and select one of the following
crossfade types:
3.
●
Free Overlaps
●
Fade In Constrains Overlaps
●
Fade Out Constrains Overlaps
Move a clip so that it overlaps the edge of another clip.
RESULT
The crossfade is automatically created in the overlap.
275
Audio Montage
Fades and Crossfades in Audio Montages Crossfade Editing
You can create crossfades with independent shapes and lengths for the fade in and fade out
curves.
The default automatic crossfade is linear. It uses the same shape and fade lengths for fade in and
fade out. The following rules apply:
●
A crossfade includes fade in and fade out.
●
You can edit the fade in and fade out curves in crossfades in the same way as fades.
●
To resize the crossfade time symmetrically, press Shift, click the crossfade area, and drag
left and right.
●
To move the crossfade region while keeping its length, press Ctrl/Cmd, click the crossfade
area, and drag left and right.
●
When you move a clip so that it overlaps another clip to create a crossfade, and neither
clip has a defined fade in the overlap, a default crossfade is created if one of the auto
crossfade options is activated.
●
When moving a clip with a defined fade curve so that it overlaps another clip without a
defined fade, the unmoved clip automatically gets the same fade shape as the moved clip,
with amplitude compensation. This only applies if the fade out length of the unmoved clip
is set to zero.
●
If both clips have different defined fade curves, an asymmetrical crossfade is created.
Additionally, other factors govern the result when creating crossfades. In the following example
a pre-defined fade out and an undefined fade in are used. What happens depends on the type of
fade out curve that is used.
●
If the fade out is a preset (except Sinus (*) or Square-Root (*)) that uses Pure Shape, the
corresponding fade in gets the same preset with amplitude compensation.
●
If the fade out is a preset that uses a compensation attribute, the fade in gets the same
preset, but with Pure Shape activated, for the compensation to take effect.
●
If the fade out uses either the Sinus (*) or Square-Root (*) presets with the Pure Shape
setting, the fade in gets the same preset also with the Pure Shape setting. In fact, power
compensation is used. This is because the Sinus (*) and Square-Root (*) curves provide
constant power crossfades by themselves.
RELATED LINKS
Options for Moving and Crossfading Clips on page 244
Crossfading with Fade Constrained Overlaps
PREREQUISITE
To use fade in/fade out constrained overlaps, there must be a defined (not set to zero) fade in/
fade out in the overlap. Otherwise, Free Overlaps is activated for that crossfade.
276
Audio Montage
Fades and Crossfades in Audio Montages The following description applies to fade in constrained overlaps and fade out constrained
overlaps. For the latter, however, the defined fade out length constrains the overlap, and
accordingly, the left edge of the right clip is adjusted.
PROCEDURE
1.
Open an audio montage and select the Fade tab.
2.
In the Options section, open the Overlaps pop-up menu.
3.
Activate Fade In Constrains Overlaps.
4.
On a track that contains several clips, create a fade in curve in a clip.
5.
Drag the clip to the left so that it overlaps another clip, past the right clip edge.
A crossfade is created in the overlap.
6.
Continue dragging the clip, so that the fade in point of the dragged clip overlaps the right
edge of the left clip.
7.
Drag the clip to the right again.
The resized clip is gradually uncovered. The original clip length is memorized, so you can
later restore the resized clips.
8.
Separate the two clips again without creating an overlap so that they return to the original
left/right position relative to each other.
9.
Drag the left clip to the right so that it overlaps the other clip, and continue dragging to
the right.
The right edge of the left clip is progressively resized as you drag the clip further to the
right.
Fade constrained overlaps can also be used with the options Allow Multiple Automatic
Crossfades and Allow Automatic Crossfading with Clips on Selected Track.
RELATED LINKS
Automatic Crossfading on page 207
Crossfades Between Clips
The Wave Matching window shows a magnified view of the beginning of the selected clip and
allows you to adjust the crossfade point for two adjacent clips.
The main purpose of this is to help you splice two consecutive clips together. The zoom view
displays the end of the left clip and the start of the right clip. This type of splicing is achieved by
applying short crossfades.
There are two main types of crossfades:
Artistic crossfades
For example, if you want to crossfade two songs to make a nice transition. Usually,
these types of crossfades are quite long and can easily be created from the audio
montage window.
Patch crossfades
For example, if you want to replace a section of audio, without audible discontinuity
in the resulting audio. In this case, short crossfades should be used. These
crossfades are best created in the Wave Matching window.
RELATED LINKS
Wave Matching Window on page 278
277
Audio Montage
Fades and Crossfades in Audio Montages Adjusting Crossfades Between Clips
Adjusting the crossfades between clips is important to avoid clicks at the junction points.
WaveLab Pro analyzes the waveforms to automatically find the best crossfade offsets.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, on a track, align the two clips that you want next to each other.
2.
Select the clip that is located on the right.
3.
Select Tool Windows > Wave Matching.
This shows a close-up of the two clips.
4.
In the Wave Matching window, set the zoom factor using the icons above the zoom view,
or select a zoom factor from the Menu.
If you activate Menu > Automatic Level Zooming, the waveforms are automatically
zoomed vertically to fill out the zoom view.
5.
If necessary, move or resize the clip located on the right in the zoom view.
6.
Set the search range using the icons above the zoom view, or select a search range from
the Menu.
7.
Decide whether you want to move the right clip to the left or to the right.
●
To move the clip to the left, select Menu > Move to Left (Match Waveform).
●
To move the clip to the right, select Menu > Move to Right (Match Waveform). This
is useful if the two clips are already overlapping.
RESULT
WaveLab Pro scans the audio to the left of the splice point and moves the clip on the right to the
position which provides the best possible phase match, to avoid harmonic cancellation. When the
clip on the right is moved over the clip on the left, a short crossfade is automatically created.
RELATED LINKS
Wave Matching Window on page 278
Wave Matching Window
In the Wave Matching window, you can find the best crossfade point for two adjacent clips.
●
To open the Wave Matching window, open an audio montage and select Tool Windows >
Wave Matching.
On the Menu, you have the following options:
Move to Left (Match Waveform)
Scans the audio to the left of the splice point and finds the best possible phase match
to avoid harmonic cancellation. The clip on the right is moved over the clip on the
left. This automatically creates a short crossfade, ensuring the smoothest possible
splice.
278
Audio Montage
Clip Time Stretching Move to Right (Match Waveform)
Scans the audio to the right of the splice point and finds the best possible phase
match to avoid harmonic cancellation. The clip on the right is moved further to the
right. This automatically creates a short crossfade, ensuring the smoothest possible
splice. This function is useful if the two clips already overlap.
Search Range
Determines how WaveLab Pro scans the clips when searching for the best possible
phase match. Higher values result in greater accuracy but also longer processing
times. If the sounds contain a lot of bass, avoid the shortest search range setting.
Zoom
Sets the zoom factor. For example, 1:4 means that 1 pixel on the screen corresponds
to 4 audio samples.
Automatic Level Zooming
Automatically zooms the waveform vertically to fill the view.
Show Envelope
Displays the envelope curves of the clips in the view. Which curves are displayed
depends on the settings of each clip.
Clip Time Stretching
You can adjust the length of a clip by using time stretching.
The best results are achieved when using small or moderate amounts of time stretch.
NOTE
Avoid time stretching of already time stretched material.
When you perform time stretching on a clip, a copy of the original audio file is created that
contains the audio range that is used in the clip. The time stretch is applied to the copy, and the
clip now references the copy.
●
The copied audio file has the same name as the original, but with the suffix “_#X” where X
is a number.
●
The copied audio file is saved in the implicit folder that is specified in the Audio Montages
Preferences.
Time-Stretching Clips
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, move the edit cursor to the position where you want the clip to
end.
2.
Right-click the lower part of the clip that you want to time-stretch, and select Time-Stretch
to Cursor.
3.
In the Time Stretching dialog, edit your settings, and click OK.
Only the Method section is available for editing, because the other settings are
determined by the edit cursor position.
RESULT
The clip is stretched or compressed so that it ends at the edit cursor position.
279
Audio Montage
Clip Pitch Shifting NOTE
Because the new copied audio file contains exactly the audio range that the clip uses, it is not
possible to lengthen the clip by resizing after Time-Stretch to Cursor has been applied.
RELATED LINKS
Time Stretching Dialog on page 183
Clip Pitch Shifting
You can adjust the pitch of a clip by using pitch shifting.
When you perform pitch shifting on a clip, a copy of the original audio file is created that
contains the audio range that is used in the clip. The pitch shift is applied to the copy, and the clip
references the copy.
●
The copied audio file has the same name as the original, but with the suffix “_#X” where X
is a number.
●
The copied audio file is saved in the implicit folder that is specified in the Audio Montages
Preferences.
Pitch-Shifting Clips
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, right-click the lower part of a clip for which you want to apply
pitch shifting, and select Pitch Shifting.
2.
In the Pitch Shifting dialog, edit your settings, and click OK.
RELATED LINKS
Pitch Shifting Dialog on page 185
Effects for Tracks, Clips, and the Montage Output
You can add VST effect plug-ins to individual clips, tracks, or the output of an audio montage. Clip
effects affect individual clips only, track effects affect all clips on a track, and the montage output
affects the whole audio montage.
Only VST 2 and VST 3 plug-ins can be used in the audio montage. Each clip, audio track, and the
montage output can be independently processed by up to 10 VST effect plug-ins.
Effects are configured as follows:
●
As inserts, where the entire audio is processed by the effects.
●
As send effects (split mode), where the balance between the unprocessed sound and the
effect send level can be controlled by effect envelope curves (clip effects and specific VST 2
plug-ins only).
An icon in front of a clip name indicates that effects are applied to a clip.
Hovering over a clip name shows the effects that are used for the clip.
280
Audio Montage
Effects for Tracks, Clips, and the Montage Output NOTE
●
Only clip effects for clips that are active at the current playback position consume CPU
power. Track and montage output effects are always active.
●
The first time that you play an audio montage after is has been opened or copied, the
program has to load all effects into memory. If you have many effects, this can result in a
short silence before the playback starts.
●
Effects that are used for tracks must support stereo audio, even if the audio track is mono.
Montage Output Effects
You can add montage output effects to an audio montage. While the Master Section is shared
among all audio montages, the montage output effects are local to each montage. This allows
you to have a fully embedded project, without needing to use the Master Section.
The montage output effects are located at the output of the audio montage.
NOTE
If you want to use a dithering plug-in, place it in the montage output.
Effects Window
This window lets you add effect plug-ins to tracks, clips, and the montage output, import the
plug-ins from the Master Section, and make pan and gain settings.
●
To open the Effects window, open an audio montage and select Tool Windows > Effects.
Menu
Clip Effects
Displays the plug-ins of the active clip.
Track Effects
Displays the plug-ins of the active track.
Output Effects
Displays the plug-ins of the montage output.
281
Audio Montage
Effects for Tracks, Clips, and the Montage Output Add Slot
Adds a slot into which an audio plug-in can be inserted.
Remove Selected Plug-ins
Removes the selected plug-ins.
Remove Selected Plug-ins from Selected Clips
Removes the plug-ins from the selected clips.
Copy
Copies the selected plug-in and its settings to the clipboard.
Copy All
Copies the settings of all plug-ins to the clipboard.
Paste (Insert)
Inserts the plug-in that was copied to the clipboard before the first selected slot. If no
slot is selected, the plug-in is inserted at the end of the plug-in list.
Paste (Replace)
Replaces the selected plug-in with the plug-in that was copied to the clipboard. If no
slot has been added, a new slot is created.
Paste to Selected Clips
Replaces the selected plug-in with the plug-in that was copied to the clipboard on all
selected clips. If no slots have been added, new slots are created.
Load Plug-in Chain
Replaces the current plug-ins with a plug-in chain that has been saved on disk.
Save Plug-in Chain
Saves the current plug-in chain as a preset.
Import Master Section Plug-ins
Imports the plug-ins that are loaded in the Master Section. Existing plug-ins are
overwritten.
Close All Windows
Closes all plug-in windows that relate to this audio montage.
Plug-in Map
Opens the Plug-in Map dialog that displays all plug-ins that are used in the audio
montage and the clips and tracks that are using them.
Bypass All Plug-ins
If this option is activated, all plug-ins of the active clip or track are bypassed during
playback.
Bypass All Plug-ins in the Montage
If this option is activated, all plug-ins of the active audio montage are bypassed
during playback.
Plug-in Window Handling
Opens the Plug-in Window Handling dialog where you can set up the appearance of
plug-in windows.
Customize Command Bar
Opens the Customize Commands dialog which contains options to hide or show
specific command bar buttons.
282
Audio Montage
Effects for Tracks, Clips, and the Montage Output Effects List
The effects list displays the effect plug-ins of the selected track, clip, or montage output. In the
list, you can replace effect plug-ins, change the effect order, and edit the Send Level and Tail of
effects.
Plug-in window icon
Opens the plug-in window.
Effect Name
Clicking an effect name opens the Plug-ins menu where you can select a new effect.
The checkbox allows you to activate/deactivate the clips.
Preset
Shows the preset that is used by the plug-in. If no preset is used, this field is empty.
Channel Processing
Allows you to specify which channel to process. If you select one channel, the other
channel is bypassed.
Routing
Allows you to set the routing of the processed signal. You can control the mix
between the dry and the processed signal with an envelope. The following routing
options are available:
●
Insert (Standard)
●
Blend Wet into Dry (Send)
●
Parallel Processing
Edit Automation Envelope opens the Envelope tab and selects the automation
envelope.
Latency
Shows the latency in the audio path. Plug-ins with latency cannot be used for
adjusting the send level.
Tail (clip effects only)
Some effects, such as reverb and delay, produce audio tails. This means that the
effect sound continues after the clip sound ends. For example, if you add echo to a
clip without specifying a tail value, the echo effect is muted as soon as the clip ends.
Set the tail length so that the effect is allowed to decay naturally. If you add another
plug-in to the clip that also produces a tail, there is no need to set a separate tail
value for this plug-in, unless you want the decay to sum up. The overall tail length for
the clip is the sum of the tail of each plug-in. The maximum tail setting is 30 seconds.
Gain/Pan Section
In this section, you can edit Gain and Pan settings for each clip and track.
283
Audio Montage
Effects for Tracks, Clips, and the Montage Output Global Gain Section
In this section, you can set the global gain for the active audio montage. This gain can be applied
before or after the montage output, depending on the setting of the pre/post button on the left
of this section. Pre is the default setting.
The Loudness Meta Normalizer can change the global gain to set the audio montage output
loudness, for example, to match the EBU R-128 recommendation.
RELATED LINKS
Pan Modes on page 268
Adding Effects to a Track, a Clip, or to the Montage Output
You can add effect plug-ins to every track and clip of the audio montage, and to the output of the
audio montage.
Adding Effects Via the Effects Window
PROCEDURE
1.
Open an audio montage.
2.
Select Tool Windows > Effects.
3.
In the Effects window, select the Clip, Track, or Output section.
4.
Click Add Slot.
5.
In the Effect Name column, select the added slot.
6.
Select a plug-in.
RESULT
The selected effect opens in a window.
284
Audio Montage
Effects for Tracks, Clips, and the Montage Output NOTE
You can add effects during playback. However, if you add an effect with a latency larger than
zero, it is better to stop and restart playback to avoid timing discrepancies. In addition, a small
number of VST plug-ins may change its latency depending on the parameter settings. If that is
the case, make sure to stop and restart playback after the latency is changed.
Additional Ways of Adding Effects
●
To add an effect to a track, click the FX button in the track control area, select Add Effect,
and select an effect from the menu.
●
●
To add an effect to a clip in the montage window, right-click the clip name, select Add
Effect, and select an effect from the menu.
●
Adding the Master Section Effects to the Track, Clip, or Montage Output
You can add the Master Section effects to a clip, a track or the output of an audio montage.
PREREQUISITE
Set up the Master Section plug-ins.
PROCEDURE
1.
Open an audio montage.
2.
Select Tool Windows > Effects.
3.
In the Effects window, select the track, clip, or montage output to which you want to add
the Master Section effects.
4.
Select Menu > Import Master Section Plug-ins.
RESULT
The Master Section effects are added to the selected track, active clip, or montage output.
NOTE
To copy a single Master Section effect, drag it from a Master Section slot to the effects list of
the Effects window.
Removing Effects from Tracks, Clips, or the Montage Output
PROCEDURE
1.
Open an audio montage.
2.
Select Tool Windows > Effects.
3.
In the Effects window, select the Clip section, Track section, or Output section.
4.
Click the effect that you want to remove, and select Remove Plug-in.
285
Audio Montage
Effects for Tracks, Clips, and the Montage Output RESULT
The effect is removed from the slot.
Rearranging the Order of Effects
The order of the effects in the list determines the processing order.
PROCEDURE
1.
Open an audio montage.
2.
Select Tool Windows > Effects.
3.
In the Effects window, in the effects list, drag the effect that you want to rearrange to
another position.
Applying Plug-in Chain Presets to Tracks, Clips, or the Montage
Output
You can save the plug-in chain of a track, a clip, or the montage output as a preset and apply it to
other clips or tracks, or to the montage output of another audio montage.
PROCEDURE
1.
Open an audio montage.
2.
Select Tool Windows > Effects.
3.
In the Effects window, set up your plug-in chain.
4.
Select Menu > Save Plug-in Chain.
5.
Enter a name and the file location for the effect chain, and click Save.
6.
Select the track, clip, or montage output to which you want to apply the effect chain.
7.
Select Menu > Load Plug-in Chain.
8.
Select a plug-in chain, and click Open.
Copying Effect Settings to Tracks, Clips, or the Montage Output
You can copy the effect and its settings of a track, a clip, or the montage output to other tracks,
clips, or the montage output of the same or another audio montage.
PROCEDURE
1.
Open an audio montage.
2.
Select Tool Windows > Effects.
3.
In the Effects window, select the effect from which you want to copy the settings.
4.
Select Menu > Copy.
5.
Decide whether you want to paste the effect settings to a new slot or replace an existing
effect.
●
To paste the effect settings to a new slot, add a new slot, and select Menu > Paste
(Insert).
●
To replace an existing effect, select the effect, and select Menu > Paste (Replace).
●
To copy the effect settings to multiple clips, select the clips, and select Menu > Paste
to Selected Clips.
286
Audio Montage
Effects for Tracks, Clips, and the Montage Output Undoing Effect Changes
You can undo/redo changes to the effect settings. However, WaveLab Pro only registers the
changes when the Effects window loses focus.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the plug-in window, click another window to lose focus of the plug-in in which you want
to undo the settings.
2.
Go back to the plug-in in which you want to undo the settings.
3.
On the command bar, click Undo or Redo.
Channel Processing
In the Master Section, in plug-in windows, and in the Effects window, you can specify for each
plug-in which channels to process. This allows you to use each plug-in in mid/side mode, for
example.
You can process all channels or only the left, right, mid, or side channel. When you select one
channel, the other channel is bypassed.
To use a different plug-ins for each channel, use one effect slot for each channel.
Insert
Stereo
All channels are processed by the plug-in.
Left
Only the left channel is processed by the plug-in.
Right
Only the right channel is processed by the plug-in.
Mid
Only the mid channel is processed by the plug-in.
Side
Only the side channel is processed by the plug-in.
Send (Return to Stereo)
Left
Only the left channel of the plug-in is processed. The left wet signal of the plug-in is
mixed to the left/right dry signal.
Right
Only the right channel of the plug-in is processed. The right wet signal of the plug-in
is mixed to the left/right dry signal.
Mid
Only the mid channel of the plug-in is processed. The mid wet signal of the plug-in is
mixed to the mid/side dry signal.
Side
Only the side channel of the plug-in is processed. The side wet signal of the plug-in is
mixed to the mid/side dry signal.
287
Audio Montage
Effects for Tracks, Clips, and the Montage Output Setting Up the Channel Processing
You can set up which channel to process in the Master Section, in plug-in windows, and in the
Effects window.
Channel Processing in the Master Section
In the Master Section, on the Effects pane, click Channel Processing, and select which channel
you want to process.
Channel Processing in Plug-in Windows
In a plug-in window, click Channel Processing and select which channel you want to process.
Channel Processing in the Effects Window
In the Effects window, click in the Channel Processing column for a plug-in and select which
channel you want to process.
288
Audio Montage
Effects for Tracks, Clips, and the Montage Output Clip Plug-in Routing
You can route clip plug-ins to a clip. This, in conjunction with envelopes, allows you to control
which part of the clip is processed by the plug-in.
Each clip plug-in has its independent envelope. When the envelope is all the way down, only
the dry signal is applied. When the envelope is all the way up, the processed/wet signal is at its
maximum.
The automation envelope can be independent for the left and right audio channels.
The following routing options are available:
Insert (Standard)
Replaces the dry signal with the processed signal.
Blend Wet into Dry (Send)
Mixes the wet part of the plug-in output with the dry signal. The amount of mixing
is determined by a fixed gain and/or an automation envelope. The corresponding
envelope can be selected in the Selector section of the Envelope tab in the Audio
Montage window.
Parallel Processing
Mixes the processed signal with the dry signal. The level of the dry signal remains
unchanged. The amount of mixing is determined by a fixed gain and/or an
automation envelope. The corresponding envelope can be selected in the Selector
section of the Envelope tab in the Audio Montage window.
This mode can be used for parallel compression.
The Edit Automation Envelope option opens the Envelope tab and selects the automation
envelope.
RELATED LINKS
Routing a Plug-in to a Clip on page 289
Ducking Clips on page 268
Routing a Plug-in to a Clip
You can route a plug-in to an entire clip or only to parts of the clip.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select Tool Windows > Effects.
2.
In the Effects window, select the Clip section.
289
Audio Montage
Effects for Tracks, Clips, and the Montage Output 3.
Click Add Slot.
4.
In the Effect Name column, select the added slot.
5.
Select a plug-in.
6.
Click in the Routing column and select one of the following routing options:
7.
●
Insert (Standard)
●
Blend Wet into Dry (Send)
●
Parallel Processing
If you have selected Blend Wet into Dry (Send) or Parallel Processing, you can edit the
effect envelope to route the plug-in only to parts of the clip. Click in the Routing column
and select Edit Automation Envelope.
The Envelope tab in the Audio Montage window opens and the plug-in is selected as
envelope type.
8.
In the montage window, edit the envelope curve.
RELATED LINKS
Adding Effects Via the Effects Window on page 284
Ducking Clips on page 268
Envelopes for Clips on page 263
Using Effect Envelopes
You can automate the effect send level for clip effects that use Split Mode by using effect
envelope curves.
PREREQUISITE
Set up a Split Mode effect plug-in for a clip.
PROCEDURE
1.
Open an audio montage.
2.
Select the Envelope tab.
3.
In the Envelope Type pop-up menu, select the effect that you want to use for the envelope
curve.
4.
Create the envelope curve.
RELATED LINKS
Effects for Tracks, Clips, and the Montage Output on page 280
Setting Pan and Gain for Effects
You can set the Pan and the Gain of the effects for each clip and track individually.
PROCEDURE
1.
Open an audio montage.
2.
Select Tool Windows > Effects.
3.
In the Effects window, select a clip or track.
290
Audio Montage
Effects for Tracks, Clips, and the Montage Output 4.
Adjust the Pan and the Gain using the controls on the left of the Effects window.
For clips, the Gain is applied post-effect.
Setting the Global Gain for Effects
You can set a global gain for the montage output effects of your audio montage and apply it
before or after the montage output effects.
PROCEDURE
1.
Open an audio montage.
2.
Select Tool Windows > Effects.
3.
In the Effects window, select Output.
4.
Adjust the global gain using the fader on the left of the Effects window.
5.
Click the pre/post button to apply the global gain before or after the montage output
effects.
Global gain before montage output effects
Global gain after montage output effects
If you use a dithering plug-in, set the gain to be pre-master.
291
Audio Montage
Effects for Tracks, Clips, and the Montage Output Plug-in Window
In this window, you can display the effect plug-ins that are used for a track, clip, or the montage
output. You can display all effects in one plug-in window or have separate windows for each
effect, for all track effects, all clip effects, or all montage output effects.
Plug-in chain window
Single plug-in window
When you add a new effect plug-in to a track, a clip, or the montage output, the plug-in window
opens automatically. In the plug-in window, the effects are displayed in a plug-in chain by
default. To change the processing order of the effects, you can drag each effect to a new position
in the chain.
You can adjust the handling of the effects in the plug-in window in the Plug-in Window
Handling dialog.
RELATED LINKS
Plug-in Window Handling Dialog on page 294
Opening the Plug-in Window
You can open the plug-in window from different locations.
●
To open the plug-in window from the Effects window, in the effects list, click the plug-in
window icon to the left of a plug-in.
●
To open the plug-in window for a clip from the montage window, right-click the bottom
part of a clip, and select Edit Plug-ins. You can also right-click the clip name and select a
plug-in.
●
To open the plug-in window for a track, click the FX button in the track control area.
Adding Effects From Within the Plug-in Window
Effects that are added to a clip, track, or the montage output in the Effects window are
automatically displayed in the plug-in window. However, you can also add effects to a track or a
clip from within the plug-in window.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Plug-in Window Handling dialog, activate Use Plug-in Chain Windows.
2.
Open the plug-in window for the clip, track, or montage output to which you want to add
an effect.
3.
In the plug-in window, click the Add Plug-in button.
292
Audio Montage
Effects for Tracks, Clips, and the Montage Output 4.
Select an effect from the menu.
The effect is added at the end of the plug-in chain.
5.
Optional: If you want to move the added effect in the plug-in chain, drag it to another
position.
RELATED LINKS
Plug-in Window Handling Dialog on page 294
Changing Effects From Within the Plug-in Window
PROCEDURE
1.
Open the plug-in window for the clip, track, or montage output for which you want to
change an effect.
2.
Click the plug-in menu icon, and select a new effect from the menu.
3.
Optional: If you want to move the changed effect in a plug-in chain window, drag it to
another position.
Switching Between Track, Clip, and Montage Output Effects in Plug-in Windows
In the plug-in window, you can switch between the effect chains of clips, tracks, and the montage
output. You can also switch between plug-in windows, when you have opened several plug-in
windows.
●
To skip through the clip and track effects of the active audio montage, use the left and
right arrow icons.
●
When using one plug-in window for both clips and tracks of an audio montage, you can
switch between the plug-ins of the active clip or the track that contains the active clip by
clicking the Show Clip Plug-ins or Show Track Plug-ins icons.
293
Audio Montage
Effects for Tracks, Clips, and the Montage Output ●
To lock a plug-in window, activate Lock Window. If this option is activated, and you select
another track or clip, another plug-in window opens. If this option is deactivated, and you
select another track or clip, the effects are displayed in the same plug-in window.
NOTE
The Lock Window button is only visible if Use Plug-in Chain Windows and Unlimited
Number of Open Windows is activated.
Closing All Plug-in Windows
PROCEDURE
1.
Open an audio montage.
2.
Select Tool Windows > Effects.
3.
In the Effects window, select Menu > Close All Windows.
Plug-in Window Handling Dialog
In this dialog, you can set up the appearance and behavior of the plug-in windows.
●
To open the Plug-in Window Handling dialog, open the Effects window and select
Menu > Plug-in Window Handling.
Use One Window Per Plug-in
If this option is activated, each plug-in opens in an individual window.
Close Other Windows When Opening a New One
Closes all open plug-in windows of an audio montage each time that you open a new
plug-in window. This means that only one plug-in is displayed at a time for a each
audio montage.
Use Plug-in Chain Windows
Shows all open plug-ins in the plug-in window as tabs, which allows you to quickly
switch between the plug-ins.
Unlimited Number of Open Windows
Allows for an unlimited number of plug-in chain windows to be open at the same
time. There can be one window for each track and one for each clip.
Lock Window on Opening
Automatically locks a plug-in each time that a plug-in chain window is opened.
If a plug-in window is locked, and you select another track or clip, another plug-in
window opens. If this option is deactivated, and you select another track or clip, the
effects are displayed in the same plug-in window.
Use One Window for Clips and One for Tracks
Uses one plug-in window for all clips, one for all tracks, and one for the montage
output.
Use One Window per Montage
Uses one plug-in window for the clips, tracks, and the montage output of an audio
montage.
294
Audio Montage
CD Markers Auto Switch between Tracks and Clips
If this option is activated and you click the track control area of a track, the plug-in
window switches to display the track plug-ins. If you click a clip, the plug-in window
switches to display the clip plug-ins.
CD Markers
A track in the audio montage is defined by CD track start and end markers or CD track splice
markers.
●
CD track splice markers indicate the end of one track and the start of the next.
●
If you delete the CD markers defining a track, the track is deleted from the CD window.
●
If you edit a marker position of a CD track, the change is reflected in the track in the CD
window.
●
The name of a CD track is the name of the CD track start marker. Editing the marker name
also changes the CD track name, and vice versa.
CD Window
In this window, you can create an audio CD or DVD-Audio.
It displays a list of CD tracks along with information about each track. You can edit each track and
the playback properties of the CD, check the conformity to the Red Book standards, add and edit
CD-Text, add UPC/EAN and ISRC codes, generate a CD report, and write the CD.
When you select a clip in the montage window, the corresponding track is highlighted in the CD
window.
A CD track in the audio montage is defined by CD markers. You can reorder CD tracks in the CD
track list using drag and drop.
●
To open the CD window, open an audio montage and select Tool Windows > CD.
Track List
Play Pre-Roll
Plays back the corresponding track from the start with a pre-roll.
You can also press Alt and click Play Pre-Roll to play back the corresponding track
from the start with a short pre-roll.
Play
Plays back the corresponding track from the start.
You can also hold Ctrl/Cmd and double-click a CD track start marker triangle to start
playback from the marker position.
295
Audio Montage
CD Window Name
Shows the track name. To change the name, double-click in the corresponding cell,
and enter a new value.
Group
Allows you to define track groups.
Pause
Shows the pause between two tracks.
Start
Shows the start position of the track.
End
Shows the end position of the track.
Length
Shows the time value from the CD track start position to the corresponding end or
splice marker.
Pre-Gap
Shows the pre-gap of a track.
Post-Gap
Shows the post-gap of a track.
Lock
The lock icon indicates a track copy protection flag. Note that not all CD-R units can
handle this flag.
Emphasis
The rainbow-colored symbol indicates the emphasis flag. This setting is used to
indicate if the track was recorded with emphasis or not. Activating/Deactivating this
option does not apply/remove emphasis from the audio. It is just an indicator for
how the file was created.
ISRC
Lets you enter an ISRC code. To change the code, double-click the corresponding cell,
and enter a new value.
CD-Text
Lets you specify the CD-Text. To change the CD-Text, double-click the corresponding
cell, and enter a new value.
Comment
Allows you to enter a comment. To enter a comment, double-click a cell.
Functions Menu
Write Audio CD or DDP
Opens a dialog that allows you to write a CD or DDP.
Check CD Conformity
Verifies that the settings for the audio montage are in accordance with the Red Book
standard.
CD Wizard
Opens a dialog that helps you generate and adjust CD markers.
296
Audio Montage
CD Window Edit CD-Text
Opens the CD-Text Editor that allows you to enter descriptive text for the tracks that
are written on CD.
Edit CD Metadata
Opens the CD Metadata editor that allows you to associate metadata with each CD
track. When rendering CD tracks via the Render dialog, the audio files inherit this
metadata.
Import ISRC Codes from Text File
Allows you to import a text file that contains ISRC codes.
Generate Audio CD Report
Opens a dialog that lets you create a text report that describes the contents of the
audio CD.
Rename CD Tracks as CD Text
Replaces the name of each CD track with the name that is specified in the CD-Text
Title field.
Play Previous CD-Track/Play Next CD-Track
This is used to audition the track before/after the selected track. This depends on the
pre-roll settings.
Play All CD-Track Starts
This is used to check the transitions between all tracks. In the Edit Playback Times
dialog of the CD window, you can set the playback length for this function.
Options Menu
Audio in Pauses
Usually, when you create a CD, only the sections between track markers are written,
and the pauses between tracks are replaced by silence. However, if Audio in Pauses
is activated, the exact image of the audio montage is written, including any audio
between tracks. This makes it possible to hear audio either between CD tracks or
before the first track, for example, to create a hidden track.
Preserve Post-Pauses when Reordering
If this option is activated, the pause after a CD track is preserved when you reorder
tracks. If this option is deactivated, the pause before a CD track is preserved when
you reorder tracks.
Show Times Relative to Track #1
If this option is activated, the start of track #1 is the time code reference, excluding
any pause before that track.
Show Times Relative to CD’s Absolute Zero
If this option is activated, the beginning of the CD, including any pause before track
#1, is the time code reference.
Time Code with CD Frames
If this option is activated, the time code is displayed in hours, minutes, seconds, and
CD frames.
Time Code with Milliseconds
If this option is activated, the time code is displayed in hours, minutes, seconds, and
milliseconds.
297
Audio Montage
CD Window Pre-Roll Mode
If this option is activated, all tracks start with a pre-roll time when they are played
back using the commands of the CD window.
Edit Playback Times
Opens a dialog where you can adjust the time values that are related to CD track
playback.
Customize Command Bar
Opens the Customize Commands dialog which contains options to hide or show
specific command bar buttons.
Toolbar
The following indicators are only available on the toolbar of the CD window:
Position in CD Track
Indicates the position of the playback/edit cursor, relative to the start of the CD track
in which it is located.
UPC/EAN Code
Opens a dialog in which you can specify an UPC/EAN code.
Edit Playback Times Dialog
In this dialog, you can edit time values that are related to the playback of the CD track when
using the playback commands of the CD window.
●
To open the Edit Playback Times dialog, open the CD window and select Options > Edit
Playback Times.
CD Track Pre-Roll
Specifies how much time before the start of a CD track is played back to help you
evaluate the transition between CD tracks.
Add One Second of Silence before Playback
If this option is activated, WaveLab Pro waits one second before starting playback of
the next CD track start.
Test Time
Specifies the playback length of CD track starts for the Play All CD-Track Starts
function in the CD window.
Metadata for CD Tracks
You can associate metadata with individual CD tracks or with an entire CD. When rendering CD
tracks via the Render dialog, the audio files can inherit this metadata.
Because standard CD Text is not unicode, it does not always provide the optimum text data. To
solve this issue, WaveLab Pro provides variables.
For CD tracks, there are two type of variables:
●
Auto variables
●
Custom variables
Auto variables are automatically added by WaveLab Pro. For example, ISRC, track names, and CDText. Custom variables can be manually edited to add additional metadata for the track.
●
To see and edit the CD track metadata, open the CD window, and select Functions > Edit
CD Metadata.
298
Audio Montage
CD Window NOTE
In this dialog, you prepare the metadata. How they are saved, is specified in the Metadata
dialog.
RELATED LINKS
Metadata on page 144
Creating Audio CD Tracks From Clips
The CD Wizard tool lets you generate CD track and splice markers from clip regions and
crossfade points. You can use the Check CD conformity option to check whether the audio
montage is ready for writing to audio CD.
PROCEDURE
1.
Make sure that the audio montage contains the material that you want on the audio CD.
CD tracks must have a length of at least 4 seconds.
2.
In the CD window, select Functions > CD Wizard.
3.
Edit the settings in the CD Wizard dialog, and click Apply.
4.
Audition the tracks in the CD window, and make corrections if necessary.
5.
In the CD window, select Functions > Check CD Conformity.
●
If a warning message appears, make corrections and check the CD conformity
again.
●
If no warning message appears, the audio montage is ready to be written to an
audio CD.
CD Wizard Dialog
In this dialog, you can generate and adjust CD markers for audio montages.
●
To open the CD Wizard dialog, open the CD window and select Functions > CD Wizard.
Generate CD Track Markers
If this option is activated, the CD Wizard automatically generates CD track markers
according to the sub-options.
299
Audio Montage
CD Window Create Markers at Clip Boundaries
If this option is activated, CD track start and end markers are added at the beginning
and end of all non-overlapping clips.
Use Splice Markers (Keep Pauses within Tracks)
If this option is activated, single splice markers are generated instead of start/end
markers. Instead of a standard pause, pause spaces are generated. The pauses are
kept within tracks. This can be useful for electronic distribution and for compatibility
with portable players.
Create Markers at Crossfade Points
If this option is activated, CD track splice markers are created at all crossfade
intersection points. Activate this option if you have clips that overlap each other and
that should become different tracks on the CD.
Keep Locked CD Track Markers
Normally, any previously created CD track markers in the montage are removed by
the CD Wizard. If Keep Locked CD Track Markers is activated, the locked CD track
markers are kept.
CD Marker Naming
Allows you to set up a naming scheme.
Start Marker
On this menu, you can select a naming scheme for the CD track start markers. The
following options are available:
●
As Clips: The name of the closest clip.
●
Specific Name: The name specified below.
●
Specific Name + Number X: The name and a number.
●
Specific Name + Number XX: The name and a number that is padded on the
left with 0.
●
Specific Name + Number (Auto): As Specific Name + Number XX, but only if
the number of tracks is greater than 10.
●
Number X + Specific Name: A number and a name.
●
Number XX + Specific Name: A number that is padded on the left with 0 and
a name.
●
Number (Auto) + Specific Name: As Number XX + Specific Name, but only if
the number of tracks is greater than 10.
●
Custom: Opens the Rename Markers dialog where you can rename multiple
markers according to specified settings.
End Marker
On this menu, you can select the name of the CD track end marker. The following
options are available:
●
No Name
●
As Start Marker
●
As Start Marker + “(End)”
●
Custom
Adjust Pauses before Tracks
If this option is activated, pauses before tracks are automatically adjusted according
to the sub-options.
300
Audio Montage
CD Window Set Time
If this option is activated, you can specify the length of the pauses between tracks.
Round Existing Pauses to Closest Second
If this option is activated, the existing pauses between tracks are rounded to
seconds.
Do Not Change First Pause
If this option is activated, the pause between the start of the montage and the first
track is not changed. If you change the length of the pauses to anything other than
2 seconds and want to be conform to the Red Book standard, you must activate this
option.
Adjust Gaps between Markers and Sound (as CD Frames)
If this option is activated, small adjustments to the spacing before and after the CD
track markers are made according to the sub-options. This is useful to ensure that a
low-quality CD player does not miss the start of tracks or cuts them off before their
actual end. In most cases, the default settings are sufficient.
Silence after First Track Start Marker
Lets you add a few frames of silence before the first track of the CD. Usually, the
pause needs to be longer for the first track than for the other tracks to ensure that a
low quality CD player does not miss the start of the first track.
Silence after Track Start Marker
Lets you add a few frames of silence before each track on the CD to ensure that a low
quality CD player does not miss the start of tracks.
Silence before Each Track End Marker
Lets you add a few frames of silence after each track of the CD to ensure that a low
quality CD player does not cut off tracks before their actual end.
Silence before Last Track End Marker
Lets you add a few frames of silence after the last track of the CD to ensure that a
low quality CD player does not cut off the end of the track or that the listener is not
disturbed by any clicks or motor noise that the player makes at the end of a CD.
Ensure Required Minimum Size for CD Tracks
If this option is activated, markers are adjusted to ensure that each CD track has the
minimum length that the Red Book standard requires.
Quantize CD Markers to Nearest CD Frame
If this option is activated, markers are quantized to the nearest CD frame.
Generate ISRC Codes
If this option is activated, ISRC codes for the CD tracks are created. Each code is
based on the code that is specified in this option, but with an ending number that is
set according to the order of the tracks.
UPC/EAN Code (13 Digits)
Lets you specify an optional UPC/EAN code for the CD.
RELATED LINKS
Batch Renaming Dialog for Markers on page 527
Audio in Pauses
Normally, when you write an audio montage on an audio CD, only the sections between the CD
markers are written, and the pauses between tracks are replaced by silence. However, if Audio
301
Audio Montage
Snapshots in Pauses is activated, the exact image of the audio montage is written on the CD, including any
audio between tracks.
Using Audio in Pauses
The following describes two use cases for the Audio in Pauses function.
Adjusting CD Track Markers to Hide Audio Sections
If you have a live recording with a section of applause between two songs, you can move the
track markers so that the applause section is between the tracks and activate Audio in Pauses.
Thus the applause cannot be heard if you play any of the two tracks on their own, but you can
hear it when playing through the CD tracks.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, place the CD track end marker of the first track at the position
where the music ends, but before the applause section.
2.
If necessary, place the CD track start marker of the following track at the position where
the music starts.
3.
In the CD window, select Options > Audio in Pauses.
Placing a Clip Before Track 1
You can create a hidden CD track before track 1, for example.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, place a clip without CD track markers prior to the first track start
marker in the audio montage.
NOTE
It is recommended that you do not place the hidden track at the very start of the montage
but leave a little room between the montage start and the start of the hidden track.
2.
In the CD window, select Options > Audio in Pauses.
3.
Proceed with writing the CD.
To hear the hidden track after writing the disc, rewind from the start of track 1.
Snapshots
You can save a number of snapshots of your audio montage, to capture the current scroll
position, zoom factor, cursor position, audio selection, and clip selection status.
You can recall a snapshot at any time and update snapshots.
Selecting a saved snapshot restores all of its view settings. You can also choose to recall only
specific view properties by activating the corresponding options for a snapshot.
RELATED LINKS
Snapshots on page 198
302
Audio Montage
Mixing Down – The Render Function Capturing the Current View
Capturing the current view saves the current zoom factor, cursor position, scroll position, clip
selection status, and time range.
PROCEDURE
1.
Set up the view of the montage window.
2.
Select the View tab.
3.
In the Snapshots section, click Take Snapshot
4.
Click one of the preset buttons to save the snapshot.
.
RESULT
The snapshot is saved and can be recalled by clicking the corresponding preset button.
Updating Snapshots
You can update a snapshot with the current view.
PROCEDURE
1.
Set up the view of the montage window.
2.
Select the View tab.
3.
In the Snapshots section, click Take Snapshot
4.
Click the preset button that you want to update.
.
RESULT
The new snapshot replaces the selected snapshot.
Mixing Down – The Render Function
The Render function allows you to mix down the whole audio montage or sections of it to a
single audio file or to several files in case of a multichannel audio montage. It also allows you to
render to an audio CD, to a CD image and cue sheet, or to a new audio montage.
A mixdown is necessary to produce an audio file from the audio montage. The Render function
can be used for the following purposes:
●
Write a CD from a CPU-intensive audio montage, because it allows you to first render all
track and clip effect processing to recreate a new audio montage and then write the CD in
a second pass.
●
Render audio files, audio montages, or marker regions in audio montages to multiple file
formats at the same time.
●
Render surround channels as multiple files while retaining the stereo/mono status of the
individual surround channels.
●
Create a CD image and cue sheet.
●
Render audio montages to a single file or render various parts of a montage to multiple
audio files in one operation. For example, you can render regions, groups, clips, or CD
tracks.
RELATED LINKS
Rendering on page 349
303
Audio Montage
Loudness Meta Normalizer Rendering to Audio File
You can render to a single audio file format or to multiple audio file formats at the same time.
PREREQUISITE
Set up your audio montage. If you want to render to multiple file formats, create file format
presets.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Montage window, select the Render tab.
2.
In the Source section, specify which part of the audio file you want to render.
3.
In the Results section, activate Named File.
4.
In the Output section, click the Format field and do one of the following:
5.
●
If you want to render to one audio format, select Edit Single Format.
●
If you want to render to multiple file formats, select Edit Multi Format.
Make your settings in the Audio File Format dialog.
●
To add multiple file formats in the Multi Audio File Format dialog, click Plus and
select the file format presets that you want to render to.
6.
Click OK.
7.
Optional: Make additional settings on the Render tab.
8.
In the Render section, click Start.
RESULT
The audio montage is rendered.
If you render a surround mix to Multi Stereo/Mono files, the mono/stereo status of the
rendered files reflects the mono/stereo status of the surround channels. If the audio montage
uses a 6 channel (5.1) surround mode, two stereo files (Lf/Rf and Ls/Rs) and two mono files (C/
Lfe) are rendered. The names of the rendered files reflect the name of the surround channel to
which they belong.
If you render an 8 channel configuration using the Multi Stereo/Mono option, the channels are
grouped as logical pairs (1-2, 3-4, etc.). For tracks that are routed to only one channel in a pair, a
mono file is created.
Under Windows, you can also render single multichannel surround files in the WMA 5.1 and 7.1
formats. Use the Windows Media Audio 9 Professional encoder.
RELATED LINKS
Multi Audio File Format Dialog on page 351
Creating Multiple Audio File Format Presets on page 351
Loudness Meta Normalizer
This tool is a key mastering component to ensure that all songs get the same loudness and to
prevent clipping. It allows you to adjust the loudness of each clip in the audio montage so that
they all have the same loudness. It is also possible to adjust the loudness of the audio montage
mixdown as well as the loudness at the Master Section output.
This tool operates on gains. It does not affect the underlying audio files or use any audio
compressor.
If it is not possible to modify the loudness of a particular clip without clipping, the level of the
other clips is reduced so that all clips still achieve the same loudness. This does not happen if the
304
Audio Montage
Loudness Meta Normalizer Ignore Peaks option on the Peaks pop-up menu in the Loudness Meta Normalizer dialog is
selected.
To avoid clipping at the Master Section stage, you can limit the mixdown output of the audio
montage before it goes into the Master Section and/or the Master Section output.
The loudness is calculated according to the EBU R-128 recommendation. The reference loudness
can either be the loudness of the loudest clip, of a specific clip, or a custom value.
There are three possible loudness references:
●
Loudness of an entire file (EBU R-128 recommendation).
●
Top of a loudness range, that is, the average loudest 3 second audio section of a file. This
ensures that a single unusually loud sound is not taken into account for the reference.
●
Maximum short-term loudness, that is, the maximum loudness that is found in a 3 second
audio section of the file, for example, the loudness of a short music passage.
NOTE
●
The audio path in the audio montage uses 32-bit floating point processing. You can
therefore overload it, for example, use levels above 0 dB in clips, without causing clipping
in the signal path. The only section of the audio path that can introduce clipping is the
output of the Master Section or the output of the audio montage. Both of these issues
can also be solved by the Loudness Meta Normalizer.
●
Because loudness requires several seconds of audio to be correctly calculated, this tool
should not be used for very short clips (under 3 seconds).
Loudness Meta Normalizer Dialog
In this dialog, you can adjust the loudness of each clip in the audio montage so that they get
the same loudness. You can also adjust the whole output, while taking the EBU R-128 audio
measurement recommendation and a true peak analysis into account.
●
To open the Loudness Meta Normalizer dialog, select the Process tab in the Audio
Montage window, and click Meta Normalizer in the Loudness section.
Clips, Master Section Output, and Audio Montage Output
●
If Clips is activated, the gain settings of all clips in the audio montage are adjusted
individually so that all clips play back at equal loudness.
●
If Audio Montage Output is activated, the gain setting of the audio montage is modified
so that the audio montage mixdown matches a specific loudness.
●
If Master Section Output is activated, the Master Section gain is adjusted so that the
audio montage mixdown that is processed through all Master Section plug-ins matches a
specific loudness. The audio montage itself is not modified by this operation.
The following options are available for the gain settings of clips, the audio montage output, and
the Master Section output.
Match loudness menu
Select whether the audio montage output should match a specific loudness. The
following options are available:
●
Do Not Change Loudness
●
Match Loudest Clip
●
Match Loudness of Active Clip
●
Match Specific Loudness
●
Equalize Peak Levels
The highest peak is used as reference.
305
Audio Montage
Navigator Window Loudness
Determines the loudness to match. For example, specify -23 LUFS if you want to
follow the EBU R-128 recommendation for broadcast.
Reference menu
Select the loudness that WaveLab Pro should reference:
●
Loudness of Entire Clip (EBU R-128 recommendation)
●
Top of Loudness Range (average loudest 3 second audio section)
●
Maximum Short-Term Loudness (loudest 3 seconds audio section)
Peaks menu
Select whether WaveLab Pro should limit the sample values (digital peaks), the
analog reconstructed samples (true peaks), or ignore the peaks.
Maximum Peak
Determines the maximum peak value that must not be exceeded.
Force Equal Loudness
If Limit True Peaks or Limit Digital Peaks is selected, some clip might not reach
the required gain for the reference loudness. In that case, activate Force Equal
Loudness to reduce the loudness of the clip that is used as a reference to achieve
equal loudness across all clips.
Additional Options
Exclude Audio Montage Effects
If this option is activated, audio montage effects are not taken into account when
you use the Loudness Meta Normalizer.
This option also affects the Pre-Gain and Post-Gain options in the Clips window.
●
If Exclude Audio Montage Effects is activated, the Loudness Meta Normalizer
changes the Pre-Gain value of the clips.
●
If Exclude Audio Montage Effects is deactivated, the Loudness Meta
Normalizer changes the Post-Gain value of the clips.
Only Selected Clips
If this option is activated, only the selected clips are processed with the Loudness
Meta Normalizer.
Show Log
If this option is activated, a log window opens after the process to show the analysis
result.
Test Only
If this option is activated, a test analysis is performed. A log window opens to show
the result of this analysis. The test analysis does not apply the loudness settings to
the audio.
Navigator Window
This window displays an overview of the entire active audio montage and allows you to quickly
navigate in it.
●
To open the Navigator window, open an audio montage and select Tool Windows >
Navigator.
306
Audio Montage
Notes Window Each clip is represented by a colored block. The visible window content is shown by a black
rectangle.
Navigating in the Navigator Window
The Navigator window allows you to quickly find positions in large audio montages.
Dragging with the mouse in any direction scrolls the main audio montage window, allowing you
to navigate to a location in your audio montage.
●
To adjust the visible range of the active window, you can resize the rectangle vertically and
horizontally by dragging its edges. You can also resize by Shift-clicking in the rectangle
edges and dragging.
●
To zoom in on a clip, click its corresponding block. If the clip is inside the rectangle, doubleclick it.
●
To completely zoom out, right-click anywhere in the window.
Notes Window
This window allows you to enter notes about the current audio montage session.
●
To open the Notes window, open an audio montage and select Tool Windows > Notes.
You can enter the text directly in this window and use the standard HTML text editor controls to
format the text, and to add images and lists. The notes are saved with the audio montage.
Groups
Groups are selections of clips that can be accessed via the Groups window or by clicking any clip
of a group.
A clip cannot be part of more than one group. If you add a clip to a group, it is automatically
removed from any other group. You can select a specific color for a group to make it easy to
discern it in the track view.
You can render all groups as individual files in the Render dialog of the Master Section.
●
To create nested groups, drag a group into another group.
●
To deactivate a group, deactivate its checkbox in the list. If a group is deactivated, you can
move the individual clips.
●
To rename a group, double-click its name and enter a new name.
307
Audio Montage
Groups ●
To select all clips of a group in your audio montage for editing, click the group.
RELATED LINKS
Super Clips on page 255
Groups Window
This window displays a list of the groups that are part of the current audio montage.
●
To open the Groups window, open an audio montage and select Tool Windows > Groups.
Group Selected Clips
Creates a group from all selected clips.
Remove Selected Group
Removes the group that is selected in the list. The clips themselves are not removed
from the montage.
Click Selects Group
If this option is activated, selecting a clip in the track view automatically selects all
clips in the same group.
If this option is deactivated, selecting a whole group requires that you click the
group name in the groups view list. This is useful if you want to be able to modify
the relative positions of clips in the group without having to remove them from the
group.
Color
Lets you select a color for the group.
Customize Command Bar
Opens the Customize Commands dialog which contains options to hide or show
specific command bar buttons.
Grouping Clips
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, select the clips that you want to group.
2.
In the Groups window, select Functions > Group Selected Clips.
3.
Enter a name for the group, and click OK.
RESULT
The new group is displayed in the group list. The group name is prepended to the names of the
clips that are included in the group.
Adding Clips to an Existing Group
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, select the clips that you want to add to a group.
308
Audio Montage
Audio Montage Backups 2.
In the Groups window, select Functions > Group Selected Clips.
3.
Select the group to which you want to add the clips, and click OK.
Removing Groups
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Groups window, select a group.
2.
Select Functions > Remove Selected Group.
RESULT
The group is removed. The clips themselves are not removed from the montage.
Coloring Groups
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Groups window, select a group.
2.
Open the Color menu and select a color.
Any individual color selections for the clips override the group color.
Audio Montage Backups
The audio montage backup mechanism allows you to maintain previous versions of saved audio
montages and to automatically save audio montages.
Whenever you save an audio montage, the previously saved version is copied to the subfolder
Backup.mon which is located in the same folder as the audio montage file. This backup folder
is automatically created by WaveLab Pro. The backup files are named “Montage_#X”, where
“Montage” is the name of the audio montage and “X” is a number.
You can specify how many previous versions you want to keep (maximum 1000). Once the
specified number of backups is reached, the oldest file is overwritten each time that the audio
montage is backed up.
NOTE
The numbers in the backup file names are not related to the age of the backup files. Instead, you
must check the dates of the files to know which backup is the most recent.
Unsaved and untitled audio montages are also backed up. The backup files for untitled audio
montages are saved in the temporary folder, and use a number as name, so that the files are
called “Y_#X”, where “Y” is a number identifying the audio montage, and “X” is the number of the
backup file.
Setting Up the Audio Montage Backup
You can specify the number of audio montage backups and define how often the backup should
be performed.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Montages Preferences, select the All Audio Montages tab.
2.
In the Backups section, specify the maximum number of backups.
To deactivate the backup function, set this setting to 0.
309
Audio Montage
Multichannel Operations in the Audio Montage 3.
Optional: Activate Auto Save, and specify how often the backup should be performed.
Opening an Audio Montage Backup
You can open the backup of an audio montage to restore a former version of the audio montage.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > Open.
2.
Click Audio Montage.
3.
Do one of the following:
●
To close the current unsaved audio montage and open the last saved version, click
Revert to Saved File. This replaces the current audio montage.
●
To open the saved version in a new window without closing the current, unsaved
version, click Revert to Backup.
Multichannel Operations in the Audio Montage
WaveLab Pro supports the use of up to 8 ASIO inputs and outputs. If you use a multichannel
audio interface with an ASIO driver, you can route audio montage tracks to up to 8 separate
channel outputs and to up to 6 surround outputs.
You can also record up to 8 channels simultaneously. This automatically creates new tracks in the
montage, one for each recorded channel or channel pair.
To be able to use WaveLab Pro for multichannel/surround projects, you need an audio card/
interface with multiple inputs and outputs. You must also set up an ASIO driver in the Audio
Connections tab and specify how the internal input/output channels are connected to your
audio card.
RELATED LINKS
Audio Connections Tab on page 11
Multichannel Configuration
You can configure the number of channels to use for each audio montage.
The are two operational modes that you can use for multichannel operation:
●
In the Multichannel (DVD-Audio Compatible) mode, in surround mode, tracks can be
routed to one or several surround output channels (Left/Right Front, Center, etc.). You can
assign up to 6 surround channels.
●
In the Multichannel (Free Configuration) mode, channels refer to the names of the 8
WaveLab Pro output channels instead of the surround channels. Track channels can be
routed to one (mono tracks) or two (stereo tracks) of the 8 available output channels.
Which configuration you should select depends on a number of factors:
●
The number of outputs that are available on your audio card. If you only have 4 outputs on
your card, you can only use surround formats with 4 or less channels.
●
Whether or not you intend to mix the audio montage to a surround format. If not, select
the Stereo mode or the 8 Channels mode.
●
The intended use of the final surround mix. For example, if you want your mix to be
compatible with the 5.1 surround set-up, select the 6 Channels mode.
310
Audio Montage
Multichannel Operations in the Audio Montage All multichannel configurations except the free configuration mode have surround formats and
are internally assigned to surround channels in WaveLab Pro. This means that the channels go
through the Master Section and then to the audio card.
Assigning Track Channels to Output Channels
When you select a multichannel configuration, you must create and assign track channels to
surround output channels manually.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Montage window, in the track control area, click Audio Track Dispatching
for an audio track.
2.
In the Audio Track Dispatching dialog, route each channel of the track to an output
channel by activating the corresponding channels.
Which channels are available depends on the selected channel configuration.
3.
Click OK.
RESULT
If you have selected a surround format, you can route a track channel to several or all surround
output channels. If you select more than one output channel for a stereo track channel, the
Surround Panner automatically opens in the track control area for the corresponding track.
Audio Track Dispatching Dialog
In this dialog, you set up to which channels the top and bottom audio channels of a track in the
audio montage are sent. The available channels depend on the selected channel configuration.
●
To open the Audio Track Dispatching dialog, click Audio Track Dispatching for an audio
track in the track control area of the Audio Montage window.
311
Audio Montage
Multichannel Operations in the Audio Montage Top Audio Channel Is Sent To
Lets you select to which audio montage audio outputs the left channel of the track is
sent.
Bottom Audio Channel Is Sent To
Lets you select to which audio montage audio outputs the right channel of the track
is sent.
Low Pass Filtering of the LFE Channel
If an LFE output is selected, a low pass filter (12 dB/octave) can be applied to the
track signal so that only the low frequency content can pass. The cutoff frequency for
the filter can be adjusted.
Surround Panning
You can use surround panning to position a track freely in the surround image.
The Surround Panner lets you adjust the pan of your audio between surround channels. Each
track can have its own Surround Panner, and several of these windows can be open at the same
time.
Using Surround Panning
You can route any audio montage channel of a track to a surround channel or to a combination
of surround channels using the Audio Track Dispatching dialog. However, if you also want to
position a track freely in the surround image, you can use the surround panner.
PREREQUISITE
In this example, it is assumed that you have set up an audio montage in 5.1 surround format and
that you want to use the surround panner for a stereo track.
312
Audio Montage
Multichannel Operations in the Audio Montage PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Montage window, in the track control area, click Audio Track Dispatching
for the track that you want to use for surround panning.
2.
In the Audio Track Dispatching dialog, activate the surround channels.
You can activate different surround channel combinations for the top (left) and bottom
(right) audio channels.
3.
Click OK.
A Surround Panner display opens in the track control area.
4.
Click and drag in the surround panner display to make coarse adjustments.
For a more precise control of the imaging, right-click the surround panner display to open
the Surround Panner dialog.
5.
In the Surround Panner dialog, click the blue square and move the mouse.
This pans the audio of the top channel. The other channel is automatically mirrored
horizontally. Right-click the display to choose from a number of positioning presets.
6.
To view and edit the other channel, click the gray square.
The gray square turns to red, and red speaker lines indicate the speaker levels.
7.
When you have finished your settings, click Close.
Surround Panner Dialog
This dialog allows you to adjust the pan of your audio between surround sound channels.
Set up a multichannel, DVD-Audio compatible, audio montage, and select 2 or more output
channels per track channel. For each track that is set to Surround in the Audio Track
Dispatching dialog, a small Surround Panner is displayed in the track view.
●
To open the Surround Panner dialog, right-click on the small surround panner.
313
Audio Montage
Multichannel Operations in the Audio Montage In the graphic display, the positions of the left/right audio channels of the clip are shown as
small squares. The signal levels of the individual speakers are indicated by colored lines from the
speakers to the center of the display.
The graphic display shows the surround imaging of either the top (blue) track audio channel,
or the bottom (red) track audio channel. The color of the speaker lines shows which channel is
selected for viewing and editing.
If you are viewing the top channel, you see a blue square indicating the position of the audio.
The other, gray square represents the other channel. Click the gray square to view and edit this
channel. The gray square turns to red and red speaker lines indicate the speaker levels.
Center
Determines how much the track signal should be mixed into the audio montage
output corresponding to the center speaker. This is only available if the center
channel is activated in the Audio Track Dispatching dialog.
Divergence
Determines the attenuation curve that is used when positioning sound sources. If
this is set to 0 %, positioning a sound source on a speaker sets all other speakers
to zero level, except for the center speaker which depends on the center level. With
higher values, the other speakers receive a percentage of the sound source. This
makes the sound less localized.
314
Audio Montage
Multichannel Operations in the Audio Montage Front/Rear Ratio
Determines how much the front and rear levels are affected by the vertical
positioning in the Surround Panner dialog. The higher the ratio, the less difference
exists between sounds that are panned front and rear. If set to 100 %, the rear and
front levels are always the same.
Constant Power
Determines whether the loudness (RMS) or the level of the summed signals is
preserved. If set to 100 %, the total loudness is the same regardless of panning
settings. If set to 0 %, the total level is preserved.
LFE Gain
Sets the amount of signal that is sent to the LFE channel. This is only available if the
LFE channel is activated in the Audio Track Dispatching dialog.
Copy
Copies the settings of the selected Surround Panner to the clipboard.
Paste
Applies the copied settings to the Surround Panner.
Presets menu
Right-click the graphic display of the Surround Panner to select from different
surround panning presets.
Surround Pan Envelopes
You can automate the surround panning for individual clips using envelopes. This is slightly
different from using regular volume and pan envelopes.
●
Internally, there is a single surround pan envelope where each envelope point contains a
complete surround state (left-right position, front-rear position, and LFE amount).
●
When you look at the envelope for a clip, you can choose to view either the left-right, frontrear, or the LFE curve.
●
When setting envelope points for either one of the envelope types, that point is
automatically added to the other envelope types at the same position in the clip.
Setting Up Surround Panning Envelopes
You can use the Surround Panner to program each envelope point. This makes it easy to set up
automated surround panning for a clip.
If you want the signal to start at the front center position, then move to the left rear speaker, and
finally move to the right rear speaker, do the following:
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Montage window, set up a track for surround panning by activating the
surround channels in the Audio Track Dispatching dialog.
2.
Select the clip, and select the Envelope tab.
3.
In the Selector section, select one of the Surround Pan envelopes.
For example, Surround Pan (Left <-> Right).
4.
In the montage window, double-click the envelope to add a new envelope point in the
middle of the clip.
This determines the position where the signal reaches the left rear speaker. Only the
position in the clip is important when you create envelope points at this stage, not the
vertical position of the point.
315
Audio Montage
Multichannel Operations in the Audio Montage 5.
In the track control area, right-click the Surround Panner display.
6.
In the montage window, select the envelope point at the start of the clip.
7.
Use the Surround Panner dialog to position the sound. In our example, the panning
should start in the front center position. Drag the position square to the top middle of the
display. You can also right-click the display and select the Front Center preset.
8.
In the montage window, select the next envelope point in the clip, and in the dialog, drag
the position square to the lower left corner of the display. You can also right-click the
display and select the Rear Left preset.
9.
In the montage window, select the last envelope point, and in the dialog, drag the position
square to the lower right corner of the display. You can also right-click the display and
select the Rear Right preset.
The left-right surround envelope curve now looks like this:
10.
On the Envelope tab, in the Selector section, select Surround Pan (Front <-> Rear).
The Front-Rear surround envelope curve looks like this:
11.
Play back the clip.
You should hear the sound move from center front to left rear to right rear.
12.
To create more complex surround panning, add more envelope points and program these
in the same way.
Editing Envelope Curves
You can edit the envelope curves without affecting other panning settings, by adjusting their
points in the clip. This can be useful if you only want to change the LFE amount without affecting
panning, or if you only want to change the left-right panning without affecting front-rear
panning and vice versa.
NOTE
If you move an envelope point in time, all surround pan envelopes are affected in the same way.
316
Audio Montage
Multichannel Operations in the Audio Montage Multichannel (DVD-Audio Compatible) Mode
If Multichannel (DVD-Audio Compatible) mode is activated for an audio montage, you can
choose between various multichannel configurations.
In the Info dialog of the audio montage, select Multichannel (DVD-Audio Compatible). On the
Channels menu, the following multichannel configurations are available:
Left/Right Front (Lf, Rf)
This is used in all surround configurations. These correspond to standard left/right
stereo speaker positions in front of the listener.
Center (C)
This is placed in between the Lf/Rf surround speakers.
Low Frequency Effects (LFE)
The LFE channel is connected to a subwoofer and provides low frequency content
(normally below 120 Hz). It can be used to provide special low frequency effects like
deep rumbles, explosions, etc. For each channel that is routed to the LFE channel,
there is a low-pass filter that allows you to extend or lower the low frequency range
that is reproduced by the LFE channel.
Surround (S)
This is sometimes referred to as the back surround channel and is normally placed in
between the left/right surround channels.
Left/Right Surround (Ls, Rs)
These are placed behind the listening position, mirroring the left/right front
speakers.
Free Configuration Mode
If Multichannel (Free Configuration) mode is selected, you can route track channels to one
of the 8 output channels. This mode is not surround oriented and allows you to use the audio
montage as an 8 channel recording/playback environment.
●
To activate this mode, open the Info dialog of the audio montage, and from the Mode
menu, select Multichannel (Free Configuration).
Channels are grouped as stereo pairs (1-2, 3-4, etc.), which is reflected in the Master Section and
when rendering to multiple files.
Enable Additional DVD-Audio Configurations
The DVD-Audio specification allows for mixed sample resolutions within the same channel
configuration, which therefore needs to be divided into two separate groups. For example, the
Lf/Rf channel group could, according to the standard, have a higher sample rate resolution than
the other surround channels in the same configuration.
The slash in the surround channel menu indicates which channels belong to which group.
However, the use of mixed resolutions is not supported in WaveLab Pro and deactivated by
default.
●
To activate additional DVD-Audio configurations, click the Audio Montage Properties
button below the montage window. Then, in the Audio Montage Properties dialog, select
Multichannel (DVD-Audio Compatible), and activate Enable Additional DVD-Audio
Configurations.
317
Audio Montage
Multichannel Operations in the Audio Montage Multichannel Recording
You can record up to 8 channels simultaneously in the audio montage.
Multichannel Recording Preparations
PREREQUISITE
Set up how the inputs on your audio card are connected to the internal channels of WaveLab Pro.
PROCEDURE
1.
On the transport bar, click Record, or press * on the numeric key pad.
2.
In the File to Create section, select whether to create a named file or a temporary file.
3.
If you want to create a named file, specify a file name and the location where you want to
save the file.
4.
Click the audio format text to open the Audio File Format dialog.
5.
Select the audio file format.
6.
On the Channels menu, select Multi Stereo/Mono or Multi Mono.
Multi Stereo/Mono produces single stereo or mono files, depending on the activated
channels in the Recording Channels dialog. The channels are logically grouped as pairs
(1-2, 3-4, etc.). This governs the mono/stereo status of the recorded files and the tracks
they will end up on. For example, if you have activated the channels 1, 2, and 3, one stereo
file (containing channels 1 and 2) and one mono file (channel 3) will be created.
7.
Click OK.
8.
On the menu below the file format, select Add to Selected Track of Montage.
9.
Click Set Input, activate the channels from which you want to record, and click OK.
For each of the activated recording channels, a meter is displayed in the Recording dialog.
10.
Optional: Make further settings.
Recording a Multichannel Project
PREREQUISITE
Prepare a multichannel recording.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the montage window, set the edit cursor where you want to start recording.
2.
In the Recording dialog, click Record.
3.
When you have finished recording, click Stop.
When you record on multiple channels, new tracks are automatically created in the
audio montage, one for each mono or stereo clip that is recorded. Each track is routed to
the same output by default, but can be routed to any output that is used in the current
configuration in the Audio Track Dispatching dialog.
318
Audio Montage
Multichannel Operations in the Audio Montage RESULT
If you have activated more than 2 input channels in the Recording Channels dialog and select
any channel option except the Multi Mono or Multi Stereo/Mono options, the activated
recording inputs are mixed and produce a single file (or two if you selected Dual Mono).
Multichannel Configurations in the Master Section
The Master Section automatically rearranges itself when starting playback of a multichannel
audio montage. You can rearrange the Master Section without starting playback by clicking
Rearrange in the Settings menu at the top of the Master Section.
The output channels for the selected channel configuration are displayed in the Master Section,
with one level fader and clip indicator for each output channel.
RELATED LINKS
Master Section on page 331
Monitoring a Stereo Mixdown of Multichannel Configurations
In the Master Section, you can monitor a stereo mixdown of a multichannel configuration. This
allows you to preview a stereo mixdown setting for a DVD-Audio project, for example.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Master Section, open the Master Level pane.
2.
Below the master meter, click Audio Channel Monitoring.
3.
Select Mix to Stereo.
319
Audio Montage
XML Export and Import of Audio Montages Master Effects and Multichannel Audio Montages
Handling effects for a multichannel audio montage is similar to handling effects when working in
stereo mode. However, not all plug-ins support multichannel operations. In this case, a warning
is displayed when you try to insert them.
XML Export and Import of Audio Montages
You can export and import audio montages as XML.
This option can be used for the following:
●
Change many file names that are used by the audio montage.
●
Generate audio montages from scratch or from a template.
●
Compare two audio montages with a text file comparing tool.
Exporting and Importing XML Files
●
To export an audio montage to XML, select File > Export and select Audio Montage to
XML. Then specify a name and file location, and click Export.
●
To import an audio montage that was saved as an XML file, select File > Import and select
XML. Then select the XML file and click Import.
AES-31 Files Export and Import
The AES-31 standard is an open file interchange format for overcoming format incompatibility
issues between different audio hardware and software. It can be used for transferring projects
from one workstation to another, retaining time positions of events, fades, etc.
AES-31 uses Broadcast Wave as the default audio file format. AES-31 files can be transferred
to and used with any digital audio workstation that supports AES-31, regardless of the used
hardware and software, as long as the workstation can read Broadcast Wave files.
The exported files are XML files but with the extension .adl (audio decision list).
Exporting AES-31 Files
When exporting audio montages to an AES-31 file, the file contains all audio track data, including
audio file references.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > Export.
2.
Click Audio Montage to AES-31.
3.
Specify a name and file location, and click Export.
4.
In the AES-31 Export Options dialog, edit the settings and click OK.
AES-31 Export Options Dialog
●
To open the AES-31 Export Options dialog, select File > Export and select Audio Montage
to AES-31. Then specify a name and file location, and click Export.
Render Linear Fades as Audio Files
If this option is activated, linear fades, which are dynamically computed by WaveLab
Pro, are rendered to small audio files while preserving the exact audio effect.
320
Audio Montage
AES-31 Files Export and Import Render Curved Fades as Audio Files
If this option is activated, complex fades, which are dynamically computed by
WaveLab Pro, are rendered to small audio files while preserving the exact audio
effect.
Render Crossfades as Audio Files
If this option is activated, crossfades, which are dynamically computed by WaveLab
Pro, are rendered to small audio files while preserving the exact audio effect.
Skip Muted Clips
If this option is activated, muted clips are not included in the AES-31 file.
After Exporting, Import File
If this option is activated, the exported file is immediately imported. This lets you
check the export result.
Importing AES-31 Files
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > Import.
2.
Click AES-31.
3.
In the file browser, select the AES-31 file that you want to import, and click Import.
4.
In the AES-31 Import Options dialog, edit the settings and click OK.
RESULT
The imported AES-31 file opens as a new, untitled audio montage that contains all the audio
tracks that are saved in the AES-31 file.
AES-31 Import Options Dialog
●
To open the AES-31 Import Options dialog, select File > Import and select AES-31. Then
select the AES-31 file and click Import.
Use Linear Fade Files, If Available (Otherwise, Create Dynamic Fades)
If this option is activated, the available audio files for linear fades are used. If no files
are available, dynamic fades are created.
Use Curved Fade Files, If Available (Otherwise, Create Dynamic Fades)
If this option is activated, the available audio files for complex fades are used. If no
files are available, dynamic fades are created.
Importing AES-31 Files Created in Nuendo
By importing an AES-31 file, you can import a project that was created in Steinberg’s Nuendo into
WaveLab Pro, for example.
In this case, it is possible to add specific codes to the marker names in Nuendo to facilitate their
conversion into WaveLab Pro-specific markers. For example, if an AES-31 file that was exported in
Nuendo is imported into WaveLab Pro, the markers that it contains are interpreted as WaveLab
Pro markers upon import.
For the CD track markers, you can use the following codes:
Marker Type
Marker Code
Example Marker Name
CD track start
[t-start]
“So it begins [t-start]”
321
Audio Montage
AES-31 Files Export and Import Marker Type
Marker Code
Example Marker Name
CD track end
[t-end]
“The end [t-end] of the road”
CD track splice
[t-splice]
Intermission [t-splice]
CD track index
[t-index]
[t-index] Hello
●
In Nuendo, a marker track must be created for the specific markers.
●
When importing AES-31 projects that contain specific markers, the marker codes are not
displayed in WaveLab Pro.
322
Recording
You can record audio in the Audio Editor and in the Audio Montage window.
Setting Up the Recording Dialog
Before you start recording, set up the Recording dialog.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Editor or the Audio Montage window, click the Record button, or press * on
the numeric key pad.
2.
In the File to Create section, open the pop-up menu, and select whether you want to
record a named file or a temporary file.
3.
In the File to Create section, select a file name and the location where you want to save
your file.
4.
Select the audio format by doing one of the following:
5.
●
Click the down arrow button to select a preset audio format.
●
Click the audio format text to open the Audio File Format dialog, select the format,
and click OK.
Select whether you want to record to an audio file or an audio montage track, by selecting
one of the following options:
●
Create New Audio File Window
●
Add to Active Audio File
●
Add to Selected Track of Montage
6.
Select an Input mode, depending on whether you want to record the audio card input or
the playback output of the Master Section.
7.
Select Set Input, activate the channels that you want to record to, and click OK.
For each of the activated recording channels, a meter is displayed in the Recording dialog.
8.
Select whether you want the Level or the Spectrum display.
9.
Optional: Make further settings in the Options section, and on the Options and Values
tabs.
10.
Click Record to start recording.
If you have selected one of the Auto-start options, the recording goes into Pause mode
until the specified Auto-start criteria are met.
The background of the Recording dialog turns red to indicate that you are recording.
11.
Optional: Pause the recording by clicking the Pause button.
12.
Optional: Drop markers during recording by clicking the drop marker buttons.
13.
When you have finished recording, click Stop.
14.
Optional: If you want to record another take, click Record again.
323
Recording
Dropping Markers During Recording Dropping Markers During Recording
When you are recording, you can click the marker buttons to add markers to the recorded file.
PROCEDURE
1.
Open the Recording dialog.
2.
Optional: If you want to name the markers that you drop rather than using generic
markers, do the following:
●
Select the Options tab and activate Confirm Name of Markers to Drop.
●
On the Method tab, enter the name in the Next Marker Name field.
3.
Make your settings and start recording.
4.
Select the type of marker that you want to drop.
●
To drop a numbered generic marker, click the yellow marker button, or press Ctrl/
Cmd-M.
●
To drop numbered generic region start and end markers, click the white buttons, or
press Ctrl/Cmd-L/Ctrl/Cmd-R.
When you chose to confirm marker names to drop, a dialog opens each time that you drop
a marker. In this dialog, you can enter a name and specify an offset, which allows you to
place a marker at a specific time before you triggered the command.
RESULT
A marker is dropped each time that you click the marker button.
NOTE
If you insert two or more region start markers in a row with no region end markers in between,
only the last of these start markers is kept. The same applies for region end markers.
Recording Dialog
In this dialog, you can make recording settings and start recording an audio file.
●
To open the Recording dialog, open the Audio Editor or the Audio Montage window, and
on the transport bar, click Record.
Main Buttons
Record
Starts recording. Depending on the recording options, the Pause mode is activated.
Split Now
Opens the audio already recorded in a new window while recording continues. By
clicking this button, you can decide when the file is split. The button is activated if
you are recording a named file, you are not pausing, and Split Mode is not activated.
324
Recording
Recording Dialog Pause
Pauses recording.
Stop
Stops recording.
Discard
Stops recording and deletes anything recorded so far.
Method Tab
On this tab, you can define options for starting, stopping, and pausing the recording
automatically. You can select an input device and choose to start a recording at a specific time or
stop if after a specific duration.
File to Create
Specify whether you want to record a temporary file to be saved later, or record to a
file with a specific name and location.
Auto Number From
If this option is activated and you record multiple files, increasing numbers are
added to the file names of the files.
Name
The name of the file to be written, without the path. When typing, all files in the
selected folder that start with the same letters are displayed. To display all files in the
selected folder, click the list icon.
Location
Specifies the folder where you want to save the recording.
Audio File Format
Opens the Audio File Format dialog, where you can specify the file format.
Location of the Recording
Specifies where the audio is recorded:
●
If Create New Audio File Window is selected, the audio is recorded in a new
audio file window.
●
If Add to Active Audio File is selected, the audio is recorded in the active
audio file window at the edit cursor position (if no audio file window exists, a
new one is created).
●
If Add to Selected Track of Montage is selected, the audio is recorded in an
existing audio montage at the edit cursor position (if no audio montage exists,
a new one is created).
325
Recording
Recording Dialog Input
Specify if you want to record the audio device input or the audio output from the
Master Section.
Set Input
If you are using an ASIO driver, this button opens the Recording Channels dialog,
where you can activate channels for recording. Up to 8 input channels can be used
simultaneously. When additional inputs are selected, the number of meters in the
dialog is automatically updated.
Auto-Start if Sound Detected
If this option is activated, recording starts when the audio input level exceeds the
threshold level specified on the Values tab.
Auto-Start at given Time
If this option is activated, recording starts at a specified time. Specify the time on the
Values tab.
Auto-Stop after given Duration
If this option is activated, recording stops automatically after the duration specified
on the Values tab.
Auto-Stop if Silence
If this option is activated, recording automatically stops when the audio input level
drops below a specified threshold level and stays there for a specific amount of time.
Specify the level and the duration on the Values tab.
Auto-Pause if Silence
If this option is activated, recording automatically pauses when the audio input level
drops below a specified threshold level and stays there for a specific amount of time.
Specify the level and the duration on the Values tab.
Auto-Create Markers at Pause Point
If this option is activated, a generic marker is created each time you click Pause
during recording.
Auto-Create Markers at Silence Points
If this option is activated, a generic marker is created each time the audio input level
drops below a specified threshold level and stays there for a specific amount of time.
Specify the level and the duration on the Values tab.
Split Mode
If this option is activated, the recording is split into several audio files. The files can
be split either by size, that is, after a specific amount of MB, or by duration, that is,
after a specific amount of time. Split Mode is useful if you make long continuous
audio recordings, such as live recordings.
●
This option is only available when Named File is selected.
326
Recording
Recording Dialog ●
Split files are contiguous, that is, there are not gaps between the files.
●
Selecting Split Mode automatically activates the Auto Number option for
audio file names.
NOTE
It is recommended to save each Split Mode recording in an empty folder. This
prevents the Auto Number option from creating files with names that already exist
in this location.
Options Tab
On this tab, you can make additional settings for the recording process.
Activate Monitoring When Opening Record Window
If this option is activated, the meters are activated when the Recording dialog opens.
If this option is deactivated, the meters and the audio thru are displayed when
pressing Record or activating Monitor.
Deactivate Monitoring When Ending Recording
If this option is activated, the meters and the audio thru are deactivated when
recording ends. This releases the audio device input.
Stop Playback When Monitoring or Recording
If this option is activated, playback stops before monitoring or recording starts.
Show Discard Button
Determines whether the Discard button is visible or hidden.
Confirm when Discarding Recording
If this option is activated, you are asked to confirm before discarding a recording.
Confirm when Stopping Recording
If this option is activated, you are asked to confirm before stopping a recording.
Confirm Name of Markers to Drop
If this option is activated, you are asked to enter a name for the last dropped marker.
Open Audio File in WaveLab Pro after Recording
If this option is activated, the audio files are opened in WaveLab Pro after recording.
Add Markers when Inserting Recording in Audio File
If this option is activated and a recording is inserted into an audio file, markers are
added encompassing the new samples.
After Recording, Move Edit Cursor at the End
If this option is activated, the edit cursor is moved to the end of the recording.
327
Recording
Recording Dialog Values Tab
On this tab, you can define values for the various recording options.
Auto-Start on Sound – Threshold (RMS)
Specify the sound level that will trigger recording.
Auto-Start on Sound – Record Previous Samples
Allows you to include a short section of audio before the start point, to capture
attacks, for example. It is only relevant if Auto-Start if Sound Detected is activated.
Silence Detection – Threshold (RMS)/Silence Duration Required
The threshold value used for the options Auto-Stop if Silence and Auto-Create
Markers at Silence Points. It is used in conjunction with the Silence Duration
Required setting, so that recording is stopped or a marker is added if the input level
stays below the threshold value for the specified duration.
Recording Programming – Start
Determines the time at which recording starts when the option Auto-Start at
Specific Time is activated.
Recording Programming – On Tomorrow
If this option is activated, you can specify a time on the next day (starting midnight).
Recording Programming – Duration
Determines the length of the recording if Auto-Stop after Specific Duration is
activated.
Split Argument – File Size
If this option is activated, a new file is created when the recorded file reaches the size
specified in the corresponding value field.
Split Argument – File Duration
If this option is activated, a new file is created when the recorded file reaches the
length specified in the corresponding value field.
Pause Memory
This is a safety buffer when you are using the Pause button. When you resume
recording, this buffer is used to restore the last short section of audio before you
deactivated the Pause button. This way, you can resume recording even if you
deactivated the Pause button a bit too late.
328
Recording
Recording Dialog Meter Display
Level/Spectrum
Specifies which meter to display.
Settings
Opens the Level/Pan Meter Settings dialog, where you can customize the meter
settings.
Reset
Resets the peak values.
Monitor
If this option is activated, the audio input is also sent to the output ports (not
available if Windows MME drivers are used).
Mix with Playback
If this option is activated and the same audio ports are selected for monitoring and
for playback (in the VST Audio Connections tab), the signals are mixed. If this is not
activated, the monitoring signal has priority.
This allows you to toggle between the auditioning of the recorded signal and the
playback signal, and to have full control over the monitor outputs.
Marker
Allows you to set markers during the recording.
Next Marker Name
Edit the name of the next marker to insert.
Solo
Reduces/Increases the size of the window and hides/shows all other WaveLab Pro
windows.
Meter Display
In the lower part of the Recording dialog, you find a meter display. This is useful for checking the
input level and the frequency spectrum of the input signal.
You can activate the meters by activating the Monitor checkbox.This is done automatically if
Activate Monitoring when Opening Record Window is activated on the Options tab in the
Recording dialog.
To reset the meters, click the Reset button.
Level Meter
In the Level Meter, horizontal bars show the peak level (outer bars) and average loudness (VU,
inner bars) of each channel. Values are also shown numerically. When you click the Settings
button, the Level/Pan Meter Settings dialog opens.
329
Recording
Recording in the Audio Montage Window Spectrometer
The Spectrometer shows a bar diagram, providing a continuous graphical representation of the
frequency spectrum. From the Settings pop-up menu you can choose whether to restrict to high
audio levels, or to include medium or low audio levels.
Disk Capacity Indicator
This indicator at the bottom of the Recording dialog indicates the approximate amount of
available disk space on the hard disk specified in the File to Create section, or the hard disk that
you have selected for temporary files.
NOTE
When there is less than 30 seconds of available hard disk space left, the disk capacity indication is
displayed in red.
Recording in the Audio Montage Window
You can record audio as clips in the audio montage.
Recording from the Cursor Position
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Montage window, click at the position where you want the recorded clip to
start.
2.
To the left of the track, open the Track pop-up menu.
3.
Select Record at Cursor.
4.
In the Recording dialog, make your settings.
5.
Click Record.
Recording During Playback
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Montage window, start playback.
2.
Select Track > Record at Cursor.
3.
In the Recording dialog, make your settings.
4.
Click Record.
NOTE
If you first go into Pause mode and then activate recording, you get a pre-roll time
according to the pause buffer, allowing you to capture the audio just before you start
recording.
Playing Back During Recording
When you record in a multitrack environment, it is often necessary to have the existing track play
back during recording, performing an overdub.
For this to be possible in the audio montage, Stop Playback when Monitoring or Recording
must be deactivated on the Options tab of the Recording dialog.
330
Master Section
The Master Section is the final block in the signal path before the audio is sent to the audio
hardware, to an audio file, or to the audio meters. This is where you adjust the master levels, add
effects, resample, and apply dithering.
The settings and effects in the Master Section are taken into account in the following cases:
●
When playing back an audio file in the wave window.
●
When playing back an audio montage.
Note that the Master Section effects are global for all clips and tracks in an audio
montage.
●
When using the Render function.
●
When using the Audio Input plug-in.
●
When writing a CD from an audio montage.
Bypassing the Master Section
By default, the Master Section is active. You can bypass it for each file individually or globally. If
the Master Section is bypassed, only the Playback Processing pane of the Master Section is
active during playback.
●
To bypass the Master Section for individual audio files or audio montages, activate the
Bypass Master Section button at the bottom of the wave/montage window.
●
To bypass the Master Section globally, activate the Bypass Master Section button at the
top left of the Master Section. All other Master Section panes are bypassed. However,
rendering to file still takes into account all plug-ins.
Master Section Window
In this window, you can apply effect plug-ins, adjust the master level, apply dithering, and render
the audio file or audio montage.
●
To open the Master Section window, select Tool Windows > Master Section.
331
Master Section
Master Section Window The Master Section consists of the following panes:
●
Effects
●
Resampling
●
Master Level
●
Final Effects/Dithering
●
Playback Processing
●
Speaker Configuration
Signal Path
The panes in the Master Section window correspond to the processing blocks of the Master
Section.
The signal passes through these blocks from top to bottom:
1
Audio from WaveLab Pro
2
Effects
Reordering the effect slots affects the signal path.
3
Resampling
4
Master Level
332
Master Section
Master Section Window The Master Section meters monitor the signal between the Master Level pane and the
Playback Processing pane.
5
Final Effects/Dithering
6
Playback Processing
The meters in the Meter windows monitor the signal between the Playback Processing
pane and the Speaker Configuration pane.
7
Speaker Configuration
8
Audio hardware or file on disk
In the Master Section, the signal passes all plug-ins, even if some plug-ins are soloed. However,
the sound is not affected by this because the muted plug-ins are bypassed from the playback
process stream.
Other meters in WaveLab Pro, for example, Oscilloscope or Wavescope, monitor the signal
directly after the Final Effects/Dithering pane, by default. You can also monitor the signal
directly after a particular slot if you activate Monitoring Point for a slot.
Master Section Tools
The tools and options at the top of the Master Section window allow you to make various
settings before rendering the file, make bypass settings, and decide whether the playback signal
passes the Master Section.
Bypass Master Section
If this option is activated, only the Playback Processing pane of the Master Section
is active during playback. All other Master Section panes are bypassed. However,
rendering to file still takes into account all plug-ins.
Presets
Lets you save and recall Master Section presets. The Presets menu offers additional
options to save and load default banks and effects.
Smart Bypass
Opens the Smart Bypass dialog, where you can make special bypass settings.
Reset Master Section
Removes all active effects from the slots and sets the master output to 0 dB.
Settings
Opens the Settings pop-up menu, where you can make settings for the Master
Section.
Settings Pop-up Menu
Hide Plug-in Windows when Master Section is not Visible
If this option is activated, plug-in windows are hidden when the Master Section is
not visible.
Show Plug-in Controls in the Plug-in Window
If this option is activated, the plug-in controls are displayed in plug-in windows.
Use Plug-in Chain Window
Shows all open plug-ins in the plug-in window as tabs, which allows you to quickly
switch between the plug-ins.
333
Master Section
Master Section Window Plug-in Windows Move with Master Section
If this option is activated, the plug-in windows are also moved when you move the
floating Master Section.
Restore Last Configuration at Next Start-Up
If this option is activated, the plug-in configuration and fader positions in the Master
Section are restored at the next WaveLab Pro start.
Section Visibility
Allows you to show or hide the Master Section sections.
Monitor 16 bit Dithering
Allows you to hear what the effect of the dither plug-in sounds like during playback.
You can try different dither plug-ins, to find out which one has the best dither effect
on the audio.
Rearrange
Rearranges the Master Section according to the sample rate and channel
configuration of the active audio file. The internal bus of the Master Section and any
active plug-ins are configured accordingly.
This operation is performed automatically before playback or rendering. It is
sometimes helpful to manually rearrange the Master Section, because some
plug-ins do not accept a mono or stereo signal as input, or a given sample rate. In
that case, clicking the button informs you about any problems, before playback or
rendering.
This operation has no effect if playback is already in progress or if there is no active
audio file.
RELATED LINKS
Final Effects/Dithering Pane on page 342
Effects Pane
This pane in the Master Section allows you to add up to 12 effect plug-ins in series, and manage
them.
Fold/Unfold Pane
Expands or collapses the pane.
Bypass All Effects
Bypasses any effect processing during playback and optionally when rendering.
Add Effect
Allows you to add an effect to an empty effect slot.
Channel Processing
Allows you to specify how a VST plug-in processes the stereo stream. You can
process all channels or only the left, right, mid, or side channel. This allows any VST
plug-in to become mid/side capable.
334
Master Section
Master Section Window Monitoring Point
Lets other meters in WaveLab Pro, for example, Oscilloscope or Wavescope,
monitor the signal directly after this plug-in.
If no monitoring point is specified, the monitoring point is after the Final Effects/
Dithering section and before the Playback Processing section.
The Master Level meter of the Master Section always monitors the level after the
faders.
Effect plug-in name
Once you have added a plug-in to a slot, you can click the plug-in name to open and
close the corresponding plug-in window.
Presets pop-up menu
Lets you save and recall preset settings. The Presets pop-up menu offers additional
options to save and load default banks and effects.
Effect Options pop-up menu
Allows you to load another effect to the effect slot. Furthermore, the following
options are available:
●
Remove Plug-in removes the effect from the slot.
●
Shift All Plug-ins Down/Shift All Plug-ins Up allows you to move the effects
to another position.
●
If Active is activated, the effect is active. If Active is deactivated, the effect is
excluded from playback and rendering.
●
If Lock is activated, the effect slot is locked. The plug-in in the slot remains as
is when a Master Section preset is loaded, or when Reset Master Section is
used.
Solo (Bypass)
Soloes the plug-in.
Bypass Processing
Bypasses the plug-in during playback and optionally during rendering. The signal is
still processed by the plug-in, but is not injected in the audible stream.
Supported Effect Plug-in Formats
WaveLab Pro supports WaveLab Pro-specific plug-ins, VST 2 plug-ins, and VST 3 plug-ins.
WaveLab Pro-specific Plug-ins
Some specific plug-ins are included in WaveLab Pro, for example, the Audio Input and External
Gear plug-ins. These are only available if you are using an ASIO driver.
VST Plug-ins
Steinberg’s VST plug-in format is supported by a lot of programs and plug-in manufacturers.
You find a number of VST plug-ins included with WaveLab Pro. Other plug-ins can be purchased
separately from Steinberg or other manufacturers.
Setting Up Effects
The number of available effects depends on the number and format of the plug-ins that you have
installed.
●
To select an effect plug-in for a slot, click the slot, and select an effect from the pop-up
menu. When you have selected an effect, it is automatically activated, and its control panel
opens.
335
Master Section
Master Section Window ●
To turn off an effect, right-click the slot, and deactivate Active. To activate the effect,
activate Active again.
●
To remove an effect plug-in, right-click the slot and select Remove Plug-in from the popup menu.
●
To show/hide a plug-in window, click the effect slot.
●
To solo an effect, click its Solo (Bypass) button. This allows you to check the sound of that
effect only. You can also bypass effects via their control panels.
●
To change the order of the slots, that is, the order in which the signal passes through the
effects, click a slot, and drag it to a new position.
Master Section Plug-in Window
In the plug-in windows of the Master Section, you can make settings for a Master Section effect
plug-in.
●
To show a plug-in window, click the effect slot.
Plug-in Chain
If Use Plug-in Chain Window is activated on the Settings pop-up menu of the
Master Section, the effects of the active audio file are displayed in a plug-in chain at
the top of the plug-in window.
You can right-click a plug-in tab or an empty tab to select a new plug-in for the slot.
Bypass Processing
If this option is activated, this plug-in is bypassed during playback, and optionally for
a rendering operation. To deactivate an effect when rendering, right-click an effect
slot, and deactivate Active in the Effects pane of the Master Section.
Bypass Modes
Right-click Bypass Processing to open the Bypass Modes pop-up menu. Here, you
can select Bypass Effect or Bypass Source Signal.
Channel Processing
Allows you to specify how a VST plug-in processes the stereo stream. You can
process all channels or only the left, right, mid, or side channel. This allows any VST
plug-in to become mid/side capable.
Solo (Bypass)
Soloes the plug-in.
Render in Place
Processes the audio in place. Bypassed plug-ins are excluded and the rendered audio
is crossfaded at boundaries.
Monitoring Point
Lets other meters in WaveLab Pro, for example, Oscilloscope or Wavescope,
monitor the signal directly after this plug-in.
If no monitoring point is specified, the monitoring point is after the Final Effects/
Dithering section and before the Playback Processing section.
336
Master Section
Master Section Window The Master Level meter of the Master Section always monitors the level after the
faders.
Switch Effect On/Off
If you deactivate a plug-in, it is excluded from both playback and rendering.
Presets
Opens a menu to save/load presets for this plug-in.
Effect Plug-in Presets
With WaveLab Pro comes a number of factory presets for the included effect plug-ins. You can
use them as they are or as a starting point for your own settings.
Third-party plug-ins can provide their own factory presets. To access the presets for an effect,
click the Presets button in its control panel window or the Presets button for its effect slot. The
available functions depend on the type of plug-in.
Presets for VST 2 Plug-ins
VST 2 plug-ins have their own preset handling.
When you click the Presets button for this type of effect, a pop-up menu with the following
options opens:
Load/Save Bank
Loads and saves complete sets of presets. The file format is compatible with Cubase.
Load/Save Default Bank
Loads the default set of presets or saves the current set of presets as the default
bank.
Load/Save Effect
Loads or saves a preset. This is also compatible with Cubase.
Edit Name of Current Program
Allows you to define a name for the preset.
Preset List
Allows you to select one of the loaded presets.
Channel Processing
In the Master Section, in plug-in windows, and in the Effects window, you can specify for each
plug-in which channels to process. This allows you to use each plug-in in mid/side mode, for
example.
You can process all channels or only the left, right, mid, or side channel. When you select one
channel, the other channel is bypassed.
To use a different plug-ins for each channel, use one effect slot for each channel.
Insert
Stereo
All channels are processed by the plug-in.
337
Master Section
Master Section Window Left
Only the left channel is processed by the plug-in.
Right
Only the right channel is processed by the plug-in.
Mid
Only the mid channel is processed by the plug-in.
Side
Only the side channel is processed by the plug-in.
Send (Return to Stereo)
Left
Only the left channel of the plug-in is processed. The left wet signal of the plug-in is
mixed to the left/right dry signal.
Right
Only the right channel of the plug-in is processed. The right wet signal of the plug-in
is mixed to the left/right dry signal.
Mid
Only the mid channel of the plug-in is processed. The mid wet signal of the plug-in is
mixed to the mid/side dry signal.
Side
Only the side channel of the plug-in is processed. The side wet signal of the plug-in is
mixed to the mid/side dry signal.
Setting Up the Channel Processing
You can set up which channel to process in the Master Section, in plug-in windows, and in the
Effects window.
Channel Processing in the Master Section
In the Master Section, on the Effects pane, click Channel Processing, and select which channel
you want to process.
Channel Processing in Plug-in Windows
In a plug-in window, click Channel Processing and select which channel you want to process.
338
Master Section
Master Section Window Channel Processing in the Effects Window
In the Effects window, click in the Channel Processing column for a plug-in and select which
channel you want to process.
Resampling Pane
This pane in the Master Section allows you to resample the signal. With the Resampling plug-in,
you can check the peaks before the master gain and meters, and before limiting and dithering.
You can select one of the common sample rate values or create custom sample rate values via
the Customize Sample Rate Menu dialog.
Fold/Unfold Pane
Expands or collapses the pane.
Off
Deactivates the resampling effect.
Use Preferred Sample Rate
If this option is activated, resampling matches the sample rate that is specified as the
preferred sample rate on the Audio Connections tab.
NOTE
The sample rate is used for playback only. This allows you to play back sample rates
that your audio device does not support.
339
Master Section
Master Section Window Monitoring Point
Lets other meters in WaveLab Pro, for example, Oscilloscope or Wavescope,
monitor the signal directly after this plug-in.
If no monitoring point is specified, the monitoring point is after the Final Effects/
Dithering section and before the Playback Processing section.
The Master Level meter of the Master Section always monitors the level after the
faders.
Sample Rate menu
Allows you to select a sample rate.
You can select one of the common sample rates or click Customize to open the
Customize Sample Rate Menu dialog, where you can specify custom sample rates.
The selected sample rate is used for playback and rendering.
RELATED LINKS
Audio Connections Tab on page 11
Customize Sample Rate Menu on page 340
Customize Sample Rate Menu
The Customize Sample Rate Menu dialog allows you to customize the available sample rate
values for the sample rate pop-up menu of the Resampling pane. You can add common sample
rate values to the menu or create custom sample rates.
●
To open the Customize Sample Rate Menu dialog, open the Resampling pane in the
Master Section window, click the sample rate, and select Customize.
Add Common Sample Rate to Menu
Adds the selected sample rate to the sample rate pop-up menu.
Remove Sample Rate from Menu
Removes the selected sample rate from the sample rate pop-up menu.
Add Custom Sample Rate
Opens the Custom Sample Rate dialog, where you can specify custom sample rate
values.
340
Master Section
Master Section Window Master Level Pane
This pane in the Master Section allows you to control the master level of the active audio file.
Faders
The faders in the Master Level pane govern the final output level. Use the faders to optimize the
level of the signal that is sent to the audio hardware.
NOTE
It is important to avoid clipping, especially when mastering. Clipping is indicated by the clip
indicators of the Master Section.
●
To lock the faders, activate Lock Faders below the fader section.
Locked faders cannot be changed with the mouse. Other editing methods, for example via
remote control or shortcut, are still possible.
Meters
The Master Section meters show the signal level of the signal before dithering or any other
plug-in that you have applied post-master fader.
Use these meters to get an overview of the signal levels. The numeric fields above the faders
show the peak levels for each channel. The peak indicators turn red whenever the signal clips. If
this happens, you should do the following:
●
Lower the faders.
●
Right-click the clip indicators and select Reset Peaks to reset the clip indicators.
●
Play back the section again until no clipping occurs.
NOTE
For critical level metering, we recommend using the Level Meter. It is more precise, and it is
applied after the whole Master Section (after dithering) and therefore shows the actual signal
level that is sent to the audio hardware.
Mixing Stereo Channels into Mono Channels and Multichannel into Stereo
The options on the Audio Channel Monitoring pop-up menu allow you to transform the left
and right channels of a stereo track into two mono channels or surround channels to stereo
channels. The output level is automatically reduced by -6 dB to avoid clipping. This is useful for
checking the mono compatibility of stereo mixes or stereo compatibility of surround mixes. You
can also render the channels into a mono file.
341
Master Section
Master Section Window Default Channels
The default channels.
Mix to Mono
Mixes the stereo channels into mono channels.
Mix to Mono (L-R)
Mixes the stereo channels into mono channels and removes the right channel from
the left channel. If both channels are the same, you hear silence. This allows you to
check if the audio is true mono.
Left Channel Only
Mixes the left stereo channel into two mono channels.
Right Channel Only
Mixes the right stereo channel into two mono channels.
Mid Channel Only
Mixes the mid stereo channel into two mono channels.
Side Channel Only
Mixes the side stereo channel into two mono channels.
Mix to Stereo
If you have a surround setup with more than two channels, you can mix the
surround channels to stereo.
NOTE
If another option than Default Channels is selected on the Audio Channel Monitoring pop-up
menu, the indicator for the Master Level pane is lit, even if the master level is not adjusted. This
helps you avoid accidentally using audio channel monitoring.
Unlink Faders
Determines whether you can adjust the faders individually or together.
If Unlink Faders is deactivated, moving one fader also moves the other by the same amount.
Activating Unlink Faders allows you to correct improper stereo balancing by adjusting the level
of the channels individually.
If you offset the faders with Unlink Faders activated and then deactivate Unlink Faders, you can
adjust the overall level without changing the level offset between the channels.
Fader offsets are not preserved at the end of the range of movement or once the mouse button
is released.
True Peak Analyzer Button
If True Peak Analyzer is activated, the analog reconstructed peaks (true peaks) are displayed
in the Master Level meter. If this button is deactivated, the sample values (digital peaks) are
displayed.
Final Effects/Dithering Pane
This pane in the Master Section allows you to add final effects and dithering to the signal before
it is sent to the audio hardware or saved as a file on disk.
342
Master Section
Master Section Window Fold/Unfold Pane
Expands or collapses the pane.
Bypass All Effects
Bypasses the effects in the Final Effects/Dithering pane.
Monitoring Point
Lets other meters in WaveLab Pro, for example, Oscilloscope or Wavescope,
monitor the signal directly after this plug-in.
If no monitoring point is specified, the monitoring point is after the Final Effects/
Dithering section and before the Playback Processing section.
The Master Level meter of the Master Section always monitors the level after the
faders.
Presets pop-up menu
Lets you save and recall preset settings. The Presets pop-up menu offers additional
options to save and load default banks and effects.
Effect Options pop-up menu
Allows you to load another effect to the effect slot. Furthermore, the following
options are available:
●
Remove Plug-in removes the effect from the slot.
●
Shift All Plug-ins Down/Shift All Plug-ins Up allows you to move the effects
to another position.
●
If Active is activated, the effect is active. If Active is deactivated, the effect is
excluded from playback and rendering.
●
If Lock is activated, the effect slot is locked. The plug-in in the slot remains as
is when a Master Section preset is loaded, or when Reset Master Section is
used.
Bypass Processing
Bypasses the plug-in during playback and optionally during rendering. The signal is
still processed by the plug-in, but is not injected in the audible stream.
Dithering
Dithering is the technique of adding small quantities of noise to a signal to reduce the audibility
of low level distortion in a digital recording. A small amount of random noise is added to the
analog signal before the sampling stage, reducing the effect of quantization errors.
By adding a special kind of noise at an extremely low level, the quantization errors are
minimized. The added noise can be perceived as a very low-level quiescent hiss added to
the recording. However, this is hardly noticeable and preferred to the distortion that occurs
otherwise. The Noise Shaping options allow you to filter this noise to a frequency area less
sensitive to the human ear.
In WaveLab Pro, dithering is applied when reducing the number of bits in a recording, for
example, when moving from 24 to 16 bits, and when applying processing. You can choose
between WaveLab Pro’s internal dithering algorithm, Izotope’s MBIT+ algorithm, or any external
dithering plug-in.
NOTE
Dithering should always be applied after the output bus fader stage, and after any kind of audio
process.
343
Master Section
Master Section Window Dithering Plug-ins
WaveLab Pro comes with two dithering plug-ins: Internal dithering and the MBIT+ dithering.
However, you can also add other dithering plug-ins.
●
To select and activate a dithering plug-in in the Master Section, click the plug-in slot in the
Final Effects/Dithering pane, and select one of the options from the pop-up menu.
●
To deactivate the dithering plug-in, open the Final Effects/Dithering pop-up menu, and
select Remove Plug-in.
Adding Other Plug-ins to the Final Effects/Dithering Pane
If you want to use another dithering plug-in than the internal or UV22HR dithering, you can add
it to the Final Effects/Dithering pane.
NOTE
The meters in the Master Section monitor the signal before the Final Effects/Dithering
pane. To avoid clipping, check the level/pan meter and adjust the output level of the plug-in, if
available.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > Preferences > Plug-ins.
2.
Select the Organize tab.
3.
Locate the plug-in that you want to add to the Final Effects/Dithering pane in the list, and
activate the checkbox in the Final column for the plug-in.
RESULT
The plug-in is available via the pop-up menu in the Final Effects/Dithering pane, and can be
inserted after the Master Level faders. The plug-in is still available for selection as a regular
pre-master effect if the corresponding entry in the Effect column in the Plug-ins Preferences is
activated.
When to Apply Dithering
The basic rule is that you should apply dithering when converting an audio file to a lower
resolution. For example, preparing a 24-bit file for mastering to CD, that uses 16-bit format.
However, even if you are playing back or rendering a 16-bit or 24-bit file to the same resolution,
you need to apply dithering if you are using any real-time processing in WaveLab Pro. The
reason for this is that WaveLab Pro works with an internal resolution of 32 bit (floating point)
for supreme audio quality. This means that as soon as you perform any kind of processing, the
audio data is treated at this high resolution instead of the original 16 bit or 24 bit, thus making
dithering necessary.
Examples of real-time processing include level adjustments, effects, mixing of two or more clips
in an audio montage, etc. The only time when a 16-bit file is played back at 16-bit resolution is
if you play it without any fades or effects, and with the Master Level faders set to 0.00 (no level
adjustment – master level indicator turned off).
NOTE
To check whether you need to apply dithering, use the Bit Meter to see the actual resolution of
your audio signals.
RELATED LINKS
Bit Meter on page 395
344
Master Section
Master Section Window Testing the Quality of the Dithering Plug-ins
In the Master Section, you can compare the quality of different dithering plug-ins, by making
the quantization noise and the dithering signal more audible.
●
To activate this option, click Settings at the top of the Master Section, and activate
Monitor 16 Bit Dithering.
Now, when you activate a dither plug-in and play back an audio section, you can hear what the
effect of the dither plug-in sounds like. You can try out different dithering plug-ins, to find out
which one has the best effect on the audio.
IMPORTANT
Make sure to deactivate Monitor 16 Bit Dithering when you are done testing the dithering
quality.
NOTE
Only dither to 16 bit, otherwise the result does not have any meaning.
Playback Processing Pane
This pane in the Master Section contains the Encoder Checker that allows you to compare
audio encoders. You can also add your own plug-ins to the Playback Processing slots.
NOTE
The plug-ins in the Playback Processing pane are only part of the playback processing. It is not
applied when rendering files or CDs.
Fold/Unfold Pane
Expands or collapses the pane.
Bypass All Effects
Bypasses the effects in the Playback Processing pane.
Monitoring Point
Lets other meters in WaveLab Pro, for example, Oscilloscope or Wavescope,
monitor the signal directly after this plug-in.
If no monitoring point is specified, the monitoring point is after the Final Effects/
Dithering section and before the Playback Processing section.
The Master Level meter of the Master Section always monitors the level after the
faders.
Effect Options pop-up menu
Allows you to add an effect to the effect slot. You can load your own plug-ins or use
the included Encoder Checker. Furthermore, the following options are available:
●
Remove Plug-in removes the effect from the slot.
●
Shift All Plug-ins Down/Shift All Plug-ins Up allows you to move the effects
to another position.
●
If Active is activated, the effect is active. If Active is deactivated, the effect is
excluded from playback and rendering.
345
Master Section
Master Section Window ●
If Lock is activated, the effect slot is locked. The plug-in in the slot remains as
is when a Master Section preset is loaded, or when Reset Master Section is
used.
Presets pop-up menu
Lets you save and recall preset settings. The Presets pop-up menu offers additional
options to save and load default banks and effects.
Bypass Processing
Bypasses the plug-in during playback and optionally during rendering. The signal is
still processed by the plug-in, but is not injected in the audible stream.
RELATED LINKS
Plug-ins Preferences on page 558
Encoder Checker
The Encoder Checker plug-in allows you to compare the quality between different audio
encoders. It is applied in the Playback Processing pane of the Master Section.
With the Encoder Checker you can find the best settings for your encoders and test the effect
of other plug-ins on the compression. The Encoder Checker is only used for playback and is
bypassed during audio file rendering.
IMPORTANT
The Encoder Checker does not support multichannel audio montages.
NOTE
The more encoders are selected in the Encoder Checker dialog, the more CPU power is used.
Also, the more audio compression is applied to the audio file, the higher the latency. The latency
is determined by the encoder with the highest latency.
Checking the Quality of Encoded Audio Files
PROCEDURE
1.
Open the audio file that you want to check in different encoding qualities.
2.
In the Master Section, right-click the effect slot in the Playback Processing pane, and
select Steinberg > Encoder Checker.
3.
In the Encoder Checker, click in the first numbered field and select a factory preset or
select Edit to specify a custom audio file format.
4.
Optional: Specify more audio file formats.
5.
Play back the audio file.
6.
Click Original Sound and the number icons to compare the sound of the original audio
with the sound of the encoders.
If the Encoder Checker window is active, you can also press the 1, 2, and 3 keys on your
keyboard to switch between the encoders and click . to select the original sound.
NOTE
If you select or edit an encoder, the plug-in synchronizes the new encoder settings with
the other active encoders and the original sound. This can result in short audio artifacts.
346
Master Section
Master Section Window AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK
If you have found the best encoder, click Render to render the audio file to the selected audio file
format. You can also click Batch Processor to open the Batch Processor window with an audio
file format preset that corresponds to the selected encoder.
Checking the Quality of Encoded Audio Files Using the Blind Modes
To make sure that you only rely on your ears when checking the encoder quality, you can use the
Blind modes to compare the encoders without knowing which encoder is playing.
PROCEDURE
1.
Open the audio file that you want to check in different encoding qualities.
2.
In the Master Section, right-click the effect slot in the Playback Processing pane, and
select Steinberg > Encoder Checker.
3.
In the Encoder Checker, click in the first field and select a factory preset or select Edit to
specify a custom audio file format.
4.
Optional: Specify more audio file formats.
5.
Do one of the following:
●
To compare only the encoders, activate Blind (Encoders). For this function, at least 2
encoders must be selected.
●
To compare the encoders and the original sound, activate Blind (Encoders +
Original Sound).
6.
Play back the audio file.
7.
Use the up/down or left/right arrow keys to switch between the encoders.
8.
Use the + and - keys to rate the encoder that you are listening to.
9.
Deactivate Blind mode.
RESULT
The encoder that you have heard last is highlighted and you can see the ratings of the encoders.
AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK
If you have found the best encoder for your needs, click Render to render the audio file to the
selected audio file format.
Encoder Checker Dialog
In this dialog, you can compare the quality of different audio encoders.
●
To open the Encoder Checker dialog, right-click the effect slot in the Playback Processing
pane, and select Steinberg > Encoder Checker.
347
Master Section
Master Section Window Display
Displays the spectrum (FFT) of the original sound (green) and of the selected encoder
(red). This gives you a rough estimation of the effects that the encoder has on the
audio spectrum.
Switch indicator LED
In the Blind modes, this LED lights up each time that a new encoder is selected via
the arrow keys.
Blind (Encoders)
If this option is activated, the original sound is selected. When you use an arrow
key, a random encoder is used. You can use the arrow keys to switch between the
selected encoders without being able to see which encoder is selected.
You can use the + and - keys to rate the encoder that you are listening to. The rating
results are displayed when you deactivate Blind mode.
Blind (Encoders + Original Sound)
If this option is activated, a random encoder or the original sound is selected. You
can use the arrow keys to switch between the selected encoders and the original
sound without being able to see which one is selected.
You can use the + and - keys to rate the encoder that you are listening to. The rating
results are displayed when you deactivate Blind mode.
Freeze Display
If this option is activated, the FFT display freezes.
Original Sound
Lets you hear the original audio file during playback.
Presets
Lets you select different audio encoders and switch between them during playback.
Rating
Shows the number of plus and minus marks that were set during the Blind modes.
Compression
The real-time estimation of the audio compression ratio with a 16-bit file size as
reference.
348
Master Section
Rendering Latencies
The first latency value indicates how long you have to wait until you hear the new
encoder when you select another encoder. The second latency value indicates the
delay when switching between encoders.
Batch Processor
Opens the Batch Processor window with an audio file format preset that
corresponds to the audio file format that is being monitored.
Open Render Tab
Opens the Render tab with the selected Encoder Checker settings defined as the
output file format.
Speaker Configuration Pane
This pane of the Master Section allows you to select the speaker configurations. The speaker
configurations are set up in the VST Audio Connections.
Fold/Unfold Pane
Expands or collapses the pane.
Speaker Configuration
Lets you select eight different speaker configurations.
Audio Connections
Opens the Audio Connections, where you can set up the speakers for the speaker
configuration buttons.
Speaker Gain
Lets you edit the gain of the speaker configuration. Positive gains are indicated by a
red LED, and negative gains are indicated by an orange LED. When the gain is zero,
the LED is dark green (off). The gain is not rendered to file.
RELATED LINKS
Speaker Configuration on page 105
Audio Connections Tab on page 11
Rendering
By rendering the effects using the Render function in the Master Section, they become a
permanent part of a file. So instead of performing all processing in real-time during playback,
you can save the audio output to a file on disk.
You can render to a single file format or to multiple audio file formats.
Writing the output of the Master Section to a file on disk allows you to apply Master Section
processing to an audio file, or mix down an audio montage to an audio file. In case of a
multichannel audio montage, several files can be created, one for each channel in the selected
configuration.
There are several uses for rendering:
●
Mix down a complete audio montage to an audio file.
349
Master Section
Rendering ●
Process a file and save a file to a new audio file, including Master Section effects,
dithering, and other settings. You can choose the format of the new audio file, which
allows you to create an MP3 file and add effects at the same time, for example.
●
Process one or more regions of an audio file in place or to new files.
Multiple File Format Rendering
You can render to multiple audio file formats simultaneously. To do so, you must first create file
format presets for these formats.
You can also create multiple audio file format presets. These are a list of single file format
presets.
Rendering Files
You can render to a single file format or to multiple file formats.
PREREQUISITE
Set up your audio file or audio montage. If you want to render to multiple file formats, create the
necessary audio file format presets.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Master Section, make your settings.
2.
On the bottom of the Master Section, click Render.
3.
Do one of the following:
●
To render a single file, click Single.
●
To render multiple files, click Multi.
4.
Make your rendering settings.
5.
In the Result section, activate Named File.
6.
Click the Format field and do one of the following:
●
To render to one audio format, select Edit Single Format, and make your settings in
the Audio File Format dialog.
●
To render to multiple file formats, select Edit Multi Format, and in the Multi Audio
File Format dialog, click Add, and select the file format presets that you want to
render to.
7.
Click OK.
8.
When you have set up the rendering process, click Start.
RESULT
The file is rendered. You can see the progress in the Tasks window.
NOTE
Several rendering operations can be performed at the same time when using different files.
RELATED LINKS
Audio File Format Dialog on page 126
Multi Audio File Format Dialog on page 351
Creating Single Audio File Format Presets on page 351
Creating Multiple Audio File Format Presets on page 351
Tasks Window on page 364
350
Master Section
Rendering Creating Single Audio File Format Presets
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio File Format dialog, specify the audio file format.
2.
Open the Presets pop-up menu and select Save As.
3.
Enter a name for the preset and click Save.
RELATED LINKS
Audio File Format Dialog on page 126
Creating Multiple Audio File Format Presets
PREREQUISITE
Create a preset for each audio file format that you want to add to the multi format preset.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio File Format dialog, click Multiple File Format.
2.
Click Add and select the preset that you want to use.
3.
Add as many audio file format presets as you need.
4.
Optional: To make changes to an existing preset, right-click it and select Edit.
5.
Open the Presets pop-up menu and select Save As to save the multiple format as preset.
RELATED LINKS
Multi Audio File Format Dialog on page 351
Multi Audio File Format Dialog
In this dialog, you can select audio file format presets. These allow you to render an audio file or
an audio montage to multiple file formats.
●
To open the Multi Audio File Format dialog, select File > Export, and select Render >
Single or Render > Multi. Then click in the Format field and select Edit Multi Format.
You can also open the Multi Audio File Format dialog via the Format tab in the Batch
Processor window.
351
Master Section
Rendering Add
Opens a menu from which you can select a file format preset to add it to the preset
list.
Remove
Removes the selected preset from the list.
Preset list
Shows the selected audio file format presets, an optional subfolder in which the files
are rendered to, and an optional suffix for the rendered files. The Subfolder column
allows you to sort the output files to different subfolders. The Suffix column helps to
avoid name conflicts.
Multicore Rendering
If this option is activated, all audio files are generated at the same time, each with a
different CPU core, if possible. This increases the rendering speed.
NOTE
It is recommended to deactivate the Multicore Rendering option if a batch
processor is running that already uses multiple CPU cores.
Single File Format/Multiple File Format
Switches the view between the Audio File Format dialog and the Multi Audio File
Format dialog.
In-Place Rendering
In the Audio Editor, you can process a section of an audio file or the whole audio file. This is a
quick way to process several audio sections in an audio file, or test the effect of different plug-ins
on an audio file.
You can select the Render in Place function in the following places:
●
On the Render tab of the Audio Editor
●
In the Master Section, in the context menu of the Render button
●
In the command bar of a plug-in window
When selecting Render in Place via the Render tab, you can make additional render settings on
the Options pop-up menu. When selecting Render in Place via the Master Section or a plug-in
window, the following render settings are always active:
352
Master Section
Rendering ●
Fade in/out at boundaries
●
Exclude bypassed plug-ins
NOTE
Once an audio section has been processed, there is no automatic bypass of plug-ins or the
Master Section.
An example for using in-place rendering:
Let’s say that you are restoring a file and have 3 favorite plug-ins, for example, 3 DeClicker plugins. Now you want to use the one that gives the best results.
1
Load all 3 plug-ins in the Master Section.
2
Select a region, solo plug-in #1, and play the region.
3
Solo plug-in #2, and play the region.
4
Solo plug-in #3, and play the region.
5
Solo the plug-in that you think sounded the best, and click Render in Place, or press Alt-A.
RELATED LINKS
Render Tab on page 354
Rendering an Audio Selection In-Place
You can render the plug-ins of a section of an audio file or the whole audio file.
PREREQUISITE
In the Audio Editor, open the audio file that you want to render, and set up the Master Section.
PROCEDURE
1.
Optional: If you only want to use some plug-ins of the Master Section, solo the plug-ins
that you want to use.
2.
In the wave window, select the audio section that you want to process.
3.
Select the Render tab.
4.
In the Source section, open the Source pop-up menu and select Selected Audio Range.
5.
In the Result section, activate In Place.
6.
In the Options section, open the pop-up menu and make render settings.
7.
In the Render section, click Start.
RESULT
The audio section or the audio file is processed.
Using the Master Section Settings in a Batch Process
You can open a Batch Processor that uses the same plug-in setup as the one that is used in the
Master Section. This allows you to process more files in a batch, or add offline processors to the
audio processing chain.
PROCEDURE
1.
At the bottom of the Master Section, right-click Render.
2.
Select Create Batch Processor from Settings.
353
Master Section
Rendering RESULT
The Batch Processor window opens with the same plug-in setup as the one that was used in the
Master Section.
AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK
Add more files to the batch process and/or make additional configurations in the plug-in chain.
RELATED LINKS
Batch Processing on page 488
Render Tab
This tab allows you to select which parts of an audio file to render, into which format, and what
to do with the result.
●
To open the Render tab, click Render at the bottom of the Master Section. If you want to
render to a single file format, select Single. If you want to render to multiple file formats,
select Multi.
The following options are available for rendering audio files and audio montages.
Part
●
Selected Audio Range processes and renders the selected audio range.
●
Specific Region processes and renders an audio range that is specified using
region markers. In the pop-up menu next to this option, select the region that
you want to render. For example, a CD track.
●
All Regions processes and renders each marked audio range to an
independent file, or renders in place, according to the settings. By defining
multiple isolated regions in an audio file, you can process them in place in one
operation. In the pop-up menu next to this option, select the type of marked
regions you want to render.
In Place
If this option is activated, the rendered audio range replaces the source audio range.
Unnamed File
If this option is activated, the file is named untitled.
Named File
If this option is activated, you can specify a name for the rendered file.
Name
Enter a name for the rendered file. Clicking the arrow icon opens a menu that offers
you several automatic naming options.
Scheme
Allows you to automatically create file names according to custom variables, text
snippets, or auto variables. For example, when rendering multiple sources, you can
activate this option to add a numeric prefix to all rendered files.
354
Master Section
Rendering Location
Select a folder for the rendered file.
Format
Opens the Multi Audio File Format dialog, where you can select the file format.
Bypass Master Section
If this option is activated, the plug-ins and gain of the Master Section are bypassed
when rendering.
Auto Save Master Section Preset
If this option is activated, the Master Section preset is automatically saved in the
audio file or audio montage when you render the file. You can load the Master
Section preset via the Load Master Section Preset option in the lower right corner
of the wave window or the montage window.
Fade In/Out at Boundaries
If this option is activated, a fade is performed at the audio range boundaries when a
new file is created, or a crossfade with the audio neighborhood is created if the audio
range is processed in place.
Crossfades allow a smooth transition between the processed and the non-processed
parts. The crossfade time and shape are set in the Audio Files Preferences. If the
fade time is longer than half the length of the processed file, it is not performed.
No Reverb Tail
If this option is activated, the audio tail produced by effects such as reverb is not
included in the rendered file.
Some plug-ins do not provide a tail duration to WaveLab Pro. In this case, this option
has no effect. For such plug-ins, you could add the Silence plug-in to add extra
samples at the end of the file.
Copy Markers
If this option is activated, markers that are included in the range to process are
copied to the rendered file.
Skip Exclusion Regions
If this option is activated, audio ranges that are marked as muted are skipped and
not included in the result.
Open Resulting Audio File
If this option is activated, the rendered files are opened in a new file group.
Bypass Master Section on Resulting Audio File
If this option is activated, playback of the resulting audio file bypasses the entire
Master Section after rendering. This setting can be toggled by clicking on the button
at the bottom right of the wave window or montage window.
NOTE
It is recommended to activate this option, because you do not need to monitor this
new file through the effects again when the effects have been applied to a file.
Export to SoundCloud
If this option is activated, the rendered file is uploaded to SoundCloud after the
rendering process is finished.
Render Tab for Audio Files
The following options on the Render tab are exclusive to rendering audio files.
355
Master Section
Rendering Part
Whole File processes and renders the whole file.
In Place
If this option is activated, the rendered audio range replaces the source audio range.
Render Tab for Audio Montages
The following options on the Render tab are exclusive to rendering audio montages.
Part
●
Whole Montage processes and renders the whole audio montage.
●
Union of Selected Clips processes and renders the audio range that starts
from the first selected clip and ends with the last selected clip. Only the
selected clips are included in the process.
●
Selected CD Track processes and renders the selected CD track in the CD
window.
●
All Clip Groups processes and renders each clip group to an independent file.
The group names are used for the output file names.
●
All Selected Clips processes and renders each clip to an independent file. The
clip names are used as output file names.
●
CD Track Group processes and renders the selected CD track group.
●
All CD Tracks in Group processes and renders all CD tracks in the selected CD
track group.
Depending on the Part setting, different additional options are available.
Create Basic Audio CD
If this option is activated, a file of the whole audio montage, including clip effects and
master effects, is created. Then a Basic Audio CD window opens.
Create CD Image and Cue Sheet
If this option is activated, the audio montage is exported as a CD image with an
accompanying cue sheet, that is, a text file identifying the CD tracks in the image
file. The cue sheet and the image file it describes can then be imported into any CD
recording application that supports this function, including WaveLab Pro, and written
onto a CD. The CD image is a wave file. You can use this option with any sample rate.
Create Audio Montage from Result
If this option is activated, the rendered audio file is imported in a new audio
montage.
Render Audio File, Do Not Change Audio Montage
If this option is activated, the rendered audio file is saved at the specified location
and the audio montage is not changed.
Replace on Same Audio Montage Track
If this option is activated, the rendered audio file replaces the audio montage track.
Add to Next Empty Audio Montage Track
If this option is activated, the rendered audio file is added to the next empty audio
montage track.
Add to New Audio Montage Track
If this option is activated, the rendered audio file is added to a new audio montage
track.
356
Master Section
Recording from an ASIO Input Bypass Clip Plug-ins
If this option is activated, clip plug-ins are bypassed when rendering.
Bypass Volume/Pan Envelopes
If this option is activated, volume/pan envelopes are bypassed when rendering.
Replace Clips with Rendered Audio Files
If this option is activated, the rendered audio files replace the selected clips.
Include Pause before Track
If this option is activated and you render CD tracks, a pause is included before each
CD track in the rendered file.
Include Pause after Track
If this option is activated and you render CD tracks, a pause is included after each CD
track in the rendered file.
Render Multi Tab
The Multi tab in the Render tab allows you to render multiple audio files and audio montages at
once.
●
To open the Render tab for multiple file formats, click Render at the bottom of the Master
Section. Then select Multi.
The file list displays all open file groups and their included files. You can filter the file list to only
display the active file group, and only audio files or audio montages.
In the file list, select the files that you want to render.
You can also select multiple file tabs and render the files via the Render tab.
RELATED LINKS
Check Tab/Uncheck Tab on page 55
Recording from an ASIO Input
You can record an audio file to disk from an ASIO input, while the audio is collected from the
audio input. The audio from the ASIO input is rendered through the Master Section including its
plug-ins and saved as a file, as when rendering normally.
This is another way to record. When you record normally, no plug-ins are used, but more options
are possible.
Rendering the ASIO Input to File
PREREQUISITE
In the Audio Connections, set up the input and output channels of the ASIO plug-in.
357
Master Section
Smart Bypass PROCEDURE
1.
In the Master Section, in the Effects pane, add the Audio Input plug-in to the first effect
slot.
2.
In the lower part of the Master Section, click Render.
3.
Make your settings.
4.
Click Start.
RESULT
The audio file is recorded to disk from the ASIO input, until you click the Stop button on the
transport bar.
RELATED LINKS
Audio Connections Tab on page 11
Smart Bypass
Smart bypass allows you to compare the original signal to the processed signal with a level
correction applied to it. This function is particularly useful when you are making final level
adjustments to a recording, for example, during mastering.
Smart bypass compares the signal at the input of the Master Section to the signal at the output
of the Master Section, and adjusts the level accordingly.
The main reason for smart bypass is that processing audio often changes the level or loudness of
the signal. When comparing the processed signal with the original signal, your ears are sensitive
to this loudness change. If you need to compare the sound of the effect independently from the
loudness change, a level correction is required.
Using Smart Bypass
PROCEDURE
1.
At the top of the Master Section, click Smart Bypass.
2.
In the Smart Bypass dialog, select one of the play modes.
You can also use key commands to select a Play option. Press A for Original Audio, B for
Processed Audio + Level Correction, and C for Processed Audio.
3.
Select one of the Level Correction modes.
4.
Depending on your selection, you have the following options:
5.
●
If you have selected Match Loudness (RMS) or Match Peaks, specify the time range
that you want to analyze in the Analysis Time field, and proceed with step 5.
●
If you have selected Custom Correction, specify a value, start playback, and
proceed with step 7.
Play back the audio and wait for the analysis to complete.
358
Master Section
Smart Bypass Wait as long as the time specified in the Analysis Time field.
6.
Click Update Gains.
Depending on the selected correction method, the level correction that is applied is shown
below the corresponding button.
You can also press U to update the gains.
7.
Switch between the three play mode options to compare the processed audio with
level correction, the processed audio without level correction, and the original audio
(unprocessed).
If you change the analysis time or start playback from another position you have to wait
for the set time, and then click Update Gains again to update the analysis.
Smart Bypass Dialog
The Smart Bypass dialog allows you to choose whether to bypass all the active effects in the
Effects slots, including faders. This allows you to compensate for any level differences introduced
by the Master Section.
●
To open the Smart Bypass dialog, click Smart Bypass at the top of the Master Section.
NOTE
This applies to playback only, not to file rendering.
Play – Original Audio
Monitors the unprocessed signal at the Master Section input.
Play – Processed Audio + Level Correction
Monitors the signal at the Master Section output plus the applied level correction.
To be able to listen to the corrected level, click Update Gains first.
Play – Processed Audio
Monitors the unprocessed signal at the Master Section output without level
correction.
Level Correction – Match Loudness (RMS)
If this option is activated, the output is adjusted so that the loudness of the
processed signal corresponds to that of the original signal.
Level Correction – Match Peaks
If this option is activated, the output is adjusted so that the peak levels of the
processed signal correspond to those of the original signal.
Level Correction – Custom Correction
Allows you to set a custom level compensation (no analysis).
Level Correction – Analysis Time
Determines how many samples are used to calculate the reference loudness.
Level Correction – Update Gains
Updates the volume analysis.
359
Master Section
Saving Master Section Presets Saving Master Section Presets
You can save all settings that are made in the Master Section as a preset. This includes which
processors are used, which settings are made for each one of them, and the dithering options.
PROCEDURE
1.
Set up the Master Section.
2.
Click Presets at the top of the Master Section, and select Save As.
3.
Optional: In the Save Master Section Preset dialog, click the path name, enter a name,
and click OK to create a new subfolder in the Master Section preset folder.
4.
Enter a name for the preset in the Name field.
5.
Select the options that you want save in the preset.
6.
Optional: Activate Create Shortcut for Selecting the Preset, to assign a shortcut to open
the preset, after you clicked Save.
7.
Click Save.
Save Master Section Preset Dialog
In this dialog, you can save a Master Section setup as preset and define which parts of the
current Master Section you want to include in the preset.
●
To open the Save Master Section Preset dialog, click Presets at the top of the Master
Section, and select Save As.
Location
Opens the root folder of the preset in the File Explorer/macOS Finder. Here, you can
create subfolders in which presets can be saved.
Presets list
Lists all existing presets.
Name
Lets you specify the name of the preset to save.
360
Master Section
Saving Master Section Presets Create Shortcut for Selecting the Preset
If this option is activated and you click Save, the Shortcut Definitions dialog opens,
where you can define a shortcut for applying this preset.
If a preset already has a shortcut, this option is grayed out. To change the existing
shortcut, double-click the preset name in the presets list.
Save Effects Plug-ins
If this option is activated, the effect plug-ins are saved with the preset.
Save Resampling Settings
If this option is activated, the resampling settings are saved with the preset.
Save Master Level Settings
If this option is activated, the master level settings are saved with the preset.
Save Final Effects/Dithering Plug-in
If this option is activated, the final effects/dithering plug-in is saved with the preset.
Save Playback Processing Plug-in
If this option is activated, the playback processing plug-ins are saved with the preset.
Exclude Locked Plug-ins
If this option is activated, locked plug-ins are not saved as part of the Master Section
preset.
Loading Master Section Presets
You can load a previously saved Master Section preset, a temporarily saved Master Section
preset, or import WaveLab Pro 4/5/6 presets.
Open the Presets pop-up menu at the top of the Master Section window.
●
To load a preset that has been previously saved in the Presets\Master Section folder,
select a preset from the Presets pop-up menu.
●
To load a preset from any location, select Load Preset, select a preset, and click Open.
●
To load a temporarily saved preset, open the Restore submenu, and select a preset.
●
To import a WaveLab Pro 4/5/6 preset, select Load WaveLab 4/5/6 Preset, select a preset,
and click Open.
Saving a Master Section Preset in an Audio File or Audio Montage
You can save the current settings of the Master Section along with an audio file or inside an
audio montage.
●
To save the current settings of the Master Section along with an audio file, open the
Master Section Preset Settings pop-up menu on the lower right of the wave window, and
select Save Master Section Preset. In the Save Master Section Preset dialog, make your
settings and click Save.
The preset is saved in companion files.
●
To save the current settings of the Master Section as part of an audio montage, open the
Master Section Preset Settings pop-up menu on the lower right of the montage window,
and select Save Master Section Preset. In the Save Master Section Preset dialog, make
your settings and click Save.
361
Master Section
Saving Master Section Presets Loading a Master Section Preset to an Audio File or Audio Montage
You can apply the Master Section settings that have been saved along with an audio file or
inside an audio montage to the project.
If the option Open Options Dialog when Selecting Preset is activated on the Presets menu
of the Master Section, the Load Master Section Preset dialog opens when applying a Master
Section preset. In this dialog, you can specify which parts of a saved Master Section preset to
load when opening it.
●
To load a Master Section preset that is saved along with the opened audio file, open the
Master Section Preset Settings pop-up menu on the lower right of the wave window, and
select Load Master Section Preset.
●
To load a Master Section preset that is saved inside the opened audio montage, open the
Master Section Preset Settings pop-up menu on the lower right of the montage window,
and select Load Master Section Preset.
Load Master Section Preset Dialog
In this dialog, you can specify which parts of a saved Master Section preset to load when
opening it.
●
To open the Load Master Section Preset dialog, click Presets at the top of the Master
Section, and select Load Preset.
This dialog only opens if it is activated on the Presets menu of the Master Section. Open the
Presets menu at the top of the Master Section, and activate Open Options Dialog when
Selecting Preset.
Now, when restoring a temporarily saved preset or opening a saved preset a dialog with the
following options opens:
Name
Displays the name of the preset.
Load/Replace Effect Plug-ins
If this option is activated, the active effect plug-ins are removed, and any new plugins are inserted from the top slot.
Insert Effect Plug-ins from Focused Slot (Keep Existing Plug-ins)
If this option is activated, the current effect plug-ins are kept, and any new plug-ins
are inserted from the top slot.
362
Master Section
Saving Master Section Presets Load/Replace Resampling Settings
If this option is activated, the current resampling settings are reset, and any new
settings are loaded.
Load/Reset Master Level Settings
If this option is activated, the current Master Level settings are reset, and any new
settings are loaded.
Load/Replace Final Effects/Dithering Plug-in
If this option is activated, the current final effects/dithering plug-in is removed, and
the new plug-in is loaded.
Load/Replace Playback Processing Plug-in
If this option is activated, the current post-processing plug-in is removed, and the
new plug-in is loaded.
Open Plug-in Windows
If this option is activated, the plug-in window opens when you load a new Master
Section preset.
Including a Master Section Preset When Rendering
You can include the Master Section preset that is saved with the audio montage in the rendering
process of super clips’ audio montages.
This means that if this option is activated for an audio montage, anytime this audio montage is
rendered so that its image is used in a parent montage, its associated Master Section preset is
used in the rendering process.
●
To include the Master Section preset when rendering a super clip, open the Master
Section Preset Settings pop-up menu on the lower right of the montage window, and
select Include Master Section Preset when Rendering as Super Clip.
Master Section Presets Pop-up Menu
This pop-up menu offers several options for saving, managing, and restoring Master Section
presets.
●
To open the Presets pop-up menu, click the presets pane at the top of the Master
Section.
Save
Saves the changes you have made to an existing preset.
Save As
Opens a dialog where you can specify a name and a location for the preset.
Organize Presets
Opens the Preset folder of the Master Section, where you can rename or delete
presets.
Define Shortcut for Current Preset
Opens the Shortcut Definitions dialog, where you can define key sequences and
keywords.
363
Master Section
Monitoring Background Tasks Load Preset
Allows you to load a Master Section preset via the File Explorer/macOS Finder. For
example, this is useful if you want to load a preset that is provided by another source
and not located in your default root folder.
Load WaveLab Pro 4/5/6 Preset
Allows you to load WaveLab Pro 4/5/6 presets via the File Explorer/macOS Finder.
Open Options Dialog when Selecting Preset
If this option is activated, a dialog opens that allows you to choose how to load the
preset you select.
Store Temporarily
Lets you select one of the slots to temporarily save a preset.
Restore
Lets you restore a previously saved preset.
List of saved presets
Lists the presets that are saved in the Presets folder of the Master Section.
Monitoring Background Tasks
When rendering, you can monitor the process, and pause or cancel tasks.
You can adjust the priority with which tasks are processed, pause, or cancel them. This is useful if
you have a number of lengthy processes underway and want to free up some processing power
to focus on editing. You can either lower the priority of a task so that it does not use as much of
the computer processor capacity, or pause the task.
To automatically open the Tasks window when a task starts, select the Options tab in the Global
Preferences, and activate Make Tasks Monitor Visible When Task Starts.
A status bar below the wave window and the montage window shows the progress of the current
rendering process, and lets you cancel and pause the rendering, without opening the Tasks
window.
RELATED LINKS
Global Preferences on page 567
Tasks Window
This window allows you to view all background rendering processes that are in progress.
●
To open the Tasks window, select Tool Windows > Tasks
The list of background tasks shows the following information about the rendered file during the
rendering process:
●
Name
364
Master Section
Dropouts ●
Status
●
Elapsed Time
●
Remaining Time
●
Progress in %
●
Progress bar
With the Pause and Cancel buttons, you can pause and cancel the rendering process.
From the Tasks menu, you can select the following options:
Suspend
Pauses the selected task.
Suspend All
Pauses all tasks.
Resume
Resumes the selected paused task.
Resume All
Resumes all paused tasks.
Cancel
Cancels the selected task.
Lowest Priority
Runs the task at a the lowest speed to leave processing power to other tasks, and
only when the mouse or keyboard are not in use.
Low Priority
Runs the task at a low speed to leave processing power to other tasks.
High Priority
Runs the tasks as fast as possible while giving you the possibility to continue working
in WaveLab Pro.
Dropouts
A dropout most likely occurs when your computer does not have the processing power to handle
all used effect processors.
To avoid dropouts, try the following:
●
Use fewer effects.
●
Consider rendering the processing rather than running it in real time. Then master from
the processed file without applying effects. Dropouts never occur when rendering to a file.
●
Do not process any files in the background.
●
If neither of the above helps, check the audio card preference settings. You might need to
adjust the audio buffer settings. If a dropout occurs during a real-time mastering process
we recommend that you re-master. Stop playback, click the dropout indicator to reset it,
and try again.
365
Markers
Markers allow you to save and name specific positions in a file. Markers are useful for editing and
playback.
For example, markers can be used for the following:
●
Indicate cue points or absolute time locations.
●
Highlight problem sections.
●
Visually separate tracks.
●
Set the wave cursor to a specific position.
●
Select all audio between two positions.
●
Define CD tracks.
●
Loop sections in an audio file.
There is no limit to the amount of markers that you can have in a file.
The following marker types come in pairs: CD, loop, mute, region, error and correction. When
you delete a marker of a marker pair, the other marker is also deleted.
Because you cannot have a CD track that starts but never ends, a loop end point without a
start, etc., special rules exist for creating, deleting, and moving these types of markers. CD track
markers must always be balanced. For example, if you delete a track start, the corresponding
end marker is also deleted.
Loop, mute, correction, error, and region markers only have a functionality when balanced.
NOTE
The functions in the Markers window are the same for audio files and audio montages.
However, the Markers window for audio montages offers additional options regarding clips.
Marker Types
The following marker types are available:
Generic markers
Allow you to locate positions and select all the audio between two points, for
example. Generic markers can be created during recording.
Temporary markers
Can be used for any purpose. Temporary markers are deleted when the
corresponding file is closed.
Playback start markers
Define a playback start point.
366
Markers
Markers Window CD track start and end markers
Denote where a CD track begins and ends. CD track start and end markers also serve
for DVD-A discs. CD/DVD markers are used in pairs.
CD track splice markers
Are used when a CD track starts exactly where another ends. CD track splice markers
also serve for DVD-A discs.
CD track index markers
Are used to create index points in CD tracks. CD track index markers also serve for
DVD-A discs.
Region start and end markers
Define start and end points for generic regions. Region start and end markers can be
created during recording and are used in pairs.
Loop start and end markers
Are used to define loop points and are required to access loop editing functions on
the Process tab of the Audio Editor. Loop start and end markers are connected to
the Loop mode when playing back audio. These markers are useful for editing and
creating loops before transferring a sound to a sampler. Loop markers are used in
pairs.
Exclusion start and end markers
Let you temporarily silence a section. Sections between exclusion regions are
skipped if Skip Range is activated in the Play Audio Range pop-up menu on the
transport bar. The Render dialog also allows you to exclude regions from being
rendered. Exclusion markers are used in pairs.
Error start and end markers
Are used to highlight errors, such as clicks. Error start and end markers are saved
in audio files if Save Error and Correction Markers is activated in the Audio Files
Preferences, on the File tab. Error start and end markers can be placed manually,
but their main use is in combination with the Error Correction tool.
Correction start and end markers
Are used to highlight corrections performed on regions previously marked as
errors. Correction start and end markers are saved in audio files if Save Error and
Correction Markers is activated in the Audio Files Preferences on the File tab. The
correction markers can be placed manually, but their main use is in combination with
the Error Correction tool.
Markers Window
In this window, you can create, edit, and use markers while working on an audio file or audio
montage.
●
To open the Markers window, open an audio file or audio montage and select Tool
Windows > Markers.
367
Markers
Markers Window Markers List
The Markers window contains a list of all markers of the active file along with their details and
controls. You can create and edit markers from the markers list.
Marker numbers
Clicking the number of a marker scrolls the waveform to reveal the corresponding
marker.
Play Pre-Roll
Plays back the audio from the marker position with a pre-roll.
You can also press Alt and click Play Pre-Roll to play back from the marker position
with a short pre-roll.
Play
Plays back the audio from the marker position.
Marker type
Shows the marker type. To change the marker type, click the marker icon and select
another marker type from the pop-up list.
Name
Shows the marker name. To change the name, double-click in the corresponding cell
and enter a new name.
Time
Shows the marker position on the time ruler. To change the position, double-click in
the corresponding cell and enter a new value.
Length
Shows the time between the marker start position and the corresponding end or
splice marker.
●
To zoom in on the region between a start and end marker, click the
corresponding cell in the Length column.
●
To select the region between a start and end marker, double-click the
corresponding cell in the Length column.
Lock
Allows you to lock markers. Locking markers prevents them from being accidentally
dragged to a new position in the wave window or the montage window. To lock a
marker, activate the corresponding checkbox.
368
Markers
Markers Window Clip Reference (only available for markers in the Audio Montage window)
A marker can be attached to the left or right edge of a clip, and to its waveform.
When you move a clip, the corresponding marker moves along. The clip reference
column shows the name of the clip.
Offset (only available for markers in the Audio Montage window)
Shows the distance between the marker and the reference point.
Comment
Allows you to enter a comment. To enter a comment, double-click in a cell.
Functions Menu
Depending on whether the Audio Editor or the Audio Montage window is open, different
options are available. The following options are available for audio files and audio montages:
Select All
Selects all markers in the markers list.
Invert Selection States
Inverts the selection status of all markers.
Select in Time Range
Selects the markers located in the selection range.
Deselect All
Deselects all markers.
Delete Selected Markers
Deletes all markers that are selected.
Select Markers to Delete
Opens the Delete Markers dialog, where you can select the markers to delete
according to various criteria.
Copy
Opens a submenu with the following options:
●
Copy All Markers copies all markers of the open audio file or audio montage
to the clipboard. When pasting these markers, the marker positions will be
relative to the file start.
●
Copy Markers in Selected Range copies all markers of the open audio file or
audio montage that are located in the selected range to the clipboard. When
pasting these markers, the marker positions will be relative to the first copied
marker.
Paste Markers
Pastes the markers that were copied to the clipboard at the edit cursor position.
Sample rate differences between the source and destination file are taken into
account when pasting markers.
Convert Marker Types
Opens a dialog where you can convert markers to another type.
Move Multiple Markers
Opens the Move Multiple Markers dialog, where you can select which markers you
want to move by a specified amount.
369
Markers
Markers Window Default Marker Names
Opens the Default Marker Names dialog, where you can select default marker
names for each marker type.
Batch Renaming
Opens the Batch Renaming dialog where you can rename several markers in one
go.
Export Markers List as Text
Opens a dialog where you can export the markers list in various file formats, or as
print out. You can decide which information about the markers to include in the
exported file.
Generate Markers
Opens the Generate Markers dialog where you can specify a sequence of markers
to create.
Lock Selected Marker
Locks the selected marker. If this option is activated, the marker cannot be moved or
deleted.
Customize Command Bar
Opens a dialog where you can customize marker-related menus and shortcuts.
The following options of the Functions menu are only available for audio montages:
Import Markers from Active Clip's Audio File to Audio Montage
Automatically adds all markers of the clip’s source audio file to the audio montage.
To visualize these markers before importing them, it is recommended to activate
Source’s Ruler and Markers in one of the following ways:
●
On the View tab of the Audio Montage window, in the Clip section, activate
Ruler.
●
In the Clips window, select Functions, and activate Show/Hide Clip Ruler and
Markers of Source File. You can also right-click the upper part of a clip, and
activate this option in the pop-up menu.
Bind Selected Markers to Start of Active Clip
Makes the marker position relative to the start of the active clip. When the start of
this clip moves, the marker moves, too.
Bind Selected Markers to End of Active Clip
Makes the marker position relative to the end of the active clip. When the end of this
clip moves, the marker moves, too.
Bind Selected Markers to Audio Samples of Active Clip
Locks the selected marker in relation to the audio samples referenced by the active
clip. The marker moves when the audio samples move relatively to the start of the
montage.
Detach Selected Markers from Their Associated Clip
Makes the marker position relative to the start of the audio montage.
Automatically Attach New Marker to the Most Suitable Clip
Links all newly created markers to a clip when a reasonable pattern is detected. For
example, an end marker at the end of a clip or slightly beyond, or any marker inside
a clip. The marker type and its position relatively to the closest clip determine the
type of bond.
370
Markers
About Creating Markers Full Clip Attachment
Attaches markers to a clip so that they are copied or deleted when the clip is copied
or deleted.
Customize Command Bar
Opens the Customize Commands dialog which contains options to hide or show
specific command bar buttons.
Filter Menu
Use the Filter menu to determine which types of markers are displayed in the markers list and
on the timeline.
Filtering Markers
The search field allows you to filter the markers list by names.
You can search for text in the Name and Comment columns. The search only happens in the
sorted columns. The function Select All only selects the filtered items.
●
In the toolbar of the Markers window, click in the search field, and enter the text that
you want to search for. You can use wildcard characters. “*” substitutes for zero or more
characters, and “?” substitutes for any character.
●
To switch the focus from the search field to the markers list, press Down Arrow.
●
To switch the focus from the markers list to the search field, press Ctrl/Cmd-F.
●
To view all markers again, cancel the search.
About Creating Markers
Markers can be created during playback or in stop mode. You can generate a sequence of
markers or mark a selection range, for example. You can create specific markers if you already
know what you want to mark, or create generic markers.
Creating Markers
You can create markers in the wave window and montage window in stop mode or during
playback.
PROCEDURE
1.
2.
Do one of the following:
●
Start playback.
●
In the wave/montage window, set the cursor to the position where you want to
insert the marker.
Do one of the following:
●
In the Audio Editor or Audio Montage window, select the Insert tab, and click a
marker icon in the Markers section.
●
Right-click the upper part of the time ruler, and select a marker from the context
menu.
●
Press Insert/M. This creates a generic marker.
●
To create CD start/end markers for audio montages, open the CD window, and use
the CD Wizard. This only works in stop mode.
371
Markers
About Creating Markers Creating Markers at Selection Start and End
You can mark a selection for looping or review, for example.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the wave window or the montage window, create a selection range.
2.
Do one of the following:
●
In the Audio Editor or the Audio Montage window, select the Insert tab and select
a marker pair in the Markers section.
●
In the wave window, make a selection range, right-click it, and select one of the
marker pairs.
●
In the wave window or the montage window, create a selection range, right-click
above the time ruler, and select one of the marker pairs.
Duplicating Markers
This is a quick way to create a marker from an existing marker.
PROCEDURE
●
In the wave window or the montage window, hold down Shift, click a marker, and drag.
Generating a Sequence of Markers
You can generate several markers at once in a specified time range. This allows you to create
markers at every beat, or create markers as guidelines for inserting silence when you want to
distribute demo sounds, for example.
PROCEDURE
1.
To decide where you want to insert the generated markers, do one of the following:
●
To generate markers in a specific time range, create a selection range in the wave
window or the montage window.
●
To generate markers from the cursor position to the end of the audio or generate a
fixed number of markers from the cursor position, set the cursor position where you
want the first marker to be created.
2.
In the Markers window, select Functions > Generate Markers.
3.
Select the type of marker and specify the gap between markers, and if you have selected a
marker pair, the region length.
4.
Optional: Activate Naming and select a naming scheme.
5.
Select a numbering scheme.
6.
Click OK to generate the markers.
Generate Markers Dialog
This dialog allows you to generate markers at regular intervals in a specified time range. You can
fill a selected time range, the region between the cursor position and the end of the audio, or
specify a fixed number of markers to be generated.
●
To open the Generate Markers dialog, open the Markers window and select Functions >
Generate Markers.
372
Markers
About Creating Markers Marker type
Specifies the type of marker to be generated.
Gap between Markers/Gap between Regions
Sets the time between two markers or two regions.
Region Length
Sets the length for the region to be generated.
Naming
Allows you to set up a naming scheme.
Depending on whether you have selected a single marker or a start/end marker, you
can specify the naming scheme for a single marker, or one naming scheme for the
start marker and one for the end marker.
If you select Custom, the Marker Naming dialog opens, where you can specify a
custom naming scheme.
Naming Fields
Allows you to specify a base name for the markers, an optional separator between
name and marker number, and the start value of the marker index.
The base name is also used as a basis for the Custom naming scheme.
Fill Selected Time Range
Generates markers in the selected time range.
Start after Gap
If this option is activated, the first generated marker is inserted after the gap time
specified at the top of the dialog.
Specific Number of Markers
If this option is activated, you can specify the number of markers that you want to
generate.
373
Markers
Deleting Markers Fill from Cursor to End
Generates markers between the edit cursor position and the end of the audio.
Fixed Number, Starting from Cursor
Generates a specified number of markers or regions, starting at the edit cursor
position.
Allow Marker after Last Clip (audio montage only)
Determines whether markers can be generated beyond the end of the last clip, when
Fixed Number, Starting from Cursor is activated.
Deleting Markers
Markers can be deleted in the wave window or the montage window, in the Markers window,
and in the Delete Markers dialog.
Deleting Markers in the Wave/Montage Window
●
In the wave/montage window, right-click a marker and select Delete.
●
Drag and drop a marker icon upwards outside the time ruler.
Deleting Markers in the Markers Window
This is useful if your project has many markers or if the marker that you want to delete is not
visible in the wave/montage window.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Markers window, select one or several markers.
You can also select Functions > Select All.
2.
Click Delete Selected Markers or select Functions > Delete Selected Markers.
Deleting Markers by Type
This is useful to delete markers of a specific type in the whole wave/montage window or in a
selection range.
PROCEDURE
1.
Optional: If you only want to delete markers in a specific time range, create a selection
range in the wave/montage window.
2.
In the Markers window, select Functions > Select Markers to Delete.
3.
Select the marker types that you want to delete.
4.
Optional: Define conditions that have to be met for markers to be deleted.
5.
In the Range section, select in which range you want to delete markers.
If you have selected an audio range and want to use it, activate In Selected Audio Range.
6.
Click OK.
Delete Markers Dialog
In this dialog, you can define which markers to delete by selecting marker types and conditions.
●
To open the Delete Markers dialog, open the Markers window and select Functions >
Select Markers to Delete.
374
Markers
Moving Markers Marker types
Allows you to select the marker types to delete.
Conditions
Allows you to select a condition that has to be met for markers to be deleted. For
example, Marker Name Must Contain This Text.
Select All
Selects/deselects all marker types.
Range – All
Select this if you want to delete all markers.
Range – In Selected Audio Range
Select this if you want to delete all markers in the selected time range.
Range – Skip Locked Markers
If this option is activated, locked markers are not deleted.
Moving Markers
You can adjust marker positions in the wave window and the montage window.
PROCEDURE
●
In the wave/montage window, drag a marker to a new position on the time ruler.
If Snap to Magnets is activated, the marker snaps to the cursor position, or the
beginning/end of a selection or waveform.
Moving Multiple Markers
You can move multiple markers simultaneously, keeping the relative distances between the
markers.
PROCEDURE
1.
Optional: If you only want to move markers in a specific time range, create a selection
range in the wave window or the montage window.
2.
In the Markers window, select Functions > Move Markers.
3.
Specify the amount of time by which you want to move the markers.
375
Markers
Moving Multiple Markers 4.
Select the marker types that you want to move.
5.
Optional: Define conditions with or without regular expressions.
6.
Optional: If you have selected an audio range and want to use it, activate In Selected
Audio Range.
7.
Click OK.
Move Multiple Markers Dialog
In this dialog, you can specify which markers you want to move by a specific amount.
●
To open the Move Multiple Markers dialog, open the Markers window and select
Functions > Move Multiple Markers.
Move Markers by This Amount
Defines the distance that the markers are moved.
Move These Marker Types
Allows you to select the marker types that are moved.
Conditions
Allows you to select a condition that has to be met for markers to be moved. For
example, Marker Name Must Contain This Text.
Select All
Selects/deselects all marker types.
Range – All
Select this if you want to move all markers.
Range – In Selected Audio Range
Select this if you want to move all markers in the selected time range.
Range – Skip Locked Markers
If this option is activated, locked markers are not moved.
376
Markers
Navigating to Markers Navigating to Markers
You can jump to the previous or next marker using the corresponding marker buttons.
●
To jump to the previous/next marker, select the View tab, and, in the Cursor section, click
Previous Marker/Next Marker.
●
To set the wave cursor to a marker position, in the wave window or the montage window,
double-click a marker triangle.
Hiding Markers of a Specific Type
For a better overview, you can hide marker types.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Markers window, select Filter.
2.
Deactivate the marker type that you want to hide.
You can make the markers visible again by activating the corresponding marker type.
Converting Marker Types
You can convert markers of a specific type to another type.
Converting the Type of a Single Marker
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Markers window, click the marker icon that you want to convert.
2.
Select a new marker type from the list.
Converting All Markers of a Specific Type
You can convert loop markers to CD track markers, for example.
PROCEDURE
1.
Optional: If you only want to convert markers in a specific time range, create a selection
range in the wave window or the montage window.
2.
In the Markers window, select Functions > Convert Marker Types.
3.
Use the From and To pop-up menus to specify the source and target marker types.
4.
Optional: Specify a condition.
5.
Select whether you want to convert all markers or only the markers in the selected range.
6.
Click OK.
Convert Marker Types Dialog
In this dialog, you can convert marker types.
●
To open the Convert Marker Types dialog, open the Markers window and select
Functions > Convert Marker Types.
377
Markers
Renaming Markers From
Specifies the source marker type.
To
Specifies the target marker type.
Conditions pop-up menu
Allows you to specify conditions for the conversion. Select an option and enter a text
in the text field below.
Markers to Convert – All
Converts all markers.
Markers to Convert – In Selected Audio Range
Converts only markers of the selected audio range.
Markers to Convert – Skip Locked Markers
Excludes locked markers from the conversion.
Renaming Markers
You can change the names of markers.
●
To rename a marker in the wave window or the montage window, right-click a marker,
select Rename, and enter a new name.
●
To rename markers in the Markers window, double-click a marker name in the Name
column, and enter a new name.
●
To batch rename multiple markers according to specified settings, in the Markers window,
select Functions > Batch Renaming.
●
To edit the default names, in the Markers window, select Functions > Default Marker
Names.
RELATED LINKS
Batch Renaming on page 525
378
Markers
Selecting Markers Default Marker Names Dialog
In this dialog, you can specify the default marker names.
●
To open the Default Marker Names dialog, open the Markers window and select
Functions > Default Marker Names.
Marker type
Lets you select the type of marker for which you want to specify the default name.
Default Name for This Marker Type
Lets you specify the default name for the selected marker type.
Selecting Markers
There are several ways to select markers.
●
In the wave window or the montage window, click a marker.
●
In the Markers window, click in a cell. The corresponding marker is selected.
●
Use Ctrl/Cmd and Shift to select multiple markers.
The marker icon changes its background to indicate the selected marker.
Selecting the Audio Between Markers
You can select the audio between two adjacent markers or between any two markers. This allows
you to select a section that has been marked.
●
To select the audio between two adjacent markers, double-click between two adjacent
markers in the wave window or the montage window.
●
To select several regions between two adjacent markers, double-click between two
adjacent markers, and after the second click, drag to select the adjacent regions.
●
To select the audio between a region marker pair, hold down Shift, and double-click a
region marker.
●
To extend the selection until the end of a marker region, in the wave/montage window,
hold down Shift, and double-click in the marker region that you want to select.
●
To open the Markers window and display further information about a specific marker,
hold down Alt, and double-click a marker.
379
Markers
Binding Markers to Clips in the Audio Montage Binding Markers to Clips in the Audio Montage
In the Audio Montage window, you can bind markers to clips. By doing this, the marker remains
in the same position relative to the clip start/end, even if the clip is moved or resized in the audio
montage.
You can find the options regarding binding clips and markers on the Functions menu of the
Markers window, and when right-clicking a marker.
When a marker is bound to a clip element, its name is preceded by a blue character.
RELATED LINKS
Markers Window on page 367
Exporting the Markers List as Text
You can export the markers list as text. The markers list contains the marker names, positions,
region lengths, types, and comments.
PROCEDURE
1.
Open the Markers window.
2.
Select Functions > Export Markers List as Text.
3.
Choose the information that you want to export, and the output format.
4.
Click OK.
RESULT
The markers list opens in the selected output format. When you select Print, the Print Preview
window opens. The text file is saved in the specified folder for temporary files.
RELATED LINKS
Specifying Folders on page 85
Export Markers List as Text Dialog
This dialog allows you to export the markers list in various file formats, or as print out. You can
decide which information about the markers to include in the exported file.
●
To open the Export Markers List as Text dialog, open the Markers window and select
Functions > Export Markers List as Text.
380
Markers
How Marker Information is Saved How Marker Information is Saved
WaveLab Pro uses MRK files as a way to save information that is independent of the file format.
However, to make marker information exchangeable between applications, WaveLab Pro also
saves some information in the Wave headers.
This makes saving files quicker if only a marker setting was changed. However, this only applies
if Write Markers in WAV File Header is deactivated in the Audio Files Preferences on the File
tab. By default, MRK files are created and information are saved in the Wave headers.
●
When you import a file for the first time, any loop points are imported and displayed as
loop markers.
●
When you save a file in the Wave format, the loop points are saved both as part of the
actual file and in the MRK file.
●
When you open a file that includes markers that were added in WaveLab Pro, and markers
that were added in another application, all markers are displayed in WaveLab Pro.
381
Metering
WaveLab Pro contains a variety of audio meters that you can use for monitoring and analyzing
audio. Meters can be used to monitor audio during playback, rendering, and recording.
Furthermore, you can use them to analyze audio sections when playback is stopped.
Meter Windows
Audio meters can be used in the WaveLab window and in the Control Window.
There can only be one instance of each audio meter.
The axis of most audio meters can be rotated, to view the graphics horizontally or vertically. For
some meters, you can also style and customize parameters via a settings dialog.
RELATED LINKS
Docking and Undocking Tool Windows and Meter Windows on page 45
Real Time vs. Non-Real Time
Metering can be used to measure audio in real time, that is, while the audio is being played back,
or in non-real time, that is, in stop mode.
Metering Monitor Modes
You can choose which audio source to monitor and select a mode for displaying information in
the meters.
The following metering modes are available on the Analyze tab in the Monitoring section of the
Audio Editor.
Playback
This is the standard metering mode, in which the meters reflect the audio that is
played back. Metering occurs after the Master Section, which means that effects,
dithering, and master faders are taken into account. You can monitor audio files,
audio montages, audio CD track lists, etc.
Audio Input
In this mode, the meters reflect the audio input. Typically, this is the mode to use
when recording. The Master Section settings are not taken into account.
Freeze Meters
This mode freezes the values for all open meters. The meters remain frozen until you
select another monitor mode.
File Rendering
In this mode, you can monitor what is being written to disk during file rendering
or when recording. Like Audio Selection, average and min/max peak values are
382
Metering
Meter Settings calculated. After rendering, the meters freeze until you refresh or change monitor
mode.
Edit Cursor (Audio Editor only)
In this mode, the meters are static, showing the levels and other values for the audio
at the position of the edit cursor, in stop mode. This allows you to analyze a specific
position in an audio file in non-real-time. The Master Section settings are not taken
into account.
Audio Selection (Audio Editor only)
In this mode, the meters display the average values calculated for the selected
range. The Master Section settings are not taken into account.
When you change the selection, you have to update the meter displays by clicking
Update Selection Analysis.
Update Selection Analysis (Audio Editor only)
Analyzes the audio selection again and updates the meters.
Meter Settings
You can set up most meters in the corresponding settings dialogs. For example, you can adjust
the behavior, scale, and color of the meters.
●
To open the settings dialog for a meter, select Functions > Settings.
●
To check the results after changing the settings without closing the settings dialog, click
Apply.
●
To close the settings dialog and discard any changes that you have made, even if you have
clicked the Apply button before, click Cancel.
Multichannel Metering
WaveLab Pro features 8 audio channels that can be routed to inputs and outputs on a multi i/o
audio card. The audio montage supports various surround channel configurations using up to 8
channels.
WaveLab Pro can display multiple meters. When working with multiple channels in an audio
montage, each channel has its own meter. This applies to all meters (up to 8 real-time FFTs, 8
level meters, 4 pan meters, 4 phase scopes, etc.). If a surround configuration is selected, each
meter indicates the corresponding surround channel (Lf, Rf, LFE, etc.).
When working with more than two channels, it is recommended to use floating meter windows,
because they can be resized more easily.
Resetting the Meters
You can reset the display of some meters, for example, the Level Meter.
PROCEDURE
●
In the meter window, click Reset, or select Functions > Reset.
RESULT
All values and numerical indicators of the meter are reset.
383
Metering
Using Presets in the Meter Windows Using Presets in the Meter Windows
You can save the settings that you have made for a meter window as a preset. By assigning
presets to preset buttons, you can quickly switch between different level scales and display
modes, for example.
●
To save your settings as a preset, select Functions > Settings, click Presets, and select
Save As.
●
To assign a preset to one of the preset buttons, select Functions > Settings, click Presets,
and from the Assign to Preset Button submenu, select a preset button.
●
To apply a preset, select it from the Functions menu, or click the corresponding preset
button.
Preset buttons 1-5
Level Meter
The Level Meter displays the peak and average loudness/decibel levels of your audio file, and
the balance between the left and right channels in a stereo file.
●
To open the Level Meter, select Meters > Level Meter.
Level Meters
The upper part of the window shows the peak level and the average loudness in the following
way:
●
The peak level meters display the peak levels of each channel, graphically and numerically.
●
The VU meters measure the average loudness (RMS) of each channel. These meters have
a built-in inertia, evening out loudness variations over a user-defined time span. If you are
monitoring playback or the audio input, you can see two vertical lines following each VU
meter bar. These lines indicate the average of the most recent minimum RMS values (left
line) and the average of the most recent maximum RMS values (right line). To the left, the
difference between the minimum and maximum average values is displayed. This gives
you an overview of the dynamic range of the audio material.
●
If you are monitoring real-time audio (playback or input), the maximum peak and loudness
values are displayed to the right of the meter bars. The numbers in brackets to the right of
the maximum peak values indicate the number of times that clipping occurs (0 dB signal
peaks). Values between 1 and 2 are acceptable, but if you get a larger number, you should
lower the master level to avoid digital distortion.
●
Recording levels should be set so that they only rarely clip. If the master level is set too
high, the sound quality and frequency response are compromised at high recording levels,
with unwanted clipping effects. If the level is set too low, noise levels can be high relative
to the main sound being recorded.
384
Metering
Level Meter Pan Meters
The lower part of the window shows the difference in level between the left and right channel of
a stereo audio file.
●
The upper pan meters show the peak level difference between the channels. The level bars
can go to the left or right, indicating which channel is loudest.
●
The lower pan meters show the average difference in loudness between the channels.
This gives you a visual indication of whether a stereo recording is properly centered, for
example.
●
If you are monitoring real-time audio (playback or input), the maximum balance difference
values (peak and loudness) for each channel are displayed numerically to the left and right
of the meter bars.
Level/Pan Meter Settings
In the Level/Pan Meter Settings dialog, you can adjust the behavior, scale, and color of the
meters.
●
To open the Level/Pan Meter Settings dialog, open the Level Meter window, and select
Functions > Settings.
Peak Meter Section
Peaks pop-up menu
On this pop-up menu, select Digital Peaks if you want WaveLab Pro to use sample
values and True Peaks if you want WaveLab Pro to use analog reconstructed values.
Ballistics – Release Rate
Determines how fast the peak level meter falls after a peak.
Ballistics – Peak Hold Time
Determines how long a peak value is displayed. The peak can be displayed as a line
or a number. If the meter's height is too narrow, only the line is displayed.
Top/Middle/Low Zone
The color buttons allow you to select colors for the low, middle, and top zones of the
level meter. You can define the range for the top and middle zones by changing the
corresponding values.
Cursor Mode – Unit
If this option is activated, you can specify which unit is used to display the peak value.
Show Value of Single Sample
If this option is activated, the value of the single sample is displayed at the cursor
position. If this option is deactivated, several samples are scanned around the cursor
to determine the peak value. Generally, this is best activated when you have zoomed
in on the waveform to see the details.
VU Meter (Loudness) Section
VU Meter (Loudness)
Activates/Deactivates the VU meter.
Modes pop-up menu
On this pop-up menu, you can choose between the standard mode and three KSystem modes. The settings for K-System modes are shown in the Zones section.
385
Metering
Level Meter Ballistics – Resolution
Sets the time that is used to determine the loudness. The smaller this value, the
more the VU meter behaves like the peak meter.
Ballistics – Range Inertia
Sets the time that is used to determine the recent minimum and maximum value
lines, and therefore determines how quickly these respond to changes in loudness.
Top Zone/Middle Zone/Low Zone
The color buttons allow you to select colors for the low, middle, and top zones of the
VU level meter. You can define the range for the top and middle zones by changing
the corresponding values.
Cursor Mode – Samples to Scan
Determines how many samples are scanned when calculating the VU meter value in
Monitor Edit Cursor Position mode.
Panning Meter Section
Panning Meter
Shows/Hides the panning meter in the Level Meter window.
Range
Determines the dB range of the panning meter.
Peak and Loudness Left/Right, Global Colors
Lets you specify the colors for the different elements.
Global Colors Section
In this section, you select colors for the meter background, marks (scale units), and grid lines.
Global Range (Peak and VU Meter) Section
In this section, you specify the minimum and maximum values of the displayed level range.
K-System VU Meter Modes
K-System integrates standardized metering, monitor calibration, and level practices.
In WaveLab Pro, you can choose between three metering modes which all set the 0 dB VU point
below the standard level meter. To fully utilize the K-System, you have to calibrate your monitor
level so that 0 VU equals 83 dB.
You should use a pink noise reference signal and a SPL level meter. Use C weighting (slow
response), and adjust your playback level so that your noise meter indicates 83 dB SPL per
channel or 86 dB SPL when played on the two channels simultaneously.
The K-System has three meter operating modes (selectable from the VU-Meter pop-up in the
Level/Pan Meter Settings dialog). These are intended for different uses:
●
K-System 20: This places 0 VU 20 dB lower than standard VU mode, and is intended for
music with a very wide dynamic range, e.g. classical music.
●
K-System 14: This places 0 VU 14 dB lower than standard VU mode, and is intended for
music with a slightly more compressed dynamic range. Use this for pop, R&B, and rock
music.
●
K-System 12: This places 0 VU 12 dB lower than standard VU mode, and is intended for
broadcast applications.
386
Metering
Loudness Meter Loudness Meter
The Loudness Meter is an audio meter for monitoring loudness, according to the EBU R-128
standard.
●
To open the Loudness Meter, select Meters > Loudness Meter.
1) Momentary loudness bar
Displays the loudness of a 400 milliseconds slice that is evaluated every 100
milliseconds.
2) Short-term loudness bar
Displays the loudness of a 3 seconds slice that is evaluated every second.
3) Integrated loudness bar
Displays the average loudness. This bar is evolving over time, because it makes an
average of the loudness by measuring 400 millisecond slices every 100 milliseconds.
4) Target loudness
The purple vertical line corresponds to the target loudness defined in the Loudness
Meter Settings dialog. The purple shadow around it corresponds to the acceptable
deviation.
5) EBU R-128 Loudness Range (LRA)
This loudness range displays the difference between the estimates of the 10th and
the 95th percentiles of the loudness distribution. The lower percentile of 10 % can,
for example, prevent the fade out of a music track from dominating the loudness
range. The upper percentile of 95 % ensures that an unusually loud sound, such as a
gunshot in a movie, is not responsible for a large loudness range.
The EBU R-128 loudness range, the dynamics range of the short-term loudness,
and the dynamics range of the momentary loudness help to decide if dynamic
compression is necessary, by giving instant feedback about the dynamics (too low,
good, too much).
6) Dynamics range of the short-term loudness
This loudness range monitors the recent minimum/maximum loudness
measurements to provide a hint about the short-term dynamics.
7) Dynamics range of the momentary loudness
This loudness range monitors the recent minimum/maximum loudness
measurements to provide a hint about the momentary dynamics.
8) Loudness curve
This curve shows where the loudness is distributed in a song. The audio signal is
divided into small blocks, and the loudness of each block is computed. The curve
informs about how often audio events with a given loudness appear in the file in
comparison to all other events. If the curve has a peak, the given loudness often
appears in the song.
387
Metering
Loudness Meter The curve is always normalized. The peak shows which loudness is the most
represented in a song. The curve is related to the LRA as the LRA starts at the left
part of the curve and ends at the right part, with a 10 %/95 % tolerance.
9) Gate LED
The Gate LED lights up when audio is discarded from measurement. The EBU
standard discards audio below a specific level, relative to the average loudness.
10) Numerical values of the bars
This section shows the numerical values of the bars. The values in brackets are the
loudness ranges.
11) True Peak LED
The True Peak LED is based on a true peak analysis and lights up when clipping is
detected.
RELATED LINKS
EBU Loudness Standard R-128 on page 36
Loudness Meter Settings
In the Loudness Meter Settings dialog, you can set up the appearance of the Loudness Meter
window.
●
To open the Loudness Meter Settings dialog, open the Loudness Meter window, and
select Functions > Settings.
Short-term Loudness/Momentary Loudness
Top Zone/Middle Zone/Low Zone
Here, you can specify the colors for the top, middle, and low zones of the meter.
From
Allows you to specify the starting point for the middle and top zones.
Show Maximum Values
If this option is activated, the maximum short-term and momentary values are
displayed instead of the loudness range values.
Loudness Range
If this option is activated, a moving rectangle is displayed, which symbolizes the
short-term loudness range/momentary loudness.
Ballistics
Determines the inertia of the loudness range for the short-term loudness/
momentary loudness, that is, how fast the range edges meet each other after a new
minimum or maximum loudness is reported.
Integrated Loudness
Target Loudness
Allows you to specify the ideal loudness to match. The EBU R-128 recommendation
for broadcast is -23 dB.
Acceptable Deviation
Allows you to specify the loudness range that is considered to be an acceptable
deviation from the target loudness.
Outside the Acceptable Deviation
Allows you to specify a color for the range that is outside the acceptable deviation.
388
Metering
Phasescope Loudness Range
Range Color
Lets you specify the range colors if the range size is above the associated value (Too
Much), exactly as the associated value (Good), or below the associated value (Not
Enough).
Below/From
A loudness range that you consider to be not enough (Below) and too much (From).
Transition
Lets you specify how fast the color changes from Good to Too Much, and from Good
to Not Enough. 0 % means that the color changes abruptly when a threshold is
reached. 100 % means that the color changes gradually.
Additional Settings
Background/Marks/Grid/Curve
Lets you set the colors for the meter background, marks, grid lines, and the loudness
distribution curve of the Loudness Meter.
Peak Hold Time
Determines how long the peak LED remains lit after a true peak.
Show Loudness Histogram
If this option is activated, a loudness histogram is displayed in the Loudness Meter.
Scale
In this section, you can specify the low and high end of the displayed level range.
The EBU +9 scale and the EBU +18 scale are EBU recommendations. Both of these scales are
centered around 0 LU, which represents -23 LUFS, the recommended EBU loudness.
Phasescope
The Phasescope indicates the phase and amplitude relationship between two stereo channels.
●
To open the Phasescope, select Meters > Phasescope.
Reading the Phasescope
The Phasescope works as follows:
●
A vertical line indicates a perfect mono signal (the left and right channels are the same).
●
A horizontal line indicates that the left channel is the same as the right, but with an inverse
phase.
389
Metering
Spectroscope ●
A fairly round shape indicates a well balanced stereo signal. If the shape leans to one side,
there is more energy in the corresponding channel.
●
A perfect circle indicates a sine wave on one channel, and the same sine wave shifted by
45° on the other.
●
Generally, the more you can see a thread, the more bass is in the signal, and the more
spray-like the display, the more high frequencies are in the signal.
Phase Correlation Meter
The phase correlation meter at the bottom of the display works as follows:
●
The green line shows the current phase correlation, and the two red lines show the recent
minimum and maximum values.
●
With a mono signal, the meter shows +1, indicating that both channels are perfectly in
phase.
●
If the meter shows –1, the two channels are the same, but one is inverted.
●
Generally, for a good mix, the meter should show a value between 0 and +1.
The phase correlation meter is also available in Analyze Audio Selection mode, showing an
average value for the selected range.
Phasescope Settings
In the Phasescope Settings dialog, you can adjust the behavior, scale, and color of the meters.
●
To open the Phasescope Settings dialog, open the Phasescope window, and select
Functions > Settings.
Background
Click this to change the background color.
Coil Display
Allows you to adjust the color for the grid and phase coil display.
Auto-Size (Maximize)
If this option is activated, the display is optimized to fit in the window.
Correlation Display
This is where you select colors for the elements in the phase correlation meter
display, and adjust the peak hold time for the maximum and the minimum indicator.
Number of Samples to Display
This setting affects the length of the phase coil and the density of the display. For
audio with high sample rates, you might want to raise this value.
Spectroscope
The Spectroscope shows a graphical representation of the frequency spectrum, analyzed into 60
separate frequency bands, represented as vertical bars.
●
To open the Spectroscope, select Meters > Spectroscope.
390
Metering
Spectrometer Peak levels are shown as a horizontal lines above the corresponding bands, indicating recent
peak/maximum values. The Spectroscope offers a quick spectrum overview. For a more detailed
analysis of the audio spectrum, use the Spectrometer.
On the Functions menu, you can specify whether only high audio levels are displayed, or
whether medium and low levels are also shown.
Spectrometer
The Spectrometer uses FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) techniques to display a frequency graph,
providing a precise and detailed real-time frequency analysis.
●
To open the Spectrometer, select Meters > Spectrometer.
The current frequency spectrum is shown as a linear graph. Spectrum peaks are shown as short
horizontal lines.
Zooming
In the Spectrometer window, you can zoom in on a frequency area.
●
To zoom in on a frequency area, click and drag a rectangle in the spectrum. The display is
zoomed in so that the selected frequency range fills the window.
●
To return to full-scale display, select Functions > Zoom out Fully, or double-click in the
spectrum.
Spectrometer Snapshots
You can take snapshots of the current spectrum, to check the effects of adding EQ, for example.
The snapshots are displayed on the spectrum graph. Up to five snapshots can be displayed. The
sixth snapshot replaces the earliest snapshot.
391
Metering
Spectrometer ●
To take a snapshot, select Functions > Add Snapshot.
●
To erase the last snapshot, select Functions > Erase Last Snapshot.
Exporting FFT Data as ASCII Text
FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) analysis is a method to convert a waveform from the time domain to
the frequency domain. You can export the displayed FFT data as a text file.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Editor, select the Analysis tab.
2.
In the Monitoring section, activate Edit Cursor or Audio Selection.
3.
In the Spectrometer window, select Functions > Export FFT Data as ASCII.
4.
Specify a file name and location.
5.
Click Save.
RESULT
The resulting text file can be imported into Microsoft Excel, or other applications that allow graph
plotting from text files.
Spectrometer Settings
In the Spectrometer Settings dialog, you can adjust the behavior and display of the meters, and
assign up to five sets of spectrometer settings to the preset buttons.
●
To open the Spectrometer Settings dialog, open the Spectrometer window, and select
Functions > Settings.
Process Tab
Analysis Block Size
The higher this value, the higher the accuracy in the frequency domain, that is,
the spectrum is divided into more bands. At the same time, the time localization is
reduced. This means that the higher the value, the less easy to know where a given
frequency starts and ends in time.
NOTE
Raising the block size value also requires more CPU power and introduces a higher
latency. Therefore, high values should only be used for offline monitoring.
Analysis Overlapping
To get more accurate results, the program can analyze overlapping blocks. This
setting determines the amount of overlap between these blocks – the higher the
value, the more accurate the results.
392
Metering
Live Spectrogram NOTE
Raising this value is very CPU intensive. A setting of 50 % requires twice the amount
of CPU power, a setting of 75 % requires four times the CPU power, etc.
Smoothing Window
Allows you to choose which method to use for pre-processing the samples in order
to optimize the Spectrogram.
Display Tab
Frequency Ruler
Determines the frequency range to be shown, at full-scale display. The lowest
frequency to be shown depends on the Analysis Block Size setting and the highest
actual frequency depends on the sample rate.
Logarithmic Scale
When this is activated, each octave occupies the same horizontal space in the display.
If you need more resolution in the high frequency range, you may want to turn this
off.
Level Ruler
Determines the range of the vertical level ruler, in dB or as a percentage value.
Normalize Display to 0 dB
If this option is activated, the level display is offset, so that the highest point on the
curve is displayed as 0 dB. This is only possible in non-real-time mode.
Optimize Scale
Optimizes the level scale so that only the relevant level range is shown. This is only
possible in non-real-time mode.
Display Type
Allows you to toggle the display between curve and bar graph.
Peak Hold Time
Determines for how long the peak level graph remains displayed when the levels
drop.
Colors
This is where you select colors for the curves, grid, background, etc.
Live Spectrogram
The Live Spectrogram shows the last seconds of the audio stream. This allows you to detect
disturbances in the spectrogram, and monitor the noise level and frequencies, for example.
●
To open the Live Spectrogram, select Meters > Live Spectrogram.
393
Metering
Live Spectrogram Live Spectrogram Settings
The Live Spectrogram settings allow you to adjust the behavior and display of the Live
Spectrogram.
●
To open the Live Spectrogram settings, open the Live Spectrogram window, and open
the Functions menu.
Clear
Clears the spectrogram.
Clear on Playback
Clears the spectrogram when you start playback.
Start Scrolling from Left
If this option is activated, the spectrogram starts scrolling from the left edge of the
Live Spectrogram window.
Start Scrolling from Right
If this option is activated, the spectrogram starts scrolling from the right edge of the
Live Spectrogram window.
Wrap
If this option is activated, the spectrogram restarts from the left when it reaches the
right edge of the Live Spectrogram window.
Slow Scroll Speed/Medium Scroll Speed/Fast Scroll Speed
Allows you to select the scroll speed of the spectrogram.
Default Style
The spectrogram uses the style that is defined as default in the Spectrogram
Options dialog.
Style of Current Audio File
The spectrogram uses the style of the active audio file.
Custom Style
Opens the Spectrogram Options dialog that allows you to customize the style of the
spectrogram.
Rotate
Allows you to rotate the axis of the spectrogram to view the graphics horizontally or
vertically.
394
Metering
Bit Meter Bit Meter
The Bit Meter shows how many bits are used.
●
To open the Bit Meter, select Meters > Bit-Meter.
While you may expect the maximum number of bits to be the same as the resolution of the audio
file, this is not necessarily the case.
As soon as you perform any kind of real-time processing on an audio file, the audio data is
treated at a much higher resolution (32-bit floating point), to allow for pristine audio quality.
The only time when a 16-bit file is played back at 16-bit resolution is, for example, if you play it
without any fades or effects, and with the master faders set to 0.00.
How to Read the Bit Meter
●
The inner meters show how many bits are used.
●
The outer meters show how many bits were recently in use.
●
The Over segment indicates clipping.
●
If the Below segment is lit, there are more than 24 bits. The Bit Meter shows the 24 higher
bits, and the Below segment indicates the existence of extra, lower bits.
●
If the Inter segment is lit, this indicates that the audio data cannot be correctly expressed
on a regular 24-bit scale. For example, this is the case when floating point values in
between bits are present, which is typically the case if you apply effects, etc.
When to Use the Bit Meter
The Bit Meter is useful in the following situations:
●
To check whether dithering is necessary. If you are playing back or mixing down to 16 bits,
and the Bit Meter shows that more than 16 bits are used, you should apply dithering.
●
To see the actual resolution of an audio file. For example, even though a file is in 24-bit
format, only 16 bits may be used. Or, a 32-bit file may only use 24 bits, in which case, the
Below segment would not be lit.
●
To see whether a plug-in that is set to zero still affects your signal, or whether a plug-in
uses 16-bit internal processing.
395
Metering
Oscilloscope Bit Meter Settings
In the Bit Meter Settings dialog, you can adjust the behavior and display of the Bit Meter.
●
To open the Bit Meter Settings dialog, open the Bit Meter window, and select
Functions > Settings.
Colors
You can adjust the colors of the meter segments, grids, background, etc. by clicking
the corresponding color buttons.
Bit Hold Time
Determines for how long peak values are held by the outer meters.
Bit Display
Determines how the bits are displayed. In Intuitive Mode, the absolute value of
the signal is shown. The bar graph goes higher with higher signal levels, similar to a
common level meter.
In True Mode, the meter shows the direct mapping of the bits. However, because
the actual values may be negative, there is no intuitive relationship with the level.
This mode is useful if you want to check the full range, because all bits are displayed,
regardless of the audio signal level.
Oscilloscope
The Oscilloscope offers a highly magnified view of the waveform around the playback cursor
position.
●
To open the Oscilloscope, select Meters > Oscilloscope.
If you are analyzing stereo audio, the Oscilloscope normally shows the separate levels of the
two channels. However, if you activate Show Sum and Subtraction on the Functions menu, the
upper half of the Oscilloscope shows the mix of the two channels and the lower half shows the
subtraction.
Oscilloscope Settings
In the Oscilloscope Settings dialog, you can adjust the display colors, and activate/deactivate
Auto-Zoom. When Auto-Zoom is activated, the display is optimized so that the highest level
reaches the top of the display at all times and even small signals are visible.
●
To open the Oscilloscope Settings dialog, open the Oscilloscope window, and select
Functions > Settings.
396
Metering
Wavescope Wavescope
The Wavescope meter displays a real-time waveform drawing of the audio signal being
monitored. It can be useful when recording or rendering a file if Monitor File Rendering mode is
active.
●
To open the Wavescope, select Meters > Wavescope.
Wavescope Settings
In the Wavescope Settings dialog, you can make various color settings for the background, grid,
and waveform display, and set the waveform rendering speed and vertical zoom.
●
To open the Wavescope Settings dialog, open the Wavescope window, and select
Functions > Settings.
Colors
Lets you select colors for the waveform graphics.
Waveform Rendering Speed
Determines how much the waveform display is compressed.
If Same As Live Spectrogram is activated, the rendering speed of the Wavescope
display has the same speed as the Live Spectrogram display.
Level Zoom
Determines the level zoom. Set a high value if the waveform has a low amplitude.
Clear Waveform when Reaching Right of Pane
If this option is activated, the waveform display is cleared each time the cursor
reaches the right end of the display. If this option is deactivated, the new waveform
overwrites the previous waveform.
397
Basic Audio CD
In WaveLab Pro, you can write Basic Audio CDs that are compatible with the Red Book standard.
In the Basic Audio CD window, you create your audio CD by adding audio files to a list of tracks.
Each track contains a reference to the external audio file. This means that you can save your
Basic Audio CD layout as its own session and continue editing individual tracks, for example.
A Basic Audio CD project contains the information about the CD track start position and the
length of the referenced audio file. If the CD markers of an audio file are deleted, the audio file is
removed from the Basic Audio CD project.
Once you have set up your CD layout, you can check the CD for conformity to the Red Book
standard, write the CD, or export it to the Audio Montage window for further editing. You can
also consolidate the audio files in the CD into a single audio file containing track markers.
A Basic Audio CD can also be used as a generic playlist. It allows you to assemble lists of files or
sections of files with adjustable pauses in between.
IMPORTANT
Writing Basic Audio CDs offers only basic functionality. For professional CD creation you should
use the Audio Montage window.
RELATED LINKS
CD Window on page 295
Basic Audio CD Window
In this window, all tracks of the Basic Audio CD are listed. Here you can assemble and write Basic
Audio CDs that are compatible with the Red Book standard.
●
To open a new Basic Audio CD file, select File > New and click Basic Audio CD.
●
To open a saved Basic Audio CD file, select File > Open and click Basic Audio CD. Select the
Basic Audio CD file that you want to open and click Open.
398
Basic Audio CD
Basic Audio CD Window Track List
The track list shows information about the CD tracks. Apart from the entries in the Name
column, you cannot edit the information shown in this window. The following information are
available for each track:
●
Name
●
Start position
●
Length
●
ISRC code
●
Comment (not saved on the CD)
To show the markers and pauses of a track, click the arrow icon in front of the track.
The total time of the CD is displayed at the bottom of the window.
Playback Buttons
The playback buttons in the Start column allow you to play back the corresponding track.
Play Pre-Roll
Playback from start with a pre-roll.
You can also press Alt and click Play Pre-Roll to play back from the start with a short
pre-roll.
Play
Playback from start.
Edit Tab
Add Tracks
Allows you to select the audio files that you want to add to the Basic Audio CD.
Delete
Deletes the selected track from the Basic Audio CD.
Edit Audio
Displays the audio of the selected track in the wave window.
399
Basic Audio CD
Basic Audio CD Window Options
Opens the Basic Audio CD Options dialog.
Write Audio CD or DDP
Opens a dialog from which you can write a CD or DDP.
Check CD Conformity
Verifies that the structure of the Basic Audio CD is correct according to the Red Book
standard.
Clone Fully
Creates a single audio file that contains all the audio material used by the
Basic Audio CD, as well as a new Basic Audio CD file. The new Basic Audio CD is
independent from the audio files and markers that are referenced by the active Basic
Audio CD.
Save Each CD Track as an Audio File
Opens a dialog where you can specify a location to save each track as separate audio
file.
Create Audio File from All CD Tracks
Creates an audio file that recreates the structure of the Basic Audio CD and opens it
in the wave window, without writing any audio sample to disk.
Convert to Audio Montage
Creates an audio montage with the same structure of CD tracks as the Basic Audio
CD.
Basic Audio CD Options Dialog
In this dialog, you can specify an UPC/EAN code for the CD, add silence before and after tracks,
specify pauses, and decide whether to play back the audio through the Master Section.
●
To open the Basic Audio CD Options dialog, open a Basic Audio CD file, and on the Edit
tab, click Options.
UPC/EAN Code
Here you can specify an optional UPC/EAN code for the CD.
Adjust Gaps between Markers and Sound (as CD Frames)
If this option is activated, WaveLab Pro performs small adjustments to the spacing
before and after the CD track markers. This is useful to ensure that a low-quality CD
player does not miss the start of tracks or cut them off before their actual end, for
example. You can specify the silence length for the following options:
●
Silence after First Track Start Marker
●
Silence after Track Start Marker
●
Silence before Each Track End Marker
●
Silence before Last Track End Marker
Default Pause
Allows you to add silence before the first track of the CD. Usually, the pause needs to
be longer for the first track than for the other tracks, to ensure that a low-quality CD
player does not miss the start of the first track, for example.
Reset Pause of All Tracks
If this option is activated, the pauses of all tracks are reset to the default value when
you close the dialog.
400
Basic Audio CD
CD Markers Play through Master Section
If this option is activated, playback of the Basic Audio CD passes the Master Section.
NOTE
You cannot use this option when writing a Basic Audio CD.
Save as Default Settings
If this option is activated, the settings made in this dialog are used for newly created
Basic Audio CDs.
CD Markers
A track in the Basic Audio CD window is defined by CD track start and end markers or CD track
splice markers.
●
CD track splice markers indicate the end of one track and the start of the next. If you insert
a start marker after another start marker, the second marker is automatically converted
into a splice marker.
●
If you delete the CD markers defining a track, the track is deleted from the Basic Audio CD
list.
●
If you edit the marker position of a CD track, the change is reflected in the track in the
Basic Audio CD.
●
When you create a CD track start marker, a CD track end marker is automatically created
at the start of the next track or at the end of the audio file, whichever comes first.
●
If you try to move CD track markers beyond the end of the corresponding file, to a position
inside another track, etc., the marker is automatically moved to the closest valid position.
●
The name of a CD track equals the name of the CD track start marker. Editing the marker
name also changes the CD Track name, and vice versa.
Preparing a Basic Audio CD
You can add any type of file to a Basic Audio CD. However, when writing the files to CD, the files
must meet specific specifications.
●
44100 Hz (44.1 kHz)
●
Mono, dual mono, or stereo.
●
8, 16, 20, or 24-bit resolution. During the writing process, files are converted to 16-bit
stereo.
A track can only be used once in a Basic Audio CD.
Creating a Basic Audio CD
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > New and click Basic Audio CD.
2.
Add tracks to the Basic Audio CD project using the following methods:
●
In the Basic Audio CD window, on the Edit tab, click Add Tracks, and select the
audio files that you want to add.
●
Drag audio files from the file browser of your computer to the Basic Audio CD
window.
●
Drag a selection of an audio file from the wave window to the Basic Audio CD
window.
401
Basic Audio CD
Preparing a Basic Audio CD If a file contains CD start and sub-index markers, these are used to define the track in the
list.
If a file does not contain markers, a dialog asks you if you want to use the file start and end
as boundaries for the track.
3.
Select File > Save, specify a name and location, and click Save.
RESULT
The audio files are added to the Basic Audio CD project.
Saving a Basic Audio CD
PREREQUISITE
Set up your Basic Audio CD.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Basic Audio CD window, click the Save button, or select File > Save.
2.
In the Save Basic Audio CD dialog, specify a file name and location.
3.
Optional: Activate one of the following options:
4.
●
Open standard file selector before this dialog
●
Save copy
Click Save.
Opening a Basic Audio CD Project
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > Open.
2.
Select Basic Audio CD.
3.
Select Browse.
4.
Select a Basic Audio CD file and click Open.
RESULT
All audio files that are referenced by the Basic Audio CD are opened in WaveLab Pro. However,
they do not appear in the wave windows.
Deleting CD Tracks from a Basic Audio CD
You can delete a CD track from a Basic Audio CD project by deleting its CD track markers or by
deleting it from the Basic Audio CD list.
●
In the wave window, right-click the CD track start or end marker of the CD track that you
want to delete, and select Delete.
●
In the Basic Audio CD window, select a track, and on the Edit tab, click Delete.
402
Basic Audio CD
Opening CD Tracks for Editing Adjusting Pauses in CD Tracks
You can change the length of the pause that is played before the beginning of a track in the Basic
Audio CD.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Basic Audio CD window, click the arrow icon next to a track to unfold it.
2.
Double-click the Length column of the Pause row, enter a value, and press Return.
Opening CD Tracks for Editing
You can open the tracks of a Basic Audio CD in a wave window to edit the audio or open the
tracks as a clip in an audio montage.
●
To open an entire CD track, double-click it in the Length column. A wave window opens
and the entire CD track is selected.
●
To open an entire CD track and position the cursor at track start or end, click the arrow
icon to unfold the CD track, and double-click the Length column of the Track Start or
Track End rows.
●
To insert a CD track into an open audio file, drag the CD track on the open audio file in the
wave window.
●
To open a CD track as a clip in an audio montage, drag the CD track into the audio
montage and select one of the insert options.
Playing Back Files in the Track List
There are several ways to play back files in the track list of a Basic Audio CD.
●
In the Start column, click the time information of the track that you want to play back.
What you hear during playback is identical to the audio that is played back from the actual
CD. All pauses and other adjustments are taken into account.
If you have audio files in the list that do not have the correct sample rate (44.1 kHz), they
can still be played back. However, when you activate playback, all files play back at the
same rate. The inherent rate of the selected file is used for all files.
●
Select a track, and click Play on the transport bar. Press Stop to stop playback.
●
To play back from the marker position, click the right play icon of a track in the Start
column. To play back from the marker position with a pre-roll, click the left play icon.
Playing Back Files in the Track List Through the Master Section
Playing back files through the Master Section takes all the settings and effects in the Master
Section into account.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Basic Audio CD window, on the Edit tab, click Options.
2.
Activate Play through Master Section, and click OK.
403
Basic Audio CD
Saving Basic Audio CD Tracks as Separate Files Saving Basic Audio CD Tracks as Separate Files
You can save tracks of a Basic Audio CD as separate audio files on your hard disk. This is useful
for archiving, for example.
PROCEDURE
1.
Set up a Basic Audio CD.
2.
In the Basic Audio CD window, on the Edit tab, click Save Each CD Track as an Audio File.
3.
Specify a location and the output format.
4.
Click OK.
RESULT
The tracks in the list are saved as separate audio files in the specified folder.
Saving Basic Audio CD Tracks as One File
You can save tracks of a Basic Audio CD as a single audio file on your hard disk.
PREREQUISITE
Set up a Basic Audio CD. A track must be at least 4 seconds long.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Basic Audio CD window, on the Edit tab, click Clone Fully.
2.
Specify a location.
3.
Click OK.
RESULT
The tracks in the list are saved as a single audio file in the specified folder.
404
DVD-Audio
In WaveLab Pro, you can author a DVD-Audio from a collection of audio montages and write it to
DVD-Audio.
You can add your audio montages to the DVD-Audio window, check the DVD-Audio layout for
conformity, and write a DVD-Audio disk.
Compared to a Basic Audio CD, the DVD-Audio has the following advantages:
●
More disk space
●
Higher audio quality with up to 192 kHz and 24 bit
●
Surround support
●
Picture slide show support
The contents of a DVD-Audio project are saved in a folder named AUDIO_TS (Audio Title Set),
which includes all audio, still picture, text, and visual menu data.
The AUDIO_TS contents are created when you render a DVD-Audio project. These data files are
readable by the DVD-Audio player, but cannot be opened or edited in WaveLab Pro.
You can use DVD+R, DVD-R, DVD+RW, DVD-RW, DVD-RAM for writing DVD-Audio compatible
discs.
NOTE
Throughout WaveLab Pro, where “CD” is mentioned (for example, in messages or marker
names), this usually also applies for DVD-Audio.
Structure of a DVD-Audio Project
You structure your DVD-Audio projects in groups.
●
An album can contain up to 9 groups. In WaveLab Pro, a group corresponds to an audio
montage. A group is similar to a CD and can be represented by an audio montage.
●
Each group can contain up to 99 tracks. Tracks are defined by CD track start and end
markers in the audio montage.
DVD-Audio Formats
A DVD-Audio project can contain audio in a variety of resolutions.
The sample rates can be 48 kHz, 96 kHz, 192 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 88.2 kHz, or 176 kHz and the bitdepths can be 16 or 24.
You can use other bit resolutions for audio files in a montage, but they are saved on the DVDAudio disc as either 16-bit or 24-bit audio samples, regardless of the original resolution. The
sample rate of the DVD is specified on the Info tab of the corresponding audio montage.
405
DVD-Audio
DVD-Audio Format Considerations DVD-Audio Format Considerations
There are two main considerations when planning a DVD-Audio project: the total size of the
album and the highest allowable data rate for a group.
A single album cannot contain more data than 4.7 GB (using a standard single layer DVD).
Highest Allowable Data Rate for a Group
The data rate is the data bandwidth that is necessary to reproduce a given number of channels
at a specific bit resolution and sample frequency. The DVD-Audio specification allows for a
maximum data rate of 9.6 Mbps when using an uncompressed PCM audio format.
To keep a DVD-Audio project within the allowable data rate limit, use the following list as a guide.
6 Channels
Maximum bit resolution/sample rate: Up to 16 bit/96 kHz or 24 bit/48 kHz
4 Channels
Maximum bit resolution/sample rate: Up to 24 bit/96 kHz
2 Channels
Maximum bit resolution/sample rate: Up to 24 bit/192 kHz
DVD-Audio Window
In this window, you can author DVD-Audio and write it to DVD.
●
To open a new DVD-Audio file, select File > New and click Create DVD-Audio.
●
To open a saved DVD-Audio file, select File > Open and click DVD-Audio. Select the DVDAudio file that you want to open and click Open.
DVD-Audio List
The columns in the DVD-Audio window show information about the audio montages in
the project. Apart from the entries in the Group Name column, you cannot edit any of the
information shown in this window.
Group Name
If you double-click the name, you can enter a new name for the group. By default,
the name of the audio montage is used as the group name. The group name is
shown in the DVD menu display.
406
DVD-Audio
DVD-Audio Window File
The name of the audio montage. If you double-click the audio montage name, the
corresponding audio montage opens.
Titles
The number of titles in the audio montage.
Time
The total time of all titles.
Bits
The bit depth of the samples in the audio montage as they will be saved on the final
DVD.
Rate
The sample rate of the audio montage.
Channel
The number of audio channels used in the audio montage.
Size
The total size of the audio montage.
Edit Tab
Add Audio Montages
Opens the file browser where you can select the audio montages that you want to
add to the DVD-Audio.
Remove
Removes the selected audio montage from the DVD-Audio.
Open Audio Montage
Opens the montage window of the selected audio montage.
Options
Opens the DVD-Audio Options dialog.
Check Conformity
Verifies that the structure of the DVD-Audio conforms to the standard.
Write DVD-Audio
Opens a dialog from which you can write a DVD.
DVD-Audio Options Dialog
In this dialog, you can make various settings for the DVD-Audio.
●
To open the DVD-Audio Options dialog, open a DVD-Audio file, select the Edit tab, and
click Options.
Disc Identification
Volume ID and Number of Volumes allow you to specify disc information. For
example, if you have a project that has 3 DVD discs, you can specify 3 volumes, and
specify the ID for the volumes 1, 2, and 3.
Album Name allows you to type in the name of the album. This name is also used as
the DVD volume name.
Provider Information allows you to type in information about the DVD-Audio
provider.
407
DVD-Audio
Preparing a DVD-Audio Options
If Generate Menus is activated, a basic menu displaying the album/group/tracks
structure is automatically generated. This menu appears when playing back the DVDAudio in a DVD player.
If Include Still Picture Tracks is activated, pictures placed on audio montage picture
tracks are included on the DVD, and are displayed by a compatible DVD player.
If Auto Play is activated, DVD playback starts automatically when the DVD is inserted
into a compatible DVD player.
TV System
Specifies whether the DVD-Audio disc should conform to the NTSC or PAL/SECAM
video standard.
Default Still Picture
If this option is activated, you can define a default still picture that is displayed when
the DVD-Audio is played back.
Still Picture Effects
Lets you define effect transitions between pictures. Choose a mode and a duration of
the transition for start and end of playback. Not all DVD players support this feature.
TV Systems
If you want to use still pictures, you need to specify whether the DVD-Audio disc should conform
to the NTSC or PAL/SECAM video standard.
This is important because the NTSC (used in North America and Asia) and PAL/SECAM (used in
Western Europe, Australia/France, and Eastern Europe) use different resolutions.
Preparing a DVD-Audio
Creating a DVD-Audio
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > New and click Create DVD-Audio.
2.
Add tracks to the DVD-Audio project using the following methods:
3.
●
In the DVD-Audio window, on the Edit tab, click Add Audio Montages, and select
the audio montages that you want to add.
●
Drag audio montages from the file browser of your operating system to the DVDAudio window.
●
Drag an audio montage tab to the DVD-Audio window.
Select File > Save, specify a name and location, and click Save.
RESULT
The audio montages are added to the DVD-Audio project.
Saving a DVD-Audio
PREREQUISITE
Set up your DVD-Audio.
408
DVD-Audio
Opening Audio Montages for Editing PROCEDURE
1.
In the DVD-Audio window, click Save As, or select File > Save As.
2.
In the Save DVD-Audio dialog, specify a file name and location.
3.
Click Save.
Opening a DVD-Audio Project
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > Open and click DVD-Audio.
2.
Select Browse.
3.
Select a DVD-Audio file and click Open.
RESULT
All audio montages that are referenced by the DVD-Audio file are opened in WaveLab Pro.
However, they do not appear in the montage window.
Setting an Audio Montage to DVD-Audio Mode
To be able to write an audio montage to DVD-Audio, the mode of the audio montage must be
DVD-Audio compatible.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Montage window, click the File tab.
2.
Click Info.
3.
Open the Mode menu and select Multichannel (DVD-Audio Compatible).
4.
Click File > Save to save the changes.
Removing Audio Montages from a DVD-Audio
When removing audio montages from a DVD-Audio, the audio montage references are removed
from the DVD-Audio, but the audio montage files are not deleted.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the DVD-Audio window, select an audio montage.
2.
On the Edit tab, click Remove.
Opening Audio Montages for Editing
There are several ways to open an audio montage of a DVD-Audio project for editing in the Audio
Montage window.
●
Double-click the audio montage in DVD-Audio window.
●
Select an audio montage from the list, select the Edit tab, click Open Audio Montage.
●
Drag an audio montage from the DVD-Audio window to an open audio montage, or the
Audio Montage window area.
409
DVD-Audio
Checking the DVD-Audio Conformity Checking the DVD-Audio Conformity
Before rendering the DVD-Audio project, you can use the Check Conformity function to make
sure that the settings conform to the DVD-Audio standard. This is also done automatically before
writing to disk.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the DVD-Audio window, select the Edit tab.
2.
Click Check Conformity.
RESULT
All audio montages that are part of the DVD-Audio project are checked for their conformity.
Afterwards, a message opens stating the result of the conformity check.
410
Writing Operations
To start the CD/DVD writing process, you must have completed all CD/DVD writing preparations.
Refer to the description about Basic Audio CD, DVD-Audio, and CD window for a description of
the preparations before following the instructions here.
RELATED LINKS
Basic Audio CD on page 398
DVD-Audio on page 405
CD Window on page 295
Write Audio CD or DDP Dialog
In this dialog, you can write your audio CD project and audio montage to audio CD or DDP
image.
●
If you want to write audio files to an audio CD or a DDP image, open the Basic Audio CD
window, select the Edit tab, and click Write Audio CD or DDP.
●
If you want to write audio montages to an audio CD or a DDP image, open the CD window,
and select Functions > Write Audio CD or DDP.
The following options are the same for writing both audio files and audio montages to audio CD
or DDP image.
Device
Allows you to select the disc writer that you want to use or select DDP Image to write
a set of DDP files on the hard drive.
NOTE
On the Mac, insert a medium in the drive after opening WaveLab Pro. Otherwise, the
drive is under the control of the operating system and is not available for WaveLab
Pro.
411
Writing Operations
Write Audio CD or DDP Dialog Refresh
Scans the system for connected optical devices. This is done automatically when this
dialog opens. Click the refresh icon after you insert a new blank medium to update
the Speed menu.
NOTE
On the Mac, insert a medium in the drive after opening WaveLab Pro. Otherwise, the
drive is under the control of the operating system and is not available for WaveLab
Pro.
Eject Optical Medium
Ejects the optical medium present in the selected drive.
Device Information
Opens the Device Information dialog that shows information about the selected
device.
Erase Optical Media
Erases the optical medium present in the selected drive, provided it is a rewritable
medium.
If DDP Image is selected, clicking the button erases the existing DDP files.
Bypass Master Section
If this option is activated, the audio signal is not processed through the Master
Section before being written to the medium. For writing a Basic Audio CD, this
option is always activated.
Destination Folder (DDP image must be selected)
Allows you to specify the destination path. If you type a non-existing path, it is
automatically created.
Write Table of Contents and Customer Information (DDP image must be selected)
If this option is activated, a file called IDENT.TXT is written in the DDP folder. It
contains a table of contents of the tracks and some customer information. This file is
not officially part of the DDP specification, but it can be used by the recipient of the
DDP image to identify the files.
Speed
Allows you to select the writing speed. The highest speed depends on the capabilities
of your writing device and the medium present in the device.
Copies
Allows you to define the number of copies that you want to write.
Test Only, Do Not Write
If this option is activated, clicking OK initiates a simulation of writing the CD. If this
test is passed, the real write operation will succeed. If the test fails, try again at a
lower writing speed.
Render to Temporary File before Writing (only available for writing audio montages)
If this option is activated, a disk image is created before writing, which eliminates the
risk of buffer underruns. This is useful if your project uses many audio plug-ins while
writing. It is activated automatically when writing multiple copies. While this option
makes the writing operation longer, it allows you to select an higher writing speed.
CD-Extra Compatible (New Session Possible)
If this option is activated, the resulting audio CD is compatible with the CD-Extra
format.
412
Writing Operations
Erase Optical Media Dialog Eject after Completion
If this option is activated, the medium is ejected after the writing operation.
Erase Optical Media Dialog
In this dialog, you can quickly or fully erase an optical disc before writing.
●
To open the Erase Optical Media dialog, open the Write Audio CD or DDP dialog and click
the garbage icon.
Quick Erase
Erases the table of contents of the disc.
Full Erase
Erases all parts of the disc.
Force Erasing Even If a Disk Appears to Be Blank
If this option is activated, the disc is erased, even if it is declared as blank. Use this
option to make sure that discs that were partially or minimally erased are fully
erased.
About Writing Audio Files
You can write the audio files of a Basic Audio CD project to an audio CD or a DDP image.
Writing Audio Files to an Audio CD
PREREQUISITE
Set up a Basic Audio CD project.
NOTE
On Mac, insert a medium in the drive after opening WaveLab Pro. Otherwise, the drive is under
the control of the operating system and is not available for WaveLab Pro.
PROCEDURE
1.
Optional: In the Basic Audio CD window, select the Edit tab, and click Check CD
Conformity to check that all settings conform to the Red Book standard.
2.
Insert an empty CD into your drive.
3.
In the Basic Audio CD window, on the Edit tab, click Write Audio CD or DDP.
4.
From the Device pop-up menu, select the writing device that you want to use.
5.
Select the writing speed from the Speed pop-up menu.
6.
Optional: Activate one or several of the following options:
●
Activate Test Only, Do Not Write if you want to test if the writing operation is
successful.
413
Writing Operations
About Writing Audio Files 7.
●
Activate CD-Extra Compatible (New Session Possible) if you want the resulting
audio CD to be compatible with the CD-Extra format.
●
Activate Eject after Completion if you want the disc to be automatically ejected
after the writing operation.
Click OK to start the writing operation.
RELATED LINKS
Write Audio CD or DDP Dialog on page 411
Writing Audio Files to DDP Image
There might be situations when you want to freeze an entire Basic Audio CD, without actually
writing a CD. This is done by saving it as a DDP image.
PREREQUISITE
Set up a Basic Audio CD project.
PROCEDURE
1.
Optional: In the Basic Audio CD window, select the Edit tab, and click Check CD
Conformity to check that all settings conform to the Red Book standard.
2.
In the Basic Audio CD window, on the Edit tab, click Write Audio CD or DDP.
3.
From the Device pop-up menu, select DDP Image.
4.
Specify the destination folder.
5.
Optional: Activate Write Table of Contents and Customer Information to create a text
file, containing information about the DDP file.
6.
Click OK to start the writing operation.
RELATED LINKS
Write Audio CD or DDP Dialog on page 411
Writing an Audio CD from a DDP Image
You can write a CD from a DDP image that you have previously created with WaveLab Pro or
another application.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > Tools > Write Audio CD from DDP Image.
2.
In the Write Audio CD from DDP Image dialog, open the Device pop-up menu, and select
the writing device that you want to use.
3.
Select the writing speed from the Speed pop-up menu.
4.
Select the DDP image folder.
5.
Optional: Activate one or several of the following options:
6.
●
Activate Test Only, Do Not Write if you want to test if the writing operation would
be successful.
●
Activate Eject after Completion if you want the disc to be automatically ejected
after the writing operation.
Click OK to start the writing operation.
414
Writing Operations
About Writing Audio Files Write Audio CD From DDP Image Dialog
This dialog allows you to write a CD from a DDP image that you have previously created with
WaveLab Pro or another application.
●
To open the Write Audio CD from DDP Image dialog, select File > Tools > Write Audio
CD from DDP Image.
Device
Here, select the disc writer that you want to use.
NOTE
On the Mac, insert a medium in the drive after opening WaveLab Pro. Otherwise, the
drive is under the control of the operating system and is not available for WaveLab
Pro.
Refresh
Scans the system for connected optical devices. This is done automatically when this
dialog opens. Click the update icon after you insert a new blank medium to update
the Speed menu.
NOTE
On the Mac, insert a medium in the drive after opening WaveLab Pro. Otherwise, the
drive is under the control of the operating system and is not available for WaveLab
Pro.
Eject Optical Medium
Ejects the optical medium present in the selected drive.
Device Information
Opens the Device Information dialog that shows information about the selected
device.
Erase Optical Disc
Erases the optical disc present in the selected drive, provided it is a rewritable
medium. If DDP Image is selected, clicking the button erases the existing DDP files.
Speed
Allows you to select the writing speed. The highest speed depends on the capabilities
of your writing device and the medium present in the device.
415
Writing Operations
About Writing Audio Montages Test Only, Do Not Write
If this option is activated, clicking OK initiates a simulation of writing the CD. If this
test is passed, the real write operation will succeed. If the test fails, try again at a
lower writing speed.
Eject after Completion
If this option is activated, the medium is ejected after the writing operation.
DDP Image Folder
Lets you specify the source path of the DDP image.
About Writing Audio Montages
You can write audio montages to an audio CD or a DDP image.
Writing an Audio Montage to an Audio CD
PREREQUISITE
Set up your audio montage and make your CD writing settings in the Global Preferences.
NOTE
On Mac, insert a medium in the drive after opening WaveLab Pro. Otherwise, the drive is under
the control of the operating system and is not available for WaveLab Pro.
PROCEDURE
1.
Optional: In the CD window, select Functions > Check CD Conformity to check that all
settings conform to the Red Book standard.
2.
Insert an empty CD into your drive.
3.
In the CD window, select Functions > Write Audio CD or DDP.
4.
From the Device pop-up menu, select the writing device that you want to use.
5.
If you want to bypass the Master Section, activate Bypass Master Section.
6.
Select the writing speed from the Speed pop-up menu.
7.
Select the number of copies that you want to write.
When you want to write more than one copy, it is recommended to activate Render to
Temporary File before Writing.
8.
9.
Optional: Activate one or several of the following options:
●
Activate Test Only, Do Not Write if you want to test if the writing operation would
be successful.
●
Activate Render to Temporary File before Writing if your audio montage uses
many plug-ins. This way, the audio data is sent to the CD writer fast enough.
●
Activate CD-Extra Compatible (New Session Possible) if you want the resulting
audio CD to be compatible with the CD-Extra format.
●
Activate Eject after Completion if you want the disc to be automatically ejected
after the writing operation.
Click OK.
RESULT
The writing operation starts.
416
Writing Operations
About Writing Audio Montages RELATED LINKS
Write Audio CD or DDP Dialog on page 411
Writing an Audio Montage to a DDP Image
PREREQUISITE
Set up your audio montage and make your CD writing settings in the Global Preferences.
PROCEDURE
1.
Optional: In the CD window, select Functions > Check CD Conformity to check that all
settings conform to the Red Book standard.
2.
In the CD window, select Functions > Write Audio CD or DDP.
3.
From the Device pop-up menu, select DDP Image.
4.
If you want to bypass the Master Section, activate Bypass Master Section.
5.
Specify the destination folder.
6.
Optional: Activate Write Table of Contents and Customer Information to create a text
file, containing information about the DDP file.
7.
Click OK to start the writing operation.
RELATED LINKS
Write Audio CD or DDP Dialog on page 411
Writing Audio Montages With Any Sample Rate
You can write audio montages to CD/DDP even if they are not at 44.1 kHz. To be able to do this,
set up the Resampler plug-in in the Master Section. This procedure is not automated so that
you can customize the resampling quality, limiting, and dithering.
PREREQUISITE
Set up your audio montage.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Master Section, add the Resampler plug-in to an Effects slot.
2.
In the Resampler, set the Sample Rate to 44.1 kHz.
3.
Optional: Add a Peak Limiter and a Dithering plug-in at the end of the Master Section.
4.
Write the audio montage as you would write any other audio montage.
RELATED LINKS
Writing an Audio Montage to an Audio CD on page 416
Writing an Audio Montage to a DDP Image on page 417
Checking the Transition Between Tracks
You can set up a pre-roll time before tracks start and then play back all tracks. This way you can
check the transition between tracks.
PREREQUISITE
Set up your audio montage.
417
Writing Operations
About Writing Audio Montages PROCEDURE
1.
In the CD window, select Options > Edit Playback Times.
2.
Make your settings, and click OK.
3.
In the CD window, select Functions > Play All CD-Track Starts.
RESULT
Each track start point and end point is played back according to the values set in the Edit
Playback Times dialog.
CD-Text
CD-Text is an extension of the Red Book Compact Disc standard and allows you to save text
information such as title, songwriter, composer, and disc ID on an audio CD.
The text data is then displayed by CD players that support the CD-Text format. The CD-Text can
also be included in the audio CD report.
CD-Text Editor Dialog
In this dialog, you can specify information such as track title, performer, and songwriter, that is
written onto the CD as CD-Text.
You can add information about the disc itself and each individual track. This information is
entered in the text fields that scroll horizontally. There is one pane of fields for the disc itself and
a pane for each track.
●
To open the CD-Text Editor dialog, in the CD window, select the track for which you want
to edit the CD-Text, and select Functions > Edit CD-Text.
Copy CD Track Marker Name
Copies the name of the CD track marker to this field.
Copy CD Track Start Marker Name to All CD Track Titles
Copies the name of each CD track start marker to the title field of each CD track.
Copy Text to All Following Tracks
Copies the text to all tracks that are located after the current one.
418
Writing Operations
About Writing Audio Montages Scrollbar
Allows you to navigate across all CD-Texts. The first position corresponds to the
whole CD, other positions to individual tracks.
Language
Here, select how characters should be encoded on the CD.
NOTE
If a character is not CD-Text compatible, it is displayed as a ? character.
Restrict to ASCII
To ensure the maximum compatibility with CD players, it is recommended to restrict
the characters to ASCII when using the Western European option. If this option is
activated, and you type a non-compatible character, a ? character is displayed.
Enable CD-Text Writing
If this option is activated, the CD-Text is written onto the CD.
Import
Allows you to import a text file that contains CD-Text.
Importing CD-Text
You can import CD-Text that has been written in a standard CSV text file in UTF-8 format.
●
To import CD-Text, click Import in the CD-Text Editor dialog and select the text file that
you want to import.
Importing CD-Text replaces the content of the CD-Text Editor dialog.
You can specify the CSV delimiter in the Global Preferences on the Formats tab. The CSV file
must only contain the text and between 1 and 7 fields per line. The text must be in the following
order:
1
Title
2
Performer
3
Songwriter
4
Composer
5
Arranger
6
Message
7
Disc ID
RELATED LINKS
Formats Tab on page 570
Audio CD Reports
An audio CD report is a detailed report about the active audio CD. This report includes a full track
listing with ISRC codes, track times, and CD-Text.
The audio CD report can be output in HTML, Adobe PDF, XML, simple text format, CSV format, or
printed out. You can choose the details of what is displayed and include your custom logo. You
can send the audio CD report to your client, an album artwork designer, or to the CD replication
house when presenting them with a master CD, for example.
There are two types of variables:
419
Writing Operations
About Writing Audio Montages ●
Factory variables provide automatically generated information about a project, such
as number of tracks, track times, track names, etc., based on the actual contents of the
project.
●
User defined variables contain personal data such as company name and copyright
information, etc.
Along with the variables, the audio CD report can also include any CD-Text that you have
specified, for example, composers or performers.
Generating an Audio CD Report
An audio CD report should be generated when an audio montage is fully prepared and ready for
CD writing.
PROCEDURE
1.
Open the audio montage that you want to create a report for.
NOTE
The audio montage must be in stereo mode.
2.
Select Tool Windows > CD.
3.
In the CD window, select Functions > Generate Audio CD Report.
4.
On the Rich Text tab, in the Output format section, specify one of the following output
formats:
●
HTML
●
Adobe PDF
●
Print
●
XML
●
CSV
5.
Make your settings.
6.
Optional: On the Raw Text tab, select a cue sheet template or enter cue sheet information.
7.
Optional: If you want to save the audio CD report to a specific location, activate Specify
File Name and Location, and specify a file name and location.
8.
Click Apply.
Audio CD Report Dialog
In this dialog, you can generate an audio CD report and specify which information to include in
this report.
●
To open the Audio CD Report dialog, in the CD window, select Functions > Generate
Audio CD Report.
Global Options
The following option is available on the Rich Text tab and the Raw Text tab.
Specify File Name and Location
Lets you specify a name and location for the report. The file is created when you click
Apply.
420
Writing Operations
About Writing Audio Montages Rich Text Tab
CD Tracks
Allows you to select whether you want to create an audio CD report for all tracks or
for a specific track group.
Font/Font Size
Determines the font and font size to use in the report.
Header Image
Lets you select an image to be inserted at the top of the report.
Center Image
Centers the image horizontally. If deactivated, the image is placed on the left.
Header
Adds general information at the start of the report.
Custom Text
Lets you enter text to be inserted at the top of the report. To insert custom variables,
right-click the text field.
Extra Lines
Lets you select which of the following information you want to add to the header:
●
Date
●
Audio Montage Name
●
UPC/EAN Code
●
Number of Tracks
●
Disc Duration
Skip Lines with Empty Values
If this option is activated, a line is not added to the report if the line contains an
empty variable.
Ignore CD Pre-Gap
If this option is activated, the default 2 second gap at the start of a red-book CD is
ignored.
ISRC
Adds a column to the report to display the ISRC code.
Pre-Emphasis Status
Adds a column to the report to display the track pre-emphasis status.
Copy Status
Adds a column to the report to display the copy status of the track.
Time Details
Adds a description of the pause, track start, and possible sub-indexes to the report.
Pause
If this option is activated, the pause information is included in the report.
Sub-Indexes
If this option is activated, track sub-indexes are described in the report.
Sub-Indexes Relative to Track
Sets the sub-index values to be relative to the start of the corresponding track. If
deactivated, they are relative to the start of the CD.
421
Writing Operations
About Writing Audio Montages Start Time (in Audio Montage)
Adds a column to the report to display the event times from the start of the audio
montage.
Start Time (on CD)
Adds a column to the report to display the event times from the start of the CD.
CD-Text
If this option is activated, the CD-Text is included in the report. You can specify which
CD-Text information you want to include in the report.
Output Format
Lets you select the output format for the report.
●
HTML generates an HTML file with a UTF-8 character format.
●
Adobe PDF generates a PDF file.
●
Print generates a preview of the report, allowing you to print the report. If no
printer is connected, the preview is empty.
●
XML generates an XML file that includes the CD information.
●
CSV generates a CSV file that can be imported in a spreadsheet. The CSV file
can only save the main properties of the CD report. You can set the type CSV
delimiter in the Global Preferences dialog on the Formats tab.
Value Format
Opens the Value Formats dialog, where you can edit the format of the autogenerated values. These variables are part of any presets saved for this dialog.
Raw Text Tab
Template
Lets you select a template for the report layout. When selecting Custom, you can
also create your own cue sheet template.
422
Writing Operations
About Writing Audio Montages Cue sheet field
Lets you write a cue sheet.
Copy to Clipboard
Copies the text to the clipboard.
Cue Sheet Templates
A cue sheet is an alternate form of the CD report, based on raw UTF-8 text, and can be
customized in several ways. Creating a cue sheet requires an understanding of computers and
some knowledge about programming, because it makes use of the commands and variables
concept.
Cue sheets are organized in the following way: There are a number of codes, commands, and
variables, which you place in a text file – the template. If you ask the program to generate a cue
sheet, it creates the text file based on the codes it finds in the template.
If the program encounters a variable, it replaces this with some information about the CD. For
example, there is a variable called “NUM_TRACKS”. When the program finds this, it replaces it
with the actual number of tracks in the CD.
Commands, on the other hand, are instructions for the program to do something. For example,
the command “TIMECODE SEPARATOR =” followed by a few special characters, instructs the
program what characters should be inserted between time code values, so that you can get time
code values printed out in the format 00:00:00.00, “00 00 00 00”, or anything else you prefer.
The following codes can be entered for specific purposes:
$
A variable. The text that follows right after the “$” is the command name, for
example, “$TITLE”. A variable can occur anywhere on a line, and there can be any
number of variables on a line.
#
A command. The text that follows after the “#” is the command name, for example,
“#FOR EACH TRACK”. There can only be one command per line and there should not
be anything else on that line.
;
If a line starts with a semi-colon “;”, the line is interpreted as a comment. Nothing on
such a line is used in the cue sheet. This is useful for making notes, for example.
All other text characters can be entered on their own lines or among the variables, and are
used as they are. For example, if you type “Title: $TITLE” and the title you have entered is
“My Greatest Hits!”, the text “Title: My Greatest Hits” appears in the cue sheet.
To find out more about the available commands and how they are used, you can open the
included templates and study them. The following variables are available:
Track Number
T0
As decimal number “1” or “22”
T1
Blank Justified Two Digit Number “1” or “22”
T2
Zero Justified Two Digit Number “01” or “22”
423
Writing Operations
About Writing Audio Montages Track Index
I0
As decimal number “1” or “22”
I1
Blank Justified Two Digit Number “1” or “22”
I2
Zero Justified Two Digit Number “01” or “22”
Copy Protection Status
C1
“x” or “ ”
C2
“Y” or “N”
Emphasis Status
E1
“x” or “ ”
E2
“Y” or “N”
Absolute Time of Index
TIME_IA_0
As decimal number
TIME_IA_1
Blank justified 7 digit decimal number
TIME_IA_2
Time as “hh:mm:ss:ff”
TIME_IA_3
Time as “hh:mm:ss:ff” blank justified, leading zero not displayed
TIME_IA_4
Time as “hh:mm:ss:ff” compressed if there are no hours, none are displayed
TIME_IA_5
Time as “mm:ss:ff” no hours displayed
TIME_IA_6
Time as “mm:ss:ff” blank justified, leading zero not shown, no hours displayed
TIME_IA_7
Time as “mm:ss:ff” no minutes displayed if not required, no hours displayed
TIME_IA_8
Time format as “1h 2mn 3s 4f”
TIME_IA_9
Time format as “1h 2mn 3s”
424
Writing Operations
About Writing Audio Montages Index Time Relative to Start of CD
TIME_IR_0
As decimal number
TIME_IR_1
Blank justified 7 digit decimal number
TIME_IR_2
Time as “hh:mm:ss:ff”
TIME_IR_3
Time as “hh:mm:ss:ff” blank justified, leading zero not displayed
TIME_IR_4
Time as “hh:mm:ss:ff” compressed if there are no hours, none are displayed
TIME_IR_5
Time as “mm:ss:ff” no hours displayed
TIME_IR_6
Time as “mm:ss:ff” blank justified, leading zero not shown, no hours displayed
TIME_IR_7
Time as “mm:ss:ff” no minutes displayed if not required, no hours displayed
TIME_IR_8
Time format as “1h 2mn 3s 4f”
TIME_IR_9
Time format as “1h 2mn 3s”
Index Time Relative to Start of Track
TIME_IT_0
As decimal number
TIME_IT_1
Blank justified 7 digit decimal number
TIME_IT_2
Time as “hh:mm:ss:ff”
TIME_IT_3
Time as “hh:mm:ss:ff” blank justified, leading zero not displayed
TIME_IT_4
Time as “hh:mm:ss:ff” compressed if there are no hours, none are displayed
TIME_IT_5
Time as “mm:ss:ff” no hours displayed
TIME_IT_6
Time as “mm:ss:ff” blank justified, leading zero not shown, no hours displayed
TIME_IT_7
Time as “mm:ss:ff” no minutes displayed if not required, no hours displayed
TIME_IT_8
Time format as “1h 2mn 3s 4f”
425
Writing Operations
About Writing Audio Montages TIME_IT_9
Time format as “1h 2mn 3s”
Pause Length
TIME_PA_0
As decimal number
TIME_PA_1
Blank justified 7 digit decimal number
TIME_PA_2
Time as “hh:mm:ss:ff”
TIME_PA_3
Time as “hh:mm:ss:ff” blank justified, leading zero not displayed
TIME_PA_4
Time as “hh:mm:ss:ff” compressed if there are no hours, none are displayed
TIME_PA_5
Time as “mm:ss:ff” no hours displayed
TIME_PA_6
Time as “mm:ss:ff” blank justified, leading zero not shown, no hours displayed
TIME_PA_7
Time as “mm:ss:ff” no minutes displayed if not required, no hours displayed
TIME_PA_8
Time format as “1h 2mn 3s 4f”
TIME_PA_9
Time format as “1h 2mn 3s”
Track Length
TIME_TR_0
As decimal number
TIME_TR_1
Blank justified 7 digit decimal number
TIME_TR_2
Time as “hh:mm:ss:ff”
TIME_TR_3
Time as “hh:mm:ss:ff” blank justified, leading zero not displayed
TIME_TR_4
Time as “hh:mm:ss:ff” compressed if there are no hours, none are displayed
TIME_TR_5
Time as “mm:ss:ff” no hours displayed
TIME_TR_6
Time as “mm:ss:ff” blank justified, leading zero not shown, no hours displayed
TIME_TR_7
Time as “mm:ss:ff” no minutes displayed if not required, no hours displayed
426
Writing Operations
About Writing Audio Montages TIME_TR_8
Time format as “1h 2mn 3s 4f”
TIME_TR_9
Time format as “1h 2mn 3s”
CD Length
TIME_CD_0
As decimal number
TIME_CD_1
Blank justified 7 digit decimal number
TIME_CD_2
Time as “hh:mm:ss:ff”
TIME_CD_3
Time as “hh:mm:ss:ff” blank justified, leading zero not displayed
TIME_CD_4
Time as “hh:mm:ss:ff” compressed if there are no hours, none are displayed
TIME_CD_5
Time as “mm:ss:ff” no hours displayed
TIME_CD_6
Time as “mm:ss:ff” blank justified, leading zero not shown, no hours displayed
TIME_CD_7
Time as “mm:ss:ff” no minutes displayed if not required, no hours displayed
TIME_CD_8
Time format as “1h 2mn 3s 4f”
TIME_CD_9
Time format as “1h 2mn 3s”
Various
NUM_TRACKS
Total number of tracks as decimal number
UPC
UPC/EAN code
ISRC
ISRC code
FILE
File name (no path)
PFILE
File name (with path)
TRACK_NAME
Track name
TRACK_COMMENT
Track comment
427
Writing Operations
Write DVD-Audio Function Creating a Cue Sheet Template
You can create a cue sheet template and load it each time you want to create an audio CD report.
PROCEDURE
1.
Open an audio montage that contains CD tracks.
The audio montage must be in stereo mode.
2.
Select Tool Windows > CD.
3.
In the CD window, select Functions > Generate Audio CD Report.
4.
Select the Raw Text tab.
5.
In the Template section, select Custom to start with an empty cue sheet, or select one of
the available cue sheets to modify them.
6.
Enter the cue sheet information.
7.
Activate Specify File Name and Location, and specify a file name and location.
8.
Click Apply to save the cue sheet template.
Write DVD-Audio Function
Before writing an audio montage to DVD-Audio, the contents of the DVD-Audio project must be
rendered to an AUDIO_TS folder. This folder is automatically added to a Data CD/DVD project,
from which you can start the actual writing operation.
DVD-Audio Creation Dialog
This dialog allows you to make settings for the DVD-Audio creation.
●
To open the DVD-Audio Creation dialog, in the DVD-Audio window, set up the DVD-Audio
project and click Write DVD-Audio.
Test Only
If this option is activated, all data is checked and rendered in memory to know if the
DVD-Audio project is complete and ready for rendering. When the test is finished, a
report opens.
Render Each Audio Montage with Its Own Plug-in Set
If this option is activated, each audio montage is rendered with its own Master
Section effects.
Use Current Master Section Settings for All Audio Montages
If this option is activated, all audio montages are rendered using the selected Master
Section settings.
Ignore
If this option is activated, the audio montages are rendered without any Master
Section effects.
Output Folder
Lets you select the destination folder for the rendered files.
428
Writing Operations
Write DVD-Audio Function Rendering the DVD-Audio
To be able to write the DVD-Audio project to disc or ISO image, you must render the DVD-Audio
project first.
PREREQUISITE
Set up the DVD-Audio project.
If you want to use the Master Section plug-ins when rendering the project, set up the Master
Section to your liking.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the DVD-Audio window, select the Edit tab.
2.
In the Burn section, click Write DVD-Audio.
3.
In the Master Section plug-ins section, select one of the following options:
●
Render Each Audio Montage with Its Own Plug-in Set
●
Use Current Master Section Settings for All Audio Montages
●
Ignore
4.
Specify an output folder.
5.
Click OK.
RESULT
The Write Data CD/DVD dialog opens, allowing you to write your DVD-Audio project.
Write Data CD/DVD Dialog When Writing DVD-Audio
In this dialog, you can write your DVD-Audio project to a CD/DVD or an ISO file.
●
To open the Write Data CD/DVD dialog, set up the DVD-Audio project in the DVD-Audio
window and click Write DVD-Audio. After the rendering operation is finished, the Write
Data CD/DVD dialog opens.
Device
Lets you select the disc writer that you want to use, or select ISO Image to write a file
on the hard drive. You can use an ISO image to create an optical medium that you
want to write to disc in the future.
NOTE
On Mac, insert a medium in the drive after opening WaveLab Pro. Otherwise, the
drive is under the control of the operating system and is not available for WaveLab
Pro.
429
Writing Operations
Write DVD-Audio Function Refresh
Scans the system for connected optical devices. This is done automatically when this
dialog opens. Click the update icon after you insert a new blank medium, to update
the speed menu.
NOTE
On Mac, insert a medium in the drive after opening WaveLab Pro. Otherwise, the
drive is under the control of the operating system and is not available for WaveLab
Pro.
Eject Optical Medium
Ejects the optical medium present in the selected drive.
Device Information
Opens the Device Information dialog that shows information about the selected
device.
Erase Optical Disc
Erases the optical disc present in the selected drive, provided it is a rewritable
medium. If ISO Image is selected, clicking the button erases the existing ISO file.
ISO File Name
If ISO Image is selected on the Device menu, specify the file name and file location
of the ISO file in the text field.
Speed
Allows you to select the writing speed. The highest speed depends both on the
capabilities of your writing device and the medium present in the device.
Test Only, Do Not Write
If this option is activated, clicking OK initiates a simulation of writing the CD. If this
test is passed, the real write operation will succeed. If the test fails, try again at a
lower writing speed.
Verify After Write
If this option is activated, the data on the medium is automatically verified after the
writing process.
Eject Before Verifying
If this option is activated, the disc is ejected and retracted before the verification
process, to force the drive out of the write state. This is only possible if the disc can
be retracted automatically.
Eject After Completion
If this option is activated, the medium is ejected after the writing operation.
Writing a DVD-Audio Project to a Data CD/DVD
After rendering the DVD-Audio project, you can write it to a Data-CD/DVD.
PREREQUISITE
You have set up and rendered a DVD-Audio project.
IMPORTANT
On Mac, insert a medium in the drive after opening WaveLab Pro. Otherwise, the drive is under
the control of the operating system and not available for WaveLab Pro.
430
Writing Operations
Write DVD-Audio Function PROCEDURE
1.
Insert an empty DVD into your drive.
2.
In the DVD-Audio window, select the Edit tab.
3.
In the Burn section, click Check Conformity to check that all settings are compatible with
the Red Book standard.
4.
Click Write DVD-Audio.
5.
In the Master Section plug-ins section, select one of the following options:
●
Render Each Audio Montage with Its Own Plug-in Set
●
Use Current Master Section Settings for All Audio Montages
●
Ignore
6.
Specify an output folder.
7.
Click OK.
8.
In the Write Data CD/DVD dialog, open the Device pop-up menu, and select the disc
writing device that you want to use.
9.
Select the writing speed from the Speed pop-up menu.
10.
Optional: Activate one or several of the following options:
11.
●
Activate Test Only, Do Not Write if you want to test if the writing operation would
be successful.
●
Activate Verify After Write if you want the file to be verified after the writing
operation.
●
Activate Eject Before Verifying and/or Eject After Completion if you want the disc
to be automatically ejected at the corresponding situations.
Click OK to start the writing operation.
Writing a DVD-Audio Project to an ISO Image
If you want to save an entire DVD-Audio project without actually writing a DVD, you can save the
project as an ISO image.
PREREQUISITE
Set up and render a DVD-Audio project.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the DVD-Audio window, select the Edit tab.
2.
In the Burn section, click Check Conformity to check if all settings are compatible with the
Red Book standard.
3.
Click Write DVD-Audio.
4.
In the Master Section plug-ins section, select one of the following options:
●
Render Each Audio Montage with Its Own Plug-in Set
●
Use Current Master Section Settings for All Audio Montages
●
Ignore
5.
Specify an output folder.
6.
Click OK.
7.
In the Write Data CD/DVD dialog, open the Device pop-up menu and select ISO Image.
8.
Specify an ISO file name and location.
9.
Click OK to start the writing operation.
431
Writing Operations
Data CD/DVD Projects 10.
When the operation is finished, click OK.
Data CD/DVD Projects
A data CD/DVD project can be used to compile and write a data-only CD, DVD, Blu-ray, or to
write to ISO image. You can enter a name for your disc and change the disc file structure before
writing your data to a CD, DVD, Blu-ray, or ISO image.
Creating a Data CD/DVD Project
A data CD/DVD project can be used to compile and write a data-only CD, DVD, Blu-ray, or to write
to ISO image.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > Tools > Data CD/DVD.
2.
Add files to the project, using one of the following methods:
3.
●
Drag the files from the WaveLab Pro File Browser window or from the File Explorer/
macOS Finder into the Data CD/DVD window.
●
Drag an audio file or audio montage tab into the Data CD/DVD window.
●
Right-click a file tab, and select Add to > Data CD/DVD.
Optional: Click New Folder, specify a folder name, and arrange the files by dragging.
Writing a Data CD/DVD Project
PREREQUISITE
Open the Data CD/DVD dialog, and add the files that you want to write to a data CD/DVD.
PROCEDURE
1.
Click Write Data CD/DVD.
2.
Select a writing device.
3.
●
If you select ISO Image, specify a file name and file location.
●
If you select a CD/DVD writer, specify the writing speed and make further settings.
Click OK.
Data CD/DVD Dialog
In this dialog, you can create a data CD/DVD project, and write it to a CD, DVD, Blu-ray, or an ISO
image.
●
To open the Data CD/DVD dialog, select File > Tools > Data CD/DVD.
432
Writing Operations
Data CD/DVD Projects Media
Allows you to select the media type you want to write. If the media size that you
want to use is not listed, select the media type that offers the size closest to your
requirements.
Volume Name
Allows you to specify the volume name of the CD/DVD.
Open File Explorer/macOS Finder
Opens the File Explorer/macOS Finder to show the location of the selected file.
Remove Selected Files and Folders
Removes the selected files and folders from the CD/DVD project.
New Folder
Creates a folder. You can also create sub-folders.
Write Data CD/DVD
Opens the Write Data CD/DVD dialog from which you can write the medium.
Data CD/DVD list
Shows the contents of the CD/DVD project, and the size creation date, and number of
files.
Available space on media
Indicates how much space is used on the media. The Total Size of the data CD/DVD
project is shown below the data CD/DVD list.
Reset
Removes all files from the data CD/DVD project.
Write Data CD/DVD Dialog
In this dialog, you can write a data CD/DVD project to a CD/DVD or an ISO file.
●
To open the Write Data CD/DVD dialog, open the Data CD/DVD dialog and click Write
Data CD/DVD.
433
Writing Operations
Data CD/DVD Projects Device
Allows you to select the disc writer that you want to use or select ISO Image to
write a file on the hard drive. Writing an ISO image creates a copy of a future optical
medium.
NOTE
On the Mac, open WaveLab Pro without a medium in the drive. Otherwise, the drive
is under the control of the operating system and is not available for WaveLab Pro.
Refresh
Scans the system for connected optical devices. This is done automatically, when this
dialog opens. Click the update icon after you insert a new blank medium, to update
the speed menu.
Eject Optical Medium
Ejects the optical medium present in the selected drive.
Device Information
Opens the Device Information dialog that shows information about the selected
device.
Erase Optical Medium/ISO Image
Erases the optical medium present in the selected drive, provided it is a rewritable
medium. If ISO Image is selected, clicking the button deletes the existing ISO file.
ISO File Name
If ISO Image is selected in the Device menu, specify the file name and file location of
the ISO file in the text field.
Speed
Allows you to select the writing speed. The highest speed depends on the capabilities
of your writing device and the medium present in the device.
Test Only, Do Not Write
If this option is activated, clicking OK initiates a simulation of writing the CD. If this
test is passed, the real write operation will succeed. If the test fails, try again at a
lower writing speed.
Create CD-Extra Session
If this option is activated, the data is written in a new session, after the audio tracks.
This creates a CD Extra, also known as Enhanced CD and CD Plus. For this to work,
the CD in the drive must have audio tracks on it, written with the CD Extra option.
Otherwise the operation fails.
434
Writing Operations
Audio CD Formats Verify After Write
If this option is activated, the data on the medium is automatically verified after the
writing process.
Eject Before Verifying
If this option is activated, the disc is ejected and retracted before the verification
process, to force the drive out of the write state.
NOTE
This is only possible if the disc can be retracted automatically.
Eject After Completion
If this option is activated, the disc is ejected after the writing operation.
Audio CD Formats
This chapter provides you with background information on the CD format, to help you better
understand how to create your own CDs.
Basic CD Formats
There are a number of different formats for the contents of a CD disc. For example, audio CDs,
CD-ROMS, and CD-I. These are all slightly different.
The audio CD specification is called Red Book. It is this standard to which WaveLab Pro conforms.
NOTE
Red Book CD is not a real file format. All the audio on the CD is saved in one big file. This is
different from hard disks, for example, where each file is saved separately. Keep in mind that all
the audio is in fact one long stream of digital data.
CD-Extra Support
CD-Extra is a format that allows for the writing of both audio and data on a single CD, just like
Mixed Mode CDs. When writing an audio CD, you can prepare it for CD-Extra support (also known
as Enhanced CD or CD Plus).
The difference is that when Mixed Mode CDs are written with the audio placed on the last tracks
of the CD, for CDs in the CD-Extra format the audio is contained in the first tracks of the CD, and
the data follows subsequently.
All features of the Red Book audio CD are possible with CD-Extra, unlike with Mixed Mode CDs.
After an audio CD has been written with CD-Extra support, the data can be added to the CD in a
separate session, by creating and writing a data CD project.
NOTE
Some computer CD drives may not recognize CDs in the CD-Extra format.
Types of Events on an Audio CD
There are three types of events that can be used to specify various sections of audio on the CD.
Track start
There can be up to 99 tracks on one CD. Each is identified by its start point only.
435
Writing Operations
Audio CD Formats Track sub-index
On advanced CD players, a track can be divided into sub-indexes (sometimes called
only indexes). These are used to identify important positions within a track. There
can be 98 sub-indexes in each track. However, because it is difficult and timeconsuming to search for and locate to a sub-index, many CD players ignore this
information.
Pause
A pause is added before each track. Pauses can be of variable lengths. Some CD
players indicate the pauses between tracks on their displays.
Frames, Positions, Small Frames, and Bits
The data on an audio CD is divided into frames.
A frame consists of 588 stereo samples. 75 frames make up one second of audio. This is because
75 x 588 = 44100, and because the sampling frequency of the CD format is 44100 Hz (samples
per second), this equals one second of audio. When you specify positions on the CD, in WaveLab
Pro, you do it in the format mm:ss:ff (minutes:seconds:frames). The frame values go from 0 to 74,
because there are 75 frames to a second.
Technically, there is no way to specify something smaller than a frame on a CD. One effect of this
is that if the sample length of a track on the CD does not equal a perfect number of frames, some
blank audio must be added at the end. Another effect of this is that when you play the CD, you
can never locate to anything closer than a frame. If you need some data in the middle of a frame,
you still have to read the whole frame. Again, this is unlike a hard disk, where you can retrieve
any byte on the disk, without reading the surrounding data.
But frames are not the smallest block of data on a CD. There is also something called “small
frames”. A small frame is a container of 588 bits. 98 small frames together make up one regular
frame. In each small frame there is only room for six stereo samples, which means that a lot
of space is left for data other than the actual audio. There is information for encoding, laser
synchronization, error correction, and the PQ data to identify the track boundaries. This PQ data
is of major importance to anyone who wants to create their own CD, and handled effortless in
WaveLab Pro.
PQ Codes Handling
The PQ codes convey information about track start, sub-indexes, and pauses.
However, when creating a CD there are a number of rules you must take into account. For
example, there should be some silent frames before each track, sub-indexes should be slightly
early, there should be pauses at the beginning and end of the entire CD, etc.
When creating CDs from an audio montage, these rules and settings are handled by the CD
Wizard. If you do not change these settings, you will get default values that ensure your CD will
work properly. However, you can still adjust the PQ codes to your liking. We recommend to leave
the settings as they are.
WaveLab Pro only exposes intuitive CD markers and automatically generates the corresponding
PQ codes to be written to CD.
ISRC Codes
International Standard Recording Code (ISRC) is an identification that is only used on CDs
intended for commercial distribution. WaveLab Pro allows you to specify an ISRC code for each
audio track. These codes are provided by your publisher or clients.
The ISRC code is structured as follows:
●
Country Code (2 ASCII characters)
436
Writing Operations
Audio CD Formats ●
Owner Code (3 ASCII characters or digits)
●
Recording Year (2 digits or ASCII characters)
●
Serial Number (5 digits or ASCII characters)
The groups of characters are often presented with hyphens to make them easier to read, but
hyphens are not part of the code.
Importing ISRC Codes
You can import ISRC codes that has been written in a standard text file. The ISRC text file must
have one ISRC code per line.
●
To import ISRC codes, select Functions > Import ISRC Codes from Text File in the CD
window, select the text file that you want to import, and click Open.
UPC/EAN Codes
UPC/EAN code – the Universal Product Code/European Article Number, is a catalog number for
an item (such as a CD) intended for commercial distribution. On a CD, the code is also called the
Media Catalog Number and there is one such code per disc. These codes are provided by your
publisher or clients.
UPC is a 12-digit barcode widely used in the USA and Canada. EAN-13 is a 13-digit barcoding
standard (12 + a checksum digit) defined by the GS1 standards organization. EAN is now
renamed as International Article Number, but the abbreviation has been retained.
Pre-Emphasis
CD pre-emphasis refers to process designed to increase, within a band of frequencies, the
magnitude of some (usually higher) frequencies compared to the magnitude of other (usually
lower) frequencies in order to improve the overall signal-to-noise ratio by lowering the
frequencies during reproduction.
Pre-emphasis is commonly used in telecommunications, digital audio recording, record cutting
and in FM broadcasting transmissions. The presence of pre-emphasis on a track is sometimes
indicated by a checkmark in the Pre-Emphasis
column on the Import Audio CD dialog.
Disc-At-Once – Writing CD-Rs for Duplication Into Real CDs
WaveLab Pro only writes audio CDs in Disc-at-Once mode.
●
If you want to create a CD-R to use as a master for a real CD production, you must write
the CD-R in Disc-At-Once mode. In this mode, the entire disc is written in one pass. There
are other ways of writing a CD, namely Track-At-Once and Multi-Session. If you use these
writing formats, the link blocks created to link the various recording passes together will
be recognized as uncorrectable errors when you try to master from the CD-R. These links
can also result in clicks when playing back the CD.
●
Disc-At-Once mode provides more flexibility when specifying pause lengths between
tracks.
●
Disc-At-Once is the only mode that supports sub-indexes.
Writing On The Fly vs. CD Images
WaveLab Pro writes a CD on the fly, that is, it does not create a CD image before writing. This
method makes writing CDs/DVDs faster and requires less disc space. However, you can also
create an image prior to writing a CD/DVD.
437
Spectral Editing
Spectral editing allows you to edit and process individual frequency ranges instead of the full
frequency spectrum.
Spectral editing is intended for audio restoration of short time ranges. You can also process an
individual frequency range via the Master Section. Spectral editing operates on a spectrum
region, which is defined using one of the spectrum selection tools. The selected region is defined
by a time and a frequency range. This allows you to edit and process audio both in the time
domain and in the frequency domain of the selected region.
Spectral editing can consist of many different types of processing. Although it is developed for
audio restoration, it can also be used for artistic purposes or special effects.
You can perform spectral editing on the left and right channels or on the mid and side channels
of a stereo file.
Spectral editing comprises the following steps:
●
Defining the region that you want to edit.
●
Editing the region with the Spectrum tab by applying filter operations, by copying regions,
or by sending it to the Master Section to apply effects.
Spectrogram
The Spectrogram in the wave window shows the frequency spectrum in relation to time.
●
To see the spectrum view of the audio file in the Audio Editor, click Spectrum below the
Waveform display.
●
To see the spectrum view of the audio file and activate spectral editing mode, select the
Spectrum tab in the Audio Editor.
●
To switch between the spectrum view for the left/right channels and the mid/side
channels, click the LR/MS button at the bottom left of the spectrogram.
Each vertical line represents the frequency spectrum at a particular time position.
●
You can make time selections and frequency selections in the Spectrogram.
438
Spectral Editing
Wavelet Display If you make frequency selections in the Spectrogram, you can use the WaveLab Pro
spectrum editing tools on the Spectrum tab to edit the spectrogram. If you point the
mouse cursor at a defined frequency selection, a tooltip displays the frequency range and
the time range for the current selection.
You can also use the WaveLab Pro editing tools on the Edit tab to edit the spectrogram.
●
Low frequencies are shown at the bottom of the display and high frequencies at the top.
●
In the Spectrogram Options dialog, you can define how the frequency spectrum is
displayed.
●
The vertical ruler on the left shows the frequency range in Hz.
●
The status bar shows the time/frequency position of the mouse cursor.
●
If you are in spectrum editing mode, you can right-click in the spectrogram to open a
context menu with additional options.
Wavelet Display
The Wavelet display shows a higher time resolution in high frequencies and a higher frequency
resolution in lower frequencies.
●
To see the Wavelet display of the audio file in the Audio Editor, click Wavelet below the
Waveform display.
●
To switch between the Wavelet display for the left/right channels and the mid/side
channels, click the LR/MS button at the bottom left of the Wavelet display.
Each vertical line represents the frequency spectrum at a particular time position.
●
You can make time selections and frequency selections in the Wavelet display.
If you make frequency selections in the Wavelet display, you can use the WaveLab Pro
spectrum editing tools on the Spectrum tab to edit the wavelet. If you point the mouse
cursor at a defined frequency selection, a tooltip displays the frequency range and the
time range for the current selection.
You can also use the WaveLab Pro editing tools on the Edit tab to edit the wavelet.
●
Low frequencies are shown at the bottom of the display and high frequencies at the top.
●
In the Spectrogram Options dialog, you can define how the frequency spectrum is
displayed. It can be represented in color or in black and white.
●
The vertical ruler on the left shows the frequency range in Hz.
●
The status bar shows the time/frequency position of the mouse cursor.
●
If you are in spectrum editing mode, you can right-click in the Wavelet display to open a
context menu with additional options.
439
Spectral Editing
Spectrogram Options Dialog NOTE
In the Wavelet display, you cannot zoom in and out as far as in the Spectrogram due to
performance constraints.
RELATED LINKS
Spectrogram Options Dialog on page 440
Spectrogram Options Dialog
The Spectrogram Options dialog allows you to define how the frequency spectrum is displayed
in the Spectrogram and in the Wavelet display.
●
To open the Spectrogram Options dialog, click Spectrogram Options.
The following options are available:
Color Scheme
Allows you to customize the color scheme for the frequency levels in the
Spectrogram and the Wavelet display.
●
To change the color scheme for different frequency levels, move the color
markers with the mouse.
●
To change the color of a marker, right-click it and select a new color.
●
To create a new color marker, double-click on the color bar.
Magnitude Range
Allows you to specify the spectral amplitude range that you want to display in the
Spectrogram and the Wavelet display.
Opacity of Selection
Allows you to specify the opacity of the selection in the Spectrogram or the Wavelet
display.
Frequency Scale
Allows you to select the scale on which the frequency spectrum is displayed in
the Spectrogram. If Log is activated, the frequency spectrum is displayed on
a logarithmic scale, thus spacing the octaves equally. This comes closest to the
perception of pitch of the human ear. Mel, Bark, and ERB are psycho-acoustic scales.
FFT Bands
Allows you to adjust the trade-off between temporal resolution and frequency
resolution in the Spectrogram. If you specify a higher value, more frequencies are
analyzed but they are located less accurately in the time domain.
440
Spectral Editing
Spectrum Tab FFT Window
Allows you to select the shape that most effectively reduces the artifacts of the audio
analysis.
Wavelet Bands
Allows you to set the number of bands per octave for the Wavelet display.
Presets
Allows you to save and restore presets for spectrum process settings.
Spectrum Tab
The Spectrum tab allows you to use high-quality linear-phase filters to process a spectrum range
selection for audio restoration and processing.
Settings
The Settings section allows you to customize the Spectrogram and the Wavelet display.
Display Options
Allows you to define how the frequency spectrum is displayed.
Spectrum Settings
Allows you to make settings for the Spectrogram and the Wavelet display.
To open the Spectrum Settings dialog, click the arrow icon in the lower right of the
Settings section.
●
If Show Information about Selections is activated and you hover over a
spectrum selection, a tooltip in the Spectrogram and the Wavelet display
shows you information about the selection.
●
If Show Magnitude Range Slider below Spectrum and Wavelet Display is
activated, a slider below the Spectrogram and the Wavelet display allows you
to specify the minimum and maximum spectrum values that are displayed.
The minimum and maximum values represent frequency amplitudes. The
left color of the color scheme determines the color of the amplitudes that are
equal to or below the minimum value. The right color of the color scheme
determines the color of the amplitudes that are equal to or above the
maximum value.
Selection
The Selection section allows you to select the spectrum that you want to process. You can undo/
redo all selection operations.
Time Selection
This tool allows you to select a time range. This deactivates the spectrum editing
functions.
Rectangle Selection
This tool allows you to select a frequency range with fixed bottom and top
frequencies.
441
Spectral Editing
Spectrum Tab Play
This tool allows you to play back the audio file at the position where you click.
Lasso Selection
This tool allows you to draw a free shape to make a spectrum selection.
Brush Selection
This tool allows you to paint a spectrum selection with a round brush. You can
change the size of the brush.
Magic Wand
This tool allows you to click on the spectrogram and automatically select the
surrounding spectral content that has a similar dB magnitude, according to the Time
Expansion and Frequency Expansion values.
Snap Mode
If this option is activated, the mouse cursor snaps to the spectral hot points when
creating a selection with the Lasso Selection or the Rectangle Selection.
Selection Modes
The selection options allow you to add and remove spectrum selections.
●
New Selection allows you to create a new selection in the spectrum while
removing the old selection.
●
Add Selection allows you to add another selection to the spectrum while also
keeping the old selections. You can also press Shift and click with the mouse
to add a selection.
●
Remove From Selection allows you to remove parts of existing selections.
You can also press Ctrl/Cmd-Shift and click with the mouse to remove parts of
an existing selection.
You can click on a selection and move it. To only allow horizontal movement, Shiftclick the selection and move the mouse. To only allow vertical movement, press
Alt-Shift, click the selection, and move the mouse.
Zoom Selection
Zooms in on the selected region on both the time and frequency domain.
Invert Selection
Inverts the frequency selection inside the selected time range.
Deselect All Regions
Deselects all frequency selections.
442
Spectral Editing
Spectrum Tab Harmonics
Allows you to add harmonics to the spectrum selection while keeping the shape of
the selection. By default, no harmonics are added.
Edit Settings
Allows you to make settings for the Spectrum and the Wavelet display.
●
If Group Editing is activated and more than one region is selected, you can
move and resize all selected regions simultaneously. You can also double-click
a region to activate or deactivate group editing for this selection.
To remove a region from a group, right-click a region and select Deselect This
Region.
To deselect all selected regions, double-click in the Spectrogram or the
Wavelet display or press Esc.
When Group Editing is deactivated, you can individually group regions. Press
Shift and click the regions that you want to group. You can then move or
resize regions without changing other regions.
●
If Show Resizing Frame is activated, a frame encompasses the selected
regions. This allows you to resize the selected regions.
Channel Selection
Allows you to select if the spectrum selection should be on either the left channel,
the right channel, or both channels.
NOTE
If there is no spectrum selection, you can also press Shift and use one of the
spectrum selection tools to make a selection on either the left or the right channel. If
there is a spectrum selection, you can press Shift to add another selection.
Select until Start of File/Select until End of File
Extends the selection to the start/end of the audio file.
Select until Top/Select until Bottom
Extends the selection to the top/bottom of the frequency axis.
443
Spectral Editing
Spectrum Tab Share Selection
If this option is activated, you can share a selection among audio files of the same
file group. This allows you to use the same selection in all audio files of a stem, for
example. The selection must fit in the other audio file.
To share a selection in another audio file of the same file group, activate Share
Selection, make a selection, and select another audio file tab.
NOTE
You have to apply the processing to each audio file individually.
Crop
Removes all audio outside of the selection.
Text Selection
Use the Rectangle Selection tool to select a rectangle that you want to replace with
a selection that outlines text. This allows you to create a watermark in your spectrum
to protect your audio, for example.
Range Selection
Opens the Range Selection dialog. This dialog allows you to define selection ranges
and frequency ranges very accurately.
Define and Copy
Source at Cursor
Duplicates the selection rectangle at the current cursor position and defines it as
source region for copy operations. This ensures that the selection to copy and the
selected region that you want to edit have the same size. This allows you to quickly
find the best source region to replace the destination region.
Mix
Allows you to mix the source frequency with the target frequency. 100 % means all of
the source region is copied to the target region.
Copy
Copies the selected audio spectrum to the clipboard. If you close the audio file from
which you copied the audio spectrum, the clipboard content is deleted. If you modify
the audio spectrum in the source audio file, the clipboard is updated accordingly.
Paste Exactly
If Source at Cursor is activated, Paste Exactly pastes the defined source region
exactly.
If Source at Cursor is deactivated, Paste Exactly pastes the clipboard content.
Paste Ambience
Pastes an average of the frequencies of the source region, blurring the original
dynamics and pitches, and making the copied region appear less identifiable.
Depending on the audio material, this may avoid a repetition effect.
444
Spectral Editing
Spectrum Tab Processing
Processing Algorithm
The Processing Algorithm menu allows you to select the type of processing
algorithm that is applied to the selected audio spectrum. The following options are
available:
●
Change Level attenuates or boosts the level of the selected region according
to the set gain.
●
Blur Peaks attenuates or boosts the level of the frequencies with the highest
level in the selection according to the set gain. If the gain is set to a negative
value, these frequencies are blurred. This is useful for removing acoustic
feedback, for example.
●
Dispersion blurs the dynamics and frequency phases of the selected region
according to the set gain without changing the frequency content.
●
Master Section allows you to render Master Section plug-ins to the selection.
●
Fade Out gradually filters out the frequencies in the region along the time
axis, creating a fade out. The Fade Out Shape option in the Processing
section allows you to select a fade out shape.
●
Fade In gradually lets pass frequencies in the region along the time axis,
creating a fade in. The Fade In Shape option in the Processing section allows
you to select a fade in shape.
●
Fade Out then Fade In lets the frequencies fade out and fade in again. The
Fade In Shape and Fade Out Shape options in the Processing section allow
you to select the shapes of the fades.
●
Fade In then Fade Out lets the frequencies fade in and fade out again. The
Fade In Shape and Fade Out Shape options in the Processing section allow
you to select the shapes of the fades.
●
The Noise Mixing options allow you to mix in different types of noise to the
spectrum selection according to the set gain.
●
Transcode Picture allows you to insert a picture into your spectrogram to add
a watermark, for example.
NOTE
It is recommended to display the spectrum with a linear scale, because the
picture scaling is frequency-linear based. You can activate the linear frequency
scale in the Spectrogram Options dialog.
Gain
Determines the level of the filter processing. Negative gain settings attenuate the
effect, positive gain settings boost the effect.
Fade In
Allows you to select a fade in shape for the fade processing algorithms.
445
Spectral Editing
Spectrum Tab Fade Out
Allows you to select a fade out shape for the fade processing algorithms.
Apply
Applies the selected processing algorithm.
Audio Inpainting
The Audio Inpainting algorithm allows you to remove or attenuate sounds in the
spectrum. Audio inpainting restores a spectrum selection based on the content to
the left and to the right of the selection rectangle.
The following options are available:
●
If Show Surrounding Region is activated, you can customize the length of the
surrounding region that the Audio Inpainting function takes into account.
You can resize the surrounding region with the mouse cursor. Only the active
region is customized.
●
Bands allows you to define the number of frequency bands that the algorithm
works on. If you work on rhythmic content or modify high frequencies, use low
values. If you work on harmonic content or modify low frequencies, use high
values.
●
Precision allows you to specify the precision of the audio inpainting. Low
precision results in a more blurry spectrum. High precision results in a more
detailed spectrum. Higher precision settings increase the processing time.
●
Persistence of Original allows you to specify how much of the original
spectrum is kept when audio inpainting is applied to the content inside the
selection rectangle. To ignore the content inside the selection rectangle,
set the value to 0 %. To attenuate the original spectrum inside the selection
rectangle, set the value to 100 %.
Fine-Tuning
Allows you to control the quality of the audio processing.
●
Window allows you to select the smoothing shape that reduces the artifacts of
the audio processing most effectively.
●
Bands allows you to define the number of frequency bands that the algorithm
will work on. If you work on rhythmic content, use low values. If you work
on harmonic content, use high values. Use low values if you modify high
frequencies and bigger values if you modify low frequencies.
●
If Multiresolution is activated, multiple band settings are used at the same
time. This option increases the processing time.
Smoothing
The Smoothing options allow you to create a crossfade between the processed and
the unprocessed signal in the time and in the frequency domain.
The following options are available:
●
Time allows you to set the duration of the crossfade between the processed
and the unprocessed signal in the time domain.
●
Frequencies allows you to create a crossfade in the frequency domain
between the processed and the unprocessed section. If the value is high, the
446
Spectral Editing
Spectrum Processing selected region contains much of the unprocessed signal near the frequency
edges.
●
If Outside is activated, the smoothing effect is applied to the area outside of
the selection.
●
If Inside is activated, the smoothing effect is applied to the area inside of the
selection.
Presets
Allows you to save and restore spectrum processing presets.
Playback
Regular
If this option is activated, all frequencies play back without any kind of filtering when
you press Play.
Solo Selection
If this option is activated, only the selected spectrum is played back when you press
Play.
Mute Selection
If this option is activated, the selected spectrum is muted when you press Play.
RELATED LINKS
Range Selection Dialog on page 26
Spectrum Watermark on page 452
Spectrogram Options Dialog on page 440
Spectrum Processing
Spectrum processing can be used to process short regions of up to 60 seconds offline. This type
of processing can be used to reduce, remove, or replace unwanted sound artifacts in the audio
material with great precision.
NOTE
To apply spectrum processing to regions over 60 seconds, use the Rectangle Selection tool and
activate Master Section in the Processing Algorithm menu.
For example, you can replace a part of a live recording that contains an unwanted noise such as
a mobile phone ring tone, with a copy of a similar region of the spectrum that contains a clean
signal.
NOTE
In general, the spectral copy/paste combination gives the best results if the source and
destination regions are properly chosen.
First, you have to define a time/frequency region. Once a region has been set, you can use the
spectrum processing functions. Filtering operations allow you to filter the selected region in
various ways. Copy operations allow you to copy the spectrum region and apply it to another
region.
447
Spectral Editing
Spectrum Processing Defining a Region for Spectral Editing
All spectral editing functions are applied to a selected region, or from a selection region if
Master Section processing is used. A region that is set in the Spectrogram or the Wavelet
display contains a time range and a frequency range.
PREREQUISITE
Zoom in on the time range where you want to perform spectral editing.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Editor, select the Spectrum tab.
2.
In the Selection section, select one of the spectrum selection tools.
3.
In the Spectrogram or Wavelet display, drag the selection around the region that you
want to edit.
When defining a region in a stereo file, a corresponding region is automatically created in
the other channel.
To define a region only on the right or the left channel, Shift-click while dragging with the
spectrum selection tool.
The selection range is also displayed in the overview display. This allows you to see both
the time domain and the frequency domain of the selection range. You can also resize the
time range for the frequency selection by adjusting the selection edges on the waveform
display.
4.
Optional: Click and drag the defined region to move it.
5.
Optional: Move the cursor over a region edge, and click and drag to resize the defined
region.
AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK
Process the selected region in the Spectrum tab.
Filtering Individual Frequencies
Filtering individual frequencies is useful for audio restoration purposes.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Spectrum tab, select one of the spectrum selection tools in the Selection section.
2.
In the Spectrogram or Wavelet display, make a spectrum selection.
448
Spectral Editing
Spectrum Processing 3.
In the Processing section, select a processing type.
4.
In the Filter Settings section, make the filter settings that you want to use.
5.
Click Apply.
Spectral Editing by Copying Regions
Spectral editing by copying regions is useful for removing unwanted sounds in the audio
material.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Editor, select the Spectrum tab.
2.
In the Selection section, select one of the selection tools.
3.
In the Spectrogram or Wavelet display, define a source region.
4.
In the Define and Copy section, click Copy.
To copy the source region to another audio file, use Ctrl/Cmd-C.
5.
Place the playback cursor at the position that you want to define as the target region.
6.
In the Define and Copy section, use the Mix option to specify how much of the source
region you want to copy to the target region.
7.
Right-click the Paste Exactly/Paste Ambience pop-up menu and select the paste method
that you want to apply. The following options are available:
●
To copy the defined source region to the target region, select Paste Exactly.
●
To copy an average of the frequencies of the source region, blurring the original
dynamics and pitches, and making the copied region appear less identifiable, select
Paste Ambience.
The paste method that you select via the menu will be saved as default.
To paste the source region to another audio file, you can also use Ctrl/Cmd-V.
The audio is pasted and, if Smoothing is activated, crossfaded both in the time domain
and in the frequency domain.
8.
Play back the audio file to hear the result.
Copying Spectral Regions by First Defining a Target Region
Spectral editing by copying regions is useful for removing unwanted sounds in the audio
material. You first define a target region and a source region. Then you copy the audio from the
source region to the target region while using the same frequency range and duration.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Editor, select the Spectrum tab.
2.
In the Selection section, select one of the selection tools.
449
Spectral Editing
Spectrum Processing 3.
In the Spectrogram or Wavelet display, define a target region.
4.
In the Define and Copy section, click Source at Cursor.
5.
Place the playback cursor at the position that you want to define as the source region.
For example, the left rectangle defines the source region at the edit cursor position and the right
rectangle defines the target region.
When you have defined a source region on a single channel of a stereo file, you can click
in the upper part of the left channel or the lower part of the right channel to define the
source region on the other channel. The source region must be in the same audio file.
6.
In the Define and Copy section, use the Mix option to specify how much of the source
region you want to copy to the target region.
7.
Right-click the Paste Exactly/Paste Ambience pop-up menu and select the paste method
that you want to apply. The following options are available:
●
To copy the defined source region to the target region, select Paste Exactly.
●
To copy an average of the frequencies of the source region, blurring the original
dynamics and pitches, and making the copied region appear less identifiable, select
Paste Ambience.
The paste method that you select via the menu will be saved as default.
The audio is copied and, if Smoothing is activated, crossfaded both in the time domain
and in the frequency domain.
8.
Play back the audio file to hear the result.
If Source at Cursor is activated, press F6 to play back the source. If Source at Cursor is
deactivated, F6 plays back the selection.
Rules and Tips for Spectral Editing by Copy Operations
The Source at Cursor function is recommended for copy operations in the Spectrogram and
Wavelet display that are intended for audio restoration purposes. You first define a source
region and a destination region, and then you copy audio from the source region to the
destination region.
●
Setting the source region just before or after the sound to remove can produce very
accurate results, as this region probably contains a similar frequency spectrum as the
target region containing the artifact.
●
In the low to low-mid frequency range, the masking or removal of unwanted artifacts
is difficult to achieve without audible interruptions. Finding a limited frequency area is
important to not interrupt the flow of the audio when removing artifacts.
RELATED LINKS
Copying Spectral Regions by First Defining a Target Region on page 449
450
Spectral Editing
Audio Inpainting Copying Spectral Selections to a New Window
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Spectrogram or Wavelet display, make a spectrum selection.
2.
Right-click the selection and select Copy Selection to New Window.
RESULT
The spectral selection opens in a new window.
Creating New Audio Files from Spectral Selections
You can render a spectrum selection to a new audio file that only contains the selected
frequencies.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Spectrogram or Wavelet display, make a spectrum selection.
2.
In the Selection section of the Spectrum tab, click Invert Selection.
3.
In the Processing section, open the Processing Algorithm pop-up menu and select
Master Section.
4.
In the Master Section, drag the Master Level faders to the bottom.
This reduces unwanted frequencies.
5.
Select the Render tab.
6.
In the Source section, open the pop-up menu and select Selected Audio Range.
7.
In the Result section, select Unnamed File or Named File.
8.
In the Render section, click Start.
RESULT
The rendered audio file opens in a new tab.
Audio Inpainting
The Audio Inpainting algorithm allows you to remove or attenuate sounds in the spectrum.
Audio inpainting restores a spectrum selection based on the content of the surrounding region.
Applying Audio Inpainting
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Editor, select the Spectrum tab.
2.
In the Selection section, select one of the spectrum selection tools.
3.
Click in the Spectrogram or in the Wavelet display and make a spectrum selection around
the region that you want to correct.
4.
Optional: If Show Surrounding Region is activated, you can resize the surrounding region
with the mouse cursor.
The surrounding area of the spectrum selection determines the spectrum that audio
inpainting uses as a source to correct the spectrum selection.
451
Spectral Editing
Spectrum Watermark 5.
In the Processing section, right-click Audio Inpainting and make additional settings.
6.
Click Audio Inpainting.
Spectrum Watermark
You can transcode text and pictures in the spectrum and thereby define a watermark. Other
spectrogram applications are able to display the watermarks. The watermarks are compatible
with lossy encodings.
You can create a watermark file and use the Audio Mixer batch plug-in or the Audio Injector
batch plug-in to apply a watermark to multiple files.
Transcoding a Text in the Spectrogram
You can transcode text in the spectrogram and thereby define a watermark. The transcoding is
audible in the audio file.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Editor, select the Spectrum tab.
2.
In the Selection section, select the Rectangle Selection tool.
3.
In the Spectrogram or in the Wavelet display, define the region in which you want to
apply the text.
NOTE
It is recommended to display the spectrum with a linear scale, because the text scaling is
frequency-linear based. You can activate the linear frequency scale in the Spectrogram
Options dialog.
4.
In the Selection section, click Text Selection.
5.
In the Text Selection dialog, enter the text and click OK.
You can resize and move the text frame.
452
Spectral Editing
Spectrum Watermark 6.
In the Processing section, open the Processing Algorithm menu and select Change Level
or one of the Noise Mixing options.
7.
Specify the Gain level.
For example, if you place the text in the high frequencies and set the Gain to -120  dB, the
text is visible in the spectrum but not audible.
8.
Click Apply.
RESULT
The text is written into the spectrogram.
RELATED LINKS
Spectrum Tab on page 441
Spectrogram Options Dialog on page 440
Transcoding a Picture in the Spectrogram
You can transcode pictures in the spectrogram and thereby define a watermark. The transcoding
is audible in the audio file.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Editor, select the Spectrum tab.
2.
In the Selection section, select the Rectangle Selection tool.
3.
In the Spectrogram or in the Wavelet display, define the region in which you want to
apply the picture.
NOTE
It is recommended to display the spectrum with a linear scale, because the text scaling is
frequency-linear based. You can activate the linear frequency scale in the Spectrogram
Options dialog.
4.
Specify the Gain level.
5.
In the Processing section, open the Processing Algorithm menu and select Transcode
Picture.
6.
In the file browser, select the picture that you want to transcode and click Open.
RESULT
The picture is written into the spectrogram.
453
Spectral Editing
Master Section Processing RELATED LINKS
Spectrum Tab on page 441
Master Section Processing
Master Section mode allows you to process an individual frequency range via the Master
Section.
The selected or non-selected regions of the spectrum can be processed differently. You can also
use a number of filters (bandpass/low-pass/high-pass) to further refine the range of frequencies
to be affected by any Master Section effects.
The signal is split so that one part (selected spectrum or non-selected spectrum) is sent to the
plug-ins, while the other part can be mixed with this processed signal, after the Master Section
output.
The arrows show the three possible routing options for the spectrum region selection. The nonselected spectrum has the same options, although it cannot use the same routing destination as
the region selection.
The spectrum selection goes through the Master Section and the non-selected part goes to the
output mix.
454
Spectral Editing
Master Section Processing Applying Master Section Processing
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Editor, select the Spectrum tab.
2.
In the Selection section, select a selection tool.
3.
In the Spectrogram or in the Wavelet display, define the region in which you want to
apply the plug-in processing.
4.
In the Processing section, open the Processing Algorithm menu and select Master
Section.
5.
Click Apply to apply the settings.
455
Auto Split
The auto split function allows you to automatically split audio files or clips in an audio montage
according to specific rules.
Auto split can create new audio files or audio montage clips referencing the original files. The
new audio files or clips can be automatically named and/or numbered.
Auto Split in Audio Files
You can use the auto split function, for example, to cut a recorded audio file into single takes, to
cut a drum loop into its individual drum hit samples, to output individual tracks from an album
master file, or to silence the regions between audio information in an instrumental take.
You can use auto split to split audio files at the following positions:
●
Markers
●
Regions containing silences
●
Beats using beat detection
●
Specific intervals
●
Specific regions derived from a text file
Auto Split Dialog in the Audio Editor
In this dialog, you can set up auto split rules for audio files.
●
To open the Auto Split dialog for an audio file, select File > Tools, and select Auto Split.
You can also select the Process tab in the Audio Editor, and click Auto Split.
The Auto Split dialog contains a series of pages, with different parameters and options
depending on the selected auto split method.
456
Auto Split
Auto Split in Audio Files On the first page, you specify which files to process. You have the following options:
●
The audio file in the active window.
●
All audio files are in a specified folder.
●
The audio files derived from a file list.
On the second page, you select the type of splitting that you want to perform. The following
types are available:
Split According to Markers
Splits the files at specific marker positions. If you select this option, you can specify
the marker type that will be used for the splitting on the next page.
Split at Specific Intervals
Splits the files at specific time intervals. If you select this option, you can specify the
time interval, that is, the duration of each region, on the next page.
Split at Silences
Splits the files so that all non-silent sections become separate regions. If you select
this option, you can specify the minimum region duration, the minimum duration of
a silent section, and the signal level that should be considered as silence on the next
page.
Split at Beats
Detects beats in the audio material and splits the files at each beat. If you select this
option, you can specify the sensitivity of the beat detection, the minimum beat level
to create a split point, and the minimum region duration on the next page.
Cut Head and Tail
Removes sections from the start and/or end of the files, silent sections, or specified
sections.
Learn Regions from a Text File
Splits an audio file according to a description of regions that is saved in a text file.
Convert Stereo Files to Two Mono Files
Splits stereo files into two mono files.
The third page of the dialog varies according to the selected split method. The following pages of
the dialog are common to all types of auto split, except that some options are grayed out in the
dialogs if they are not applicable.
On the fourth page, you specify what to do with the regions that are created by auto split. You
can save the regions as separate files or create clips and add these to a new or an existing audio
montage. You can also create markers at the split points instead of splitting the files.
On the fifth page, you can insert silence at the start and/or end of the files, or automatically
assign root key note numbers to the files.
On the last page, you specify how to name the files, clips, or markers that are created by auto
split. Options include name as source file name plus a key name or number, or name as specified
in a text file. To open a saved naming scheme file, click Open, select the text file that you want to
open, and click Open.
457
Auto Split
Auto Split in Audio Files The Finish button is available from all pages. If you are sure about your settings, you can click
Finish without having to go to all pages. For example, when you are using a preset and you know
that you do not want to make changes on the last pages, you can click Finish earlier.
Learn Regions From Text File
You can split an audio file according to a description of regions that is saved in a text file.
Each region must be described by a name, a start position, and an end position (or region
length). The text file must be placed in the same folder as the audio file, with the same name, and
with the extension that you specify in the WaveLab Pro dialog (for example, “txt” or “xml”).
You can use four tags to specify the regions.
●
Region name
●
Start
●
End
●
Length
These tags can be customized in the Auto Split dialog. The text file must specify either the End
or the Length parameter.
Each parameter must be located on a separate text line.
The time values must be in samples or in timecode format.
●
Hours:minutes:seconds:samples
You can use three text formats.
●
“Tag”=“Value”: The tag comes first, then “=”, then the value.
●
“Tag” Tabulation “Value”: The tag comes first, then a tabulation, then the value.
●
XML style: The tag comes first, surrounded by < and >, then the value, then the tag
surrounded by </ and >.
Text files must be in UTF-8 format.
458
Auto Split
Auto Split in Audio Montages Example for Using Auto Split for Audio Files
You can split a long recording into samples. This is useful if you are working with a sampler, for
example, HALion.
PROCEDURE
1.
Open an audio file in the Audio Editor.
2.
Select the Process tab.
3.
In the Split section, click Auto Split.
4.
In the Auto Split dialog, select Audio File in Active Window and click Next.
5.
Select Split at Silences and click Next.
6.
Set up the page according to the audio file and click Next.
Adjust the first setting according to the length of the shortest recorded note, the second
setting according to the shortest period of silence between two notes, and the third
setting according to the level of the silence between the notes.
7.
Select Save as Separate Files, specify the format and location for the new files, and click
Next.
8.
On the Options page, activate Assign Key, select Detect Pitch, and click Next.
This way, the correct key is assigned to each sample. If you activate Quantize to Nearest
Semitone, WaveLab Pro sets the key according to the closest semitone. If not, the Detune
setting in the sample may also be adjusted, according to any pitch deviations.
9.
Select the naming option As Audio File Name + Key and click Finish.
RESULT
The file is split according to your settings, and new files are created in the specified location.
Auto Split in Audio Montages
You can use the auto split function to split the active clip. You can use the auto split function in
many situations, for example, to cut a single clip of a recording into separate takes, to cut a drum
loop into its individual drum hit samples, to output individual tracks from an album master file,
or to silence the regions between audio information in an instrumental take.
During the analysis, only the audio files of the audio montage are taken into account. Envelopes
and effects are ignored.
You can use auto split to split the active clip at the following positions:
●
Markers
●
Specific intervals
●
Between silences
●
Beats
Auto Split Dialog in the Audio Montage Window
In this dialog, you can set up auto split rules for audio montages.
●
To open the Auto Split dialog for an audio montage, open the Audio Montage window,
select the Process tab, and click Auto Split.
459
Auto Split
Auto Split in Audio Montages The Auto Split dialog contains a series of pages, with different parameters and options
depending on the selected auto split method.
On the first page, you select the target for the auto split.
On the second page, you select the type of splitting. The following types are available:
Split According to Markers
Splits the files at specific marker positions. If you select this option, you can specify
the marker type that will be used for the splitting on the next page.
Split at Specific Intervals
Splits the files at specific time intervals. If you select this option, you can specify the
time interval, that is, the duration of each region, on the next page.
Split at Silences
Splits the files so that all non-silent sections become separate regions. If you select
this option, you can specify the minimum region duration, the minimum duration of
a silent section, and the signal level that should be considered as silence on the next
page.
Split at Beats
Detects beats in the audio material and splits the files at each beat. If you select this
option, you can specify the sensitivity of the beat detection, the minimum beat level
to create a split point, and the minimum region duration on the next page.
Cut Head and Tail
Removes sections from the start and/or end of the files, silent section or specified
sections.
The third page of the dialog varies according to the selected split method. The following pages of
the dialog are common to all types of auto split, except that some options are grayed out if they
are not applicable.
On the fourth page, you specify what to do with the regions that are created by auto split. You
can split the regions or remove silent parts. You can also create markers at the split points
instead of splitting the files.
On the last page, you specify how to name the clips that are created by auto split. Options
include name as marker names, name as clip name, or name as specified in a text file. To save
this text file, select Save, enter a name and location, and select Save. To open a saved naming
scheme file, click Open, select the text file that you want to open, and click Open.
460
Auto Split
Auto Split in Audio Montages The Finish button is available from all pages. If you are sure about your settings, you can click
Finish without having to go to all pages. For example, when you are using a preset and you know
that you do not want to make changes on the last pages, you can click Finish earlier.
461
Loops
This chapter describes various operations that are related to looping. Looping is used to simulate
the infinite or at least very long sustain of many instrumental sounds. WaveLab Pro has tools for
creating smooth loops, even for the most complex types of sounds.
Basic Looping
Looping a sound allows you to repeat a section of the sample indefinitely in order to create a
sustain of unlimited length. Instrumental sounds in samplers rely on looping organ sounds, for
example.
In WaveLab Pro, loops are defined by loop markers. Loop markers are added, moved, and edited
just as any other type of marker.
To ensure that you find a good loop point, note the following:
●
A long loop usually sounds the most natural. However, if the sound does not have a stable
section in the middle (an even sustain part), it might be hard to find a good long loop.
For example, a piano note which decays continuously is hard to loop because the start
point of the loop is louder than the end point. A flute is much simpler, because the sound
in the sustain section is very stable.
●
A loop should start shortly after the attack, that is, when the sound has stabilized to a
sustaining note.
●
If you set up a long loop, it should end as late as possible but before the sound starts
decaying to silence.
●
Short loops are difficult to position within the sound. Try to position them near the end.
NOTE
More information about looping in general, and the exact capabilities of your sampler in
particular can be found in the manual of the sampler.
Creating a Basic Loop
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Editor, select the audio section that you want to loop.
2.
Right-click above the ruler and select Create Loop from Selection.
3.
On the transport bar, activate Loop.
4.
Play back the loop and adjust the position of the markers to change the loop.
AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK
Creating a loop this way does not necessarily lead to good loops, because clicks or abrupt
changes in timbre at the turning point can occur.
462
Loops
About Refining Loops We suggest that you use this method for setting up the basic length of the loop and then use the
Loop Tweaker and Loop Tone Uniformizer for optimizing.
About Refining Loops
The Loop Tweaker tool allows you to refine a region of audio for seamless looping. Use the Loop
Tweaker to tweak an existing loop selection so that it loops perfectly or use it to create a loop
from material which is not perfectly suited to create a loop.
You can automatically detect loop points by scanning the area between two loop markers. You
can specify parameters that determine how accurate the program should be when suggesting
loop points.
If the automatic search for loop points is not successful, you can process the waveform to allow
for smoother loops by crossfading areas of the waveform close to the loop start and end points.
To use the Loop Tweaker, you must first define a loop using a pair of loop markers.
Loop Points Adjustment Tab
Use the Loop Points Adjustments tab in the Loop Tweaker dialog to manually refine a loop
selection by dragging the waveform to the left/right or by using the automatic search buttons
to find the nearest suitable loop point. The aim is to align the waveforms so that they meet at
a zero-crossing point where the waveforms match as closely as possible. When you adjust your
loop start and end points in the dialog, the start and end loop markers in the main waveform
window adjust accordingly. Note that this movement may not be visible depending on how much
you move the markers and on the zoom factor that you have selected.
It may be helpful to activate Loop on the transport bar during playback so that you can hear the
difference when you adjust the loop markers. If you are not using a crossfade or post-crossfade,
you do not have to click Apply when tweaking loop points. You can also leave this dialog open
and manually adjust the position of the markers in the main waveform windows.
Crossfade Tab
This tab allows you to apply a crossfade between the audio at the end of a loop and the audio at
the beginning of the loop. This can be useful to smooth the transition between the end of a loop
and its beginning, especially when you use material that is not perfectly suited to create a loop.
Use the envelope drag points or value sliders to adjust the crossfade envelope. Click Apply to
create the crossfade.
Post-Crossfade Tab
This tab allows you to apply a crossfade at the end of the loop by mixing a copy of the loop back
into the audio. Use the envelope drag points or value sliders to adjust the crossfade envelope.
Click Apply to create the post crossfade.
Post-crossfading means crossfading the loop back into the audio after the end of the loop so that
there is not glitch when playback continues after the loop. This is done by mixing a copy of the
loop back into the audio.
Refining Loops
You can refine loops using the Loop Tweaker tool.
PREREQUISITE
Set up a basic loop.
463
Loops
About Refining Loops PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Editor, select the loop that you want to refine by clicking between its loop
start and loop end marker.
2.
Select the Process tab.
3.
In the Loop section, click Tweaker.
4.
In the Loop Tweaker dialog, refine your loop.
5.
Click Apply.
Moving Loop Points Manually
If your loop still has glitches or bumps at the transition points, you can use the Loop Tweaker
tool to move the points in small steps to remove the glitch.
This is similar to moving the loop points in the wave display, but with a visual feedback to
facilitate finding good loop points.
There are two ways of moving the loop points manually on the Loop Points Adjustment tab in
the Loop Tweaker dialog:
●
Drag the waveform to the left and right.
●
Use the green arrows below the waveform to nudge the audio to the left and right. Each
click moves the loop point by a single sample.
The following applies when moving the loop points manually:
●
To move the end point to a later or earlier position, move the left part of the display.
●
To move the start point to a later or earlier position, move the right part of the display.
●
To move the start and end points simultaneously, activate Link Start and End Points. This
way, when adjusting a loop point, the length of the loop stays the same, but the entire
loop is moved.
●
You can also adjust the loop markers in the wave window.
Automatically Detecting Good Loop Points
The Loop Tweaker tool can automatically search for good loop points.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Editor, select the loop that you want to refine by clicking between its loop
start and loop end marker.
2.
Select the Process tab.
3.
In the Loop section, click Tweaker.
4.
In the Loop Tweaker dialog, on the Loop Points Adjustment tab, make sure that Link
Start and End Points is deactivated.
5.
In the Automatic Search section, specify the Aimed Correspondence and the Search
Accuracy.
6.
Click the yellow arrow buttons to start the automatic search for a good loop point.
WaveLab Pro scans from the current point forwards or backwards, until it finds a point that
matches. You can stop at any time by clicking the right mouse button. The program then
jumps back to the best found match.
7.
Check the loop by playing it back.
8.
Optional: If you think there might be a better loop point, continue with the search.
464
Loops
About Refining Loops Temporarily Saving Loop Points
Temporarily saving and restoring loop points allows you to compare different loop settings.
PREREQUISITE
Set up a basic loop and open the Loop Tweaker tool.
NOTE
●
There are five slots for temporarily saving loop points for each wave window and montage
window. If you have several sets of loops in your file, you must be careful to not recall the
wrong set.
●
Only loop positions are temporarily saved.
PROCEDURE
1.
On the Loop Points Adjustment tab, in the Temporary Memories section, click M.
2.
Select one of the five memory slots.
Crossfades in Loops
Crossfading is useful to create smooth transitions between the end of a loop and its beginning,
especially when using material that is not perfectly suited to create a loop.
Sometimes it is impossible to find a loop that does not cause any glitches. This is especially true
for stereo material, where you might be able to find a perfect candidate for only one channel.
In this case crossfading smears the material around the end loop point so that it loops perfectly.
This is achieved by mixing material from before the loop start with material that is located before
the loop end.
NOTE
This technique alters the waveform and therefore changes the sound.
Creating a Crossfade
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Editor, create as good a loop as you can.
2.
Select the Process tab.
3.
In the Loop section, click Tweaker.
4.
In the Loop Tweaker dialog, decide if you want to create a crossfade or a post-crossfade:
●
If you want to create a crossfade, click the Crossfade tab.
●
If you want to create a post-crossfade, click the Post-Crossfade tab.
5.
Make sure that Crossfade Audio at End of Loop with Audio before Loop (Crossfade
tab) or Crossfade Audio after Loop with Audio of Loop Start (Post-Crossfade tab) is
activated.
6.
Specify the length for the crossfade either by dragging the length handle or by adjusting
the Length value below the graph.
7.
Specify the crossfade shape by dragging the shape handle or by adjusting the Shape
(from Equal Gain to Equal Power) value.
8.
Click Apply.
The sound is processed. Each time that you click Apply, the previous loop process is
automatically undone. This allows you to try out different settings quickly.
465
Loops
About Refining Loops NOTE
Do not move the loop points after you have performed a crossfade. The waveform has
been processed specifically for the current loop settings.
AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK
●
You can check the crossfade visually by opening the Loop Points Adjustment tab and
activating Display Processed Audio. If this is activated, the display shows a preview of
the crossfaded waveform. If this option is deactivated, the display shows the original
waveform. Switching back and forth allows you to compare the two.
Post-Crossfades
Post-crossfading means crossfading the loop back into the audio after the end of the loop so that
there is not glitch when playback continues after the loop. This is done by mixing a copy of the
loop back into the audio.
The post-crossfade can be set up on the Post-Crossfade tab of the Loop Tweaker dialog.
The post-crossfade analyzes the part of the waveform that occurs just after the loop start and
processes a specific area that begins at the end of the loop. The length parameter adjusts the
size of this area. Everything else is identical with regular crossfading.
Loop Tweaker
This dialog allows you to adjust the loop start and end points, and crossfade the loop boundaries.
The loop start and end points are specified with the loop start and end markers.
If more than one loop marker pair is available in the audio file, click in the area between a loop
marker pair to tweak the corresponding start and end points.
●
To open the Loop Tweaker dialog, open the Audio Editor, select the Process tab, and in
the Loop section, select Tweaker.
466
Loops
About Refining Loops Loop Points Adjustment Tab
The top of this dialog shows the beginning and the end of the waveform between the loop
markers. The bottom of this dialog offers the following options:
Loop End – Inner Arrows
Move the loop end points to the left/right.
Loop End – Outer Arrows
Invokes an automatic search for the nearest good loop point to the left/right of the
loop end point and moves the end point to that position.
Loop Start – Inner Arrows
Moves the loop start points to the left/right.
Loop Start – Outer Arrows
Invokes an automatic search for the nearest good loop point to the left/right of the
loop start point, and moves the start point to that position.
Stereo Merge
If this option is activated for a stereo file, the two waveforms are overlaid, otherwise
they are shown in two separate sections.
Overlap
If this option is activated, the waveforms of both halves are continued in the other
half. This shows how the waveform looks like right before and after the loop.
Display Processed Audio
If this option is activated, the display shows a preview of the waveform after
crossfading. If this option is deactivated, you see what the waveform looks like
without crossfading. This option only makes sense after you have applied a
crossfade.
Automatic Vertical Zooming
If this option is activated, the vertical magnification is adjusted so that the waveform
always fills the entire display vertically.
467
Loops
About Refining Loops Zoom
Sets the zoom factor.
Current Correspondence
Indicates how well the waveforms near the loop points match one another. The
left value estimates the similarity across several wave cycles, while the right value
estimates the similarity of the few samples near the loop points. The higher the
values, the better the match.
Aimed Correspondence (0-1000)
Sets up the automatic search for good loop points. This defines how well the found
section must resemble the section to which it is compared, in order to be considered
a match. The higher the value, the more precise the resemblance must be. A value of
1000 requires a 100 % perfect match.
Search Accuracy
Determines how many samples should be taken into account by the auto-find
analysis. Higher values result in greater accuracy, but also in longer processing
times.
Link Start and End Points
If this option is activated, both the start and end points move simultaneously when
you adjust the loop points manually. That is, the loop length stays exactly the same
and the entire loop moves.
Temporary Memories
Allows you to save up to five different sets of loop points which you can later recall.
This allows you to try out different loop settings. To save a set, click this button, then
on one of the buttons 1-5.
Crossfade Tab
Crossfade Audio at End of Loop with Audio before Loop
To enable crossfading, activate this checkbox. The crossfade is applied when you
click Apply.
468
Loops
About Refining Loops Length
Determines the length of the crossfade. Generally, you want the crossfade to be as
short as possible, with an acceptable result.
NOTE
●
Using a long crossfade smoothens the loop. However, more of the waveform
is processed, which changes its character.
●
A shorter crossfade affects the sound less, but the loop is not as smooth.
Shape (from Equal Gain to Equal Power)
Determines the shape of the crossfade. Use low values for simple sounds and high
values for complex sounds.
Post-Crossfade Tab
Crossfade Audio after Loop with Audio of Loop Start
To enable crossfading, activate this checkbox. The crossfade is applied when you
click Apply.
Length
Determines the length of the crossfade. Generally, you want the post-crossfade to be
as short as possible, with an acceptable result.
NOTE
●
Using a long post-crossfade smoothens the loop. However, more of the
waveform is processed, which changes its character.
●
A shorter post-crossfade affects the sound less, but the loop is not as smooth.
Shape (from Equal Gain to Equal Power)
Determines the shape of the post-crossfade. Use low values for simple sounds and
high values for complex sounds.
469
Loops
Looping Audio Which Is Not Very Well Suited for Looping Looping Audio Which Is Not Very Well Suited for Looping
Sounds that constantly decay in level or continuously change in timbre are difficult to loop. The
Loop Tone Uniformizer allows you to create loops from these kind of sounds.
The Loop Tone Uniformizer applies processing to the sound that evens out changes in level
and timbral characteristics in order for a sound to loop properly. For example, this is useful for
creating looped samples for a softsynth or hardware sampler.
The Loop Tone Uniformizer includes a crossfade option allowing you to fade in the original
sound into the processed sections when playback approaches the loop start.
To use the Loop Tone Uniformizer, you must have created a loop by setting a pair of loop
markers. The original length of the loop is not changed.
Looping Seemingly Unloopable Audio
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Audio Editor, set up a basic loop.
2.
Select the Process tab.
3.
In the Loop section, click Tone Uniformizer.
4.
In the Loop Tone Uniformizer dialog, make sure that either Slice Mixing and/or Chorus
Smoothing is activated and make the settings.
5.
Optional: Select the Pre-Crossfade tab, and set up a crossfade.
6.
Click Apply.
The sound is processed. Each time that you click Apply, a new loop is defined. This allows
you to try out different settings quickly.
NOTE
Do not move the loop points after you have performed a crossfade. The waveform has
been processed specifically for the current loop settings.
AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK
After using the Loop Tone Uniformizer, the transition between the end of the loop and the end
of the file might not sound very natural. This can be fixed by creating a post-crossfade using the
Loop Tweaker.
Loop Tone Uniformizer
This dialog allows you to create sounds that loop from audio which is not very well suited for
looping. These are normally sounds that constantly decay in level or continuously change in
timbre.
●
To open the Loop Tone Uniformizer dialog, open the Audio Editor, select the Process
tab, and in the Loop section, select Tone Uniformizer.
470
Loops
Looping Audio Which Is Not Very Well Suited for Looping Uniformizers Tab
This tab allows you to specify the methods that are used to even out the sound that you want to
loop.
Slice Mixing
Cuts the loop in slices, which are then mixed together to uniformize the sound.
For slice mixing, you need to determine the number of slices. Only experimentation
can tell how many slices are needed, but generally, the more slices you have, the
more natural the sound. However, the program puts a restriction on the number of
slices, so that each one is never shorter than 20 ms.
For example, if you specify eight slices, the loop is cut up into eight sections of equal
length. These sections are then overlapped and mixed together as one sound which
is repeated eight times. This new piece of audio replaces all audio inside the loop so
that no harmonic cancellation due to phase offsets occurs.
Slice Mixing – Number of Slices
The more slices you use, the more the sound changes.
Chorus Smoothing
This processor uses a phase vocoding method to filter the harmonics. This method
is recommended for looping ensemble and choir sounds and can drastically change
the timbre.
Chorus Smoothing – Timbre
Governs the amount by which the timbral characteristics of the sample should be
evened out. The higher the value, the more pronounced the effect.
Chorus Smoothing – Chorusing
Determines the depth of the chorus effect.
Chorus Smoothing – Enhance Warmth
Creates a smoother, warmer sounding effect.
Chorus Smoothing – Stereo Expansion
Increases the width of the sample in the stereo sound image.
471
Loops
Sample Attributes Pre-Crossfade Tab
This tab allows you to crossfade the end of the loop with the start of the newly processed section
so that the transition into the looped section is smoother during playback. Use the envelope drag
points or value sliders to adjust the crossfade.
You need to use this feature because the Loop Tone Uniformizer changes the timbre only inside
the loop. This means that the transition into the loop is not as smooth as expected unless you
apply crossfading.
Crossfade Audio before Loop with Audio of End of Loop
Enables crossfading, which is applied when you click Apply.
Length
Determines the length of the crossfade. Generally, you want the post-crossfade to be
as short as possible, with an acceptable result.
●
A long crossfade produces a smoother loop. However, more of the waveform
is processed, which changes its character.
●
A shorter crossfade affects the sound less, but the loop is not as smooth.
Shape (from Equal Gain to Equal Power)
Determines the shape of the crossfade. Use low values for simple sounds and high
values for complex sounds.
Sample Attributes
Sample attributes allow you to define settings for an audio sample before loading it into a
hardware or software sampler.
Sample attributes do not process the sample, they just provide the file properties that the
receiving sampler can use. This includes information about the pitch of the sample, which can
be detected automatically, the key range that the sample should span, and the velocity range
to occupy. For WAV and AIFF files, this information is saved in the header of the file. By default,
there are no sample attributes in an audio file.
NOTE
Depending on your sampler and the protocol that you use for communicating, the sample
attributes may not be supported.
472
Loops
Sample Attributes Editing Sample Attributes
PROCEDURE
1.
Open the Audio Editor.
2.
Select Tool Windows > Sample Attributes.
3.
In the Sample Attributes window, click Create.
4.
Optional: If you want to automatically detect the pitch of an audio selection, select an
audio range, and select Detect from Audio Selection.
5.
Specify the sample attributes.
6.
Save the audio file to save the sample attributes settings in the audio file.
The sample attribute is only saved in WAV and AIFF files.
Sample Attributes Window
In this window, you can create sample attributes for an audio sample.
●
To open the Sample Attributes window, open the Audio Editor and select Tool
Windows > Sample Attributes.
Create/Remove
Creates/Removes sample attributes for the active audio file.
Tune – Key
Specifies which key plays back the sound at its basic pitch.
Tune – Detune
Specifies whether the sample should be played back at a slightly different pitch. The
range is ±50 % of a semitone, which translates into a quarter tone in each direction.
Detect from Audio Selection
Detects the pitch from an audio selection. Make sure that the audio selection
contains a clearly defined pitch.
Key Range – High/Low
Specifies the key range for the sample if the sample is part of a multi-sample key
map.
Velocity Range – High/Low
Specifies the velocity range for the sample if the sample is part of a multi-sample key
map with velocity-switchable samples.
473
Generating Signals
In WaveLab Pro, you can generate synthesized sounds and DTMF or MF tones.
Signal Generator
The Signal Generator allows you to generate complex synthesized sounds in mono or stereo.
You can layer different waveform generators together and if outputting a stereo file, adjust
different settings for both the left and right channels.
Use the Signal Generator for the following:
●
Testing the specifications of audio equipment
●
Measurements of various kinds, including calibrating tape recorders
●
Testing signal processing methods
●
Educational purposes
The Signal Generator is based on a waveform generator that can generate a large number of
basic waveforms, such as sine, saw, pulse, and various types of noise.
The Signal Generator has a multitude of settings for character (Source tab), frequency
(Frequency tab), and amplitude (Level tab).
You can combine up to 64 Signal Generators into layers and make separate settings for the left
and right channel.
NOTE
The Signal Generator is not intended for synthesizing musical sounds.
Signal Generator Dialog
This dialog allows you to generate complex synthesized sounds in mono or stereo.
●
To open the Signal Generator dialog, select File > Tools > Signal Generator.
474
Generating Signals
Signal Generator Audio Properties
Opens the Audio Properties dialog in which you can select sample rate, bit
resolution, etc.
Global Gain
Adjusts the global level of all combined layers.
Number of Layers
Determines the number of layers, for example, the number of independent signals
to be combined.
All Channels/Left Channel/Right Channel
Determines whether the settings on the tab are applied to the left or right channel of
the selected layer, or to both channels. This option is only available for stereo files.
Copy
Copies all settings of the current layer.
Paste
Pastes the settings to the selected layer.
NOTE
Clicking Paste replaces the source, frequency, and level settings on all tabs, not just
on the selected one.
Generate
Applies the settings.
Source Tab
475
Generating Signals
Signal Generator Waveform
Use this pop-up menu to select a waveform for the selected layer.
Width
If you select one of the pulse waveforms, you can set this parameter to the width of
the pulse, specified as a percentage or a number of samples.
Angle (0-359°)
Sets the phase of the signal for the selected layer.
Adjust Signal Length to End on a Cycle Boundary
If this option is activated, the generated waveform ends with a complete cycle,
regardless of the phase setting.
Frequency Tab
Envelope Section
In this section, you can set up the frequency envelope of the selected layer. The
envelope consists of four frequency values and three duration values in between the
frequency values.
If you want to set a static frequency (no envelope curve), make sure that all time
values are set to 0, and set the frequency with the Median Freq. 2 parameter.
Vibrato Section
In this section, you can add a vibrato to the frequency of the selected layer. You can
select a waveform for the vibrato, set the frequency, and adjust the intensity.
Change Frequency at Cycle Boundaries
If this option is activated, the vibrato is not continuously applied from sample-tosample, but recomputed after each cycle.
Linear Frequency Variations
If this option is activated, the frequency varies linearly.
476
Generating Signals
Signal Generator Level Tab
Envelope
In this section, you can set up the amplitude envelope of the selected layer. The
envelope consists of three level values and three duration values in between the level
values. In addition, the Silence Before and Silence After parameters allow you to
include a period of silence before or after the signal of the selected layer.
NOTE
The Overall Gain parameter determines the overall level of the layer.
Tremolo
In this section, you can add a tremolo (continuous level variation) to the selected
layer. You can select a waveform for the tremolo, set the frequency, and adjust the
intensity.
Change Level at Cycle Boundaries
If this option is activated, the tremolo is not continuously applied from sample-tosample, but recomputed after each cycle.
DC Offset
Allows you to add a DC offset to the signal of the selected layer.
Overall Gain
Allows you to set an overall level for the selected layer.
Generating an Audio Signal
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > Tools > Signal Generator.
2.
In the Signal Generator dialog, click the audio properties.
3.
In the Audio Properties dialog, set up the channels, sample rate, and bit resolution.
4.
Choose how many layers of signal generators you want to use by setting the Number of
Layers parameter.
5.
Set the Global Gain.
6.
For each layer, edit the settings on the Source, Frequency, and Level tabs.
477
Generating Signals
DTMF Generator 7.
If you have selected stereo channels, you can make changes for both or just one of the
channels by selecting All Channels, Left Channel, or Right Channel.
8.
Once all settings are made, click Generate.
The file is generated and opens in a new window.
DTMF Generator
With the DTMF Generator you can generate DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) or MF tones as
used by analog telephone systems.
These tones are created by combining two sine waves with variable frequencies. Push button
telephones generate these two sine waves at different frequencies depending on the number
that you press. These dial pulses are then decoded by the telephone exchange to identify which
letters or numbers you pressed.
DTMF Generator Dialog
This dialog allows you to generate DTMF or MF tones.
●
To open the DTMF Generator dialog, select File > Tools > DTMF Generator.
Dial String
Lets you enter the numbers that you want to convert into DTMF tones. The
characters that you can use for DTMF are 0123456789ABCD*#,) and for MF
0123456789ABC*#,.
DTMF
DTMF is the most commonly used standard. DTMF strings are limited to 16
characters.
MF
MF uses a different frequency than DTMF. MF strings are limited to 15 characters.
478
Generating Signals
DTMF Generator Leading Silence
Determines the length of the silent region before the first tone.
Tone
Sets the length of each tone.
Inter-Tone
Adjusts the time interval between the tones.
Pause
Determines the length of any pauses in the dial string. A pause is entered by typing a
comma character in the dial string.
Trailing Silence
Determines the length of the silent region after the last tone.
Overall
Controls the level of the tone’s mix.
High Frequencies Gain
The DTMF signal consists of a mix between two tones. One high frequency tone and
one low frequency tone. You can either choose to let the two tones have the same
amplitude by leaving this at zero, or you can raise the high frequency tone by up to
12 dB. On some telephone lines, the high frequency tones are set 2 dB higher than
the low ones.
Fade In/Fade Out Tones
If this option is activated, the generated tones will fade in and out.
Time
Lets you set the time of the fades if the corresponding option is activated.
Audio Properties
Opens the Audio Properties dialog in which you can select sample rate, bit
resolution, etc.
Generating DTMF Files
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > Tools > DTMF Generator.
2.
In the DTMF Generator dialog, enter a dial string in the text field at the top of the dialog.
The characters that you can use are shown above the text field.
3.
Select the standard to use.
4.
Make the settings for Durations and Amplitude.
5.
Click the audio properties to select a bit resolution and a sample rate.
The Audio Properties dialog opens where you can edit settings for the audio file.
6.
Click Generate.
The file is generated and opens up in a new window.
479
Importing Audio CD Tracks
You can read audio tracks from regular CDs and save them as a digital copy in any audio format
on your hard disk.
Although WaveLab Pro supports a large number of CD drives, there are some restrictions you
need to be aware of:
●
There are a number of different protocols for retrieving audio from a CD-ROM/CD-R drive.
WaveLab Pro supports as many of these methods as possible, but there are no guarantees
that it works with any particular drive. This applies for CD-Text and ISRC.
●
Observe and respect any copyright notices on the CDs from which you are importing
tracks.
When importing tracks, they are named “Track XX” by default, where XX is a number starting at
01. The numbering scheme can be changed.
NOTE
●
Importing audio CD tracks is technically more complicated than reading files from a CDROM or hard disk, because audio sectors can be hard to detect. Some CDs which do not
conform completely to the CD standard may cause problems, especially when they are
copy protected.
●
If you import a CD track with Emphasis, and later want to use this on a CD of your own,
remember to activate Emphasis for that track in the audio montage or Basic Audio CD
window.
Import Audio CD Dialog
In this dialog, you can import one or more tracks from an audio CD.
●
To open the Import Audio CD dialog, select File > Import, and click Audio CD.
480
Importing Audio CD Tracks
Import Audio CD Dialog Functions Menu
CD Info
Displays the CD length and the UPC/EAN code, if available.
Extract ISRC Codes
Reads the ISRC codes and displays them in the track list. Depending on your CD
drive, this can take a while.
Examine CD-Text
Opens the CD-Text dialog where you can view the CD-Text. Not all CD drives support
CD-Text.
Extract CD-Text
Extracts the CD-Text and displays a summary in the track list.
Rename Tracks Menu
Name
Renames the tracks according to the selected renaming scheme.
Search Track Names on the Internet (FreeDb)
Searches track names from an Internet database. If the album is found, the CD track
list is updated.
Submit Track Names to the Internet (FreeDb)
Submits the information about the audio CD to the FreeDb database of CD
information.
Convert Menu
Convert All Tracks to Audio Montage
Extracts all audio CD tracks and uses them to create an audio montage.
481
Importing Audio CD Tracks
Import Audio CD Dialog Convert Selected Tracks to Audio Montage
Extracts the selected audio CD tracks and uses them to create an audio montage.
Convert All Tracks to Basic Audio CD
Extracts all audio CD tracks and uses them to create a Basic Audio CD.
Convert Selected Tracks to Basic Audio CD
Extracts the selected audio CD tracks and uses them to create a Basic Audio CD.
Actions Tab
Source
Select the CD drive from which you want to import audio CD tracks.
Speed
Allows you to set the writing speed. The highest speed depends on your writing
device and on of the medium present in the device.
Refresh
If you insert a CD while the Import Audio CD dialog is open, you need to click this
button to show the contents of that CD in the list.
Eject Optical Medium
Ejects the medium from the selected drive.
Track List
Shows the tracks on the CD.
Range – Start/Length
If you want to import only a section of a track, use the Start and Length fields to
define a start point and length.
Output – Location
Allows you to set the output location.
Output – File Format
Allows you to set the output file format.
Select All
Selects all CD tracks in the track list.
Play
Plays back the selected CD track.
Options Tab
Trim Silence
If this option is activated, silence between imported tracks is removed. Only digital
silence is removed, that is, samples with a zero level.
Automatically Refresh on CD Change
If this option is activated, WaveLab Pro checks for the presence of a new CD in the
drive several times a second. If a new CD is found, the track list display is refreshed.
Automatically Extract ISRC Codes
If this option is activated, ISRC codes are automatically extracted when a CD is
inserted.
Automatically Extract CD-Text
If this option is activated, CD-Text is automatically extracted when a CD is inserted.
482
Importing Audio CD Tracks
Importing Audio CD Tracks Automatically Search Track Names on the Internet
If this option is activated, track names are automatically searched on the Internet
when a CD is inserted.
Grab Pause before First Track (If Available)
If this option is activated, when a section of audio is located before the first track, it is
extracted together with the first track. This way, you can import hidden bonus tracks.
Use a Japanese CD-Text Decoder
If this option is activated, CD-Text is interpreted as Japanese the next time it is
extracted.
Create Peak File
If this option is activated, a peak file is created together with the rendered files.
Show Times with CD Frame Units
If this option is activated, times are shown in CD frame units. There are 75 CD frames
per second.
Play through Master Section
If this button is activated, the Master Section is ignored. If the button is deactivated,
the audio is played through the Master Section.
Convert Titles and CD-Text to Metadata
If this option is activated when importing tracks into an audio format supporting
metadata (for example, MP3 and WMA), the titles of the tracks and the CD-Text are
automatically added to the file header.
Ultra-Safe Mode (Slow)
If this option is activated, each CD track is read several times until the same result is
found (checksums are used). Specify the number of times that a track must be read
with the same result before it is saved to disk.
Real Audio Before and After Tracks
You can ensure that tracks are imported in their entirety by defining how much audio
should be read before and after each CD track.
Importing Audio CD Tracks
PROCEDURE
1.
Insert a CD into the CD-ROM/CD-R device.
2.
Select File > Import.
3.
Click Import Audio CD.
4.
In the Import Audio CD dialog, in the Source section, select the drive from which you
want to read, and specify the read speed.
5.
Optional: Rename the files and adjust the numbering scheme.
The tracks must have unique names if you want to import them all.
6.
Optional: On the Options tab, in the Read Audio Before and After Tracks section, define
how much audio should be read before and after each CD track.
7.
In the track list, select the tracks that you want to import.
8.
Optional: If you have only selected one file, in the Range section, you can define a Start
and Length, to import just a part of the track.
9.
In the Output section, click the folder icon, and select an output location.
You can also drag one or more CD tracks onto an audio montage track.
483
Importing Audio CD Tracks
Searching Track Names on the Internet 10.
In the Output section, click the file format field, and select a file format for the imported
audio files.
11.
Click Save.
RESULT
The tracks are imported to the specified location.
Searching Track Names on the Internet
You can search for information about your CDs using the FreeDb database of CD information.
PREREQUISITE
You must be connected to the Internet to use the FreeDb function.
PROCEDURE
1.
Insert a CD into the CD-ROM/CD-R device.
2.
Select File > Import.
3.
Click Import Audio CD.
4.
In the Import Audio CD dialog, select Rename Tracks > Search Track Names on the
Internet (FreeDb).
Submitting Track Names to the Internet
You can submit information about an audio CD to the FreeDb database of CD information.
PREREQUISITE
You must be connected to the Internet to use the FreeDb function.
PROCEDURE
1.
Insert a CD into the CD-ROM/CD-R device.
2.
Select File > Import.
3.
Click Import Audio CD.
4.
In the Import Audio CD dialog, rename each track.
5.
Select Rename Tracks > Submit Track Names to the Internet (FreeDb).
6.
In the Submit CD Information dialog, fill out the text fields and enter an e-mail address.
NOTE
An e-mail address is required to report submission errors. It will not be saved.
The FreeDb database does not offer the possibility to enter different artists or genres for
individual tracks. If the artists differ from track to track, you can write the track title in the
following way:
Title/Artist
7.
Click OK.
484
Importing Audio CD Tracks
Ultra-Safe Mode Ultra-Safe Mode
Sometimes, a small bit of a CD track is not properly retrieved which results in unpleasant clicks
and pops in the audio. This depends on the quality of your CD drive. To solve this issue, you can
activate the Ultra-Safe Mode in the Import Audio CD dialog options.
If this option is activated, you can specify how many times each CD track must be read with the
same result, before it is saved to disk.
Converting Audio CD Tracks to an Audio Montage
PROCEDURE
1.
Insert a CD into the CD-ROM/CD-R device.
2.
Select File > Import.
3.
Click Import Audio CD.
4.
Optional: In the Import Audio CD dialog, on the Options tab, select which information
you want to extract from the Audio CD when converting.
5.
Decide whether to convert only selected tracks or all tracks.
●
To convert only selected tracks, select Convert > Convert Selected Tracks to Audio
Montage.
●
To convert all tracks, select Convert > Convert All Tracks to Audio Montage.
RESULT
When the conversion is finished, the imported files open in the Audio Montage window.
Converting Audio CD Tracks to a Basic Audio CD
PROCEDURE
1.
Insert a CD into the CD-ROM/CD-R device.
2.
Select File > Import.
3.
Click Import Audio CD.
4.
Optional: In the Import Audio CD dialog, on the Options tab, make your settings.
5.
Decide whether to convert only selected tracks or all tracks.
●
To convert only selected tracks, select Convert > Convert Selected Tracks to Basic
Audio CD.
●
To convert all tracks, select Convert > Convert All Tracks to Basic Audio CD.
RESULT
When the conversion is finished, the imported files are added to the Basic Audio CD window.
485
WaveLab Exchange
You can use WaveLab Pro as an external editor for Cubase Pro, Cubase Artist, and Nuendo, and
vice versa.
IMPORTANT
●
WaveLab Exchange is only available for Cubase Pro 8.5.10 or higher, Cubase Artist 8.5.10
or higher, and Nuendo 7.1.20 or higher.
●
WaveLab Exchange supports the file format Wave.
WaveLab Pro as External Editor for Cubase/Nuendo
You can open Cubase/Nuendo events in WaveLab Pro. This allows you to use the editing
capabilities of WaveLab Pro and apply them to Cubase/Nuendo events.
For example, the following editing options are exclusively available in WaveLab Pro:
●
Audio error correction
●
Audio spectral editing
●
Independent channel editing and processing
●
Mid/Side editing and processing
●
Loudness normalization (EBU R-128 recommendation)
●
Analysis meters, global analysis (EBU R-128 recommendation), and 3D frequency analysis
●
RestoreRig
●
MasterRig
Editing Cubase/Nuendo Audio Events in WaveLab Pro
PREREQUISITE
Open your Cubase/Nuendo project in Cubase/Nuendo.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Cubase/Nuendo Project window, select the audio event that you want to edit in
WaveLab Pro.
You can also select only a part of the audio event with the Object Selection tool.
2.
Select Audio > Edit in WaveLab.
3.
In WaveLab Pro, edit the audio event.
4.
When you have finished the editing, click Trigger Cubase/Nuendo Update on the
command bar.
RESULT
The changes to the audio event are applied to the Cubase/Nuendo project.
486
WaveLab Exchange
Cubase/Nuendo as External Editor for WaveLab Pro Cubase/Nuendo as External Editor for WaveLab Pro
When you are working on an audio file or clip in WaveLab Pro, you can open the project of the
audio file in Cubase/Nuendo. This allows you to correct issues that you have identified during
mixing and correct these issues in the audio file in Cubase/Nuendo.
When you then export the audio file in Cubase/Nuendo, and you use the same file name, the
audio file or clip is automatically updated in WaveLab Pro.
Preparing the Cubase/Nuendo Project for WaveLab Exchange
PROCEDURE
1.
In Cubase/Nuendo, open the project that you want to prepare for WaveLab Exchange.
2.
Select File > Export > Audio Mixdown.
3.
In the Export Audio Mixdown dialog, specify a file name and path.
4.
In the File Format pop-up menu, select Wave File or Wave 64 File.
5.
Activate Insert iXML Chunk.
6.
Click Export.
Editing the Audio File in Cubase/Nuendo
PREREQUISITE
The Cubase/Nuendo project is prepared for WaveLab Exchange.
PROCEDURE
1.
In WaveLab Pro, open the audio file in the Audio Editor.
A yellow line above the file tab indicates that the file has been rendered in
Cubase/Nuendo.
2.
Select the Edit tab.
3.
In the Source section, click Edit Project.
The Cubase/Nuendo project that contains the audio file opens.
4.
In Cubase/Nuendo, edit the audio file.
5.
Select File > Export > Audio Mixdown.
6.
In the Export Audio Mixdown dialog, activate Insert iXML Chunk.
IMPORTANT
Do not change the file name and path.
7.
Click Export.
RELATED LINKS
Preparing the Cubase/Nuendo Project for WaveLab Exchange on page 487
Tab Colors on page 77
487
Batch Processing
Batch processing in WaveLab Pro allows you to process any number of audio files or audio
montage files with Master Section plug-ins and presets, offline effects, and other plug-ins that
are unique to batch processing.
Each file is processed and then saved to a folder of your choice. You can change the file format,
rename the file according to a set of rules, and run an external application when the batch is
finished. You can process as many files as you want taking advantage of multi-processing on
multi-core processors.
When you save batch processor files, you can run batches repeatedly, if required. For example,
you may have a folder of 24-bit audio files which you want to normalize, add a fade out to, and
dither down to 16 bit 44.1 kHz. You could save this as a batch processor file, and re-run the
batch each time that you update the original files. This procedure can be simplified using batch
templates.
Advantages of the WaveLab Pro Batch Processor
While processing multipass plug-ins, other plug-ins of the plug-in chain are only gone through
when necessary and file writing is reduced to a single writing process. This results in an
improved performance of the batch processing. The following graphic shows the advanced uses
of the multipass plug-ins of the batch processor.
Batch Processing Metadata
You can batch process metadata. For this you can set up the Metadata dialog in the Batch
Processor window, and apply this metadata to the files of the batch process.
488
Batch Processing
Batch Processor Window RELATED LINKS
Metadata in the Batch Processor Window on page 148
Batch Processor Window
This window allows you to process any number of audio files or audio montages with Master
Section plug-ins and presets, offline effects, and other plug-ins.
Edit Tab
Execution
Start
Runs the batch process.
Pause
Interrupts the process to reduce the CPU load. You can continue the process by
clicking Pause again.
Cancel
Cancels the running process.
Run All
Runs all open batches sequentially. That is, a batch process starts when the previous
one ends. An error does not prevent a new batch process from starting. If you stop
the active process, the global process stops.
489
Batch Processing
Batch Processor Window Preview
Preview Processing
Allows you to preview the effect of the batch processor on any file of a batch. The
preview includes all effects and the file format.
Reset Status
All Files
Sets the files with the status “Done” or “Error” to “To do”.
All Selected Files
Sets all selected files with the status “Done” or “Error” to “To do”.
Files with an Error
Sets the files with the status “Error” to “To do”.
Insert
Audio Files
Allows you to select the audio file that you want to add to the batch process.
Audio Montages
Allows you to select the audio montage that you want to add to the batch process.
Files from Folder
Opens the Add Files from Folder dialog, where you can add files of a specific type
from a folder to the batch process.
Add Master Section Preset
Adds the Master Section plug-ins to the batch process.
Remove
All Files
Removes all files from the list that are not being processed.
Selected Files
Removes the selected files from the list that are not being processed.
All but Selected
Removes all files from the list that are not selected and not being processed.
Successfully Processed Files
Removes all files with the status “Success” from the list.
Files with Errors
Removes all files with the status “Error” from the list.
XML
XML Audio Description
Opens the XML Audio Description dialog, in which you can instruct WaveLab Pro
how to understand the structure of the XML file that you want to read.
Audio Plug-in Chain
Here, you can add plug-ins that the audio signal traverses, from top to bottom.
You set up the list by dragging plug-ins from the plug-ins section.
490
Batch Processing
Batch Processor Window ●
To remove a plug-in from the list, select it and press Delete, or right-click a plug-in and
select Remove.
●
To edit a plug-in, double click it, or right-click a plug-in and select Edit.
Red, green, and blue arrows on the right of the audio plug-in chain visualize the audio signal
path when plug-ins have been added to the list.
You can prevent a plug-in from processing by deactivating it.
Files to Process
Here, you specify which files to process. You can add files to the list via drag and drop or use the
insert options on the Edit tab.
Options on Context Menu
You can right-click a file, to access a context menu with the following options:
Reset Status
Sets the status of the selected files to “unprocessed”.
Remove
Removes the selected files from the list.
Open in WaveLab Pro
Opens the selected file in WaveLab Pro.
Reveal in File Explorer/Finder
Opens the folder of the selected file in the File Explorer/macOS Finder.
Open with Default Application
Opens the selected file with the default application, for example, a media player.
Preview Processing
Allows you to preview the effect of the batch processor on the selected file. The
preview includes all effects and the file format.
Insert Audio Files
Opens a submenu that allows you to select the audio files that you want to insert in
the file list.
Insert Audio Montages
Opens a submenu that allows you to select the audio montages that you want to
insert in the file list.
Options Above the File List
The following options are available above the files list:
Folder
Lets you select the folder that you want to add to the batch process.
Each time you start the batch process, the selected folder is scanned and the audio
files that are found in the folder are processed.
To disable this option, clear the path name.
NOTE
If you want to use XML files in the folder mode, you must select XML Descriptors in
the File Types to Process menu.
491
Batch Processing
Batch Processor Window Include Subfolders
If this option is activated, the subfolders of the selected folder are also scanned. The
audio files inside these subfolders are added to the batch process.
Refresh
Refreshes the selected folder and, if Include Subfolders is activated, its subfolders.
All audio files inside the folders are added to the batch process.
File Types to Process
Lets you specify which file types should be added to the batch process. You can also
select that all file types should be added to the batch process.
Options Below the File List
The following options are available below the files list:
Accept Dual Mono Files
If this option is activated, you can add dual mono files to your batch process.
Preview Duration
Determines the length of the preview duration.
Output Tab
On this tab, you can specify the output location for the files that you want to process.
Destination folder type
Define a type of destination folder. The following types are available:
●
Temporary (Can Be Undone)
Writes the processed audio in a temporary file. For this, the source file must
already be open in the Audio Editor.
●
As Source Path
The file is rendered in its own folder.
●
Subfolder of Source Path
The file is rendered in a customizable subfolder of its own folder.
●
Subfolder “Output” in Source Path
The file is rendered inside the Output subfolder of the Watch Folder. This
subfolder is created automatically by WaveLab Pro.
●
Explicit Path
The file is rendered in a destination folder that you must specify.
●
Explicit Path + Source Folder
As previous option, but the folder name of the source file is added to the path.
●
Explicit Path + Source Folder (2 Levels)
As previous option, but the folder name of the source file, and its parent, are
added to the path.
●
Explicit Path + Source Folder (3 Levels)
As previous option, with one more added element of the source path.
●
No Audio Output
Processing takes place while no file is written to the disk.
When using Watch Folders, this option only makes sense if you use the Audio
Analyzer plug-in to produce a text file from the source audio file, without
rendering a new audio file. The text file is always written in the Output
subfolder of the Watch Folder.
492
Batch Processing
Batch Processor Window NOTE
For Watch Folders, the destination folder can also be determined by an XML
file that contains this information.
Path
Specify the folder into which the files are rendered.
Rename Files
If this option is activated, the source file names are processed through a renaming
preset, to produce new names for the rendered files.
Renaming Field
Allows you to open the Rename Files dialog, where you can set up a renaming
scheme.
Name Scheme
Allows you to define naming schemes for the audio files or audio montages that you
want to render. You can save naming schemes as presets.
RELATED LINKS
Naming Schemes on page 83
Format Tab
On this tab, you can specify the file format for the files that you want to process and specify how
to handle metadata.
File Format
Allows you to open the Audio File Format dialog for single file formats or multiple
file formats.
Batch Metadata
Lets you select one of the following options for handling the batch metadata:
●
Ignore the batch metadata and preserve the metadata in the audio file.
●
Merge the batch metadata with the metadata found in the audio file.
●
Replace the metadata of the audio file with the batch metadata.
These options only have effect if Inherit From Source File is activated in the Audio
File Format dialog.
For Audio Montages, Render CD Images and Cue Sheets
If this option is activated, audio montages are rendered as CD images together with
cue sheets.
Options Tab
On this tab, you can make additional settings for the batch process.
Create Peak Files
If this option is activated, peak files are created for each rendered file.
No Reverb Tail
If this option is activated, a fade is performed at the audio range bounds when a new
file is created, or a crossfade with the audio neighborhood is created if the audio
range is processed in place.
493
Batch Processing
Batch Processor Window Crossfades allow a smooth transition between the processed and the non-processed
parts. The crossfade time and shape are set in the Audio Files Preferences. If the
fade time is longer than half the length of the processed file, it is not performed.
Copy Markers
If this option is activated, markers that are included in the range to process are
copied to the rendered file.
On Success, Run External Tool
Allows you to select an external tool to run after the batch process is finished. For
example, you could email, upload, or archive the resulting files. To be able to select
tools, you need to specify them in the Configure External Tools dialog.
This option has no effect when using Watch Folders.
Audio Files without Valid Header
●
If Accept Unknown Audio is activated, you can apply batch processing to
audio files that do not include any header information such as sampling rate,
bit depth, endian, or number of channels.
Click on the Presets field to open the Special File Format dialog. This dialog
allows you to specify how to interpret the format of the audio file that you
want to open.
●
If Reinterpret Header Sample Rate is activated, you can specify the sample
rate that is applied to the audio stream in the batch process.
IMPORTANT
This option could produce files with a wrong sample rate. Use this option with
care.
RELATED LINKS
Special File Format Dialog on page 136
XML Tab
On this tab, you can make settings to generate XML files containing information about the audio
files.
Process
Lets you select whether the output XML file should be generated from scratch
(Generate XML/HTML File) or can use the input XML files as reference (Transform
Input XML File). If you do not want to use an XML process, select the No XML
Process option.
Presets
Lets you save and restore setting presets.
XSLT File
The path of the XSLT file that is used to generate the XML file.
Optional Parameters
The list of the parameters to send to the XSLT process. You can type new parameters
into the text field or click the pen icon to open the Parameters for XSLT Processing
dialog and enter the new parameters there.
494
Batch Processing
Batch Processor Window Execution Tab
On this tab, you can make additional settings for the batch process.
Auto Start When Dropping Files
If this option is activated, the processing starts automatically when dragging a file
into the list.
Auto Remove Converted Files
If this option is activated, a file is removed from the list once it is successfully
processed.
Stop on Error
If this option is activated, the global process stops if an error is encountered. If it is
deactivated, the file associated with the error is marked in red, and the next file is
processed.
This option has no effect when using Watch Folders.
Include File List When Saving
If this option is activated, the list of files (with their status) is saved with the batch
processor document.
Usage of Processor Cores
Allows you to select how many cores are to be used simultaneously. The contents of
this pop-up menu depend on your computer hardware.
When a File is to Be Overwritten
Specify the behavior when a file is to be overwritten. The following options are
available:
●
Overwrite without Question
●
Stop and Ask
●
Report as Error
●
Skip and Mark as Done
●
Auto-Rename
This option has no effect when using Watch Folders.
Comment Tab
On this tab, you can enter a comment for the active batch process document.
Batch Plug-ins Window
The Plug-ins window for batch processes allows you to select plug-ins and Master Section
presets for the batch process. A plug-in or preset can be dragged into the audio plug-in chain of
the active batch processor document. You can also double-click a plug-in to add it at the end of
the chain.
●
To open the Plug-ins window, open a batch process file and select Tool Windows > Batch
Plug-ins.
495
Batch Processing
Offline Processors From the following categories, you can select plug-ins or Master Section presets:
Master Section Presets
This is the list of Master Section presets.
Master Section Plug-ins
This is the list of all plug-ins available in the Master Section.
Monopass Plug-ins
This is the list of monopass plug-ins. Monopass means that the audio signal needs to
pass through the plug-in only once to be processed. These plug-ins are not available
in the Master Section.
Multipass Plug-ins
This is the list of multipass plug-ins. Multipass means that the audio needs to be
analyzed at least once before it is modified. These plug-ins are not available in the
Master Section. Some are unique to the Batch Processor.
Metapass Plug-ins
This is the list of metapass plug-ins. Metapass means that the audio is analyzed once,
and is processed after all other files have been analyzed, to take all analyses into
account. These plug-ins are not available in the Master Section and are unique to
the Batch Processor.
Offline Processors
There are several different types of plug-ins that can be applied to a batch process.
The following types of batch processing plug-ins are available:
●
Monopass plug-ins only require one pass when processing. A monopass plug-in effect
processes the signal and then outputs it to any subsequent plug-in.
●
Multipass plug-ins require two or more passes (one or more analysis passes followed by
a process pass) before processing the audio. Some are unique to the Batch Processor
window while others are also found as offline processors in the Audio Editor.
●
Metapass plug-ins are unique to the Batch Processor window and require at least one
analysis pass on all audio files before audio is processed. After analyzing the audio,
a metapass plug-in takes into account all other plug-ins in the effects chain before
processing the audio.
496
Batch Processing
Working with the Batch Processor Master Section Presets
These presets are updated each time that you save a new preset in the Master Section. The
presets also contain the Master Section gain settings.
Master Section Plug-ins
These plug-ins are all the plug-ins available from the Master Section, sorted in the same
manner.
Metapass Plug-ins
A metapass plug-in analyzes all files in the batch, collects the results, and processes the files by
varying amounts. The result of the analysis of one file can affect how other files are processed.
A typical example of a metapass plug-in is the Loudness Meta Normalizer, which can process a
number of files so that they all get the loudness of the loudest file in the batch.
Metapass plug-ins can be freely combined with other types of processors. For example, you can
use both the Loudness Meta Normalizer and a regular Normalizer in the same batch. You may
also combine metapass plug-ins with multipass plug-ins.
A metapass plug-in requires two processing passes. During the first pass all the files in the batch
are analyzed and during the second pass they are all processed.
This is different from other multipass plug-ins, where each file is analyzed/processed twice or
more times if required.
Avoid Clipping When Increasing the Signal Level
Processors often increase the signal level. If you are not careful, your file may be distorted
when it exits the batch. To prevent this, you can use the Only if Clipping option of the Level
Normalizer multipass plug-in.
It is no problem for the signal to be amplified above 0 dB (full level) within the audio stream,
because WaveLab Pro uses 32-bit internal processing. There is a lot of extra headroom and the
signal will not be clipped. However, when a signal that exceeds 0 dB is converted to a 16-bit file at
the output of the Batch Processor, clipping occurs.
To remedy this, you can insert the Normalizer effect at the end of the signal chain. The
Normalizer raises or lowers the levels as required so that the signal peaks exactly at the specified
value just before it is converted to a file. This is useful to do even when Only if Clipping is not
activated.
If you only want the Normalizer to be applied to avoid clipping, activate Only if Clipping. When
this is activated, the signal output may be low, but the audio does not clip due to amplification
within any of the processors.
This allows you to use the Normalizer as a completely distortion-free limiter.
If you reduce the bit depth, add the dithering plug-in after the Normalizer plug-in.
Working with the Batch Processor
Creating a Batch Process File
Batch process files allow you to set up a batch process.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > New.
497
Batch Processing
Working with the Batch Processor If you have specified a template to be the default template, clicking New opens a new
template with the settings of the default template.
2.
Click Batch Processor.
3.
Do one of the following:
●
To open an empty batch process file, select Create Empty.
●
To create a batch process file that contains all files that are open in WaveLab Pro,
select From Current File.
●
To create a batch process from a template, select Templates and click the template
that you want to use.
Saving a Batch Process File
PREREQUISITE
Set up your batch process.
PROCEDURE
1.
Do one of the following:
●
To save a batch process file that has never been saved before, select File > Save As.
●
To save a batch process file that has been saved before, click Save, or select File >
Save.
2.
Specify a file name and location.
3.
Optional: Activate Include File List.
4.
Click Save.
Save Batch Processor Dialog
In this dialog, you can specify the name and location of the batch processor file that you want to
save.
●
To open the Save Batch Processor dialog, click the Save As button, or select File > Save
As.
Name
The name of the file to write.
Location
The location where you want to save the file.
Include File List
If this option is activated, the file list is also saved, including the status of each file.
Save
Saves the file.
Save Copy
Allows you to save a copy of the open batch processor file. The batch process
continues to refer to the source file. Click the arrow at the bottom right of the Save
button to access the Save Copy option.
498
Batch Processing
Working with the Batch Processor Adding Files to a Batch Process
You can add audio files and audio montages to a batch process.
Adding Audio Files to a Batch Process
PREREQUISITE
Create a new batch process file or open an existing file.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Batch Processor window, select the Edit tab.
2.
In the Insert section, click Audio Files.
3.
Select Browse.
4.
Browse to the location of the audio file that you want to add, and select it.
5.
Click Open.
RESULT
The audio file is added to the batch process.
NOTE
You can also add audio files by right-clicking the Files to Process window, and selecting Insert
Audio Files > File Group > Select All, or selecting one of the open audio files from the list.
Adding Audio Montages to a Batch Process
PREREQUISITE
Create a new batch process file or open an existing file.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Batch Processor window, select the Edit tab.
2.
In the Insert section, click Audio Montages.
3.
Select Browse.
4.
Browse to the location of the audio montage that you want to add, and select it.
5.
Click Open.
RESULT
The audio montage is added to the batch process.
NOTE
You can also add audio montages by right-clicking the Files to Process window, and selecting
Insert Audio Montages > File Group > Select All, or selecting one of the open audio montages
from the list.
Adding Files from a Folder to a Batch Process
You can add all files that are included in a folder to a batch process.
PREREQUISITE
Create a new batch process file or open an existing file.
499
Batch Processing
Working with the Batch Processor PROCEDURE
1.
In the Batch Processor window, select the Edit tab.
2.
In the Insert section, click Files from Folder.
3.
In the Add Files from Folder dialog, specify the folder location.
4.
Optional: Activate Include Subfolders if you want to include files located in subfolders.
5.
Specify the file type.
6.
Click OK.
RESULT
All files are added to the list of files to process.
Adding Files from a Default Folder to a Batch Process
You can specify a default folder in which you put the files that you want to batch process. Each
time that you start the batch process, the selected folder is scanned and the audio files that are
found in the folder are added to the file list and processed.
PREREQUISITE
Create a new batch process file or open an existing file.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Folder field, specify the source folder.
2.
If you want to include the files that are located in the subfolders, activate Include
Subfolders.
3.
From the File Types to Process pop-up menu, select which audio file types you want to
include.
4.
To start the batch process, select the Edit tab and click Start.
Custom Plug-in Chain vs. Associated Master Section Preset
You can batch process files using a common custom plug-in chain or batch process each file with
its own associated Master Section preset. You can also choose to use no plug-in at all for the
batch process and only use the other features of the Batch Processor window, for example, the
file format conversion or metadata processing.
Adding Plug-ins to a Batch Process
You can create a custom plug-in chain and include it in the batch process.
PREREQUISITE
Create a new batch process file or open an existing file.
PROCEDURE
1.
Open the batch processing pop-up menu and select Custom Plug-in Chain.
500
Batch Processing
Working with the Batch Processor 2.
In the Plug-in window, do one of the following:
●
Select the plug-in or the Master Section preset that you want to use, and drag it to
the Custom Plug-in Chain.
●
Double-click a plug-in or a Master Section preset to add it at the end of the plug-in
chain.
Audio Signal Path
The audio signal path of a batch process is indicated by red, green, and blue arrows in the audio
plug-in chain list.
●
A red arrow indicates that the signal is processed, then sent to the next plug-in.
●
A green arrow indicates that the signal is analyzed at this stage of the audio chain, but is
not yet modified and therefore not sent to the next plug-in. When the audio stream comes
to an end, it is restarted. Next time the signal reaches this plug-in, it is modified, and sent
to the next plug-in. Some plug-ins need several analyses before passing to the next plugin.
●
A blue arrow indicates that the signal has been fully processed at this stage and is written
to disk.
●
A vertical separator line indicates that a meta-pass happens. This means that the files are
read and processed again one after the other.
NOTE
Some multipass plug-ins request more than one analysis pass, or send the signal further in the
chain without ordering the audio stream to restart. This behavior depends on the plug-in settings
and on the audio material and cannot be influenced.
Removing Files and Plug-ins from the Batch Process
PROCEDURE
●
In the Custom Plug-in Chain or Files to Process list, right-click the item that you want to
remove, and select Remove, or select the item and press Delete.
Changing the Order of the Plug-ins in the Batch Process
PREREQUISITE
Create a new batch process file or open an existing file.
PROCEDURE
●
Select a plug-in or Master Section preset from the audio plug-in chain list, and drag it to
another position.
501
Batch Processing
Working with the Batch Processor Previewing the Effect of Batch Processing
You can preview the effect of the batch processor on any file of a batch. The preview includes all
effects and the file format.
PREREQUISITE
Set up your batch process.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the lower right corner of the Batch Processor window, set up the Preview Duration.
The preview duration can be between 2 seconds and 59 seconds.
2.
Right-click the file that you want to preview and select Preview Processing.
Processing Open Files
If you are processing a file that is already open there are things to consider.
●
If the new file will have the same name and is saved in the same location, the file will not
be saved because it is already open.
●
If the new file will have the same name and is saved in the same location, and the number
of channels changes in the file (mono becomes stereo or vice versa), a new document is
created, which is opened in an untitled window.
Selecting an Output Format for the Batch Process
You can render to a single audio format or to multiple audio formats.
PREREQUISITE
Create a new batch process file or open an existing file.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Batch Processor window, select the Format tab.
2.
Click the File Format field.
3.
Select Edit Single Format or Edit Multi Format.
4.
In the Audio File Format dialog, make the settings, and click OK.
Setting Up a File Location for the Batch Process
PREREQUISITE
Create a new batch process file or open an existing file.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Batch Processor window, select the Output tab.
2.
Set the type of destination folder and the folder in which the audio files are rendered.
Specifying an Overwriting Strategy
PREREQUISITE
Create a new batch process file or open an existing file.
502
Batch Processing
Working with the Batch Processor PROCEDURE
1.
Select the Execution tab.
2.
From the When a File Is to Be Overwritten pop-up menu, select one of the following
overwriting strategies:
●
Overwrite without Question
●
Stop and Ask
●
Report as Error
●
Skip and Mark as Done
●
Auto-Rename
Naming Rendered Audio Files
With the renaming function of the Batch Processor window, you can generate new names for
the rendered files according to custom rules.
PREREQUISITE
Open a batch processor file.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Batch Processor window, select the Output tab.
2.
Activate Renaming, and click the renaming field.
3.
Make your settings, and click OK.
Running and Stopping the Batch Process
Once all settings are made, you can start the batch process. You can pause and cancel the
processing procedure at any time.
●
To start the batch process, select the Edit tab and click Start.
●
To pause the batch process, select the Edit tab and click Pause. You can continue the
batch processing by clicking Pause again.
●
To cancel the batch process, select the Edit tab and click Cancel.
Batch Processing Status Icons
The icons next to the file number indicate the status of the files in the Files to Process list.
Green circle
Indicates that the file is ready to be processed.
Cogwheel icon
Indicates that the file is being processed. The Batch Processor window cannot be
closed if any files have this status.
Yellow dot
Indicates that the process is done partially. For example, the files have been analyzed
(analysis pass), but not yet processed (modifying pass).
Green dot
Indicates that the file has been successfully processed. In order to process the file
again, you need to reset its status.
503
Batch Processing
Watch Folders Red dot
Indicates that an error occurred.
Resetting the Status of Batch Processed Files
To apply the batch process again on already processed files, you need to reset the status of these
files.
●
To reset the status of one or several files in the File to Process list, select one or several
files, right-click them, and select Reset Status.
●
To reset the status of all files in the Files to Process list, select the Edit tab and, in the
Reset Status section, click All Files.
●
To reset the status of all files with an error in the Files to Process list, select the Edit tab
and, in the Reset Status section, click Files with an Error.
Multitasking During the Batch Process
You can select how many CPU cores of your computer should be used simultaneously. The
available number of cores depends on your computer hardware.
Each task uses one core, therefore the multitasking setting represents the maximum number of
tasks that can be run in parallel. It is not always recommended to use the highest settings for the
following reasons:
●
If you want to continue working with your computer during batch processing, you need to
spare power.
●
The disk is slower.
●
Graphics performance and user interface responsiveness are reduced.
●
If your processor uses hyper-threading, half of the cores are virtual and do not bring as
much power as real cores.
If many large files are written, using multitasking is not always recommended, because the files
can become more fragmented on your disk. The resulting files might be slower to read, unless
you are using SSD drives.
NOTE
The number of cores to be used can be changed at any time. Tasks that are already running are
continued or paused, depending on the new setting.
Selecting Processor Cores for the Batch Process
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Batch Processor window, select the Execution tab.
2.
Open the Usage of Processor Cores pop-up menu and select the number of processor
cores that you want to use.
Watch Folders
Watch Folders can be used to automate batch processing tasks. By copying files into a Watch
Folder, a predefined batch processor is automatically applied to these files.
In the batch processor, you can use all audio processing functions that WaveLab Pro offers. For
example, processing with VST plug-in chains, R-128 loudness normalizing, audio analysis reports,
MP3 conversions, etc.
504
Batch Processing
Watch Folders NOTE
To fully take advantage of the Watch Folder feature, you must be acquainted with the Batch
Processor window in WaveLab Pro.
Any kind of File Explorer/macOS Finder folder can be defined as Watch Folder. You can drag or
copy files into the folder, or save audio files into a Watch Folder from any application. Watch
Folders can process both audio files and audio montages.
You can set up multiple Watch Folders, each corresponding to a different audio process.
WaveLab Pro processes any files that are copied into Watch Folders, even if it is not the active
application.
The procedure to set up a Watch Folder is to set up a batch processor, create a Watch Folder,
associate the Watch Folder with the batch processor, and then activate the Watch Folder. When
you now drag files into this folder, they are processed automatically.
The files that you drag into the Watch Folder can be located in folders with subfolders. The
processed files in the output folder will have the same folder structure as the source files.
You can also drag XML files that specify the audio files that you want to process into the Watch
Folder.
RELATED LINKS
Batch Processing on page 488
XML Files in Batch Processing on page 517
Setting Up a Batch Processor for Watch Folders
You can associate any existing batch processor configuration with your Watch Folders or set up a
new batch processor configuration for your Watch Folders.
A Watch Folder can be associated with multiple batch processor tasks. For example, copying a file
into a Watch Folder could automatically produce a 96 kbps MP3 file, a 192 kbps MP3 file, an OGG
file, and a normalized WAVE file.
●
To edit the batch processor, double-click a batch processor in the Watch Folder window.
●
To edit the output folder of a batch processor, double-click the Output Folder column of a
batch processor in the Watch Folder window.
IMPORTANT
Plug-ins that show a validation dialog on startup cannot be used.
RELATED LINKS
Working with the Batch Processor on page 497
Multitasking During the Batch Process on page 504
Watch Folders Window
In this window, you can set up and edit the Watch Folder configuration.
●
To open the Watch Folder window, open the Batch Processor window and select Tool
Windows > Watch Folder.
505
Batch Processing
Watch Folders NOTE
The configurations that you make in the Watch Folder window are automatically saved as you
edit.
Watch Folder List
The Watch Folder list shows the selected Watch Folder and its associated batch processors.
●
To edit a Watch Folder, double-click the folder in the list.
●
To exclude batch processors from being triggered, deselect the corresponding checkbox in
the Watch Folders window.
Functions Menu
Add Watch Folder Task
Opens the Add Watch Folder Task dialog, where you can assign a new Watch Folder
to a batch processor.
Remove Watch Folder Task
Removes the selected watch folder task.
Settings
Opens the Watch Folder Settings dialog, where you can make additional settings
for the Watch Folder.
Verify Configuration
Verifies that the Watch Folder configuration is valid and ready to be activated. This
check is automatically performed when you activate the Watch Folder.
Start
Activates the Watch Folder. If you drag files into an active Watch Folder, the
associated batch processors are applied.
Pause
Pauses the Watch Folders.
Stop
Stops the Watch Folders. All tasks that are running are canceled.
Multi Computer Processing
Allows you to activate the Watch Folders as master instance or slave instance.
Presets Menu
Save As
Allows you to save the active Watch Folder configuration as a preset.
Presets List
Lets you select a Watch Folder configuration preset.
506
Batch Processing
Watch Folders Defining a Watch Folder
PREREQUISITE
Set up a batch processor.
PROCEDURE
1.
2.
In the Batch Processor window, do one of the following:
●
In the Watch Folders window, select Functions > Add Watch Folder Task.
●
In the Watch Folders window, click the + icon.
●
Drag a folder that you want to make a Watch Folder or a batch processor file into
the Watch Folders window. This opens the Watch Folder Task dialog and sets the
corresponding folder or batch processor file as default.
In the Add Watch Folder Task dialog, do the following:
●
Specify the path of the folder that you want to use as a Watch Folder.
●
Specify the file types that you want to process.
●
Specify the path of the batch processor that you want to trigger in the selected
Watch Folder.
If a batch processor is already open in the Batch Processor window, it will be proposed by
default in the Batch Processor File field.
3.
Click OK.
The Watch Folder setup is added to the Watch Folders list.
4.
In the Watch Folders window, select Functions > Settings and make additional settings
for the Watch Folders.
5.
To validate the Watch Folder setup, select Functions > Verify Configuration.
6.
Optional: Assign another batch processor to the Watch Folder.
AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK
When you are done creating a Watch Folder configuration, you must activate it.
RELATED LINKS
XML Files in Batch Processing on page 517
Watch Folder Settings Dialog on page 512
Add Watch Folder Task Dialog
In this dialog, you can specify the Watch Folder location, its associated batch processor file, and
the file types that should be processed.
●
To open the Add Watch Folder Task dialog, open the Watch Folders window, and select
Functions > Add Watch Folder Task or click the + icon.
507
Batch Processing
Watch Folders Watch Folder Location
Allows you to specify the Watch Folder location.
File Types to Process
Allows you to select the file types that are associated with the Watch Folder. Only files
with the corresponding file format are added to the batch process.
Batch Processor File
Allows you to specify the batch processor file that you want to associate with the
Watch Folder.
You can click the icon at the right of the text field to see a list of all open batch
processors and a list of all recently used batch processors.
Activating the Watch Folder Configuration
Once you have set up a Watch Folder configuration, you can activate it.
PREREQUISITE
Set up a batch processor and create one or more Watch Folders.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Watch Folders window, select Functions > Start.
2.
In the Watch Folder Activation dialog, make your settings, and click Activate.
RESULT
The Watch Folder configuration is active. Once you drag a file into a Watch Folder, the associated
batch processors are triggered.
IMPORTANT
To apply the changes that you have made for an active Watch Folder configuration, you must
stop and restart the Watch Folders.
AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK
Via the system tray icon you can access information about the activated Watch Folder, and pause
or stop the processing.
Processing Watch Folders in the Background
WaveLab Pro’s Watch Folder feature can be used as a background task. For this, an additional
instance of WaveLab Pro is opened in the background. The two instances can run simultaneously.
The GUI mode is mainly used for setting up the Watch Folder and test the functionality. Once
everything has been set up, you can activate the Watch Folder configuration using the WaveLab
Pro background instance.
The background instance can be used once you have set up the Watch Folder. When you drag
files into your Watch Folder, the WaveLab Pro background instance processes the files. You can
have the background instance launched automatically with the operating system.
You can use the Multi Computer Processing option to run a WaveLab Pro background instance
on a different computer to increase the processing speed.
NOTE
Once a background instance is opened, it is independent from the instance that you work with.
508
Batch Processing
Watch Folders RELATED LINKS
Watch Folder Activation Dialog on page 510
Multi Computer Processing on page 509
Automatically Starting a Background Instance on Startup
You can start a WaveLab Pro background instance automatically with the operating system.
●
To activate or deactivate the automatic startup function, open the Watch Folder
Activation dialog, and select Activate Watch Folders at Computer Startup.
You can also deactivate the automatic startup function outside WaveLab Pro.
●
●
On Windows, remove the WatchFolders.lnk file from the following location:
C:\Users\[UserName]\AppData\Roaming\Microsoft\Windows\Start Menu
\Programs\Startup
On Mac, remove the WaveLab Pro entry from the login items list.
System preferences/Users & groups/Login items
RELATED LINKS
Activating the Watch Folder Configuration on page 508
Multi Computer Processing
You can use several computers that are located in the same network to process the same
Watch Folders. For example, if there are 10 computers and 800 files to process, each computer
processes 80 files. This increases the processing speed.
If the Watch Folder is located on a shared network path, the processing tasks are distributed
between the computers. One instance of WaveLab Pro is the “master” version that distributes
the files between the other computers that are in “slave” mode. This allows for much faster
processing of the files.
The Watch Folder configuration of the master instance is used and shared with the slave
instances.
The multi computer processing option uses the background instance mode for each computer in
the setup.
IMPORTANT
●
All computers in the network must be either Windows or Mac.
●
All computers in the network must be set to the same language.
●
Each computer must be set up with the plug-ins that are used by the batch processors.
●
The paths specified in the Watch Folder configuration must be specified in a universal
form.
On Windows, this must be in the following form: \\ServerName\volume
●
On Mac, this must be in the following form: /ServerName/volume
If a task depends on specific settings (for example, the XML settings), these settings
must be set on each computer. You can use the Synchronization Settings option in the
WaveLab Pro global preferences to synchronize the computers.
Activating a Multi Computer Processing Watch Folder
PREREQUISITE
Set up a batch processor and create one or more Watch Folders.
509
Batch Processing
Watch Folders PROCEDURE
1.
In the Watch Folders window, do one of the following:
●
To activate a master instance, select Functions > Multi Computer Processing >
Start as Master.
●
To activate a slave instance, select Functions > Multi Computer Processing > Start
as Slave.
NOTE
When you are setting up a new multi computer processing, you must first start the master
instance.
2.
Specify the network setting path.
3.
Decide whether to activate the Watch Folders at computer startup.
4.
Click Activate.
RESULT
The Watch Folder starts in master or slave mode.
Watch Folder Activation Dialog
In this dialog, you can set up the Watch Folder mode for the Watch Folders that you are
activating.
Depending on whether you are activating a standard Watch Folder or use the multi computer
processing mode, the Watch Folder Activation dialog has different options.
Standard Watch Folder Activation Dialog
In this dialog, you can specify whether the Watch Folder runs in GUI mode or as a background
application.
In the Batch Processor window, in the Watch Folders window, set up a Watch Folder task, and
select Functions > Start.
Start in This WaveLab Session
If this option is activated, the active WaveLab Pro instance is used for processing files
in the Watch Folders. When files are copied into a Watch Folder, the corresponding
batch processor file is activated. This allows you to see the progress of the
processing from within WaveLab Pro.
This mode is useful for setting up the Watch Folder configuration.
Start as Background Application
If this option is activated, a new WaveLab Pro instance is launched in the
background. This instance is used for processing the Watch Folders.
510
Batch Processing
Watch Folders Priority
When using a WaveLab Pro background instance for processing files in the Watch
Folders, this can slow down other programs when files are processed. You can set
the priority with which the background instance uses the resources of the computer.
The following priorities are available:
●
Normal: Causes the WaveLab Pro background instance to run with the same
priority as all other programs.
●
Low: Causes a WaveLab Pro background instance to run with a lower priority.
Processing is slower, leaving more power to other applications.
●
Lowest: Causes a WaveLab Pro background instance to run with the lowest
priority. Processing is slower, leaving more power to other applications than
the Low option.
Activate Watch Folder at Computer Startup
If this option is activated, a background instance of WaveLab Pro automatically
launches when the computer starts. This instance is used for processing files in the
Watch Folders.
Watch Folder Activation Dialog for a Master or Slave Instance
In these dialogs, you can set up the multi computer processing. This allows you to distribute the
processing of the batch processor files over several computers in the network.
Network Setting Path
When using multi computer processing, the Watch Folder configuration must
be shared among all computers and the network path must be accessible for all
computers in the network.
Activate Watch Folder at Computer Startup
If this option is activated, a background instance of WaveLab Pro automatically
launches when the computer starts. This instance is used for processing files in the
Watch Folders.
Using the Watch Folder
Once you have set up the Watch Folder configuration, you can start to process files.
PREREQUISITE
Set up one or several batch processor files, associate them with one or more Watch Folders, and
activate the Watch Folder configuration.
PROCEDURE
●
Drag, copy, or save audio files into your Watch Folders.
You can also drag entire folders into the Watch Folder.
NOTE
●
If you drag an empty folder into the Watch Folder, it is automatically deleted.
511
Batch Processing
Watch Folders ●
If you have set up the Scheduled Folder option, place the files into the Scheduled
subfolder inside the Watch Folder. Otherwise, they are processed immediately.
RESULT
The files are processed according to your settings.
Saving a Watch Folder Configuration as Preset
You can save the Watch Folder settings and list as a preset. However, the preset does not include
the batch processor files, which are independent files.
PROCEDURE
1.
Set up a Watch Folder configuration.
2.
In the Watch Folders window, select Presets > Save As.
3.
In the Save Preset As dialog, do one of the following:
●
To save the preset in the default folder, enter a name and click Save.
●
To save the preset in a custom subfolder of the default folder, click the folder icon,
enter a name for the subfolder, and click OK. Then select the subfolder, enter a
name for the preset and click Save.
Watch Folder Settings Dialog
In this dialog, you can make settings for the Watch Folders.
●
To open the Watch Folder Settings dialog, in the Watch Folders window, select
Functions > Settings.
Main Tab
After Processing Input File
After an input file is successfully processed, it has to be removed from its folder. The
following options are available:
●
Move Input File to the “Sources” Subfolder
If this option is activated, processed files are moved to a folder called
Sources, inside the Watch Folder. The original folder structure is preserved.
NOTE
When using an XML file to describe the files to process, an audio file can be
located anywhere outside the Watch Folder. In that case, the Move It to
Source Subfolder option has no effect.
●
Delete Input File
If this option is activated, processed files are deleted from the Watch Folder.
If an Input File Cannot Be Processed
If an input file cannot be successfully processed, it has to be removed from its folder.
The following options are available:
●
Move Input File to the “Errors” Subfolder
If this option is activated and a file cannot be successfully processed, it is
moved to a folder called Errors, inside the Watch Folder. The original folder
structure is preserved.
●
Delete Input File
512
Batch Processing
Watch Folders If this option is activated and a file cannot be successfully processed, it is
deleted from the Watch Folder.
Scheduled Folder
You can specify a time range for the processing of Watch Folders. This allows you to
automatically process files over night or during lunch break, for example.
To do so, create a folder named Scheduled inside the Watch Folder, activate the
Scheduled Folder option, and specify the time range.
Files that reside copied outside the Scheduled subfolder are processed immediately.
Notification after Processing
If this option is activated, a system tray notification pops up when the files have been
processed successfully. Clicking this notification opens the folder where the last file
was rendered.
Add Readme File to Each Watch Folder
If this option is activated, a file called “readme.html” is added to the root folder of
each Watch Folder. The readme file contains information about the settings of the
Watch Folder.
Advanced Tab
Timing
●
Poll Period
This is the period during which WaveLab Pro scans Watch Folders. The shorter
the time, the sooner the files that are copied into the Watch Folder are
processed.
●
Delay before Processing Starts
A file must be fully written to the Watch Folder before processing can start.
Therefore, WaveLab Pro monitors how the file size increases and the time
stamp of the file. Once these indicators are stable, WaveLab Pro waits for the
specified time before starting the batch processors.
If the files are written by another application, for example, a Cubase mixdown,
a value of 2 seconds is recommended. If the audio files are copied or moved
from the File Explorer/macOS Finder, you can use a smaller value.
●
Wait for Companion File
If an audio file is copied into the Watch Folder along with a marker file (.mrk),
the processing should only start when both files are present in the Watch
Folder. The delay value specifies how long WaveLab Pro waits for a marker file.
If you never process audio files with marker files, you can set this value to 0.
WaveLab Pro also waits for both mono audio files of a dual mono file if this
is activated in the batch processor. The Wait for Companion File option is
independent from the dual mono file capability, which relies on file naming
analysis that you can set up in the Audio Files Preferences.
Log File
You can create a log file that is continuously updated with messages about the batch
processing inside the Watch Folders. The log file helps you locate errors in the Watch
Folder configuration.
●
File Path
Here, you can specify the name and the location of the log file.
If you use Watch Folders in a distributing network environment, one
independent log file is created on each computer.
●
Clear Log File when Activating Watch Folders
513
Batch Processing
Watch Folders If this option is activated, the log file is cleared each time Watch Folders are
activated. This option is always activated if the log file has a markup format.
●
Only Report Errors
If this option is activated, only error messages are written to the log.
●
Format
Lets you select whether the log file is a raw text file or a markup file (XML or
HTML).
For markup files, an end tag is added only when the Watch Folders are
deactivated. In case of a distributing computing environment, this tag is added
by the master computer.
RELATED LINKS
XML Files in Batch Processing on page 517
Dual Mono Files on page 137
System Tray Icon
If Watch Folders are active, a system tray icon is displayed that gives information about the
progress and errors, and offers several options regarding the active Watch Folder.
To open the context menu, click the system tray icon.
System tray icon on Windows.
Explore Watch Folder
Lets you open the active Watch Folders in the File Explorer/macOS Finder.
Info
Opens a pop-up message about the number of successfully processed files and the
number of error messages.
Open Log File
Opens the log file for the Watch Folders.
Start WaveLab Pro
If the system tray icon corresponds to a background instance of WaveLab Pro, this
option opens a new WaveLab Pro instance.
If there is already a visible instance of WaveLab Pro, it is put to the front.
Start
Activates the Watch Folders. If this option is not available, the Watch Folders are
already activated.
Pause
If this option is activated, WaveLab Pro stops watching folders. If files are being
processed, their processing is paused. It will continue as soon as Pause is
deactivated.
514
Batch Processing
Watch Folders Stop
If this option is activated, WaveLab Pro stops watching folders and cancels any batch
processing that is taking place.
Quit
Quits WaveLab Pro and cancels any batch processing that is active. This option is only
available if WaveLab Pro is running in the background.
System Tray Status Icons
The system tray icon changes according to the status of the Watch Folder.
Active
Indicates that the Watch Folder is active.
Processing
Indicates that the Watch Folder is processing.
Pause
Indicates that the Watch Folder is paused.
Stop
Indicates that the Watch Folder is stopped.
Error
Indicates that an error occurred during processing. However, processing is not
stopped.
Folder Structure
There are different types of subfolders that WaveLab Pro automatically creates inside a Watch
Folder.
Output, Sources, Errors, Scheduled, and $TEMP$ are reserved for WaveLab Pro. You cannot
create a subfolder with one of these names.
Output
When you create a new batch process, this is the folder where processed files are
written by default. You can change the output folder in the Output tab of each batch
processor.
Sources
This is the folder where processed files are moved when they are successfully
processed. For this, the corresponding option must be activated in the Watch Folder
settings.
Errors
This is the folder where files that could not be processed are moved. For this, the
corresponding option must be activated in the Watch Folder settings.
515
Batch Processing
Watch Folders Scheduled
If you want to process some files only at a specific time, this is the folder where you
must place the files. These files are only processed at the time that is specified in the
Watch Folder settings.
$TEMP$
This is a temporary folder that is created and deleted by WaveLab Pro during
processing.
Controlling the WaveLab Background Application via Command Line
Parameters
You can control the WaveLab Pro background instance via command line parameters.
The following options are available:
--serviceLaunch
This command launches a WaveLab Pro background instance. It must be followed by
one of the following options:
●
alone: Causes a WaveLab Pro background instance to be launched for use in a
single computer system.
●
master: Causes a WaveLab Pro background instance to be launched in Master
Mode for a multi computer system.
●
slave: Causes a WaveLab Pro background instance to be launched in Slave
Mode for a multi computer system.
For these commands, a background WaveLab Pro instance is launched in stop mode
by default. This command can be followed by the commands --serviceCommand
start and --servicePriority, for example.
--serviceLaunch alone --serviceCommand start --servicePriority low
--serviceAuto
This command causes a WaveLab Pro background instance to be launched in the
mode that was active when you last selected Activate Watch Folders at Computer
Startup from the Watch Folder Activation dialog.
For such an instance, the Watch Folders are automatically activated.
--serviceCommand
This command starts, pauses, or stops the WaveLab Pro background instance. It
must be followed by one of the following options:
●
start: Starts the WaveLab Pro background instance.
●
pause: Pauses the WaveLab Pro background instance.
●
stop: Stops the WaveLab Pro background instance.
--servicePriority
This command defines the priority with which the WaveLab Pro background instance
is using the processing power of the computer. It must be followed by one of the
following options:
●
normal
●
low
●
lowest
516
Batch Processing
XML Files in Batch Processing --serviceSettingPath
This command specifies the network path used to synchronize the configuration
between the computers when you are running WaveLab Pro in master and slave
mode. For example:
--serviceSettingPath "\\server\volume\test"
An example to start a master instance:
--serviceLaunch master --serviceCommand start --serviceSettingPath
"\\server\volume\test"
An example to start a slave instance:
--serviceLaunch slave --serviceCommand start --serviceSettingPath
"\\server\volume\test"
--serviceStatus
This command instructs WaveLab Pro to write the status of the Watch Folder to a
file. This command must be followed by a file name and WaveLab Pro must run as a
background instance.
The status file gives information about whether WaveLab Pro is running, paused, or
stopped, the number of error messages, and success messages.
This command is useful to check the status of the Watch Folder system.
--serviceStatus "d:\tests\status.txt"
XML Files in Batch Processing
WaveLab Pro can read information from XML files, such as audio file location and metadata.
WaveLab Pro can also write information to XML or HTML files, such as custom data, metadata,
and audio analysis.
This is useful for handling and tagging huge amounts of audio files. Also, the batch input to
WaveLab Pro and the batch output from WaveLab Pro can be controlled externally with XML files.
The input XML files must not be formatted in a restricted way. You can instruct WaveLab Pro to
understand the structure of your XML files.
XML Input
You can add an XML file to a batch processor to pass information to WaveLab Pro.
There are three types of elements that WaveLab Pro can identify.
Input file path and file name
To instruct WaveLab Pro where to find the audio file that you want to process. This
information is mandatory.
Output file path
To instruct WaveLab Pro where to render the audio file. This information is optional.
If this information is available, it has priority over the output path settings that you
make for the batch process on the Output tab.
Metadata
To transmit metadata that WaveLab Pro can add to the audio files that you want to
process. This information is optional.
517
Batch Processing
XML Files in Batch Processing Instructing WaveLab to Understand your XML Files
You must instruct WaveLab Pro to understand your XML files, in order to make use of the XML
input function.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Batch Processor window, select the Edit tab.
2.
In the XML section, click XML Audio Description.
3.
In the XML Audio Description dialog, specify the input location.
4.
Optional: Specify more elements.
If you have selected User Variable (to Import Metadata), specify a user variable.
5.
Specify a tag and, if necessary, an attribute name and value.
NOTE
You can only specify one attribute per tag. If your XML file has other attributes, these are
ignored by WaveLab Pro.
6.
If necessary, specify the enclosing element tag and its attribute name and value.
7.
Optional: To save the settings as preset, click the presets field, select Save As, enter a
name, and click OK.
8.
Click OK.
RESULT
WaveLab Pro can understand the structure of your XML file. You can now add the XML file to your
batch process.
XML Audio Description Dialog
In this dialog, you can instruct WaveLab Pro how to understand the structure of the XML file that
you want to read.
●
To open the XML Audio Description dialog, open the Batch Processor window, and in the
XML section on the Edit tab, click XML Audio Description.
Element
Lets you select the element that you want WaveLab Pro to identify in the XML file.
You can specify the file location of the input file and the file location of the output
file. The following input and output elements are available:
●
Input Folder/Output Folder
518
Batch Processing
XML Files in Batch Processing The input folder is the folder where the audio file is located. The output folder
is the folder where you want to save the file. These paths can be relative to the
path of the XML file.
If no input/output folder is found, the file path of the XML file is used instead.
●
Input File Name/Output File Name
The file name of the input/output file. For example, Piano.wav.
●
Input File Path/Output File Path
The complete input/output path including the file name. For example, C:
\AudioFiles\Piano.wav.
For the input, you must specify either the Input File Path or the Input Folder +
Input File Name. If the audio file is located in the same folder as the XML file, it is
sufficient to specify only the File Name.
If you do not make any output settings, the settings of the batch processor are used.
User Variable
Lets you specify custom variables that you want WaveLab Pro to identify in the XML
file. This option is available if you have selected User Variable on the Element menu.
The custom variables are shared throughout WaveLab Pro. To edit the variables,
select File > Preferences > Variables.
Identification – Tag
Lets you specify the XML tag that describes the element to identify.
Identification – Attribute Name and Value
If this option is activated, you can specify an XML attribute and its value for the tag
to identify an element. In the text field, you must write the name and value in the
following style:
attr=”value”
Enclosing Element
If this option is activated, the element must be further identified by a parent tag.
Enclosing Element – Tag
Lets you specify the XML tag of the enclosing element.
Enclosing Element – Attribute Name and Value
If this option is activated, you can specify an XML attribute and its value for the tag
of the enclosing element to identify an element. In the text field, you must write the
name and value in the following style:
attr=”value”
Preview
Shows a preview of the structure that WaveLab Pro expects in the XML file.
RELATED LINKS
Variables and Text Snippets on page 562
XML Output
After a batch process, WaveLab Pro can automatically produce an XML or HTML file that
describes the processed audio files. This file can contain the type of processing, the embedded
metadata, and the audio analysis result, for example.
An XSLT file must be specified to instruct WaveLab Pro how to generate the XML/HTML file. The
XSLT file must use the UTF-8 character set.
519
Batch Processing
XML Files in Batch Processing You can generate the XML/HTML file from scratch or generate an XML file that is based on an
existing XML file. The structure of the existing input XML file must be specified in the XML Audio
Description dialog. The input XML file can contain the location of the audio files that you want to
process and information that you want to find in the XML/HTML output file, for example.
Once the XML/HTML files are generated, you can import them to a database or a podcast, for
example.
RELATED LINKS
Instructing WaveLab to Understand your XML Files on page 518
XML Tab on page 494
XSLT Files
WaveLab Pro needs an XSLT file to create an XML output file or transform an XML or HTML
document to another XML document.
XSLT is a language for transforming XML documents into other XML documents, or generating
XML documents from scratch. The WaveLab Pro XSLT processor is compatible with the XSLT 2.0
standard. However, not all features are supported, for example, xsl:output.
The XSLT file in WaveLab Pro determines whether the generated output file will be in XML or
in HTML format. WaveLab Pro provides XSLT example files to generate XML or HTML files that
describe the processed audio files.
●
To use the XSLT example files, select the XML tab, open the Presets pop-up menu, and
select Factory Presets > HTML Example or Factory Presets > XML Example.
In order for the example to work properly, the processed audio file must contain
information for the ID3v2 metadata fields Title and Genre.
Parameters for XSLT Processing
You can specify which parameters will be included in an XML or HTML output file that you can
generate with the batch process. For example, you can include metadata and the results of an
audio analysis in such an output file.
To transmit parameters to the XSLT script, define them in the Parameters for XSLT Processing
dialog.
NOTE
ID3v2 metadata can have custom fields (“TXXX”) that WaveLab Pro cannot list automatically on
the menu. However, you can enter them manually.
Including Audio Analyzer Results in the XML or HTML Output File
You can include the audio analysis results of the Audio Analyzer batch processor monopass plugin in the XML or HTML output file.
PROCEDURE
1.
Open the Audio Analyzer monopass plug-in.
2.
In the Audio Analyzer dialog, activate the Send Analysis Results to XML Processor
option.
3.
Open the Parameters for XSLT Processing dialog and select the parameters of the audio
analysis that you want to include in the output XML.
520
Batch Processing
XML Files in Batch Processing Parameters for XSLT Processing Dialog
In this dialog, you can edit the parameters that you want to find in the XML or HTML file that you
can generate with the batch process.
●
To open the Parameters for XSLT Processing dialog, in the Batch Processor window,
select the XML tab, and click the pen icon.
Create Parameter
Creates a new parameter.
Remove Parameter
Removes the selected parameter.
Parameter List
In the left column, you can specify a parameter name that is known by your XSLT file.
In the right column, you can specify the value for the parameter.
The parameter values can be custom variable codes, custom variable values, auto
variable codes, auto variable values, and text snippets. To see a list of all available
parameters, click the arrow icon.
RELATED LINKS
Variables and Text Snippets on page 562
Generating an XML or HTML File From Scratch
PREREQUISITE
●
Set up your batch process.
●
Set up an XSLT file.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Batch Processor window, select the XML tab.
2.
On the output pop-up menu, select Generate XML/HTML File.
3.
In the XSLT file field, specify the path to your XSLT file.
4.
Optional: In the Optional Parameters field, click the pen icon and specify additional
parameters.
521
Batch Processing
XML Files in Batch Processing 5.
On the Edit tab, click Start to start the batch process.
RESULT
The audio files are processed and an XML/HTML file is generated with the information that are
specified by the XSLT script.
The XML/HTML file is saved in the same location and with the same name (extension .xml or
.html) as the rendered audio file. If No Output is activated, the XML/HTML file is saved in the
Output subfolder of the Watch Folder.
Generating an XML File Based on an Existing Input XML File
PREREQUISITE
●
Set up your batch process.
●
Set up an XSLT file.
●
Instruct WaveLab Pro how to understand the input XML file.
IMPORTANT
The input XML file must be valid to the structure that is specified in the XML Audio Description
dialog.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Batch Processor window, select the XML tab.
2.
On the output pop-up menu, select Transform Input XML File.
3.
In the XSLT file field, specify the path to your XSLT file.
4.
Optional: In the Optional Parameters field, click the pen icon and specify additional
parameters.
5.
Add the input XML file to the batch process.
The audio files that are specified in the input XML file are displayed in the batch processor
list.
IMPORTANT
Do not manually add audio files to the batch process. The location of the audio files that
you want to process is taken from the input XML file.
6.
On the Edit tab, click Start to start the batch process.
RESULT
The audio files are processed and an output XML file is generated with the information that are
specified by the XSLT script.
The XML file is saved in the same location and with the same name (extension .xml) as the
rendered audio file. If No Output is activated, the XML file is saved in the same location as the
source file.
RELATED LINKS
Instructing WaveLab to Understand your XML Files on page 518
XML Audio Description Dialog on page 518
522
Batch Conversion
You can convert multiple files simultaneously to another format. If no processing is needed, this
can be done using the Batch Conversion dialog.
Batch Conversion Dialog
This dialog allows you to convert the file format of a group of audio files.
●
To open the Batch Conversion dialog, select File > Tools > Batch Conversion.
Add File
Opens a dialog, where you can select files to add to the list.
Remove Selected Files
Removes the selected item from the list.
List of files to convert
Shows the files to convert.
Output Tab
Folder
Allows you to specify the folder in which the converted files are saved.
File Format
Allows you to open the Audio File Format dialog, where you can set the file format.
523
Batch Conversion
Batch Converting Files Options Tab
Auto Start When Dropping Files
If this option is activated, the conversion starts automatically when you drag a file
into the list.
Auto Remove Converted Files
If this option is activated, a file is removed from the list once it is successfully
converted. Otherwise, it remains in the list with a green mark indicating its status.
Stop on Error
If this option is activated, the global process stops if an error is encountered. If this
option is deactivated, the file associated with the error is marked in red, and the next
file is processed.
Multitasking Tab
Usage of Processor Cores
Allows you to select how many cores to use simultaneously. The contents of this
menu depend on your computer hardware.
Batch Converting Files
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > Tools > Batch Conversion.
2.
Click the plus icon to add files, or drag the files into the Files to Convert list.
3.
On the Output tab, select a file location and a file format.
4.
Optional: Make further settings on the Options and Multitasking tabs.
5.
Click Start to begin converting the files.
524
Batch Renaming
With the batch renaming functions, you can batch rename multiple files, markers, and clips. You
can convert, remove, format, import, and insert text. This allows you to batch rename file names
according to user specified rules.
You can use simple options to match text, or you can build your own regular expressions. Batch
renaming can be useful with large projects, for example, to apply easily identifiable names to all
referenced files, clips, and markers belonging to the project.
You can use batch renaming for the following operations:
●
Rename files
●
Rename clips in an audio montage
●
Rename markers in audio files and audio montages
Batch Renaming Dialogs
The Batch Renaming dialogs for files, clips, and markers share most features, with some
differences.
The Batch Renaming dialog has 3 pages.
1
The first page defines which files, clips, or markers are renamed. It is different for all
renaming operations.
2
The second page defines how the renaming is performed. It is identical for all renaming
operations.
3
The third page shows you a preview of the resulting names.
Batch Renaming Files
You can batch rename multiple files according to specified settings.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > Tools > Batch Renaming.
2.
In the Batch Renaming dialog, select the files that you want to rename and click Next.
3.
Define the batch rename operation and click Next.
4.
Verify that the renaming is performed as intended, then click Finish.
RELATED LINKS
Batch Renaming Dialog for Files on page 526
Renaming Operation Categories and Types on page 530
Previewing and Performing All Renaming Operations on page 536
525
Batch Renaming
Batch Renaming Files Batch Renaming Dialog for Files
In this dialog, you can batch rename individual files. Any open files that reference these files are
updated automatically.
●
To open the Batch Renaming dialog, select File > Tools > Batch Renaming.
On the first page of this dialog, you can define which files to rename, by using the following
options:
Rename Files in This Folder
Allows you to specify the folder that contains the files to rename.
Scan Subfolders
If this option is activated, files are also searched in subfolders.
Only Rename Files with This Extension
If this option is activated, only files with the extension specified in the text field below
are renamed.
Only Rename Files with Specific Names
If this option is activated, only files that correspond to a specific name are renamed.
You can type in a text string in the text field below, and select one of the following
options from the menu:
●
Name must contain this text
●
Name must NOT contain this text
●
Name must contain this text (with wild cards)
●
Name must NOT contain this text (with wild cards)
●
Name must contain this regular expression
●
Name must NOT contain this regular expression
Skip Read-Only Files
If this option is activated, files that are read-only are not renamed.
Set New Extension
If this option is activated, the extension of files is replaced with the extension
specified below.
526
Batch Renaming
Batch Renaming Markers Batch Renaming Markers
You can batch rename multiple markers in audio files or audio montages according to specified
settings.
PROCEDURE
1.
Optional: If you only want to rename markers in a specific time range, create a selection
range in the wave window or the montage window.
2.
Open the Markers window, and select Functions > Batch Renaming.
3.
In the Batch Renaming dialog, on the Target page, make your settings, and click Next.
If you have made an audio selection and want to use it, activate All Markers in Audio
Selection.
4.
Define the batch rename operation, and click Next.
5.
Verify in the preview list that the renaming is performed as intended, and click Finish.
RELATED LINKS
Batch Renaming Dialog for Markers on page 527
Renaming Operation Categories and Types on page 530
Previewing and Performing All Renaming Operations on page 536
Batch Renaming Dialog for Markers
In this dialog, you can batch rename markers of any type.
●
To open the Batch Renaming dialog for markers, open the Markers window and select
Functions > Batch Renaming.
All Markers
If this option is activated, all markers in the selected file are renamed.
All Markers in Audio Selection
If this option is activated, all markers in the selected audio range are renamed.
Types to Rename
Only the markers of the type selected here are renamed.
527
Batch Renaming
Batch Renaming Clips Only Markers With Specific Names
If this option is activated, only markers that correspond to a specific name are
renamed. You can type in a text string in the text field below, and select one of the
following options from the menu:
●
Name must be empty
●
Name must contain this text
●
Name must NOT contain this text
●
Name must contain this text (with wild cards)
●
Name must NOT contain this text (with wild cards)
●
Name must contain this regular expression
●
Name must NOT contain this regular expression
Skip Locked Markers
If this option is activated, markers that are locked are not renamed.
Batch Renaming Clips
You can batch rename multiple clips according to specified settings.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Clips window, select Functions > Batch Renaming.
2.
In the Batch Renaming dialog, select the clips that you want to rename and click Next.
3.
Define the batch rename operation and click Next.
4.
Check in the preview list if the renaming is as intended, then click Finish.
RELATED LINKS
Batch Renaming Dialog for Clips on page 528
Renaming Operation Categories and Types on page 530
Previewing and Performing All Renaming Operations on page 536
Batch Renaming Dialog for Clips
In this dialog, you can batch rename audio montage clips.
●
To open the Batch Renaming dialog for clips, open the Clips window and select
Functions > Batch Renaming.
528
Batch Renaming
Batch Renaming Clips On the first page of this dialog, you can define which clips to rename, by using the following
options:
All Clips
If this option is activated, all clips are renamed.
All Clips on Selected Track
If this option is activated, all clips on the selected track are renamed.
All Selected Clips
If this option is activated, all selected clips are renamed.
Only Clips With Specific Names
If this option is activated, only clips that correspond to a specific name are renamed.
You can type in a text string in the text field below, and select one of the following
options from the menu:
●
Name must be empty
●
Name must contain this text
●
Name must NOT contain this text
●
Name must contain this text (with wild cards)
●
Name must NOT contain this text (with wild cards)
●
Name must contain this regular expression
●
Name must NOT contain this regular expression
Skip Locked Clips
If this option is activated, clips that are locked are not renamed.
RELATED LINKS
Clips Window on page 237
529
Batch Renaming
Renaming Operation Categories and Types Renaming Operation Categories and Types
On the second page of the Batch Renaming dialog, you set up the renaming operation that you
want to perform for clips, files, or markers.
The Category pop-up menu lists the renaming operation categories. The Type pop-up menu
lists the various types of renaming operations. When you select a type, the related controls are
displayed. The types depend on the selected category.
Remove
All
Removes all characters from the selected range.
Spaces
Removes all spaces from the selected range.
Spaces at Start/End
Removes all spaces at start and end of the selected range.
Duplicate
Replaces two consecutive identical characters by one. Specify the character to
remove in the Character field.
Specific Characters
Removes all instances of one or more characters. Specify the characters to remove in
the Character field.
Surrounded Text
Removes all instances of one or more characters. In the Left Character field, specify
the characters from which on the text is removed. In the Right Character field,
specify the last character to remove.
Then specify in the Occurrence pop-up menu which character to remove if several
are found.
Convert
To Lower Case
Sets all characters in the selected range to lower case.
To Upper Case
Sets all characters in the selected range to upper case.
Capitalize
Sets the first character to upper case, and the rest to lower case. On the menu, you
can specify whether only the first word or all words should be capitalized.
Initials to Upper Case
Sets only isolated letters to upper case. For example, u.s.a to U.S.A.
Specific Character to Text
Replaces each instance of a specific character with a custom string. In the Character
to Replace field, enter the character you want to replace. In the Replacement field,
enter the replacement string.
Pad Number with Zeros
Pads a number present in the selected range with zeros at the left side. On the menu
below, specify how many digits the number should consist of.
530
Batch Renaming
Renaming Operation Categories and Types Invert Character Order
Inverts the order of the characters in the selected range.
Replace with New Text
Replaces the selected range by a specific text string. In the text field below, enter this
string.
Insert
Nothing
Inserts nothing.
Counter
Inserts a number at the selected position, and updates its value with each insertion.
Set up the counter with the additional options.
Specific Text
Inserts a string at the selected position. In the text field below, enter the text to be
inserted.
Part of Original Name
Inserts a part of the original name (before the first operation was performed) at the
selected position. In the text field below, enter the regular expressions. Clicking on
the bulb icon opens a menu with shortcuts for several regular expressions.
Pair of Characters around Text
Inserts specific characters before and after the selected range. In the Left Character
field, specify the characters to insert before the selected range. In the Right
Character field, specify the characters to insert after the selected range.
Spaces around Text
Inserts a space before and after the selected range.
Space after Specific Characters
Inserts a space after specific characters. In the field below, enter the characters that
should be followed by a space.
Space before Each Capitalized Word
Inserts a space before each word starting with an upper case letter. For example, this
changes “MyNicePiano” to “My Nice Piano”.
If Only Capitalize First Word is activated, only the first word is capitalized.
Today’s Date/Time
Inserts the current date and time.
Universal Unique Identifier
Inserts a unique identifier. This is useful for recordings, for example.
Random Word
Inserts a random pronounceable word.
Import and Insert External Data
This category allows you to insert information taken from a file or current context. This is mostly
audio-oriented as some features analyze the audio file headers. The available options differ
depending on the selected Batch Renaming dialog.
Sample Rate
Inserts the sample rate of the file. In the fields below, enter a prefix and suffix, and
select how to format the imported data.
531
Batch Renaming
Renaming Operation Categories and Types Number of Channels
Inserts the number of channels of the file. In the fields below, enter a prefix and
suffix, and select how to format the imported data.
Sample Bit Resolution
Inserts the bit resolution of the file. In the fields below, enter a prefix and suffix, and
select how to format the imported data.
Bit Rate
Inserts the bit rate of the file if the file is encoded. In the fields below, enter a prefix
and suffix, and select how to format the imported data.
Variable/Constant Bit Rate
Inserts the tag VBR or CBR if the file is encoded. In the fields below, enter a prefix
and suffix.
File Length
Inserts the length of the file. In the fields below, enter a prefix and suffix.
File Extension
Inserts the extension of the file. In the fields below, enter a prefix and suffix.
Date/Time
Inserts the date/time of the file at the selected position. In the Format field below,
enter a date.
Folder Name
Inserts the name of the folder containing the file. In the fields below, enter a prefix
and suffix.
Folder Name (2 Positions Up)
Inserts the name of the folder located two positions higher up in the hierarchy. In
the fields below, enter a prefix and suffix.
Folder Name (3 Positions Up)
Inserts the name of the folder located three positions higher up in the hierarchy. In
the fields below, enter a prefix and suffix.
Sample: MIDI Note
Inserts the sample note of the file, if available. In the fields below, enter a prefix and
suffix, and select how to format the imported data.
Sample: Detune
Inserts the detune information for the sample, if available. In the fields below, enter
a prefix and suffix.
Sample: Key Range
Inserts the key range of the sample, if available. In the fields below, enter a prefix,
suffix, and separator, and select how to format the imported data.
Sample: Velocity Range
Inserts the velocity range of the sample, if available. In the fields below, enter a
prefix, suffix, and separator, and select how to format the imported data.
Metadata: Title
Inserts the title if this information is present in the metadata of the file. In the fields
below, enter a prefix and suffix.
532
Batch Renaming
List of Renaming Operations Metadata: Artist
Inserts the artist if this information is present in the metadata of the file. In the fields
below, enter a prefix and suffix.
Metadata: Genre
Inserts the genre if this information is present in the metadata of the file. In the
fields below, enter a prefix and suffix.
Metadata: Album
Inserts the album if this information is present in the metadata of the file. In the
fields below, enter a prefix and suffix.
Metadata: BWF description
Inserts the corresponding metadata. You can insert the title, artist, genre, album,
and BWF description.
Timeline Position
Inserts the position of the file in the timeline. In the fields below, enter a prefix and
suffix.
Variable
Inserts the value of a variable. The value of the variable is retrieved from the
corresponding source audio file. In the field below, enter the variable name.
Line [x] from Text File
Inserts the specified line from a text file to the specified renaming operation. In the
field below, specify the location of the text file (UTF-8) from which the strings should
be collected.
Find and Replace from Table
This category allows you to define a table of words and to associate each word with a
replacement. This feature is useful to reformat a text according to a new style. For example, it
can be used to map a series of numbers to a series of tags, to change a numerical sequence like
“000 – 127” to “C-2 – G8” (MIDI notes).
Find Anywhere in Text
Replaces the words in the table with their specified replacement if they can be found
anywhere in the selected range.
Find Exact Text
Replaces a word of the table with its specified replacement if it is identical to the
word in the selected range.
In the table below these types, you can define a list of strings to find, and define a replacement
for each one. Double-click the cells to edit the list. If a file cell is empty, it is ignored.
If Case Sensitive Search is activated, the search takes the letter cases into account. If Keep
Letter Case is activated, the case of the replacement text is adapted to the case of the found
text.
List of Renaming Operations
In this section on the Operation page of the Batch Renaming dialog, you can create, delete, and
arrange renaming operations.
533
Batch Renaming
Preview Section Add Renaming Operation
Adds a new renaming operation at the end of the list.
Remove Selected Renaming Operation
Removes the selected renaming operation from the list.
Arrow Up/Down
Moves the selected renaming operation one position up/down.
Renaming Operations
Lists all renaming operations that are performed on the original name. The
operations are performed one after the other.
Preview Section
In this section on the Operation page of the Batch Renaming dialog, you can preview the result
of the selected renaming operation.
When you enter a name in the Original field, the change is automatically reflected in the Output
Format field. This preview is continuously updated.
If the preview cannot display missing data, an “X” is shown instead.
Range Parameters
The range parameters on the Operation page of the Batch Renaming dialog allow you to
specify where in the name the operation is performed.
●
To access the range parameters, click Advanced Editing at the bottom of the Batch
Renaming dialog.
534
Batch Renaming
Range Parameters Range to Process
All
If this option is activated, the whole name is processed by the operation.
Regular Expression
Select this option if you want only a part of the name to be processed by the
operation. In this case, you need to define a regular expression. Clicking on the bulb
icon opens a menu with shortcuts for several regular expressions.
From/To
If this option is activated, you can set the start and end position of the range
independently in the From and To sections.
From
Start
If this option is activated, the position is the beginning of the source name.
Character Position
If this option is activated, the position is a fixed offset from the beginning of the of
the source name.
Start of Regular Expression
Select this option if you want the position to be the one of the sub-strings found by
the regular expression applied on the source name.
After Regular Expression
Select this option if you want the position to be the one right after the sub-string
found by the regular expression applied on the source name.
End of Previous Operation
If this option is activated, the position corresponds to the end of the change
performed by the previous operation.
End
If this option is activated, the position is the end of the source name.
To
End
If this option is activated, the position is the end of the source name.
Position from End
If this option is activated, the position is a fixed offset before the end of the source
name.
Number of Characters
If this option is activated, the end position is given by the start position plus a
number of characters.
Before Start of Regular Expression
Select this option if you want the position to be just before the sub-string found by
the regular expression applied on the source name.
End of Regular Expression
Select this option if you want the position to be the end of the sub-string found by
the regular expression applied on the source name.
535
Batch Renaming
Previewing and Performing All Renaming Operations Comment
Comment
Allows you to add a comment to the batch renaming operation.
Previewing and Performing All Renaming Operations
On the last page of the Batch Renaming dialog, you can see how all the selected file, clip, or
marker names are changed before you start the batch renaming. Note that if the name contains
a random item, this item name will most likely be different in the preview.
PREREQUISITE
You made your settings on the first two pages of the dialog.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the list, check if the changes are as you intended.
2.
Click Finish.
Regular Expressions
A regular expression is a formula composed of characters that have special meanings (called
operators). Other characters are plain letters and numbers that are searched for. The search
engine browses the target text one character at a time and stops as soon as it finds a sequence
of characters that matches the regular expression.
At various places in WaveLab Pro, you can use regular expressions to build complex text
matching operations into your conversion and renaming processes. A regular expression is a
set of text symbols that describe a method to find a specific text string within a large body of
text, and then apply a specific operation to this text string. Regular expressions are available to
perform powerful string search/replace operations, for example, in batch renaming or batch
processing.
Throughout WaveLab Pro, wherever you see the asterisk icon
, there is a field where you can
create your own regular expressions. A menu containing shortcuts to build up the basic syntax of
an expression is also available.
Common Regular Expressions
There are various versions of regular expressions. WaveLab Pro uses a version that represents a
good compromise between power and ease-of-use.
The term “expression” refers to a single character, a character class, or a sub-expression
enclosed with () or {}. Searches for regular expressions are not case sensitive.
536
Batch Renaming
Regular Expressions Regular Expressions Pop-up Menu
Menu Item
Any Character
Operator
.
Description
Symbolizes any character.
Character in Range
[]
A bracketed text is treated as a single character,
for example: [AEW13] means A or E or W or 1 or 3.
A hyphen within the brackets specifies a range of
characters. For example, [F-I] means F or G or H or I,
and [A-Z0-9] matches all letters and all digits.
Character Not in
Range
[^]
A circumflex located at the first position in a bracket
is a complement operator. It describes a situation
where all characters match except those included in
the bracket. For example, [^E] means any character
except E.
0 or 1 Match (1 if
Possible)
?
Matches 0 or 1 time the preceding expression. 1
repeat if possible is grabbed, then the rest of the
regular expression continues to be evaluated.
0 or 1 Match (0 if
Possible)
??
Matches 0 or 1 time the preceding expression. 0
repeat if possible (the NEXT step in the regular
expression is also evaluated and has priority).
0 or More Matches (as
Many as Possible)
*
Matches 0 or more times the preceding expression. As
many repeats as possible are grabbed, then the rest of
the regular expression continues to be evaluated.
0 or More Matches (as
Few as Possible)
*?
Matches 0 or more times the preceding expression.
As few repeats as possible are grabbed (the NEXT step
in the regular expression is also evaluated and has
priority).
1 or More Matches (as
Many as Possible)
+
Matches 1 or more times the preceding expression. As
many repeats as possible are grabbed, then the rest of
the regular expression continues to be evaluated.
1 or More Matches (as
Few as Possible)
+?
Matches 1 or more times the preceding expression.
As few repeats as possible are grabbed (the next step
in the regular expression is also evaluated and has
priority).
Or
|
OR operator. Use this to separate two expressions and
to match expression #1 or expression #2. For example,
Piano|Drum matches all texts that contain Piano or
Drum.
Not
!
Negation operator: the expression following ! must not
match the text. For example, a!b matches any “a” not
followed by “b”.
Generic Group
()
Grouping operator. Useful to form a sub-expression.
537
Batch Renaming
Regular Expressions Menu Item
Operator
Description
Capture
{}
Capture operator. By default, the found text
corresponds to the entire regular expression. But it is
possible to limit a part of the regular expression with
{ }, and if a part is matched, this will be the retained
part. For instance the regular expression “ab{cd}ef”
that is applied on “abcdef” will return “cd”.
Beginning of Text
^
Use the circumflex sign to specify that the text must be
located at the start of the browsed text. Any match not
located at the start of the browsed text is ignored.
End of Text
$
Use this sign to specify that the text must be located at
the end of the text. Any match not located at the end
of the text is ignored.
Special Characters Submenu
On this submenu, all special characters for regular expressions are available.
Shortcuts Submenu
Menu Item
Operator
Description
Any Digit (0-9)
/d
Symbolizes any digit, as [0-9].
Any Non-Digit (not
0-9)
/D
Symbolizes any non-digit, as [^0-9].
Any Letter (a-z or A-Z)
/l
Symbolizes any letter, as [a-z].
Any Non-Letter (not az, not A-Z)
/L
Symbolizes any non-letter, as [^a-z].
Any Alphabetic (a-z, or
A-Z, or 0-9)
/w
Symbolizes any alphabetic character, as [0-9a-z].
Any Non-Alphabetic
(not a-z, not A-Z, not
0-9)
/W
Symbolizes any non-alphabetic character, as [^0-9a-z].
Number
/u
Symbolizes a number (without a sign).
Number (with Possible
+- Before)
/i
Symbolizes a number which can be preceded by a + or
- sign.
Quoted String
/q
Symbolizes quoted text.
Simple Word
/z
Symbolizes a simple word (a sequence of letters
surrounded by non-letters, for example, spaces).
538
Batch Renaming
Regular Expressions Presets Submenu
Menu Item
Operator
Description
1st Word
/z
2nd Word
/z/L+{/z}
3rd Word
/z/L+/z/L+{/z}
Last Word
{/z}/L*$
1st Expression in
Parentheses
2nd Expression in
Parentheses
.*?{/(.*?/)}
Searches for the second word (separated by a space).
Searches for the third word (separated by a space).
Searches for the last word (separated by a space).
Searches for the first string enclosed in parentheses.
.*?/(.*?{/(.*?/)} Searches for the second string enclosed in
parentheses.
3rd Expression in
Parentheses
.*?/(.*?/
(.*?{/(.*?/)}
Last Expression in
Parentheses
.*{/(.*?/)}.*$
1st Expression in
Brackets
.*?{/[.*?/]}
2nd Expression in
Brackets
Searches for the first word (separated by a space).
Searches for the third string enclosed in parentheses.
Searches for the last string enclosed in parentheses.
Searches for the first string enclosed in brackets.
.*?/[.*?{/[.*?/]} Searches for the second string enclosed in brackets.
3rd Expression in
Brackets
.*?/[.*?/
[.*?{/[.*?/]}
Last Expression in
Brackets
.*{/[.*?/]}.*$
Searches for the third string enclosed in brackets.
Searches for the last string enclosed in brackets.
539
Podcasts
Podcasting is a method of distributing multimedia files over the Internet, for example, for
playback on mobile devices and personal computers.
A podcast can be downloaded automatically, using software that is capable of reading RSS feeds.
RSS (Really Simple Syndication) is a standard for distributing news and other information via the
Internet. An RSS news feed sends short messages on a specific topic from a specific web site. In
order to read the messages, the user employs a program that has the ability to monitor multiple
feeds and automatically download new messages on a regular basis. This can be a special feed
reader or an Internet browser, for example.
A podcast is an RSS feed including data content, such as audio or video files. This can be a
show of which new episodes are released regularly. The file formats .mp4a, .mp3, and .ogg are
commonly used for podcasts.
Podcast Editor
The Podcast Editor is divided into two panes. The upper pane shows the information for the feed
or an episode, depending on the item that is selected in the list below. This is where you can add
files, Internet links, or textual information to the podcast feed and its episodes. The lower pane
shows an item list of the basic feed and all episodes that are included in the podcast.
540
Podcasts
Podcast Editor Episode Section
In the Episode section, you can create, delete, and move individual podcast episodes.
New
Adds a new untitled episode.
Duplicate
Adds a new episode, copying all the information from the existing episode to the
new one.
Delete
Deletes the selected episode. Alternatively, you can exclude an episode from the
podcast by deactivating the Enabled box.
Cut/Copy/Paste
Cuts, copies, and pastes the selected episode.
Move Up/Move Down
Moves the selected episode one position up or down in the list. Alternatively, use
drag and drop.
FTP Section
In the FTP section, you can define where your podcast is going to be uploaded via FTP.
541
Podcasts
Podcast Editor Update All Items
Uploads/updates the XML podcast file on the FTP server. It also uploads all
associated media files, but only if they are not yet available on the FTP server. This is
the most common function to upload and update your podcast.
Update Selected Item
Uploads/updates the XML podcast file on the FTP server. It also uploads the media
file of the selected item in the list, but only if it is not yet available on the FTP server.
Upload/Replace All Items
This is the same as above, but it always uploads/replaces all of the media files
belonging to the item. This is useful if you have changed the audio data, for example.
Upload/Replace Selected Items
This is the same as above, but it always uploads/replaces the media file of the
selected item in the list. This is useful if you have changed the audio data, for
example.
FTP Settings
Opens the FTP Settings dialog, which allows you to edit the FTP settings that are
related to this podcast.
Podcast Section
View Published Podcast
Opens your podcast (via the URL that is specified in your FTP site settings) using your
default browser.
View XML Source Code
Opens an XML editor to display the source code of the podcast.
Global Options
Edit the automatic picture resizing, set a time offset with Greenwich Mean Time, and
specify the path of the HTML editor.
Main Tab
On the Main tab, you can assign parameters to your podcast. The available parameters change,
depending on whether you select a feed or an episode. Field labels in bold letters mark fields that
are mandatory to fill.
Title
Sets the title of the feed, for example, the topic of your podcast.
Description
Gives space for a further description of the feed content.
Import HTML File (only available for episodes)
Lets you browse for an HTML document that replaces the description.
Internet Link (URL)
The main link of the feed that the user sees. Use this to direct people to a web site
that is related to your feed. Clicking the world icon opens the specified URL in your
default Internet browser.
Audio File (only available for episodes)
This sets the path to the audio file that you want to add to the episode. The audio
file can be of any file type that is supported by the media reader of your browser.
An MP3 file provides best compatibility. Click the icon to list the audio files that are
already open in WaveLab Pro. Select one for your episode.
542
Podcasts
Podcast Editor Alternatively, you can drag the list icon of an audio file into the audio file pane. Click
the play icon to open the specified file in the default media player or viewer of your
system, for previewing or checking purposes.
Picture (only available for feeds)
According to the RSS standard, this picture may not be larger than 144 x 400 pixels,
so the picture is automatically resized. Clicking the picture icon opens the specified
picture in your default image viewer of your system.
Picture icon
Publication Date and Time
Sets the publication date and time of the feed or episode. Clicking the Now button
transfers the current date and time of your system.
As Most Recent Episode (only available for feeds)
If this option is activated, the date and time of the most recent episode are
automatically matched.
Extra Tab
On the Extra tab, you can assign parameters to your podcast. The available parameters change,
depending on whether you select a feed or an episode.
The following parameters are available for a feed:
●
Webmaster (E-Mail Address)
●
Editor (E-Mail Address)
●
Copyright
●
Category
●
Related Domain (URL)
●
Language
●
Frequency of Updates
●
Skip Hours (0 to 23, Comma Separated)
●
Time to Live (Number of Minutes)
The following parameters are available for an episode:
●
Author (Email Address)
●
Comments (URL)
●
Category
●
Related Domain (URL)
●
Title
●
Original Domain (URL)
iTunes Tab
On the iTunes tab, you can activate the iTunes extension that allows you to specify additional
feed and episode information. The available parameters change, depending on whether you
select a feed or an episode.
The following parameters are available for a feed:
●
Subtitle
●
Summary
●
Categories
543
Podcasts
Global Podcast Options ●
Keywords (Comma Separated)
●
Author
●
Owner Name
●
Picture
●
New URL of Feed
●
Hide in iTunes
●
Explicit Material
The following parameters are available for an episode:
●
Subtitle
●
Summary
●
Keywords (comma separated)
●
Author
●
Duration
●
Hide in iTunes
●
Explicit material
Global Podcast Options
Some additional options are valid for all Podcast Editor tabs.
●
To open the Global Podcast Options dialog, open the Podcast Editor, select the Edit tab,
and click Global Options.
Automatic Picture Resizing (Not for iTunes)
Defines what to do if specified pictures exceed the maximum size allowed by the RSS
standard. If pictures need resizing, the original images on your hard disk are not
modified.
Time Offset with GMT (Greenwich Mean Time)
The displayed dates and times are local. If your system is properly set up, WaveLab
Pro automatically adjusts the time offset in relation to GMT. However, if you want to
have time and date relative to a different time zone, adjust the value with this option.
HTML Editor
Sets the path to the external HTML editor that is launched when you click the pen
button in the Import HTML File section.
Creating a Podcast
There are several ways to create a new podcast feed or episode.
●
To create a new podcast, select File > New and click Create Podcast.
●
To add a new untitled episode to a podcast, in the Podcast Editor, select the Edit tab, and
click New.
●
To add an audio file to the selected episode, select the Main tab, click in the Audio File
field, and select Select File Using Standard Selector. Select the audio file in the file
browser and click Open.
You can also drag an audio file from the File Browser window to the Audio File field.
●
To duplicate the selected episode, select the Edit tab, and click Duplicate. This adds a new
episode, and copies all information from the existing episode to the new one.
544
Podcasts
Setting Up a FTP for Podcast Publishing Setting Up a FTP for Podcast Publishing
To be able to upload a podcast to your FTP server, you must enter the FTP server details first.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Podcast Editor, select the Edit tab.
2.
In the Podcast section, click FTP Settings.
3.
In the FTP Settings dialog, enter the following details:
●
The log-in details for your FTP server.
●
The relative path and file name of the podcast (extension .xml).
●
4.
Your web site address including the path to the feed.
Click OK.
Publishing Podcasts
You can upload a podcast from within WaveLab Pro to your FTP server.
PREREQUISITE
Set up your FTP settings within WaveLab Pro.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Podcast Editor, select the Edit tab.
2.
In the FTP section, select one of the following options:
3.
●
Update All Items
●
Update Selected Item
●
Upload/Replace All Items
●
Upload/Replace Selected Items
In the FTP Settings dialog, check if the FTP settings are correct, and click OK.
RESULT
The podcast is uploaded to your FTP site.
FTP Settings Dialog
In the FTP Settings dialog, you can manage all required information for the podcast upload
process.
●
To open the FTP Settings dialog, open the Podcast Editor, select the Edit tab, and click
FTP Settings.
545
Podcasts
Checking the Podcast Host
The host name or IP address of the FTP server.
User Name
The login name to your FTP server.
Password
The password to the login.
Use Passive Mode
Keep this activated and only change this if you experience problems with the FTP
connection.
Feed File Name (with Path)
The podcast file name that is displayed on your FTP server (extension .xml),
including the relative path. File name and path are part of the final public Internet
address of the podcast, so you may want to avoid long names.
Associated Web Site (URL)
Your own web site address including the path to the feed.
FTP Settings Example
●
Your FTP host address is “ftp.MyPage.com”, your public web site address is
“www.MyPage.com”.
●
The feed file name setting is “podcasts/fantastic-cast.xml”, the associated web site setting
is “www.MyPage.com/podcasts”.
●
The media files of the podcast will be uploaded to the FTP server at “ftp.MyPage.com/
podcasts”.
●
The podcast file itself and the Internet address to be distributed will be found at
“www.MyPage.com/podcasts/fantastic-cast.xml”.
Each podcast saves its own complete FTP site information. It is also possible to save and recall
FTP site presets using the Preset functions at the bottom of the dialog.
Checking the Podcast
After creating and publishing a podcast, you can check if the upload was successful.
●
To visualize the contents of the feed XML file in your default XML editor, open the Podcast
Editor, select the Edit tab, and click View XML Source Code.
●
To open your default Internet browser and receive the podcast that you have just
published from the Internet, open the Podcast Editor, select the Edit tab, and click View
Published Podcast.
546
Customizing
Customizing means making settings so that the program behaves and looks the way that you
want it to.
Workspace Layout
Workspace layouts are used for creating various work displays for different situations.
You can create a workspace layout that always appears when you launch WaveLab Pro.
Optionally, the snapshots and the files that you had opened automatically reopen.
You can save a workspace layout to recall your favorite layout for a specific editing task. Because
workspaces can be complex, it is useful to have layouts with a reduced number of visible tool
windows to perform a given task.
Working with Workspace Layouts
Depending on your computer setup or the kind of project that you are working on, you may want
to use different window layouts. You can select layout presets or create your own layouts.
You can save the placement of the workspace frame and all its tool windows and/or the layout of
tabbed data windows.
●
To select a layout preset, select Workspace > Layout and select a layout preset.
●
To save the current layout as a preset, select Workspace > Layout > Save As. In the
Workspace Layout dialog, specify the folder where you want to save the preset, enter a
name, and click Save.
●
To save the current layout as default, select Workspace > Layout > Save Current Layout
As Default.
●
To restore the default layout, select Workspace > Layout > Restore Default Layout.
●
To organize the layout preset folder, select Workspace > Layout > Organize Presets.
The File Explorer/macOS Finder opens. You can then create folders and subfolders and
organize layout presets in them. The folder structure will be reflected as submenus on the
Layout menu.
Workspace Layout Dialog
This dialog allows you to save the window layout of the active workspace as a preset.
●
To open the Workspace Layout dialog, select Workspace > Layout > Save As.
547
Customizing
Customizing the Wave Window and the Montage Window Path name
Opens the root folder of the preset in the File Explorer/macOS Finder. Here, you can
create subfolders in which presets can be saved.
Presets list
Lists all existing presets.
Name
Lets you specify the name for the preset.
Create Shortcut for Selecting the Preset
If this option is activated and you click Save, the Shortcut Definitions dialog opens,
which allows you to define a shortcut to apply to this preset.
If a preset already has an assigned shortcut, this option is grayed out. To change the
existing shortcut, double-click the preset name in the presets list.
Starting WaveLab Pro With a Workspace Layout Preset
You can start WaveLab Pro with a specific workspace layout by entering a preset name in the
command line.
The format of the command line is “--layout presetName”.
If the preset is saved inside a folder in the layout preset, you must specify the relative path. If
the preset name contains spaces, put the name in quotes. For example, --layout “My Folder/
presetName”.
EXAMPLE
An example of setting up the command line.
1
Set up a workspace layout and save it as Layout 1.
2
Start WaveLab Pro with the command line --layout “Layout 1“.
Customizing the Wave Window and the Montage Window
You can set up the wave/montage window by adjusting colors of waveforms, background, cursor
lines, etc., and changing the look of the ruler and other window details.
Customizing can be done in the following ways:
●
By changing the default style.
●
By assigning different styles, according to specific conditions. For example, a specific file
type or a specific file name.
548
Customizing
Customizing the Wave Window and the Montage Window Assigning Custom Colors to the Wave Window or the Montage
Window
PROCEDURE
1.
Depending on whether you want to customize the colors of the wave window or the
montage window, do the following:
●
For the wave window, select File > Preferences > Audio Files and select the Style
tab.
●
For the montage window, select File > Preferences > Audio Montages and select
the Style tab.
2.
Select the part that you want to color from the Parts list.
3.
Specify a color using the color picker or the RGB fields.
Assigning Custom Colors According to Conditions
You can apply different color schemes automatically to different clips, according to their names
or the properties of their audio files.
IMPORTANT
If you redefine colors, be careful not to choose colors that cause other elements to disappear.
PROCEDURE
1.
2.
Depending on whether you want to customize the colors of the wave window or the
montage window, do one of the following:
●
For the wave window, select File > Preferences > Audio Files and select the Style
tab.
●
For the montage window, select File > Preferences > Audio Montages and select
the Style tab.
Do one of the following:
●
In the Audio Files Preferences, select one of the Conditional options from the popup menu at the top of the dialog.
●
In the Audio Montages Preferences, in the Parts list, select one of the Custom
entries.
3.
Specify a color using the color picker or the RGB fields.
4.
In the This Style Is Used If These Conditions Apply section, specify the conditions.
5.
Click OK.
Copying Color Settings
You can copy the color settings of one part, or all parts of a custom color schema.
●
To copy a color setting, select the part from which you want to copy the color, and select
Copy Color. Then select the part to which you want to copy the color, and select Paste.
●
To copy all color settings of a custom color setting, drag the name of a custom color
setting onto another custom color name, and click OK.
549
Customizing
Customizing Shortcuts Customizing Shortcuts
In WaveLab Pro, you can control many functions via shortcuts to speed up your workflow. You
can edit existing shortcuts and create new shortcuts.
Most shortcuts are restricted to a specific editor, which means that you can reuse the same
shortcut combination in different editors. The exception is the Master Section where all
shortcuts are global to the application.
The shortcuts in the Navigation (Numeric Pad) and View and Navigation sections on the
Shortcuts tab are dedicated to navigating through WaveLab Pro.
Shortcuts that cannot be edited are grayed out. The shortcuts that you created are displayed in
blue in the editor.
You can create new shortcuts in the following ways:
●
By specifying a key sequence of up to four keys that must be pressed in a specific order to
invoke the operation.
●
By specifying a MIDI command. You need a MIDI controller device connected to your
computer for this to work.
●
By specifying keywords.
RELATED LINKS
Shortcuts Tab on page 553
Keywords
Keywords are custom words that are assigned to a function in the Customize Commands dialog
or to a preset in the Shortcut Definitions dialog. When you enter the keyword in the File Search
and Keyword field, the corresponding function is triggered.
EXAMPLE
For example, if you want to have a quick way to normalize audio to -1 dB, proceed as follows:
1
In the Audio Editor, select the Process tab.
2
In the Normalizing section, click Level.
3
In the Level Normalizer dialog, set the Peak Level to -1 dB.
4
Click the Presets field, and select Save As.
5
In the Save Preset As dialog, enter a name for the preset, and activate Create Shortcut
for Applying the Preset.
6
Click Save.
7
In the Shortcut Definitions dialog, enter norm_1 as a Keyword, and click OK.
8
Now, to trigger the preset, enter .norm_1 in the File Search and Keyword field, and press
Return.
The dot in front of the keyword instructs WaveLab Pro to interpret the text as a keyword.
Without the dot, the File Search and Keyword field is used for finding file tabs.
RELATED LINKS
Shortcuts Tab on page 553
Shortcut Definitions Dialog on page 554
Searching for Open Files on page 63
550
Customizing
Customizing Shortcuts Indexed Key Commands
Indexed key commands allow you to quickly jump to specific locations in your project, for
example, to a specific marker or Master Section slot.
The available indexed key commands are listed on the Shortcuts tab, in the Navigation
(Numeric Pad) section.
●
To trigger an index key command, type the number of the item that you want to jump to
and press the corresponding key on your keyboard.
EXAMPLE
If you want to jump to the 5th marker in your file window, press 5 on your keyboard and then
press M.
If you want to jump to the 10th file tab, press 10 on your keyboard and then press F.
RELATED LINKS
Shortcuts Tab on page 553
Editing Shortcuts
You can see the list of all shortcuts in the Shortcuts tab, and edit and define shortcuts on the
Shortcut Definitions dialog.
The Shortcuts tab provides a different command set for each menu or dialog.
●
To open the Shortcut Definitions dialog, select File > Preferences > Shortcuts, select a
command, and click Edit Shortcut.
●
You can enter a keyword which you can later use to activate a command by typing it into
the File Search and Keywords field in the command bar.
●
You can define a command to be triggered by an external MIDI controller. For example,
this can be useful for issuing transport commands from your midi keyboard. You can
specify a sequence of up to three midi events. The MIDI shortcut is displayed in the MIDI
Trigger column.
●
You can define one key shortcut, and/or one MIDI shortcut, and/or one keyword per
command. Each shortcut can be a sequence of up to four keystrokes or three MIDI events.
A keyword can be of any length.
●
To reset some or all types of shortcuts to their factory default use the Reset button.
Defining Key Sequences
You can define key sequences for a keyboard and for a MIDI controller.
551
Customizing
Customizing Shortcuts PREREQUISITE
If you want to define a key sequence for a MIDI controller, make sure that your MIDI controller is
connected to your computer, and selected on the Remote Devices tab.
On a Mac, commands for the main menus must consist of a single key command.
When using multiple key stroke commands, make sure that the key commands do not interfere
with each other. For example, when you have one shortcut Shift+L, M and define another to be
Shift+L, this second shortcut has no effect.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > Preferences > Shortcuts.
2.
In the commands list, select the command for which you want to define a key sequence,
and click Edit Shortcut, or double-click the Key Sequence column of the corresponding
command.
3.
In the Shortcut Definitions dialog, click in the Key Stroke fields and press the buttons
that you want to use as the key sequence.
4.
Click OK.
RESULT
When you now press the keys/buttons specified in the dialog, the corresponding operation is
performed. The key strokes must be executed one after the other.
RELATED LINKS
Remote Devices Tab on page 13
Selecting a MIDI Controller for Defining MIDI Commands
Before you can use MIDI commands, you have to select a MIDI controller.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > Preferences > Remote Devices.
2.
On the Device Editing tab, select MIDI Shortcuts for Menus from the pop-up menu at the
top.
3.
Select Active to activate the selected device.
4.
From the In-Port pop-up menu, select a MIDI input port.
Generating a List of All Shortcuts
You can generate an HTML file or print out a list that contains all shortcuts.
PREREQUISITE
If you want to print out the list, make sure a printer is connected to your system.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > Preferences > Shortcuts.
2.
Click Summary, and select one of the following options:
●
To open the Print Preview dialog, from which you can print out the list of all
shortcuts, select Print Preview. For Print Preview to be available, a printer must be
connected.
●
To open the list of all shortcuts in the HTML file format in the standard browser,
select HTML Report.
552
Customizing
Customizing Shortcuts Shortcuts Tab
This tab allows you to customize your own shortcuts for WaveLab Pro. It shows a list of the
assigned shortcuts for WaveLab Pro commands and menu options.
●
To open the Shortcuts tab, select File > Preferences > Shortcuts.
Search pop-up menu
Allows you to select the part of the commands list in which the search is performed.
Search field
Allows you to search for a command.
Use Wildcards
If this option is activated, the wildcard characters “*” and “?” can be used.
“*” substitutes zero or more characters, and “?” substitutes any character.
For example, if Search Keyboard Shortcut is selected, type “*” to display all
commands that are already associated with a shortcut.
Expand/Collapse
Expands/Collapses the folder tree.
Commands list
Shows all commands and their shortcuts.
Reset
Resets the commands to the factory settings.
Summary
Opens a menu from which you can generate a list of all commands and their
shortcuts, either in HTML or as a print out.
553
Customizing
Customizing Shortcuts Edit Shortcut
Opens the Shortcut Definitions dialog where you can edit the shortcuts for the
selected command.
Shortcut Definitions Dialog
This dialog allows you to define your own customized shortcuts for a particular function.
●
To open the Shortcut Definitions dialog, select File > Preferences > Shortcuts, select a
command, and click Edit Shortcut.
Key Sequence
1st Key Stroke
Lets you select the first key of a sequence that can consist of up to four keys. Set the
focus to the key stroke field, then press the key combination. If nothing is displayed,
a key is not allowed in this context.
2nd/3rd/4th Key Stroke (optional)
Lets you select additional keys that must be used to execute the command. The
command is only executed if this key event happens after the first one.
Clear
Erases all key event fields.
Keyword
Lets you type in a keyword that invokes the command.
MIDI Event Sequence
This section is only available if a MIDI input port is specified in the main preferences in WaveLab
Pro.
554
Customizing
Customizing Command Bars 1st Event
Lets you select the first MIDI event of a sequence that can consist of up to four MIDI
events. Set the focus to the event field, then trigger the MIDI event from your MIDI
controller.
2nd/3rd Event (optional)
Lets you select additional MIDI events that must be triggered to execute the
command. The command is only executed if this MIDI event happens after the first
one.
Clear
Erases all MIDI event fields.
Customizing Command Bars
You can hide or show individual command bar buttons. This way you can customize command
bars by removing unwanted commands.
PROCEDURE
1.
In a tool window, open the menu and select Customize Command Bar.
2.
To show a specific command on the command bar, activate the checkbox in the Bar
column for the corresponding command.
3.
Click OK.
Plug-in Organization
WaveLab Pro comes with various plug-ins, and additional plug-ins can be added. To retain an
overview over the plug-ins that are relevant to your project, you can organize your plug-ins in
groups.
On the Organize tab of the Plug-ins Preferences, you can specify how your plug-ins appear on
menus in the program. In the plug-ins list, you find subfolders representing groups of plug-ins.
Initially, plug-ins are categorized by vendor, category, favorite plug-ins, and recently used plugins.
If the 32-bit and 64-bit versions of WaveLab Pro are used on the same system, their settings are
shared. An exception to this rule are the following options in the Plug-ins Preferences:
●
Additional VST Plug-in Folders
●
Ignore Plug-ins Located in the following Subfolders
This is because 32-bit plug-ins cannot be used in WaveLab Pro 64 bit and vice versa.
RELATED LINKS
Plug-ins Preferences on page 558
Deactivating Plug-ins
You can deactivate plug-ins. This is useful if you do not want to use particular plug-ins in
WaveLab Pro.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > Preferences > Plug-ins.
2.
Select the Organize tab.
555
Customizing
Plug-in Organization 3.
In the plug-ins list, navigate to the plug-in that you want to deactivate.
4.
Deactivate the checkbox in for the plug-in. When selecting multiple plug-ins, you can
deactivate all of them with a single click.
●
To deactivate the plug-in on the plug-in selection menus, deactivate the checkbox in
the Effect column.
●
To deactivate the plug-in on the Final Effects/Dithering panel of the Master
Section, deactivate the checkbox in the Final column.
●
To deactivate the plug-in on the Playback-Processing panel of the Master Section,
deactivate the checkbox in the Play column.
●
To deactivate a clip plug-in when a clip is not streamed, deactivate the checkbox in
the Dyn column.
This allows you to save DSP power when using hardware plug-ins.
Adding Plug-ins to the Favorites Menu
You can add plug-ins that you are using regularly to the Favorites menu of the plug-in selection
menu.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > Preferences > Plug-ins.
2.
Select the Organize tab.
3.
In the plug-ins list, navigate to the plug-in that you want to add to the favorites.
4.
Activate the checkbox for the corresponding plug-in in the Favorites column.
Favorites
NOTE
If the Favorites menu is empty, it does not appear in plug-in selection menus.
Customizing Plug-in Groups
You can customize the appearance and sorting of plug-ins on the Organize tab of the Plug-ins
preferences.
●
To update the tree, click the Show Changes button.
●
To create a custom category for a plug-in, click the Custom Category column for the
corresponding plug-in, and enter a new category name. Alt-click to delete the category.
Use the character “|” to create subcategories, for example, “Folder-1|Folder-2”. If you
select multiple plug-ins, the category name is applied to all selected plug-ins.
●
To rename a custom category, click the category name in the Custom Category column,
and select Rename Category from the pop-up menu. In the Rename Category dialog,
enter the name of the category that you want to rename in the Find field, and the name
that you want to replace it with in the Replace with field. Then click Replace All.
●
The category labels that are used to create the hierarchy are supplied by the plug-in
manufacturers. To change the category name, navigate to the Category Renaming table,
click in the Original column, and select the category that you want to rename. Then click in
the Modified column, and enter a new name.
556
Customizing
Plug-in Organization ●
To change the sorting of plug-in groups, select whether to sort by category or by vendor
in the sorting menu of the Customize section. If a plug-in does not publish a vendor name
or category, the name of the enclosing plug-in folder on disc is used as vendor name or
category if it is not the VST plug-in root folder.
●
To group all plug-ins that start with the same prefix in one submenu, activate Create
Submenus Based on Prefixes, and specify the number of plug-ins that must start with the
same prefix. Only if this number is reached, a submenu is created.
●
To group plug-ins in a single submenu if their number is below a specified value, activate
Compress Hierarchy, and specify the threshold. A tree is flattened to a single submenu if
the number is below the threshold. This prevents too small submenus.
●
To activate the Recently Used category, activate Submenu with Recently Used Plug-ins,
and specify the maximum number of recently used plug-ins that should be displayed in
this category.
●
You can make the Recently Used category global to all places or individual for each
context, for example, for the Master Section, audio montage track, or audio montage clip.
To make the Recently Used category individual for each context, activate Independent
Recently Used Plug-ins Menus.
RELATED LINKS
Plug-ins Preferences on page 558
Adding Additional VST Plug-ins
You can specify folders where additional VST plug-ins can be found. This is useful if you are using
third-party VST plug-ins that you do not want to save in the standard VST folder.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > Preferences > Plug-ins.
2.
Select the General tab.
3.
In the Additional VST Plug-in Folder (WaveLab Specific) section, click the folder icon, and
navigate to the folder that contains the VST plug-ins that you want to add.
Excluding Plug-ins
You can specify a list of plug-ins that WaveLab Pro does not open.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > Preferences > Plug-ins.
2.
Select the General tab.
3.
In the Do Not Load the Following Plug-ins section, type in the name of the plug-in that
you do not want to open:
●
Enter the exact file name, without path and without file extension.
●
Enter one name per line.
●
If you put “*” in front of the name, any plug-in that contains the name is ignored.
557
Customizing
Plug-in Organization Replacing Missing Plug-ins
When you open an audio montage and some plug-ins for tracks or clips are missing, you can
select plug-ins to replace the missing plug-ins.
PROCEDURE
1.
In the Missing Plug-ins dialog, click the Replacement column, and select a replacement
for the plug-in displayed in the Original column.
2.
If you want to use the new plug-in from now on, activate Save Replacements as Default.
3.
Click OK.
Plug-ins Preferences
On this tab, you can access a number of options for managing your VST plug-ins.
You can specify where WaveLab Pro should search for your VST plug-ins and which ones it should
ignore. It also allows you to choose how your VST plug-in controls respond to mouse actions and
how frequently graphics are updated.
If you use your own file structure to organize and save VST plug-ins, this dialog allows you to gain
full control over which plug-ins are loaded and which are ignored. This is useful if you want to
deactivate a particular plug-in or if you want to ignore plug-ins that you never want to use with
WaveLab Pro.
●
To open the plug-in preferences, select File > Preferences > Plug-ins.
558
Customizing
Plug-in Organization General Tab
Search Standard VST Plug-in Shared Folders
If this option is activated, WaveLab Pro searches for VST plug-ins in the default VST
plug-in folders.
Information About the Searched Folders
Click on the info icon to see in which folders WaveLab Pro searched for plug-ins
when it was launched. If you cannot find a plug-in in WaveLab Pro, this helps you to
determine whether you have specified the correct folder, for example.
Additional VST Plug-in Folders (WaveLab Pro Specific)
Lets you specify additional folders where VST plug-ins can be found.
Ignore Plug-ins Located in the following Subfolders (Separate Folder Names with a
Semicolon)
Lets you specify folder names that WaveLab Pro skips when searching for VST plugins.
Do Not Load the following Plug-ins
Lets you specify plug-ins that WaveLab Pro does not open. Enter the file names,
without path and without file extension. Write each plug-in on a new line.
559
Customizing
Plug-in Organization If you put the character * in front of the name, any plug-in that contains the name is
ignored.
Force Plug-in Detection at Next Launch
Analyzes the plug-ins when launching WaveLab Pro the next time. To reduce the
start time of WaveLab Pro, the plug-ins are not analyzed every time WaveLab
Pro is started. However, WaveLab Pro keeps a list of plug-ins and updates this
automatically when a date or size change is detected.
Keep Plug-ins in Memory until WaveLab Pro Quits
If this option is activated, the plug-ins are kept in memory even when they are no
longer used. This results in a faster reopening of plug-ins. However, if you use many
plug-ins, too much memory could be used after a specific time, which slows down
the application.
Faster Graphics Refreshing (Consumes More Computer Power)
Refreshes the graphics of VST plug-ins more quickly.
VST Plug-in Knobs
Lets you set the mode for using knobs in plug-ins. You can set the mode to Circular,
Circular Mode (Relative Movement), and Linear.
Organize Tab
Plug-ins list
Displays the hierarchy of the plug-ins in WaveLab Pro. Here, you can specify whether
a plug-in is available on the plug-in selection menus and/or the Final Effects/
Dithering panel and Playback-Processing panel of the Master Section.
You can add plug-ins to the Favorites list, create shortcuts for plug-ins, specify
custom categories, and decide whether to use the generic user interface or the plugin specific user interface.
560
Customizing
Plug-in Organization Expand/Collapse
Expands/Collapses the folder tree.
Search field
Allows you to filter the plug-ins list for names.
●
Click in the search field, and enter the text that you want to search for.
●
To switch the focus from the search field to the plug-ins list, press Down
Arrow.
●
To switch the focus from the plug-ins list to the search field, press Ctrl/Cmd-F.
Only Show New Plug-ins
If this option is activated, only the recently detected plug-ins are displayed.
Remove “New” Status
Resets the “new” status of the recently detected plug-ins.
Show Changes
Refreshes the plug-in tree according to the current settings.
Sorting
Determines how the plug-ins are sorted. The other parameters act on that hierarchy.
Compress Hierarchy
Merges all items into a single submenu if a submenu and all its submenus contain
less than a specific number of plug-ins (Threshold).
The Threshold value determines the minimum number of items that are needed to
compress the hierarchy.
Create Submenus Based on Prefixes
Creates a submenu that is labeled as the prefix if several items in a submenu start
with the same prefix.
The Threshold value determines the minimum number of items that must start with
the same prefix that are needed to create submenus that are labeled as the prefix.
Merge Single Submenus
Merges submenus that contain another submenu with only a single item in it.
Category Renaming
The category labels used to create the hierarchy are supplied by the plug-in
manufacturers. In this section, you can change the category name. This can also be
useful to merge two categories into one, by renaming these two categories with the
same name.
Submenu with Recently Used Plug-ins
If this option is activated, the Recently Used submenu is shown.
The Maximum Size value determines the maximum number of plug-ins on the
Recently Used submenu.
The Independent Recently Used Plug-ins Menu option determines whether the
Recently Used submenu is global to all places where plug-ins can be selected, or if it
is local to each context.
Ignored Plug-ins
Opens the Ignored Plug-ins dialog, where you can see plug-ins which were not
loaded. This dialog lets you instruct WaveLab Pro to rescan these plug-ins at the next
launch. This is faster than a full rescan.
561
Customizing
Variables and Text Snippets Number of Plug-ins
Shows the number of plug-ins that are available in WaveLab Pro.
Variables and Text Snippets
You can define and use custom variables and text snippets, or use auto variables in various
places in WaveLab Pro, for example, in the Metadata dialog.
Custom variables can be used to replace codes with a specified text in metadata saved within
audio files. For example, you can define the variable %proj% to be replaced by the name of the
current project. A custom variable can also contain references to other variables. For example,
%comment% can be defined as “%proj% started on @Date1@”.
Variable codes are replaced with the variable values when the file is written. For example, when
the metadata is saved inside an audio file.
Auto variables are automatically set by WaveLab Pro. For example, the current date, the sample
rate, the bit resolution, or metadata values that are found in audio files.
Text snippets can be used to define words that you are using regularly when filling in text fields.
These can be inserted into a text field via the Text Snippets menu.
Some auto variables depend on the context. For example:
●
CD Text variables are only used when rendering an audio montage.
●
Auto variables that relate to CD tracks are only used when rendering CD tracks from an
audio montage. To render CD tracks, activate one of the following options in the Render
dialog: Selected CD Track, One Region (CD Track markers), or Regions (track markers).
If a variable is used in a wrong context, it is replaced with a blank.
Defining Variables and Text Snippets
You can create new variables and text snippets, and define values for them.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > Preferences > Variables.
2.
Do one of the following:
562
Customizing
Variables and Text Snippets 3.
●
On the Custom Variables tab, click the plus icon to add a new variable, or doubleclick an existing variable that you want to modify.
●
On the Text Snippets tab, click the plus icon to add a new definition, or double-click
an existing definition that you want to modify.
For custom variables, enter the name, code, and value for the variable. For text snippets,
enter the text.
NOTE
Variable codes are case sensitive. It is recommended to select the codes from the menus.
Applying Variables and Text Snippets
You can apply custom variables, auto variables, and text snippets at various places in WaveLab
Pro.
PREREQUISITE
Define custom variables and text snippets.
PROCEDURE
1.
In a value field, click the arrow icon. If several fields are selected, right-click to access the
pop-up menu.
2.
From the menu, select a custom variable, an auto variable, or a text snippet.
The variable or text snippet is added to the value field.
Variables and Text Snippets Dialog
This dialog allows you to define custom variables, see the auto variables, and define text
snippets.
●
To open the Variables and Text Snippets dialog, select File > Preferences > Variables.
563
Customizing
Scripting Plus icon
Adds a new custom variable/text snippet.
Minus icon
Removes the selected custom variable/text snippet.
Scripting
WaveLab Pro contains a powerful scripting language to help advanced users create their own
scripts to automate tasks. Using basic scripts can be useful for automating repetitive editing
tasks such as trimming and cropping a file at specific times, for example.
You can write scripts that perform other basic editing commands, apply offline processing, place
markers, and display information about the active file. You can script commands to edit the
active audio file or the active audio montage. If you have some experience of programming with
modern scripting languages you should have no problem writing utility scripts for WaveLab Pro.
The WaveLab Pro scripting language is based on ECMAScript, with the addition of WaveLab Pro
specific commands.
●
The WaveLab Pro specific scripting functions are available in the WaveLab Pro
Scripting documentation. The documentation is available on the Internet from https://
steinberg.help/.
●
On Windows, there is an additional scripting interface to control WaveLab Pro from
external applications using VBScript or JScript. The WaveLab Pro ActiveX Scripting
documentation is available on the Internet from steinberg.help and in the following folder:
●
Steinberg\WaveLab Pro 9.5\Tools\Windows Scripting\
For a broader look at the complete subset of commands that are available, see the
ECMAScript Language Specification.
This chapter is about scripts that are executed from within WaveLab Pro.
Script Editor
The Script Editor allows you to write and execute scripts in WaveLab Pro.
●
To open a new script file, select File > New and click Script.
●
To open a saved script file, select File > Open and click Script. Select the script file and click
Open.
564
Customizing
Scripting Execute Script
Executes the script.
Writing and Executing a Script
PROCEDURE
1.
Select File > New.
2.
Click Create Script.
3.
In the Script Editor, type your script or copy and paste it from an external text editor.
4.
To run the script, select the Edit tab, and click Execute Script.
NOTE
Only one script can be executed at a time.
RESULT
The script runs if there are no syntax errors. Any errors appear in a dialog box to help you debug
them.
NOTE
There are several free utility text editors that are context sensitive. This means that they can color
and highlight parts of your code to make it more readable. If you use one of these for writing
and editing your scripts, choose Javascript as the editing language and/or save the file with a .js
(Javascript) extension.
Using the Log Window When Scripting
It is a good idea to begin scripting by writing some simple scripts that output some text to the
Log window.
The goal of the following example is to output a simple text message to the Log window.
PROCEDURE
1.
Select Tool Windows > Log.
565
Customizing
Touch Bar (macOS only) 2.
Copy and paste the following script into the Script Editor.
//output the number of samples in the active wave as text in the log window.
logWindow.printInfo("This file has " + activeWave.size() + " samples");
NOTE
Any lines of a script that begin with two forward slashes // are comments, and are ignored
when the script is executed.
3.
Execute the script.
RESULT
In the Log window, the number of samples used in the active file is displayed.
Touch Bar (macOS only)
The Touch Bar at the top of your keyboard gives you shortcuts to the WaveLab Pro functions. The
Touch Bar changes automatically based on where you are in WaveLab Pro and offers a subset of
the available options. You can customize the Touch Bar according to your needs.
NOTE
The Touch Bar is only available on certain Apple products.
Customizing the Touch Bar (macOS only)
●
To open the Touch Bar customization window, select WaveLab Pro 9.5 > Customize Touch
Bar.
●
To add an option to the Touch Bar, use your cursor to drag your favorite options from the
customization window down into the Touch Bar.
When you are done, tap Done in the Touch Bar or click Done on the screen.
●
To rearrange options within the Touch Bar, drag them to the left or right.
●
To remove options from the Touch Bar, drag them up and out of the Touch Bar.
566
Configuring WaveLab Pro
You can configure WaveLab Pro according to your needs.
NOTE
The settings that you make in the preferences are applied when you switch to another WaveLab
Pro window.
Global Preferences
Global preferences are preferences that apply throughout WaveLab Pro. Before you start
working with WaveLab Pro, it is recommended to edit these preferences according to your
needs.
●
To open the global preferences, select File > Preferences > Global.
General Tab
This tab allows you to change the location of settings files and the user interface language. You
must restart the application for changes to take effect.
General
Language
Allows you to select the user interface language.
Setting Location
Common for All Users
Shares the preferences settings with all users on this computer.
Independent for Each User
Lets each user on this computer make their own preferences settings.
Application Folder (Portable Installation)
Saves settings in the application directory. Use this option to install the application
on a portable device.
Specific Folder
Allows you to save the settings in a specified folder.
Open Setting Folder
Opens the folder that is used to save settings. This way you know where the settings
are saved and you can back up the settings.
567
Configuring WaveLab Pro
Global Preferences Synchronization Settings
Master Folder
Lets you specify where the preference settings are saved.
Synchronize at Every Launch
If this option is activated, the settings are synchronized whenever WaveLab Pro is
launched.
Synchronize at Next Launch
If this option is activated, the settings are synchronized the next time that WaveLab
Pro is launched.
Preferences Handling
Determines how to synchronize the preferences, that is, all settings except the
presets. You can either ignore or mirror the preferences.
Preset Handling
Determines how to synchronize the presets that are saved in the master folder. The
following options are available:
●
If Ignore Presets is activated, the presets are not synchronized.
●
If Mirror Presets is activated, the presets are restored from the master folder,
regardless of their time stamp. Any additional local presets are deleted.
●
If Import New Presets is activated, the presets in the master folder that are
unavailable on the computer are imported.
●
If Update Old Presets is activated, existing presets are overwritten if a newer
version is found in the master folder.
Ignore the following Preset Folders (Separate Them with a Semicolon)
Lets you specify which preset folders you want to ignore when synchronizing
the settings. For example, to ignore the Audio Connections settings, add "Audio
Connections" to the field.
Update Master
If you click this button, the settings that were used when launching WaveLab Pro are
used to update the master folder.
NOTE
This procedure should only be run by the system administrator if multiple WaveLab
Pro workstations are used.
Display Tab
This tab allows you to change many aspects of the user interface that apply across the whole
application. These options provide information and usability functions but can be deactivated to
streamline the interface.
Theme
Theme
Allows you to switch between the WaveLab Pro color schemes.
Workspace
Show Tab If There Is a Single File Window
If this option is activated, the tabs are always visible, even if there is only one active
file.
568
Configuring WaveLab Pro
Global Preferences Display Active File Path in Title Bar
Displays the file path of the active file in the title bar of the workspace.
When Closing the Active Tab
Determines the behavior of the program when closing the active tab.
Tool Windows
Show Title for Single Tool Windows
Allows you to show or hide the title bar for single tool windows.
Animate Slide-Out Windows
If this option is activated, slide-out windows open with an animation.
Window Transparency
Sets the degree of transparency for windows that have this option activated.
Miscellaneous Options
Show Application in High DPI (Windows only)
If this option is activated and your display supports high resolution, WaveLab Pro is
displayed in high resolution. If your display does not support high resolution, this
option will be ignored.
NOTE
Plug-in windows are not displayed in high-resolution. If plug-in windows appear too
small, deactivate Show Application in High DPI.
Use the System File Selector to Open Files
If this option is activated, the standard file selector opens when you select the Save
As option.
Open Quick File Selector When Saving Files
If this option is activated and you save a file via the save shortcut, a dialog opens
instead of the File tab.
Undo/Redo Does Not Scroll/Zoom Audio
If this option is activated, the undo and redo functions for audio files and audio
montages do not restore the snapshot that was active when the operation was
performed.
Show WaveLab Pro Logo on Startup
Determines whether the WaveLab Pro logo is displayed during initialization.
Show Tooltips
If this option is activated, tooltips are displayed when you move the mouse cursor
over markers or command bar buttons.
Hide Top Level Windows When the Application Is Not Active (Windows only)
If this option is activated, all floating windows are automatically hidden when
another application becomes active. If this option is deactivated, floating windows
remain on top of other application windows.
History
Maximum Number of Items in Recent File Menus
Sets the maximum number of files that are listed in recent file menus.
569
Configuring WaveLab Pro
Global Preferences Maximum Number of Items in Recent Files Tab
Sets the maximum number of files that are listed in the Recent Files tab.
Maximum Number of Items in the Recent Folders Menu
Sets the maximum number of files that are listed in the Recent Folder menus.
Audio Tab
Resample Conversion Quality
Allows you to specify the resample conversion quality.
Default Fade/Crossfade
Allows you to specify the default duration and shape of the fades or crossfades that
WaveLab Pro creates automatically during specific processes.
Formats Tab
This tab allows you to adjust settings for some of the audio formats and units that WaveLab Pro
uses.
Formats
Use AES17 Standard for RMS Values
Determines how RMS values are reported.
●
If this option is activated, the displayed level for a full scale sine audio file is 0
dB. This follows the AES17 standard.
●
If this option is deactivated, the displayed level for a full scale sine audio file is
-3 dB.
Loudness Analysis Reference
Allows you to define the loudness reference value. The EBU R-128 recommendation
for broadcast is -23 dB.
The loudness reference value is used in the following contexts:
●
To display the zero point marker in the bottom scale of the Loudness Meter.
●
To display the loudness value in relation to the reference value in the Global
Analysis dialog.
●
To display the loudness value in relation to the reference value in the Audio
Analyzer plug-in of the Batch Processor window.
Pitch of A3 (Used in Frequency To Note Conversions)
Sets the reference pitch in WaveLab Pro. The frequency-to-note conversions take this
pitch into account.
Create Windows-Compatible File Names(macOS only)
Some characters in file names, for example, | and \, are not supported by Windows.
If this option is activated and you save a file, WaveLab Pro converts unsupported
characters to characters that are supported by Windows.
MIDI Note Display
The options in this section allow you to choose whether to display the different key values in
WaveLab Pro with the pitch or the MIDI note number of the key. In musical notation, keys are
denoted according to their pitch. For example, C3 means the note C in the third octave.
Each key corresponds to a MIDI note number from 0 to 127. For example, key C3 corresponds
to the MIDI note number 48. MIDI note numbers make it possible for samplers to automatically
map samples to the correct keys.
570
Configuring WaveLab Pro
Global Preferences Numeric Style
Determines the format for MIDI notes that are displayed as numbers.
Middle C (Note #60)
Determines the key convention for the MIDI note range (0-127).
Display
Determines how MIDI notes are displayed throughout the application.
CSV Delimiter
CSV Delimiter
Several areas of WaveLab Pro allow you to export information in the CSV text format.
This option lets you set the delimiter character that a third-party software requires to
import CSV files.
CD Writing Tab
This tab allows you to set a number of parameters for CD writing and for the creation of DDP
images.
CD Writing
Use Burnproof
Fixes possible buffer underrun errors automatically, provided that the CD writer
supports this technology.
Allow Disc Overflow
Allows WaveLab Pro to attempt writing more data (max. 2 minutes) than the official
capacity of the disc.
Maximum Audio CD Size
Allows you to specify the maximum length for a CD. A warning message will appear if
the project exceeds this length. The standard maximum length is 74 minutes.
DDP Creation
DDP Creation – Format 1.0/Format 2.0
Determines which format to create when producing DDP files for an audio project.
Write Checksum File (CRC-32)
If this option is activated, a file called CHECKSUM.CHK is added to the DDP files that
are created on the hard drive. The checksum contains the CRC32 checksums of the
created DDP files.
Write Checksum File (MD5)
If this option is activated, a file called CHECKSUM.MD5 is added to the DDP files that
are created on the hard drive. The checksum file contains the MD5 checksums of the
created DDP files.
Write Log File
If this option is activated, a text file called gear.log is added to the DDP files that
are created on the hard drive. The log file logs all operations.
Warn If Files Already Exist
If this option is activated, a warning message is displayed if files are about to be
overwritten in the specified destination folder.
571
Configuring WaveLab Pro
Audio Files Preferences Options Tab
This tab allows you to control application-wide start-up options. You can also reset the default
message boxes.
Make Tasks Monitor Visible When Task Start